16 - 020 - 02 - 0419 SH SLK (30k) en

Service Manual
Lithotripter
MODULITH® SLK (1L)
(30k)
Published: April 2019

Original language: English
Publisher:
STORZ MEDICAL AG
Lohstampfestr. 8
CH-8274 Tägerwilen
Switzerland
28586
II
Content
16 020 02 0419
Content
Chapter 1 Introduction 1-1
1.1 Copyright 1-3
1.2 Foreword 1-3
1.3 Modification status of lithotripter 1-3
1.4 Format of service manual 1-4
1.5 Usage of Warning-boxes 1-6
1.6 Safety instructions 1-7

1.6.1 High voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.6.2 Hydraulic circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.6.3 X-ray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.6.4 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.7 System variations 1-8
1.8 Abbreviations 1-9
Chapter 2 System Description 2-1

III
2.1 System overview 2-4
2.1.1 Overall dimensions SLK system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.1.2 Major components SLK system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.2 General description 2-8

2.2.1 System combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.2.2 Board overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2.3 Control panel 2-10

2.3.2.1 Interaction with base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.3.2.2 Structure and Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.3.2.3 Specific service modes and menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2.4 Power supply 2-15
2.5 Water-air-system 2-16

2.5.1 Water coupling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
2.5.2 Water degassing system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
2.5.3 Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
2.5.4 Temperature control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
2.5.5 Water temperature safety circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Content
16 020 02 0419
2.6 Movements 2-27
2.6.1 Manoeuvring the lithotripter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
2.6.2 Table positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
2.6.2.1 X-movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
2.6.2.2 Y-movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
2.6.2.3 Z-movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
2.6.2.4 Trendelenburg movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
2.6.3 Swivel - vertical rotation of therapy head . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
2.6.4 Pivot - horizontal rotation of therapy head . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
2.6.5 Collision protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
2.6.6 Overview hydraulic circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
2.6.7 Predefined positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
2.7 Main controller and software concept 2-33

2.7.1 Integrated main controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
2.7.2 Software and communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
2.7.3 Control logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
2.7.3.1 Evaluation of safety signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
2.7.3.2 List of safety relevant situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
2.8 Shock wave generation 2-37

2.8.1 Hardware description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
IV 2.8.1.1 Therapy head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
2.8.1.2 PCCU (Pulse Current and Charging Unit) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
2.8.1.3 Shock wave generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
2.8.1.4 PCCU service functions and signalling . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
2.8.2 Shock wave safety circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
2.8.2.1 Display energy task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
2.9 In-line Unit 2-45

2.9.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
2.9.2 Mechanical details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
2.9.3 Electronic details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
2.9.4 Software control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
2.10 Footswitch 2-47
2.11 Communication controller 2-48

Content
16 020 02 0419
Chapter 3 Block Diagrams 3-1
3.1 Main board with system overview 3-3
3.3 Water air system 3-7

3.3.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.3.2 Safety logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3.4 PCCU [25860] 3-9
3.5 Hydraulic circuit 3-10
Chapter 4 Removal / Installation 4-1
4.1 Introduction 4-5
4.2 Housing elements 4-6

4.2.1 Housing removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4.2.1.1 Remove / Install cover ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.2.1.2 Remove / Install top cover extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.2.1.3 Remove / Install top cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.2.1.4 Remove / Install back cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 V
4.2.1.5 Remove / Install side cover left and right . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4.2.1.6 Remove / Install front cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.2.1.7 Remove / Install lower front cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4.2.1.8 Remove / Install lower side covers left and right . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4.2.2 Housing installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4.2.3 Collision protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4.2.3.1 Exchange of PSPD-tube (patient table) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4.2.3.2 Exchange of PSPD-cushion (therapy arm) . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4.2.3.3 Exchange of PSPD-safety relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4.3 Water circuit 4-14

4.3.1 Drain water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4.3.2 Fill water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
4.3.2.1 Adjustment of water level in therapy head . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
4.3.2.2 Calibration of water level sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
4.3.3 Water filter cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
4.3.4 Water bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4.3.4.1 Water bag removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4.3.4.2 Water bag installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Content
4.3.5 Circulation pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
16 020 02 0419
4.3.5.1 Circulation pump removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4.3.5.2 Circulation pump installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4.3.6 Water radiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4.3.7 Degassing unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4.3.7.1 Degassing unit removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4.3.7.2 Degassing unit installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
4.3.7.3 Degassing unit disassembling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
4.3.7.4 Degassing unit assembling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
4.3.7.5 Degassing pump removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
4.3.7.6 Degassing pump installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
4.3.7.7 Board distributor degassing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
4.4 Rubber parts 4-26

4.4.1 Patient foil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
4.4.1.1 Patient foil removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
4.4.1.2 Patient foil installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
4.4.1.3 Patient foil tensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
4.4.2 Coupling Cushion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
4.4.2.1 Coupling cushion removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
4.4.2.2 Coupling cushion installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
4.4.3 Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
4.4.3.1 Airbag removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
4.4.3.2 Airbag installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
VI
4.5 Electrical parts 4-31

4.5.1 Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4.5.1.1 Coil removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4.5.1.2 Coil installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
4.5.2 PCCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
4.5.2.1 PCCU removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
4.5.2.2 PCCU installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
4.5.2.3 PCCU overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
4.5.3 Exchange of HV cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
4.5.3.1 Remove HV cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
4.5.3.2 Install HV cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
4.5.4 Exchange of Contact flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
4.5.4.1 Remove contact flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
4.5.4.2 Install contact flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
4.5.5 Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
4.5.5.1 Inductive sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
4.5.5.2 X and Y potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
4.5.5.3 Z tackle-potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Content
4.5.5.4 Pivot micro switches and potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
16 020 02 0419
4.5.5.5 Light barriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
4.5.5.6 Signal converter of temperature sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
4.5.6 Main Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
4.5.7 Valve plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
4.6 Control panel and software 4-51

4.6.1 Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
4.6.2 Communication controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
4.6.2.1 Installation of controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
4.6.2.2 Connections via SCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
4.6.2.3 Connections via LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
4.6.3 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
4.6.3.1 Software for main board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
4.6.3.2 Software for control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
4.6.3.3 Setting up control panel ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
4.6.3.4 Software for communication controller . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
4.6.3.5 Set up for communication controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
4.7 Mechanical parts 4-56

4.7.1 Front wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
4.7.1.1 Front wheel right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
4.7.1.2 Front wheel left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
4.7.2 Wheels and brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
VII
4.7.2.1 Turnable wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
4.7.2.2 Turnable wheel / brake exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
4.7.2.3 Front wheels / brake exchange and adjustments . . . . . . . . . 4-59
4.7.3 Hydraulic unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
4.7.3.1 Calibration of hydraulic movements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
4.7.3.2 Hydraulic hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
4.7.3.3 Hydraulic cylinder X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
4.7.3.4 Hydraulic cylinder Y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
4.7.3.5 Hydraulic cylinder Trendelenburg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
4.7.3.6 Swivel cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
4.7.3.7 Pivot hydraulic motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
4.7.3.8 Hydraulic pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
4.7.3.9 Bypass valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
4.7.3.10 Upper hydraulic distributor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
4.7.3.11 Lower hydraulic distributor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
4.7.3.12 Magnet coil from hydraulic valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
4.7.3.13 Hydraulic oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
4.7.4 Exchange of Snap-in catch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
4.7.4.1 Removal of snap-in catch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
Content
16 020 02 0419
4.7.4.2 Installation of snap-in catch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
4.7.5 Stopper for swivel unit slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
4.8 Inline unit 4-79

4.8.1 Top cover of in-line unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
4.8.2 Calibration of in-line unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
4.8.3 Work on controller board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
4.8.4 Potentiometer exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
4.8.5 Transducer exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
4.9 Footswitch 4-83
Chapter 5 Diagnostics 5-1
5.1 Error Messages 5-4

5.1.1 SLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.1.2 StorM-Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5.2 Safety Control 5-12

5.2.1 Movement safety circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5.2.2 PSPD safety circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5.2.3 Hydraulic safety circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5.2.4 Shockwave safety circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
VIII
5.3 Service LEDs 5-19
5.3.1 LEDs on Main board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
5.3.2 LEDs on communication controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
5.3.3 LEDs on in-line unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
5.3.4 LEDs at PCCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
5.3.5 PCCU-LED time pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
5.4 LEDs on PSPD safety relay 5-25
5.5 Service Trace 5-25
5.6 Sensors 5-36

5.6.1 Translation list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
5.6.2 Inductive sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
5.6.3 Light barriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
5.6.4 Micro switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
5.6.5 PSPD Safety relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
5.6.6 Sensor positions (movement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
5.6.7 Sensor positions (PSPD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
5.6.8 Sensor positions (temperature) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Content
5.6.9 Sensor positions (pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
16 020 02 0419
5.7 System information 5-44
5.8 Measurements 5-45

5.8.1 HV values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
5.8.2 PSPD & collision protection elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
5.8.3 Temperature sensors / converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
5.8.4 Pressure sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
5.8.5 Disintegration test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
5.8.5.1 Side conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
5.8.5.2 Test procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
5.9 Troubleshooting 5-50

5.9.1 Movement & Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
5.9.1.1 All movements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
5.9.1.2 X-axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
5.9.1.3 Y-axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
5.9.1.4 Z-axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
5.9.1.5 Trendelenburg motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
5.9.1.6 Therapy head motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
5.9.1.7 Inline unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
5.9.2 HV & PCCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
5.9.3 Water Air Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
5.9.4 Control Panel(s) & electronic & software . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52 IX
5.10 Fuse list 5-53
Chapter 6 Wiring Diagrams 6-1
6.1 Wiring overview (30000) 6-4
6.2 Power distribution (30000) 6-12
6.3 Main board (28190) 6-14

6.3.1 Board Main (overview) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
6.3.2 Board Main (power, 12V, 3.3V, 5V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6.3.3 Board Main (periphery, diverse) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
6.3.4 Board Main (SWU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
6.3.5 Board Main (I/O, CAN, LAN, SER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
6.3.6 Board Main (others) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
6.3.7 Board Main (Logic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
6.3.8 Board Main (water air, temp., degassing) . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
6.3.9 Board Main (control panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
6.3.10 Board Main (sensors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Content
16 020 02 0419
6.4 E-box connectors (28177) 6-35
6.4.1 Cables for inductive sensors [21463] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
6.4.2 Cable temperature sensor water tank SLK (1L) [-----] . . . . . . . . 6-38
6.4.3 Cable circulation pump SLK (1L) [28821] . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
6.4.4 Cable signal aktormed SLK (1L) [21379] . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
6.5 Distributor air (21018) 6-40

6.5.1 Cable to distributor air SLK (1L) [21173] . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
6.6 Distributor degassing (21020) 6-42

6.6.1 Cable to distributor degassing SLK (1L) [21176] . . . . . . . . . 6-43
6.7 Distributor therapy head (26751) 6-43

6.7.1 Cable swivel SLK (1L) [29367] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
6.7.2 Cable temperature sensor herapy head SLK (1L) [-----] . . . . . . . . 6-45
6.8 PCCU (25860) 6-47

6.8.1 Cable set power SLK (1L) [29353] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
6.8.2 Cable PCCU 25 pol SLK (1L)[21405] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
6.9 CTU (25857) 6-50
6.10 Control panel (24117) 6-52

X
6.10.1 Cable control panel SLK (1L) [20816] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
6.10.2 Cable control panel connect SLK (1L) [21015] . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
6.11 Pivot control (20988) 6-55
6.12 Box Motion Control (21024) 6-57

6.12.1 Cable set power SLK (1L) [29353] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
6.13 External panel 6-60

6.13.1 External connectors [29464] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60
6.13.2 service external panel (21005) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61
6.13.3 Communication controller (28672) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63
6.14 Hand switch (21493) 6-65
6.15 Footswitch and controller (29592, 29580) 6-66
6.16 Inline Unit 6-70

6.16.1 Cable to inline SLK (1L) [21851] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71
6.16.2 Cable inline within SLK (1L) [21849] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-72
6.16.3 Cable inline board to case SLK (1L) [22210] . . . . . . . . . . . 6-72
6.16.4 Cable inline rs232 board to case SLK (1L) [22211] . . . . . . . . . 6-73
Content
16 020 02 0419
6.17 Miscellaneous cables 6-74
6.17.1 Cable set Z-Lift [21462] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-74
6.17.2 Cable set pivot [21507] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76
6.17.3 Cable set flatcable e-box SLK (1L) [21357] . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77
6.17.4 Cable set line ebox SLK (1L) [29353] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-79
6.17.5 Cable bypass valve SLK (1L) [21589] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-80
6.17.6 Cable hand switch SLK (1L) [20817] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-80
Chapter 7 part a Preventive Maintenance 7a-1
7.1 Installation work (only for initial installation) 7a-5
7.2 Visual and functional inspections 7a-5

7.2.1 Optical conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-5
7.2.2 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-5
7.2.2.1 Locking bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-5
7.2.2.2 Emergency halt button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-6
7.2.2.3 Collision sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-6
7.2.2.4 Operating elements and movements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-6
7.2.3 Covers, wheels & brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-7
7.3 Component checks 7a-7

7.3.1 Hydraulic unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-7
XI
7.3.2 Inductive sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-7
7.3.3 Water / Air circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-7
7.3.3.1 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-7
7.3.3.2 Degassing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-8
7.3.3.3 Water leakages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-8
7.3.3.4 Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-9
7.3.3.5 Temperature control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-9
7.3.4 HV circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-10
7.3.4.1 Capacitance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-11
7.3.4.2 Resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-11
7.3.4.3 High voltage measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-11
7.3.4.4 Triggering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-11
7.3.5 Inline unit (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-12
7.4 Focal point checks 7a-12

7.4.1 Focus phantom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-12
7.4.2 Ultrasound focus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-12
7.4.3 X-ray focus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-14
7.4.4 Disintegration test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-15
Content
16 020 02 0419
7.5 Safety tests 7a-16
7.5.1 MODULITH SLK . ®
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-16
7.5.1.1 Protection earth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-16
7.5.1.2 Insulating resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-16
7.5.1.3 Earth leakage current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-16
7.5.1.4 Enclosure leakage current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-16
7.5.1.5 Wall connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-16
7.5.2 Ultrasound system (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-16
7.5.2.4 Patient leakage current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-17
7.5.2.5 Auxiliary patient leakage current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-17
7.5.3 ECG system (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-17
7.5.3.4 Patient leakage current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-17
7.5.3.5 Auxiliary patient leakage current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-17
7.6 Final work & wearing parts 7a-18
7.7 Completion of paperwork 7a-18

XII
7.8 Installation work 7b-5
7.9 Preventive maintenance 7b-5

7.9.1 Visual and functional inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7b-5
7.9.2 Component checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7b-6
7.9.3 Safety test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7b-9
7.10 Completion of paperwork 7b-11
Chapter 8 Spare Part Catalogue 8-1
8.1 Consumables 8-4

8.1.1 Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.1.2 Rubber parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8.1.3 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8.2 Electronic components 8-7

8.2.1 Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8.2.2 Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8.2.3 External connectors & power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
8.2.4 PCCU & HV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Content
8.2.5 Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
16 020 02 0419
8.3 Sensors 8-11
8.3.1 Sensors TRD / x / y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8.3.2 Sensors Z / swivel / ATBM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8.3.3 Collision protection, PSPD & relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8.4 Water / Air 8-13

8.4.1 Hoses, valves & sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
8.4.2 Degassing unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
8.4.3 Water pump & filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
8.4.4 Water reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
8.4.5 Water radiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
8.4.6 Valve plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
8.5 Mechanical components 8-19

8.5.1 Hydraulic unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
8.5.2 Wheels / Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
8.5.3 Specific parts for options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
8.5.3.1 Table-version „Standard“ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
8.5.3.2 Table-version „Table Top“ (transportable) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
8.5.4 Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
8.6 Options 8-25

8.6.1 Ultrasound & Inline unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
8.6.2 Footswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26 XIII
8.6.3 ECG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
8.6.4 Endourological accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
8.6.5 Thermal printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
8.6.6 Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
8.7 Tools & documentation 8-29

8.7.1 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
8.7.2 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Chapter 9 Modifications 9-1
Chapter 10 For future use 10-1

Content
16 020 02 0419
XIV
Content
16 020 02 0419
Service Manual
MODULITH® SLK (1L)

(30k)
1
Chapter 1
Introduction
Table of contents
1.1 Copyright 1-3
1.2 Foreword 1-3
1.3 Modification status of lithotripter 1-3
1.4 Format of service manual 1-4
1.5 Usage of Warning-boxes 1-6
1.6 Safety instructions 1-7

1.6.1 High voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.6.2 Hydraulic circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.6.3 X-ray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.6.4 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1.7 System variations 1-8
1.8 Abbreviations 1-9
1-2
Introduction
16 021 02 0918
1.1 Copyright
STORZ MEDICAL AG reserves all rights to this service manual. Without written permission of the origina-
tor, it is not permitted to copy, duplicate or insert and process by electronic means, this service manual as
complete or excerpts therefrom.
The receiver is committed not to make the service manual accessible to third parties.
1.2 Foreword
The present service manual is intended to support personnel authorized by STORZ MEDICAL to perform
repairs, maintenance and technical modifications on the MODULITH SLK (1L).
Authorized personnel are persons who have attended device specific STORZ MEDICAL Service Trainings
and are awarded a certificate confirming successful completion.
The service manual is produced in-house by STORZ MEDICAL AG. All organisational and technical queries
should be addressed to:
STORZ MEDICAL AG
Service Training / Documentation Department
Lohstampfestrasse 8
CH - 8274 Tägerwilen
Switzerland
phone : +41 (0)71 677 45 87
fax : +41 (0)71 677 45 09
e-mail: td@storzmedical.com
1-3
1.3 Modification status of lithotripter

During complete lifetime modification status of installed lithotripters can vary.
Before performing any service activities, please check the actual modification status of relevant MODULITH
SLK (1L). Single parts of this service manual may not be valid for such modified devices. Refer to Chapter 9
Modifications and find latest information regarding these modifications.
Introduction
16 021 02 0918
1.4 Format of service manual
This service manual contains all required information for an effective and reliable maintenance or repair of
the MODULITH SLK. The manual contains 10 chapters.
1 General Information
2 System Description
3 Block Diagrams
4 Removal / Installation
5 Diagnostics
6 Wiring Diagrams
7 Preventive maintenance
8 Spare Parts
9 Modifications
10 For future use
1-4
Fig. 1-1 Chapter overview

Introduction
16 021 02 0918
Chapter 1 Introduction
It is recommended to read this chapter before “working” with the service manual. The chapter contains
information for easy usage of the service manual.
Chapter 2 System Description

This chapter gives a general description of technical features and functions of the lithotripter. The descrip-
tions cover information from general overviews to detailed explanations of most components.
Chapter 3 Block Diagrams

Chapter 3 summarises information given in chapter 2 in graphical diagrams and can help to simplify tech-
nical relationships.
Chapter 4 Removal / Installation

Detailed instructions with illustrations describe the removal and installation of components, which need or
can be replaced.
Chapter 5 Diagnostics
This chapter provides an overview of all error and warning messages. It contains additional information to
perform systematical troubleshooting.
Chapter 6 Wiring Diagrams

Essential wiring diagrams of the MODULITH SLK are provided for service engineers.
Chapter 7 Preventive Maintenance

Regular maintenance prevents damage from MODULITH SLK. The different maintenance items are listed
and described in this chapter. Part 7a of the chapter will provide explanations, part 7b a maintenance
record for documentation purposes.
Chapter 8 Spare Parts Catalogue

Please use the spare parts catalogue to identify defective parts and find their part numbers for ordering. 1-5
Chapter 9 Modifications
The MODULITH SLK is subject to technical improvements. Such modifications are published by TSI (Techni-
cal Service Information). To keep the service manual on a current state, these TSI and other modification
notes should be inserted to the modification chapter.
Chapter 10 For future use

This chapter is currently not used.
Introduction
16 021 02 0918
1.5 Usage of Warning-boxes
In this service manual different levels of warning messages are used according to the adhesion regula-
tions. These levels are:
DANGER !
Refers to a situation of acute danger which, if not avoided, could lead to serious
or fatal injury.
WARNING !
Refers to a situation of potential danger which, if not avoided, could lead to seri-
ous or fatal injury.
CAUTION !
Refers to a situation of potential danger which, if not avoided, could lead to

minor injury.
ATTENTION !
1-6
Warns against possibly harmful situations that could lead to damage to either the product
or to the surrounding area.
COMMENT or NOTE
Additional information concerning specific features or operating instructions is preceded by term

“NOTE” or “COMMENT”.
Introduction
16 021 02 0918
1.6 Safety instructions
Following safety instructions must be observed before performing any service work on MODULITH SLK:
COMMENT
Beside the following safety instructions keep in mind that the lithotripter can be used in an infec-
tional environment and can be contaminated. Therefore it is recommended to consider disinfec-
tion of devices and to wear disposable gloves.
ATTENTION !
Repairs, exchanges or adjustments must be performed only by trained and certified service engi-
neers.
Only activities mentioned in the service manual may be performed.
Use only original parts supplied and designated by STORZ MEDICAL AG.
1.6.1 High voltage
DANGER !
The MODULITH SLK operates with high voltages to generate shockwaves. When work-
ing on high voltage circuits or on components that are electrically in contact with high 1-7
voltages, personnel must observe the following to avoid injury:
• Switch off the MODULITH SLK (1L) and wait 5 minutes before starting any work on the
HV circuit. This time is required to discharge the capacitors in the PCCU completely.
This applies to the following parts and assemblies:

–– Pulse current charging unit (PCCU)
–– High voltage cable from PCCU to therapy head
–– Therapy head with coil
1.6.2 Hydraulic circuit
WARNING !
The hydraulic circuit of the MODULITH SLK operates with high pressure.
Hydraulic oil may spurt out under high pressure when parts of the hydraulic unit are
damaged or opened for service. Hydraulic oil may cause injuries.
Introduction
• Before starting any service operation on the hydraulic unit switch off the system and
secure it against switch-on.
• Wear protective goggles while performing any work on the hydraulic unit. Even with
the precaution mentioned above, a slight pressure could be left in the hydraulic unit
and oil can splash uncontrolled.
16 021 02 0918
1.6.3 X-ray
WARNING !
If the MODULITH SLK is combined with an external x-ray system, for example dur-
ing focus check procedure X-rays are released.
Take utmost care about all measures concerning radiation protection and safety.
Measures for radiation protection are:

–– Release x-rays only if needed
–– Keep maximum distance to the system
–– Close the iris/shutter to reduce scattering and dose
–– Keep dose as low as possible for a good picture
–– Wear protection clothes
–– Never ! place parts of your body into the x-ray beam
1.6.4 Software
WARNING !
Components with updatable software

1-8 When exchanging components with software integrated, consider compatibility
with other software including components (e.g. main board and control panel).
• Install only components with compatible software combinations approved by
STORZ MEDICAL.
1.7 System variations

NOTE
The MODULITH SLK can be configured with different options. Single sections of the service man-
ual will provide information in parallel for these possible options:
–– with or without Trendelenburg function
–– number and configuration of control panels
Introduction
16 021 02 0918
1.8 Abbreviations
Following table provides a list with common abbreviations frequently used in SMAG documents.
Abbreviation Description
a.p. anterior-posterior
BMC Basic movement controller
CAN Controller area network
cc / c.c. craniocaudal
CDAS Collision detection and solution
CP Control panel
CTU Charge and trigger unit
ECG Electrocardiography
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
ESD Electrostatic discharge
FPD / FP Flat panel detector
FSA Focus switch assembly
FSU Focus switch unit
HV High voltage
HW Hardware
LCD Liquid crystal display
MB Main board
MC Micro controller
1-9
MPC Main process controller
OT Over table, position of therapy head or x-ray tube
p.a. posterior-anterior
PAL Programmable array logic
PCCU Pulse current and charging unit
PLD Programmable logic device
PSPD Pressure sensitive protection devices (collision detector)
SMAG STORZ MEDICAL AG (company name)
SMAL Storz Medical application layer
SMAPI Storz Medical application program interface
SMLI Storz Medical Lithotripsy Index
SPS Switching power supply
SW Shock wave
SW Software
SWC Shock wave controller
SWU Shock wave unit
SWRB Shock wave release button
Introduction
TFT Thin-film-transistor
TH Therapy head
TPC Table positioning controller (hydraulic control)
TSI Technical service information
US Ultrasound
16 021 02 0918
Abbreviation Description
USB Universal Serial Bus
UT Under table, position of therapy head or x-ray tube
WAC Water air controller
WAU Water air unit
1-10
Introduction
16 021 02 0918
Service Manual
MODULITH® SLK (1L)

(30k)
2
Chapter 2
System Description
Table of contents
2.1 System overview 2-4
2.1.1 Overall dimensions SLK system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.1.2 Major components SLK system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.2 General description 2-8

2.2.1 System combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.2.2 Board overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2.3 Control panel 2-10

2.3.2.1 Interaction with base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.3.2.2 Structure and Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.3.2.3 Specific service modes and menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2.5 Water-air-system 2-16

2.5.1 Water coupling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
2.5.2 Water degassing system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
2.5.3 Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
2.5.4 Temperature control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
2.5.5 Water temperature safety circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
2-2
2.6 Movements 2-27
2.6.1 Manoeuvring the lithotripter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
2.6.2 Table positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
2.6.2.1 X-movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
2.6.2.2 Y-movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
2.6.2.3 Z-movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
2.6.2.4 Trendelenburg movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
2.6.3 Swivel - vertical rotation of therapy head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
2.6.4 Pivot - horizontal rotation of therapy head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
2.6.5 Collision protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
2.6.6 Overview hydraulic circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
2.6.7 Predefined positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
2.7 Main controller and software concept 2-33

System Description
2.7.1 Integrated main controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33

2.7.2 Software and communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
2.7.3 Control logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
2.7.3.1 Evaluation of safety signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
2.7.3.2 List of safety relevant situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
16 022 02 0918
2.8 Shock wave generation 2-37
2.8.1 Hardware description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
2.8.1.1 Therapy head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
2.8.1.2 PCCU (Pulse Current and Charging Unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
2.8.1.3 Shock wave generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
2.8.1.4 PCCU service functions and signalling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
2.8.2 Shock wave safety circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
2.8.2.1 Display energy task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
2.9 In-line Unit 2-45

2.9.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
2.9.2 Mechanical details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
2.9.3 Electronic details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
2.9.4 Software control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
2.10 Footswitch 2-47
2-3
System Description
16 022 02 0918
2.1 System overview
COMMENT
The MODULITH SLK can be extended with a number of external devices such as Ultrasound system,
ECG-system, X-ray etc. This manual only provides technical information on basic unit of the MODU-
LITH SLK. Included are as well those parts which are necessary for interaction with the external
devices.
For detailed information on the following components, please refer to their specific documentation:
–– Ultrasound system
–– X-ray system
–– ECG-system
The MODULITH SLK is available with different options:

–– Trendelenburg function
–– Ultrasound In-line unit
–– Multiple control panels
–– Remote control via StorM-Touch (coming later)
Therefore the description in this manual may differ with local installations, depending on installed
functions.
2-4
System Description
16 022 02 0918
2.1.1 Overall dimensions SLK system
2-5
Figure 2-1 Overall dimensions (length x depth, top view) for static installation with therapy head in park
position.
System Description
Figure 2-2 Overall dimensions (length x height, front view) for static installation.
16 022 02 0918
2.1.2 Major components SLK system
Patient table
Foot rest
t e d
d a
u p
b e
t o
Degassing unit
Hydraulic unit Water reservoir

Valve plate
Hydraulic control
Figure 2-3 Major components of SLK, front, right
2-6
t e d
a
pd
Patient table
e u
b
to
Foot rest
System Description
Internal connector board

Water radiator
PCCU Main board behind cover
Brake Anti tip beam
External connector plate
Figure 2-4 Major components of SLK, left side view
16 022 02 0918
Foot rest
t e d
d a
p
Patient table
e u
o b
t
Main switch
Water radiator
PCCU
Water reservoir
Brake
Degassing unit
2-7
Figure 2-5 Major components of SLK, right rear view
System Description
16 022 02 0918
2.2 General description
The MODULITH SLK is an universal, high efficiency Lithotripter consisting of a motorized patient table with
an integrated shock wave therapy unit and coupling system. For localization purposes the MODULITH SLK
can be combined with a separate mobile C-arc and/or optional in-line ultrasound localization equipment.
Furthermore an external ECG system can be connected to release ECG synchronized shock waves. The
control of the MODULITH SLK is performed by the Lithotripter control panel. The Ultrasound system, the
ECG as well as the X-ray unit are stand-alone units controlled by their own independent control panels.
2.2.1 System combination

Figure 2-6 shows a possible system configuration consisting of the MODULITH SLK, combined with an
X-ray system, an ultrasound system and an ECG unit.
ECG
MODULITH SLK
Shock
wave
source
Patient table
Control
panel
Ultrasound Mobile x-ray

C-Arc
2-8
Figure 2-6 MODULITH SLK system combination
ECG systems, which transmit a specified ECG trigger signal, can be connected to the MODULITH SLK to
enable synchronized shock wave release. Only recommended and validated ECG systems may be used.
The MODULITH SLK can be combined with ultrasound systems, which inserts a crosshair overlay in the
ultrasound image for targeting purposes. Only recommended and validated ultrasound systems may be
used.
As well for targeting and imaging purposes mobile x-ray C-arc systems from other manufacturers can be
used together with MODULITH SLK. Both systems work independent from each other, only a safety colli-
sion sensor at the image intensifier controls distance between patient and x-ray system. Only selected and
validated X-ray systems may be used.
System Description
16 022 02 0918
2.2.2 Board overview
t e d
da
u p
b e
to 2-9
System Description
Figure 2-7 SLK board overview (draft)
16 022 02 0918
The central process within the SLK is the main process, which receives commands from the control
panel(s), checks their plausibility and gives corresponding commands to control the special functions in a
fail safe way and permanently monitored by independent software- and hardware safety circuits.
The external optional units like ECG, ultrasound systems and C-arc systems also interact with the main
controller board by hardware.
The electrical modules of the SLK essentially consist of the main controller board, the board e-box connec-
tors, the emergency halt button(s) at the control panel(s) and the motion process controller. The control
panel(s) and the shock wave release button(s) are connected via helix cables.
Several distributor boards connect the signals from the special sub-units via board e-box connector to the
main controller. That is board distributor air, board distributor degassing, board swivel and board switch
pivot.
The external connector panel is accessible at the left side of the system. It includes the mains fuse and the
connector plugs for the additional options as well as a button to reset the therapy head over temperature
condition and connectors for potential equalisation. The mains switch is located at the back side of the
system.
2.3 Control panel

The touch screen control panels are the main interface between user and shock wave device. Usually it
will be attached to an arm holder or at the standard rails of the patient table.
2-10
Figure 2-8 Typical position of standard control panel
The control panel enables controlling of all functions of shock wave device and is indicating the device’s
System Description
status and treatment parameters. Moreover, system alerts (warnings, errors) are indicated here and an
acoustic feedback is generated.
The control panel contains a complete single board computer which is running on a Windows embedded
operating system (WEC7). Access to the operating system is blocked. All relevant features are accessible
from touch screen application. For display and interaction a back-lighted colour LCD display (TFT) with
800 x 480 pixels is connected to that computer. All optical indications will be given on the screen.
Close to the touch screen the shock wave release button (SWRB) is installed. It is a two channel switch
providing the trigger signal for charging high voltage and releasing shock waves.
On upper edge of control panel an emergency halt button is mounted. If emergency halt button is
pressed an integrated light is indicating this status and the emergency signal is send to mainboard.
16 022 02 0918
2.3.2.1 Interaction with base unit
The system is designed to support multiple control panels. The maximum number is five control panels.
There are 2 connectors available at external connector plate, 1 at patient table and 2 additional “soft-
ware” emulated control panels can be connected via StorM-Touch Remote Control.
If the control panel gets connected to the system, it will start communication with the main processor by
using the proprietary Storz Medical Applied Logic (SMAL) protocol on CAN-Bus.
The microcontroller of the MODULITH SLK takes care that, if multiple control panels are connected, only
one control panel can be selected as active. The assigned shock wave release button gets activated or
deactivated simultaneously with the control panel. The emergency halt buttons are working independent
from the control panel. That means if any emergency halt button is pressed a safety event gets activated
and system will react directly.
For identification of the control panels on CAN-Bus, every control panel needs an own ID-number. These
numbers are assigned during installation. Control panel with lowest ID-number is the “Master”-control
panel.
User requests for certain functions - generated by touching the screen of the control panel - are transmit-
ted to the base unit, namely the main board with microprocessor. These so-called ‘commands’ are then
followed by one or more ‘replies’ from the shock wave device acknowledging the command, informing
the user about actual status of the system, notifying him of reasons why the desired activity could not be
complied with or giving him warning or error messages.
It is capable of visualizing the state of the shock wave device depending on the replies it gets from the
main task and depending on the public status messages from other modules connected to the CAN bus.
For nearly every technical status information the so-called “service trace” can be read out.
2.3.2.2 Structure and Layout

On colour touch screen of Modulith SLK different function fields are provided, containing: 2-11
–– Settings
–– Movement arrow fields for the therapy arm
–– Movement arrow fields for the patient table
–– Fields for adjusting shock wave parameters
–– Fields for therapy head positioning
–– Fields for table positions
–– Fields for ultrasound operation
Also language, date, time and the actual table position coordinates are shown in the bottom line of the
display.
Furthermore table can be driven with one touch to ascendent and descendent position for the patient.
Moreover an advice of process progress is located here.
System Description
16 022 02 0918
general settings
function field function field MOVEMENT function fields
SHOCK WAVE THERAPY HEAD
PARAMETER arrow field for moving TABLE POSITIONS
patient table and therapy head ULTRASOUND
table coordinates
language / date / push button for ascendent and treatment position /

time advice of process progress
Figure 2-9 Layout of control panel
2-12
Figure 2-10 Example for control panel display
2.3.2.3 Specific service modes and menus

System Description
Service trace
The function “service trace” is accessible for everyone, users and service engineers, from setting menu.
When activated an additional information area on top of the display is shown. The displayed information
are in HEX-format and representing different bits and bytes of microprocessor.
Detailed information to interpret the values displayed by service trace are available in 5 Diagnostics.
16 022 02 0918
Figure 2-11 Activated Service trace
Service menu
For system configuration there is a password protected service menu available. After selecting the setting
menu there is an item “Service” available. Directly after selecting the service item user gets asked to enter
a password. Password is handed out during technical service training and must only be used by certified
service engineers.
Independent from current language setting the service menu is always displayed in English.
The following list is giving an overview of service menu items and their functions.
Service menu item Function

Language (xxxxxxx) Change display language
Calibration Enter calibration items for x, y, z, pivot and in-line
unit movement
Explorer Switch to explorer mode (OS level)
Water sensor calibration Perform pressure sensor calibration for water level
with water level display in TH. (only active if TH in park position and UT) 2-13
CP-ID xxxx Show and set CP-ID
Software Update Install new software for CP from USB device
DevMod (on / off) Activate / deactivate a set of developer’s tools.
Serial No. (1L.xxx) Display serial no.
Counters Show internal counters for PCCU and different
pumps
Date / Time Set current time and date
Clear Error Log Reset error protocol
Show all strings Display all text messages and text entries from
activated language
Block “Logged off” (xxx) Developer’s tool
CAN Logger Developer’s tool
Show Alarmtexts Skip through available error messages with original
display (yellow message box)
System Description
Comm. Ctrl. Network Settings for communication controller

Table 2-1 Items of service menu
16 022 02 0918
Override mode
ATTENTION !
„Override mode“ must only be used by trained and certified service engineers, to avoid any damage
to lithotripter system or persons.
In case of error situation (collisions, defect safety sensors) system safety logic will block a lot of functions.
Among other things no movements will be possible any more. To fix this situation all error signals can be
bypassed by using the “override button”. The override button is located on board service external panel.
While using override mode a big warning sign on control panel is displayed.
The override button is also used during calibration of hydraulic system and for adjusting safety sensors,
when safety signal must be ignored.
Override mode is ignored if any Emergency-Halt button is active.
2-14
System Description
16 022 02 0918
2.4 Power supply
The MODULITH SLK is prepared to be powered with 115 or 230 VAC (50 or 60 Hz). Device is connected
via a single phase cable to local mains. Depending on used low voltage power supplies different hardware
configurations are available.
Line Input
115/230 VAC
to electronic
Power Supply
Main switch
24 V
Isolation trans- to PCCU

Power Supply
former / relay 48 V
Figure 2-12 Block diagram power supply, with separate 24V and 48V power supplies
Line Input
115/230 VAC
Main switch 2-15

to electronic
Power Supply
24 V
to PCCU
Power Supply
48 V
Figure 2-13 Block diagram power supply, with combined 24/48V power supply (default version)
Main switch is located in upper right corner at the back side of the device. The mains fuse is located at the
external connector panel.
The mains are divided into two branches. One branch leading to a 24 VDC power supply to provide voltage
for internal electronic, hydraulic unit, pumps and other devices. The other branch is going to a 48 VDC
power supply providing voltage for the high voltage unit (PCCU).
In error or safety relevant situations the 24 VDC for the hydraulic unit (Aktormed) can be disconnected by
safety logic disabling the control signals crtl_PwrHydr1 and/or crtl_PwrHydr2.
System Description
There is no power disconnection for the PCCU. In case of an error the internal PCCU logic stops generat-
ing high voltage (no charging of capacitors).
16 022 02 0918
2.5 Water-air-system
The water-air-system of the MODULITH SLK consists of 4 subsystems:
–– Water coupling system
–– Water degassing system
–– Water temperature control system
–– Airbag system
All four systems are controlled by a controller circuit on main board (4).
2-16
1 therapy head 14 switch degassing min 27 cushion pressure sensor

2 degassing unit 15 switch degassing max 28 circulation pump
3 water reservoir 16 degassing pump 29 water bag
4 e-box / main board 17 degassing valve 30 coupling cushion
5 valve plate 18 water filter 31 coil
6 air bag 19 ball valve 32 board distributor degassing
System Description
7 airbag compressor 20 bypass valve 33 board distributor air

8 airbag valve B 21 temperature sensor safety 34 hollow ball
9 air filter 22 water radiator 35 bleeder valve
10 sound absorber 23 filler neck 36 board distributor therapy head
11 airbag pressure sensor 24 nozzle 37 signal converter
12 airbag valve A 25 drain valve
13 degassing air valve 26 temperature sensor
Figure 2-14 Block diagram, water-air-system
16 022 02 0918
The main board (MB) is designed with an embedded microcontroller (μC) with EEPROM and CAN bus
interface, an additional hardware interface for sensors, valves and motors and a special safety circuit. The
EEPROM contains the software to operate as well the water-air system. Four software processes are used
for control this function unit:
–– Cushion control process
–– Degassing control process
–– Temperature control process
–– Air bag control process
Main Controller SLK

Cushion control Degassing control Airbag control Temperature control
………
process process process process
filling process
Coupling process
stay coupled process
cooling mode
Degassing process
safety
circuit
over-
temperature
Board e-box connector SLK 2-17
board board
distributor board distributor board distributor distributor
swivel degassing air swivel
Degassing min switch
Cushion pressure sensor
Airbag valve B
Airbag pressure sensor
Airbag valve A
degassing air valve
Degassing valve
Water radiator fan

Airbag compressor
Temperature sensor safety

Temperature sensor
Degassing pump
Degassing max switch
Bypass valve
Motor circulation pump
System Description
Figure 2-15 Water air process
16 022 02 0918
2.5.1 Water coupling system
The water coupling system consists of therapy head (1) with coil, reflector and coupling cushion (30),
water reservoir (3), circulation pump (28), bypass valve (20), and cushion pressure sensor (27).
In order to transmit the shock waves to the patients body, the coupling cushion is inflated and coupled to
the patient foil of the patient table if the therapy head is in UT position or directly to the patients skin if
the therapy head is in OT position.
Coupling pressure is adjusted by pumping water from the water reservoir to the coupling cushion. The
coupling pressure is sensed by the cushion pressure sensor and regulated by the main controller (4) ac-
cording to the preset value at the control panel and the height of the patient table. For decoupling the
circulation pump is stopped and the bypass valve opened and degassing pump is working with maximum
speed for supporting decoupling.
2-18
Figure 2-16 Water coupling system
The cushion control process on the MB starts and stops the different cushion sub processes.
System Description
Signals required for Cushion Control Process on MB

Input Output
Cushion pressure sensor Bypass valve
Temperature sensor safety Circulation pump
Temperature sensor (reservoir)
Table 2-2 Cushion control process
16 022 02 0918
Coupling and coupling reached process
The inquired input signals for the coupling process are the cushion pressure sensor and the signal ‘Safety
circuit overtemperature’ coming from the bistable relay on the MB. The input signals ‘Cushion level min,
Cushion level max, Cushion level default, Cushion level up, Cushion level down’ as well as the Z-position
value are provided. The output signals control the driver for the circulation pump and bypass valve.
The Coupling Process gets started and stopped by the Cushion Control Process on the MB (4). The circula-
tion pump is enabled and a minimum value for the circulation pump speed is set. The bypass valve is
switched OFF.
Decoupling process
The cushion height is dependent from the input of the cushion level and the Z-position value. If the
coupling reached process is stopped, the circulation pump is disabled and the bypass valve is switched ON
and degassing pump is working with maximum speed for supporting decoupling process. There is a time
delay till the input for cushion pressure sensor has reached a defined value where after the bypass valve is
switched OFF again.
During coupling process no degassing mode is possible (because TH is in therapy position) and only cool-
ing mode is supported. Maximum required time for coupling as well for decoupling is about 20 sec.
2.5.2 Water degassing system

The water degassing system consists of the degassing unit (2) with nozzle (24), degassing air valve (13),
switch ‘Degassing min.’ (14), switch ‘Degassing max.’ (15) ,degassing pump (16), degassing valve (17),
ball valve (19) and water filter (18).
The water degassing systems is operated in two cycles,the degassing cycle and the filling cycle.
2-19
NOTE
Degassing only works if therapy head is in park position with pivot rotation in 90° - 180° range
(OT range).
Degassing cycle
During the degassing cycle the degassing pump (16) pumps water from the therapy head through the coil
via the ball valve (19), water filter (18) through the degassing unit (2) into the water reservoir (3), thereby
creating a vacuum in the degassing unit. Water is sprayed into this vacuum by the nozzle (24), thus sepa-
rating water in the lower part of the degassing unit from gas bubbles in the upper part.
When the water level is low, switch ‘Degassing min.’ (14) stops the degassing pump (16) and temporarily
opens the degassing valve (17). Filling cycle begins.
Filling cycle
After a defined time the degassing air valve opens and releases the now compressed gas. At the end of
this cycle which is sensed by degassing switch max (15) degassing air valve (13) and degassing valve (17)
System Description
close again. The degassing pump (16) again pumps water out of the degassing unit and the degassing
cycles is started.
Evacuation mode
Evacuation mode could be used after service activities like coil replacement and fill water, when therapy
head and hoses are filled with air.
16 022 02 0918
Figure 2-17 Degassing system
The degassing control process on the MC starts and stops the different degassing sub processes.
2-20
Signals required for Degassing Control Process on MC
Input Output
Degassing min switch Degassing air valve

Degassing max switch Degassing valve
Request - control panel Degassing pump
Table 2-3 Degassing control process
Degassing process
The input signals for the degassing process are the switches ‘Degassing min.’ and ‘Degassing max.‘. Dur-
ing degassing process the motor driver of the degassing pump, the degassing valve and degassing air
valve are controlled.
As soon as the degassing process was started and the switch ‘Degassing min.’ is high, the degassing
pump is enabled and the degassing air valve is switched OFF.
System Description
If degassing cycle lasts less than 30 seconds of pumping and this happens 5 cycles of degassing, a warn-
ing is sent to the control panel.
If the switch ‘Degassing min.’ is low, the degassing pump is disabled and the degassing valve is switched
ON. Then the output for the degassing air valve is switched ON. After the switch ‘Degassing max.’ is
reached both valves are switched OFF and the degassing pump is enabled and direction control is set
clockwise.
This cycle is repeated, as long as the time is shorter then the defined value of the input of the switch
‘Degassing max.’ is low again or the maximum time of one hour has elapsed. Then the degassing process
gets stopped by the degassing control process.
16 022 02 0918
Circulation process
The circulation process gets started for cooling the coil while therapy head is not in park position and gets
stopped by therapy head in park position with pivot 90°.
After the circulation process was started, the degassing valve is switched ON and the degassing air valve
switched OFF, the degassing pump is enabled.
Evacuation mode process

The input signals for the evacuation mode are the switch ‘Degassing min‘ and the request of the con-
trol panel. The output from the evacuation mode controls the degassing pump, the degassing valve and
degassing air valve.
The evacuation mode is started and stopped manually on the control panel. As soon as the service degas-
sing process was started and the signal from the switch ‘Degassing max.’ is high, the degassing pump is
enabled and direction control is set clockwise. Also both output signals for the valves are switched OFF.
If the input signal of the switch ‘Degassing min. gets high, the degassing pump is disabled and the output
for the degassing air valve is switched ON. After a delay of 1 second the degassing pump is enabled and
direction control is set counter-clockwise. If the degassing max gets high again the degassing pump is
disabled and the output for the degassing air valve switched OFF. After that the degassing pump is ena-
bled and direction control is set clockwise. This cycle is repeated till the operator changes to normal mode
again. Then a message is sent from control panel to the MC and this process is stopped by itself.
2.5.3 Airbag system

The airbag system consists of the central airbag, airbag valve B (8) and airbag valve A (12), airbag com-
pressor (7), airbag pressure sensor (11), an air filter (9) and two sound absorbers (10).
During X-ray localization the airbag valves A and B are switched ON and the airbag is inflated by the air- 2-21
bag compressor. This removes most of the water from the X-ray path in order to improve image quality.
The inflation of the airbag is dependent on patient table height. According to the vertical position of the
patient table the airbag compressor inflates the airbag until a certain pressure is reached, measured by the
pressure sensor (11). When the final height of the airbag is reached the airbag compressor stops and the
airbag valve A closes. To avoid patient displacement by the inflating airbag the airbag pump is switched
off, if the pressure in the airbag is 40 mbar higher than the measured pressure in the therapy head.
After pressing the shock wave release button the airbag is deflated automatically by switching off the
airbag valve B also. The airbag compressor is switched on to suck out the air of the airbag through the air
filter (9).
Should the airbag get an air leakage the drop in pressure is sensed by the airbag pressure sensor and an
error is indicated. The ingress of water into valves and compressor, due to a leaking airbag, is prevented
by the air filter which contains a hydrophobic membrane. Water can‘t bypass this membrane.
System Description
16 022 02 0918
Figure 2-18 Airbag system
The airbag control process on the MC starts and stops the airbag processes.
Signals required for Airbag Control Process on MC
Input Output
2-22
Airbag pressure sensor Airbag valve A
Z-position value Airbag valve B
Airbag compressor
Table 2-4 Airbag control process
Airbag process
The input for the airbag process is the airbag pressure sensor. Also the input for the z-position value is
provided.
The output controls the airbag valves A and B and the airbag compressor.
If the command ‘Airbag inflate’ is sent, the airbag valve A and B and the airbag compressor are switched
ON. The airbag compressor and airbag valve A are switched OFF after the pressure sensor delivers a cer-
tain value depending on the z-position value.
System Description
16 022 02 0918
If the command ‘Airbag deflate’ is sent, airbag valve B is switched OFF and a fixed waiting time blocks a
restart of command ‘Airbag inflate’.
The input of the airbag pressure sensor is checked permanently for a certain value as long as airbag valve
B is active. If the measured value of the airbag pressure sensor is out of range an error message is sent to
the main process.
2-23
System Description
Figure 2-19 The 4 different airbag status
16 022 02 0918
2.5.4 Temperature control system
Figure 2-20 Temperature control
The water temperature control system consists of the temperature sensor (26) at the water tank (3) linked
2-24 to the main controller board (4), the temperature sensor safety (21) at the therapy head and the water
radiator with two fans (22).
When the water temperature is lower than 20 ºC the two axial fans at the water radiator are switched on
for heating up the water to ambient temperature.
When the water temperature is higher than 28 ºC, the fans are switched on for cooling. When the water
temperature is below 27 ºC, the fans are switched off again.
When the water temperature in the water tank is higher than 38 ºC a warning is indicated. If the water
temperature in the water tank is higher than 40 ºC shock wave release is blocked, the coupling cushion is
decoupled and an error is indicated. The cooling pump and the fans at the water radiator are still work-
ing. Therefore the water will be cooled down. After reaching a water temperature below 37 °C shock
wave release and cushion inflation is enabled again.
At water temperature < 15 ºC shock wave release will be switched off and temperature warning is dis-
played.
When the water temperature in the therapy head reaches 41 ºC as sensed by the temperature sensor
safety at the therapy head shock wave release is stopped, the coupling cushion is decoupled and an error
is indicated.
System Description
Signals required for Temperature Control Process on MC
Input Outputs
Temperature sensor Radiator cooling fans

Temperature sensor safety
Table 2-5 Temperature control process
16 022 02 0918
2.5.5 Water temperature safety circuit
2-25
System Description
Figure 2-21 WAC temperature control circuit
Normal condition
At normal conditions the MC monitors the temperature via the temperature sensor at the water tank.
The water however heats up by the power dissipation of the coil during shock wave release. When the
temperature reaches 38°C the MC will inform the user by the display that high temperatures are reached
(error 2301) but shock wave release is still possible. If the limit of 40°C is reached, the MC deflates the
coupling cushion and will inform the user (error 2303). Also the shock wave process on the MC will dis-
able to release further shock waves until the water temperature decreases to 37°C.
16 022 02 0918
41ºC Sensed by Temperature sensor safety. (Error code 2304)
40ºC Sensed by Temperature sensor. Coupling cushion and shock wave emission disabled.
(Error code 2303)
38ºC Warning code 2301
37ºC Coupling cushion and shock wave enabled.
28ºC Fans on
27ºC Fans off
20ºC Fans on / off
15ºC shock wave release on/off
Fans on
1ºC
Figure 2-22 Temperature diagram

2-26
Therapy head over temperature
If the temperature sensor at the water tank fails by indicating lower temperatures as present unacceptable
high temperatures would arise in the therapy head and might hurt the patient. If the temperature reaches
41°C in the therapy head, the independent temperature sensor safety for the therapy head switches off a
bistable relay.
At the same time the signal ‘Safety circuit over temperature’ is activated. This signal is normally log. high
(no error) and set to log. low on error state. This signal directly switches the hardware safety logic within
the shock wave control process, which will deflate the cushion and disable further shock wave release.
This signal also informs the user about the existing error condition (error 2304).
The therapy head over temperature failure can be reset only by activating the button ‘Reset safety circuit’
located at the external connector panel at the left side of the corpus, which is accessible for the user. As
long as the over temperature condition exists in the therapy head the bistable relay will remain in its safe
state, even if the user tries to activate the reset button.
System Description
16 022 02 0918
2.6 Movements
The MODULITH SLK is a very flexible lithotripter system. The flexibility is reached by having different move-
ments available:
–– Moving complete device (wheels and brakes)
–– Moving patient table (x-, y-, z- and Trendelenburg)
–– Rotate therapy head around vertical axis (swivel)
–– Rotate therapy head around horizontal axis (pivot)
–– Moving in-line unit in vertical direction
Apart from movement of complete lithotripter unit (pulling or pushing) and in-line unit all other move-
ments are realised by an electrohydraulic system. All axes can be driven to their end positions without
overloading the components. Accordingly, no limit switches for controlling the end positions are needed.
All axes are fail-safe with respect to a power loss which will lead to stop movements and keep all axes in
their last positions.
The hydraulic system is divided in two circuits.
Hydraulic circuit 1 comprises:
–– Longitudinal table movement (X)
–– Lateral table movement (Y)
–– Swivel of therapy head (Q).
Hydraulic circuit 2 comprises:

–– Vertical table movement (Z)
–– Trendelenburg (T)
–– Pivot of therapy head (P) 2-27
Details on sensor positions and safety logic are described in 5 Diagnostics.
2.6.1 Manoeuvring the lithotripter

The MODULITH SLK has four wheels for moving the complete device. Two fix wheels at front side and
two turnable wheels at the back side for steering. All wheels can be arrested to fix parking position of the
lithotripter. The brake systems are simple constructions with one axis pressing a brake piston on the turn-
able wheels and a simple hydraulic brake for the front wheels.
System Description
Figure 2-23 Brake for turnable wheels with mechanical brake system
16 022 02 0918
Figure 2-24 Brake for fix wheels with hydraulic brake system
2.6.2 Table positioning

All axes for table positioning are locked during shock wave release to avoid unintentional table move-
ments. While shock wave release the operator may override this lock with a separate unlocking button at
the rear side of the hand switch.
2.6.2.1 X-movement
The X-movement of the table is provided by one hydraulic cylinder in longitudinal direction (head - foot).
It covers a range of 160 mm. Position feedback is coming from a parallel installed potentiometer. Because
of the mechanical limit of the cylinder no limit switches are required.
There are no safety switches installed to control specific positions.
Acceleration is controlled through a ramp function. This allows precise adjustments and short positioning
2-28 times. X-movements are possible while the table is in Trendelenburg tilt.
2.6.2.2 Y-movement
The Y-movement of the table is provided by one hydraulic cylinder in lateral direction (patient: left - right,
table: front - back). It covers a range of 140 mm, separated in +/- 70 mm from a centre position. Position
feedback is coming from a parallel installed potentiometer. Because of the mechanical limits of the cylin-
der no limit switches are required.
There are two safety switches (YL_1S, YL_2S) installed to control maximum front (= max. left) position,
which is used for patient entry.
times. Y-movements are possible while the table is in Trendelenburg tilt.
2.6.2.3 Z-movement
The Z-movement of the table is provided by one hydraulic cylinder integrated in z-column for up and
down movement of complete table. It covers a range of 340 mm, seperated in four sections. Position
System Description
feedback is coming from a tackle potentiometer, mounted on base of the device. If feedback from tackle
potentiometer is missing movement gets immediately stopped. Because of the mechanical limits of the
cylinder no limit switches are required.
There are four safety switches (ZTHOT_1S, ZTHOT_2S, ZTHUT_1S, ZTHUT_2S) installed to control table
height for over- and under-table position of therapy head.
times. Trendelenburg tilt is possible when table position is higher than 175 mm.
16 022 02 0918
Section Table high [mm] Functions Controlled by
4 245-340 Treatment in under-table position ZTHUT_1S
Treatment with Trendelenburg option ZTHUT_2S
3 175-245 Treatment in under-table position ZTHUT_1S
Treatment in over-table position ZTHUT_2S
Treatment with Trendelenburg option ZTHOT_1S
ZTHOT_2S
2 120-175 Treatment in over-table position ZTHOT_1S
ZTHOT_2S
1 0-120 Patient entry
No treatment position
Table 2-6 Section of vertical movement and available functions
2.6.2.4 Trendelenburg movement
NOTE
If option “Trendelenburg” is not available cylinder is replaced by an adjustable metal rod and sensors
TRD0, TRD_xS and TRD15 are not installed, and sockets at e-box connector board are bridged.
The Trendelenburg-movement of the table is provided by one hydraulic cylinder integrated in z-column.
The tilt angle covers a range from 0° to 15°. There is no potentiometer for position feedback.
There are four limit and safety switches (TRD0, TRD15, TRD0_1S, TRD0_2S) installed to control if table is
tilted or not.
times. If Trendelenburg is active X- and Y-movements are not limited. Z must be in range from 175 to 340
2-29
mm.
For Trendelenburg movement pivot position of therapy head must be 90° (horizontal).
In case of a power loss the hydraulic cylinder will keep last position and avoid patient falling down. To
lower the table manually there is a safety valve available.
2.6.3 Swivel - vertical rotation of therapy head

The swivel movement is used to rotate the therapy head of MODULITH SLK between park- and therapy
position. In park position the therapy arm is parallel to patient table. In therapy position the therapy head
is located over or under table in treatment area.
System Description
Figure 2-25 Therapy arm in park position Therapy arm in therapy position
16 022 02 0918
The rotation is generated by one hydraulic cylinder. Rotation is controlled by several sensors (SUC1_1S,
SUC1_2S, SUT, SUP, SUXRP, SUTS, SUP_1S, SUP_2S). They are used to identify start- and stop-positions,
as well some specific positions like for example the x-ray position, where therapy head gets swivel to, until
complete treatment area can be displayed on x-ray screen.
Position Controlled by
Park position SUP
SUP_1S
SUP_2S
Therapy position SUT
SUTS
Range with therapy head outside x-ray field SUXRP
Table 2-7 Swivel positions and assigned sensors
An additional position of the therapy arm is the transport position. Therefore the swivel mechanic needs
to be decoupled and moved manually.
2-30
Figure 2-26 Transport position
The therapy head swivel movement is force-limited to avoid injuring person or damaging devices and envi-
ronment. If rotation of therapy arm is blocked an overpressure valve in hydraulic circuit opens and move-
ment is interrupted. It will directly continue if blocking cause is removed.
In case of a lateral force against the therapy head a magnetic clutch gets decoupled and will immediately
stop movement by activating safety logic and switching off the power supply for the hydraulic circuit.
In case of a power loss no swivel movement is possible. Therefore a separate valve can be opened manu-
ally and therapy head can be moved by hand to park position.
System Description
16 022 02 0918
2.6.4 Pivot - horizontal rotation of therapy head
The MODULITH SLK provides an over-table and an under-table treatment position for the therapy head.
Changing between these two positions is realized by a horizontal rotation, which is called pivot move-
ment.
Figure 2-27 Pivot-movement for UT- and OT-position
The movement is generated by one hydraulic rotary actuator. Position feedback is coming from a poten-
tiometer detecting the angle of movement. The therapy head can drive to three specific positions: under-
table (0°), park position (90°), over-table (180°). These positions are controlled by microswitches installed
on a small electronic board at the rotary actuator.
position controlled by
under-table position (0°) = UT Poti, PTHOHUS, PTHOUS 2-31
park position (90°) = H(orizontal) Poti, PTHOHUS, PTHROHS
over-table position (180°) = OT Poti, PTHOUS, PTHOHUS, PTHROHS, PTHROS
Table 2-8 Pivot positions and assigned sensors
2.6.5 Collision protectors

To avoid hazardous collision situation for patients and staff some parts of MODULITH SLK are equipped
with pressure sensitive protection devices (PSPD). It is a foamy material with electrical contacts integrated.
Theses PSPD can be shaped as tubes (below patient table) or plain covers (therapy arm). In case the PSPD
is compressed or squeezed its electrical resistance will change. This change gets evaluated by a special re-
lay with control electronic. The created signal is forwarded to the main process and will impact the safety
circuit logic. The 2-channel-safety is realised by separate signal per PSPD each (Ch 2) and a combination of
all three PSPD relays in a row (Ch 1).
On same base of technology a collision protector for x-ray image intensifiers is available. With a flexible
adapter system the collision protector will fit to most mobile c-arc-systems.
System Description
As alternative for mobile x-ray c-arcs there is a simple collision sensor (spring arc) available too.
Both collision protectors can be connected at the same socket (red label) on external panel. Therefore take
care about correct coding of lemo-plugs.
If no image intensifier collision protector is used, a termination plug (termination resistor) is required to
close safety circuit.
16 022 02 0918
2.6.6 Overview hydraulic circuits
Pivot Z-column Trendelenburg swivel X-axes Y-axes
force limiter swivel
Emergency valve Bypass valve

Trendelenburg Swivel
Pump 1 Oil tank Pump 2
Figure 2-28 Overview hydraulic circuit

2-32
2.6.7 Predefined positions
Following positions are predefined and can be reached by pressing separate buttons:
Button Position X Y Z TH
Easy entry Table on lowest value, lateral move- 0 70 0 ---
ment max. position to front
Therapy position Table in y centred 0 0 120 ---
Table with z higher 120 mm
Focus check Table high, therapy head in therapy 0 0 280 0°
position UT, cushion not inflated
Uro position Comfortable position for endourologi- 80 0 180 90°
cal treatment
Transport Preparation for outdoor transport of -80 -70 120 180°
‘mobile’ lithotripter, TH at x-ray pos
System Description
Preparation for inhouse transport of -80 20 120 OT

lithotripter, TH must be secured unlocked
16 022 02 0918
2.7 Main controller and software concept
2.7.1 Integrated main controller
2
1
2-33
4 5
6 7
8
System Description
9
Figure 2-29 1) Fuses for 24V, 2) internal power supply, 3) PLD safety logic, 4) WAC, 5) Microprocessor,
6) PCCU, 7) external communication, 8) Optocouplers, 9) I/O to connectors
16 022 02 0918
Central control unit of the MODULITH SLK is the main controller located behind covers of the e-box. On
this board all controller circuits are integrated. Following paragraph gives a short description of “electronic
areas” on main board.
The board is powered by 24 VDC which is coming from a power supply. On main board the 24 VDC are
distributed to other components as well. These circuits are fused and the power supply of these circuits
is indicated by LEDs (1). Voltages of 12VDC, ±5VDC, and 3.3VDC for the electronic are generated directly on
the board (2).
Safety logic is realized by two circuits each with a PLD-IC (3). Safety relevant signals are given in parallel to
the logic for evaluation. Coordination of system status is controlled by a 32-bit ARM Cortex-M3 micro-
controller (5). As well located on the main board are “controller regions” for the water-air-circuit (4), the
PCCU (6), the movements and external communication via Ethernet RS232 or CAN-bus (7). The feedback
signals from the (movement-)sensors are separated from the main board by optocouplers (8).
On the main board there are many sockets available to provide signals to other boards in the system and
especially to the hydraulic unit (AKTORmed) (9). Some of the connectors are only for internal use like
programming and testing.
2.7.2 Software and communication

The MODULITH SLK is controlled by one single microprocessor. For communication with other modules
(hardware, software processes, ...) a central communication protocol is used: SMAL - Storz Medical Ap-
plication Layer.
This communication protocol is designed to be independent from hardware. Via different bus-systems a
set of messages and statements (SyncMsg, StateMsg, MovementMsg, ...) is distributed to the sub compo-
nents and feedback messages are send back. Software makes it possible to use this set of statements on
different hardware platforms.
Communication with “external” components like the hydraulic unit or up to 5 control panels is realized
2-34 via CAN-Bus. By using the flexible CAN-Bus the system is open for additional options in future.
Foot switch /
options Control panel Hydraulic unit
inline unit /
(e.g. MiControl) (1 .. 5) (Aktormed)
...
↕CANopen ↕SMAL ↕SMAL ↕SMAL

CANopen-Bus CAN-Bus
↕CANopen ↕SMAL
Microprocessor (using SMAL, CANopen, multi-tasking)
↕ ↕ hard wired ↕
Water-Air-System PCCU Interfaces (LAN, USB, ...)
System Description
Figure 2-30 Overview of system communication
2.7.3 Control logic

One of the permanent running tasks is the system-synchronisation-task. Every 100 ms the task is sending
a sync-message and waiting for feedback. During feedback cycle (about 80 ms) all sensors and control
tasks report their latest status. If a status requires any action (display messages, stop movements, ... ) new
tasks get started to perform that action.
16 022 02 0918
2.7.3.1 Evaluation of safety signals
Safety logic of MODULITH SLK is expecting high-values (1) for safety relevant signals during normal op-
eration. If a single signal is changing to low-value (0) an error-event gets started. This principles works for
all sensors and emergency halt buttons of control panels. The status signals are given to hardware safety
logic (PLD 1 & 2) and as well to software safety logic of microprocessor.
not used Control Panel 1 Control Panel 2 Control Panel 3 Control Panel 4 Control Panel 5
(for future Xray
expansions)
EmHaltResS EmHaltFromXrayS EmHalt1S CpConnect1 EmHalt2S CpConnect2 EmHalt3S CpConnect3 EmHalt4S CpConnect4 EmHalt5S CpConnect5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
&
&
&
&
&
&
0
0
0
0
0 >=1 0 >=1 0 >=1 0 >=1 0 >=1 0 >=1
0 & 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 EmHalt
0
Read Logic
to uP
Safety PLD1 and PLD2
Board Main SLK2
Figure 2-31 Example for safety signals

03
TITLE
Emergency Halt Hardware Safety Logic
SLK2
DOC No.
20000-01-B39
02
01 AEA 09/003 28.04.2011 si/fr

© Storz Medical AG / 2010
FULL FILENAME
P:\Projekte\SLK_2010\Blockdiagramme\Shockwave Safety Circuit
PAGE
2-35
Schutzvermerk ISO 16016 4 OF 4
PLD 1 & 2 (programmable logic device) are hardware controlled safety logics which
Änderung Datum
SLK2.cdd
are independent from
microprocessor with its software. In any safety situation they will prevent mechanical damages by stop-
ping movements and they will interrupt the charge and trigger process of PCCU.
5 / 11
027000_01_B39_01_02
CLP Block Diagram Safety Circuits
Version: 1.7
Project: CLP
System Description

File: Document in ALM Beschreibung Gesamt / Total Description
Figure 2-32 Example hardware safety logic

Form: TEM_ALM_008_01_02 STORZ MEDICAL AG
Version: 0 Copyright ISO 16016
16 022 02 0918
2.7.3.2 List of safety relevant situations
Following list is describing safety relevant situations:
Safety concept movement

System is designed without squeezing- and shearing points for user and patient. Distances between mov-
ing parts are bigger than 25 mm and pressure sensitive collision protectors are used.
Hydraulic system is splitted into two circuits (X, Y, swivel and Z, Trend, Pivot). Circuit 2 is inactive when
TH is in therapy position. Mechanical overload during rotation movement is avoided by overload clutch of
therapy arm. There are bypass valves available to move hydraulic cylinders in case of power loss.
Some sensor are installed twice, to provide a 2-channel-safety-system.
Safety logic controls defined situations:
–– Patient entry position (Y-axis to maximum front, TH in park position and pivot 90°, no Trendelen-
burg active)
–– Use of Trendelenburg (TH in park position and pivot 90°, Z minimum at 175 mm or higher)
–– ESWL in UT-position (no Trendelenburg active, Z minimum at 175 mm or higher, TH at pivot 90° or
0°)
–– ESWL in OT-position (no Trendelenburg active, Z between 120 mm and 245 mm, TH at pivot 90° or
180°)
–– Swivel of TH (coupling cushion deflated, airbag deflated, inline-unit in lowest position)
–– Compression of PSPD (resistance value evaluation, movement will stop)
Safety concept shock wave release

Safety signal have impact on charging the capacitor or triggering of shock wave release.
2-36 Safety logic controls defined situations:
–– No movements during shock wave release (unlock button1...5)
–– Only shock wave release button from active control panel is accepted
–– Therapy head must be in therapy position
–– Trigger signals (internal or ECG) must be available
Safety concept water-air

Safety signal have as well impact on generating high voltage or releasing shock waves.
–– Water temperature
–– Cushion pressure
Safety concept emergency halt & control panel

System Description
Safety events from control panel or emergency halt will interrupt HV circuit and stop movements immedi-
ately. Activated emergency-halt-buttons are also blocking movements in override mode.
Signals from EmHalt1..5 are transmitted to software logic, to PLD 1 and PLD 2. The switches are 2-chan-
nel-switches.
–– Minimum one control panel must be connected
–– EmHalt1..5 gets evaluated, independent from active panel
–– EmHaltXray (Collisionsensor) gets evaluated
16 022 02 0918
2.8 Shock wave generation
The energy stored in a high voltage capacitor is discharged rapidly via a cylindrical coil, surrounded by a
cylindrical metallic membrane. The discharge current builds up a transient magnetic field in the coil. The
magnetic field induces strong eddy currents in the membrane, thus the membrane is repelled from the
cylindrical coil system. Since the membrane is immersed in water, a cylindrical pressure wave propagates
through the water to a parabolic reflector. The concentric parabolic reflector reflects the pressure wave in
such a way, that the shock wave will be focused at the focal point 150 mm in front of the reflector.
The shock wave generation system of the MODULITH SLK consists of 2 subsystems, the therapy head and
the Pulse Current and Charging Unit (PCCU).
2.8.1 Hardware description
2.8.1.1 Therapy head
The therapy head comprises the reflector, contact flange, coil with integrated airbag, pressure sensor,
temperature sensor safety, coupling cushion and the pulse current cable.
7 1
5 2-37
System Description
Figure 2-33 Therapy head, from top, cover open
1 - Focus gauge holder 4 - snap-in handle 7 - spring lever with focus mark
2 - coupling cushion inflated 5 - coil with airbag
3 - therapy arm 6 - coupling cushion deflated
16 022 02 0918
7
1
5
4
Figure 2-34 Therapy head, from below, cover open
1 - distributor board TH 4 - switch inline unit detection 7 - signal converter temp. T/I
2 - snap-in handle 5 - water connector TH
2-38 3 - pressure sensor 6 - focus gauge fixture
2.8.1.2 PCCU (Pulse Current and Charging Unit)
The PCCU consists of the board CTU (Charging and Trigger Unit), the HV-transformer with integrated HV-
multiplier and two HV-dividers (HV transformer cpl. PCCU SLK (1L)), the charging resistor, the capacitor
with integrated discharging resistors (capacitor with 1.2 µF in parallel to two 100 MΩ resistors) the board
PCCU SLK (1L) and the pulse current switch (thyristor switch).
System Description
Figure 2-35 PCCU overview
16 022 02 0918
2-39
System Description
Figure 2-36 PCCU overview
16 022 02 0918
CTU SLK (1L) (Charging and Trigger Unit)
The CTU SLK (1L) board processes the interface signals from the MB of the MODULITH SLK. A micropro-
cessor on the CTU-board controls all device functions. The safety functions of HV generation and control
are realised by a two channel hardware system. Other functions as temperature control, charging and
triggering are checked by hardware and additionally software.
The power supply which is realized by a full-bridge generates a high frequency voltage (48 VHF) to drive
the primary side of the HV Transformer.
The interface input and output signals are separated by optocouplers. The 4 input signals CTUOn,
ChargeOn, HVTest and Trigger as well as the 3 output signals CTUOk, EOC and TrigCounter are indicated
by green LEDs (V30, V34, V38, V42 as well as V19, V21, V22, see Figure 2-36), the 4 error output signals
FaultSwitch, HVmax,DivIncon, and CTUTemp are indicated by red LEDs (V35, V40, V46, V27, see Figure
2-37).
2-40
Figure 2-37 LEDs on board ctu (For details see chapter 5 Diagnostics.)
Transformer HV PCCU SLK (1L)

This module contains the HV-transformer, two boards with voltage multiplier and two independent
HV-dividers. The nominal voltage of the HV-transformer is 15kVDC. The HV-dividers supply the HV-Actual
Value and HV-Ref value to the control and interface part of the CTU SLK (1L) board.
A temperature limiter controls maximum temperature of the HV-transformer.
Thyristor switch
The thyristor switch acts as a special high performance switch for discharging the energy stored in the
capacitors into the coil enclosed in the therapy head. Several thyristors in parallel and in series enclosed
in the switch are triggered simultaneously. The trigger circuit is electrically isolated from the HV-circuit. It
System Description
operates on 24 VDC.
Capacitor Unit
The capacitor unit with 1.2 µF and the nominal voltage of 16 kV includes two 100 MΩ discharging resis-
tors in parallel.
16 022 02 0918
Board PCCU SLK (1L)
To prevent the thyristor switch from partial damage some HV-diodes are switched in parallel to the thyris-
tor. If the ringing pulse current turns into negative the current commutates to the HV-diodes.
For service maintenance activities a HV-divider at the board creates an output voltage proportional 1/1000
to the high voltage (BNC connector X14), and can directly be measured with a digital multimeter.
2.8.1.3 Shock wave generation
Warm up
The PCCU is switched on after power on of the MODULITH SLK. The warm up time lasts a few seconds.
When the warm up time is elapsed, the PCCU is standby to release shock waves. At expiration of the
warm up time, the initialization of the default treatment parameters are made by the MC. The treatment
shot counter is set to 0.
Energy level
The shock wave energy level is determined with the HV voltage in the PCCU. The HV voltage in the PCCU
is set via ‘an_HV Set Value’ (4-20mA). The output value is read back from the controller via ‘an_HVActual-
Value’ (0-10VDC) to ensure correct setting. The energy levels are divided in steps of 1 from 1-9 and in steps
of 5 from 10, 15, 20, 25 ... 90. The change of the energy level also works during the release of shock
waves.
Trigger mode and frequency
On receipt of commands, concerning trigger mode and trigger frequency, it sets the appropriate control
signals to switch the selected trigger input (internal trigger or ECG). The change of the trigger frequency
also works during the release of shock waves.
Internal trigger 2-41

The internal trigger signal is generated by the microcontroller. Possible trigger frequencies are 1, 1.5, 2,
3 and 4 Hz. Due to the charging time of the HV capacitors the maximum possible trigger frequency is
limited to 3 Hz or 2 Hz, depending on the selected HV.
ECG trigger
When ECG is selected, an external ECG trigger signal controls shock wave release.
Shock wave release

To release a shock wave with the shock wave release button, the therapy head must be in therapy posi-
tion (SUT), the Charge Enable Signal (ChargeOn) is to be activated from the MC, the water temperature
must be less than 40°C and more than 15°C. The request of a shock wave release with the shock wave
release button is sent via SMAL over the MB to CTU SLK (1L). If all conditions are fulfilled the MC ac-
knowledges the request of a shock wave release and than shock waves can be released.
System Description
Shot counter
A total shot counter is incremented each shot with the ‘st_TrigCount_lb’ signal of the PCCU. The result of
the count is saved in a non-volatile storage area. Another counter is the volatile treatment shot counter.
The treatment shot counter value is derived from the total shot counter value. The treatment shot counter
can be set back after a treatment by a command of the MC.
The coil counter counts the number of shots since the last replacement.
16 022 02 0918
2.8.1.4 PCCU service functions and signalling
HV test
The HV test examines the intrinsic safety of the PCCU directly after switching on the system. To per-
form a HV test, a voltage HV-set value of 8 kV is applied. Before the test procedure starts the signal
‘crtl_HVTest_l’ is activated. The test is to be completed by pressing the shock wave release button. During
the test the HV-feedback signal is intentionally modified, which leads to switch off the CTUok-signal. This
deviation or signal change must be identified by main process. Result of HV test is o.k. when error recog-
nition worked.
Within this test the hardware safety circuit of the CTU is checked by a nominal-actual value comparison
of the HV-Set-Ref-Value and the HV-Ref-Value. If an error occurs, it will be recognized by the hardware
safety circuit, the signal CTUOk is switched off indicated by the LED V19 (see Figure 2-37). An error detec-
tion is indicated by the MB and displayed at the operating panel.
Indicated by the elapsed LED V71 (see Figure 2-36) the 12 VDC power supply to the pulse-width modulator
is switched off if an error is detected.
Max. temperature HV transformer
If the maximal HV transformer temperature is exceeded, the HV generation is stopped / switched off.
2-42
System Description
16 022 02 0918
5 / 11
027000_01_B39_01_02
Version: 1.7
Project: CLP
2.8.2
16 022 02 0918
Figure 2-38 Shockwave safety circuit
Shock wave safety circuit

File: Document in ALM Beschreibung Gesamt / Total Description
Form: TEM_ALM_008_01_02 STORZ MEDICAL AG
Version: 0 Copyright ISO 16016
System Description
2-43
2.8.2.1 Display energy task
With display energy task an additional control level is available. By permanently comparing the set- and
feedback-values of the HV circuit during shockwave release, the system ensures correct function. To
ensure correct evaluation a defined reference voltage (2,5 VDC) is checked as well. In case of any value
deviations there is a direct feedback visible on control panel when energy level display changes colour
to light grey. If deviation persists (up to 3 deviations) a HV-warning window will be displayed and shock
wave generation is stopped. Even the data exchange between PCCU and control Panel gets controlled.
The optical feedback is not available when no shockwave is generated.
Control
Control Panel
Panel CLP
CAN-Bus
State Energy Level O.K.

Up / Down Energy
State Energy Level
Command
CAN-Bus
2-44
Real Time Operating System

SoftwareSoftware
Software Main
Main Main Main
BoardBoard
CLP
Board CLP Process
Water Air Movement Shockwave Display
Process Process Process Energy
DAC ADC ADC ADC
Ref +2,5V
HVSetFeedback
HVActualValue
HVSetValue
4-20 mA
PCCU
System Description
High Voltage
Generation
with CTU limited
High
Voltage
Figure 2-39 Display energy task and signal exchange in lithotripter
16 022 02 0918
2.9 In-line Unit
2.9.1 Introduction
The MODULITH SLK offers the possibility to integrate an ultrasound device (ultrasound transducer) into
therapy head for accurate target localisation. Therefore, and because of the cylindric shape of the coil, the
so called in-line unit is inserted into therapy head.
Transducer
Connector
StorM-Link
guide pipe with
linear spring
Potentiometer
Rotational Motor
spring
Free wheel
transmission
Toothbelt
Connector
Power / CAN
Controller 2-45
Figure 2-40 In-line unit with open cover
The in-line unit contains power- and control electronics and the complete mechanics for driving the ultra-
sound transducer in vertical direction.
Via a potentiometer a feedback of current position is given to the electronics. The analogue signals gets
converted to digital information and is processed on a serial Interface. A RS-232 interface is communicat-
ing with HITACHI-ALOKA ultrasound devices equipped with special StorM-Link software. The ultrasound
device is using the feedback information for calculating and displaying a targeting crosshair.
2.9.2 Mechanical details

The movement of the transducer is generated by a pair of springs which are supported by an electrical
System Description
motor. While force of spring for upward movement is higher than for downward, the motor is supporting
the downward movement.
Because of construction of the snap-in fixture the complete in-line unit with transducer can be rotated
360° by hand.
16 022 02 0918
transducer
linear spring
motor with
driving wheel rotational spring
toothbelt
Figure 2-41 Functional diagram of in-line unit
Driving the transducer upwards:
The transducer is pushed upwards by a linear spring. The motor is running to move the driving pulley
(wheel mounted on motor), otherwise its worm gear would block the movement (self-locking). While the
transducer drives upwards the tooth belt is unwound from the spring-pulley. Hereby the rotational spring
in the spring-pulley is tightened. In case of a collision with an obstacle (e.g. the patients body or the me-
chanical limit) only the difference between the force of the linear springs and that of the rotational spring
is applied; the motor can not apply force in an upwards direction. If the movement is blocked, the motor
keeps running but is automatically decoupled from the driving pulley via the freewheel transmission.
2-46 Driving the transducer downwards:

The transducer is pulled downwards by the motor via the tooth belt. Hereby the linear spring is tightened
and the rotational spring in the spring pulley winds the tooth belt up. The motor has to supply the differ-
ence of the force of the linear springs and that of the rotational spring.
2.9.3 Electronic details

From outside there are two connectors available at the in-line unit. One connector is providing the 24 V
power supply and CAN communication from and to the main board of the MODULITH SLK. The second
connector is for serial communication with ultrasound device.
The incoming 24 V is divided into two branches. One branch for the internal power supply of the board
with 3,3 V, indicated by green LED (V5). This branch is fused with a fix SMD-fuse T 0,5 A (F1). If this fuse
blows a “heavy” short circuit happened and complete board must be exchanged. The other branch is
providing power for the 24 V motor. This circuit is fused with an exchangeable T 0,5 A SMD-fuse (F2).
Additionally the circuit is controlled by a current limiter in case that movement is blocked while motor is
System Description
working. Motor is connected to X9-socket.
The vertical movement of the in-line unit is controlled by a separate microprocessor with individual soft-
ware. Feedback signal for current position is coming from a potentiometer connected to socket X7 and a
microswitch (X5) which is indicating lowest position and stopping power supply for motor. If microswitch
is activated the red part of LED V7 is lightning. The green part of V7 is permanently blinking and indicat-
ing communication with main board.
X4 is the socket for connecting the serial adapter for the StorM-Link cable.
For additional details see wiring diagrams in chapter 6 Wiring diagrams.
16 022 02 0918
2.9.4 Software control
The software stored on the in-line unit controller board controls the boot-up procedure, safety status and
event management caused by user request via control panel.
During boot-up (right after powering the board) in-line unit is registered to main board. Communication
is realized by SMAL-protocol on CAN-bus. Via the CAN-bus also the commands for driving up and down
are transmitted.
Safety logic takes care that in-line unit is only moving when:
–– Therapy head is in therapy position
–– Coupling cushion is inflated
Software also takes care that transducer moves down when swivel movement of therapy head to park
position gets activated or coupling cushion is switched off.
If shock wave release is started when in-line unit is still in upper position after 20 shocks in-line unit is
automatically driven down to lowest position, to avoid loss of shock wave energy.
Software is as well responsible for error messages which are displayed if for example in-line unit is not
calibrated yet.
2.10 Footswitch
The MODULITH SLK (1L) can be operated by optional footswitch.
2-47
Figure 2-42 Footswitch for MODULITH SLK (1L)
Footswitch provides following functions:

–– Trendelenburg up and down (left pedal)
–– Table movement in X and Y direction (center pedal)
–– Table up and down (right pedal)
The switch is connected to lithotripter (mainboard) via CAN-bus. Inside is a controller board mounted,
System Description
which communicates with mainboard by SMAL. If footswitch is connected, it gets detected automatically
and status information is available in service trace.
16 022 02 0918
2.11 Communication controller
The communication controller is an option to connect the lithotripter with an OR1 control computer or
personal computer. It can be used for remote control of device via maximum two software simulated
control panels on touch monitor of OR1 control computer. Therefore the software package StorM-Touch
must be installed on OR1 control computer.
Figure 2-43 Communication controller with add-on boards (microcontroller & SCB-node)
The communication controller is providing two looped through SCB-sockets for communication with OR1
control computer. Via this bus connection all signals for movements (table, inline unit, therapy head, cou-
pling cushion, and composite movements) can be transferred. It is also possible via LAN cable (RJ 45) to
provide treatment data to a PC (e.g. OR1). The LAN-socket on communication controller has an integrated
2-48 network isolator for isolation purposes.
The SCB is not designed to transfer big amount of data, e.g. like required during service trace. So data
intensive features are not available on software simulated control panels.
The communication controller consists of several PCBs (see picture above). A carrier board holding a micro
processor board on one and a SCB node on the other side. At the front side there are different connector
sockets. A Standard-A USB connector for individual software updates of communication controller and
export of configuration data is available behind the SCB-cover. The USB-mini-B socket can only be used
for proprietary debug purposes.
If communication controller is installed it gets started directly with power on of the lithotripter. Access to
configuration information is available through the control panels. The communication controller is com-
municating with mainboard of lithotripter by CAN-bus. For reset of communication controller only there is
a button S1 on side of microprocessor board.
Depending on installed cable connections (SCB or LAN) the communication controller will start in different
work modes:
–– Listening mode (with LAN cable)
In listening mode, the communication controller is reading all information which is available on the
CAN-bus. If treatment is completed (= reset of shock counter), the communication controller logs
System Description
the relevant treatment data in local flash memory until next shockwave is released.
–– SCB mode (with SCB cable, highest priority)
The communication controller establishes the connection via SCB to StorM-Touch.
All commands from StorM-Touch to the lithotripter, like table movements, therapy head move-
ments, energy adjustments and so on are interpreted and forwarded to the main process to per-
form the requested action.
When SCB connection is used, additional emergency halt buttons and shockwave release buttons
must be installed.
16 022 02 0918
Service Manual
MODULITH® SLK (1L)

(30k)
3
Chapter 3
Block Diagrams
Table of contents
3.1 Main board with system overview 3-3
3.3 Water air system 3-7

3.3.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.3.2 Safety logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3.4 PCCU [25860] 3-9
3.5 Hydraulic circuit 3-10
3-2
Block Diagrams
16 023 02 918
3.1 Main board with system overview
3-3
t e d
d a
u p
b e
to
Block Diagrams
Figure 3-1 SLK System overview [30000] (draft)
16 023 02 918
t e d
d a
u p
3-4
b e
t o
Block Diagrams
Figure 3-2 SLK System overview [30000] (draft)
16 023 02 918
3.2 Power supply
3-5
Block Diagrams
Figure 3-3 Power unit with isolation transformer and separate power supply
16 023 02 918
3-6
Figure 3-4 Power unit with combined power supply 24 / 48 V (default version)
Block Diagrams
16 023 02 918
3.3 Water air system
3.3.1 Overview
3-7
Block Diagrams
Figure 3-5 Water circulation system [26940]
16 023 02 918
3.3.2 Safety logic
3-8
Block Diagrams
Figure 3-6 WAC safety logic [26940]
16 023 02 918
3.4 PCCU [25860]
3-9
Block Diagrams
Figure 3-7 PCCU Blockdiagram [25860_01]
16 023 02 918
Block Diagrams
3-10
Pivot Z-column Trendelenburg swivel X-axes Y-axes
3.5
force limiter swivel
Figure 3-8 Hydraulic overview

Hydraulic circuit
Emergency valve Bypass valve

Trendelenburg Swivel
Pump 1 Oil tank Pump 2
16 023 02 918
3.6 Communication controller
Figure 3-9 Functional Groups of communication controller [30000_01_C39]
3-11
Block Diagrams
16 023 02 918
3-12
Block Diagrams
16 023 02 918
Service Manual
MODULITH® SLK (1L)

(30k)
4
Chapter 4
Removal / Installation
Table of contents
4.1 Introduction 4-5
4.2 Housing elements 4-6

4.2.1 Housing removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4.2.1.1 Remove / Install cover ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.2.1.2 Remove / Install top cover extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.2.1.3 Remove / Install top cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.2.1.4 Remove / Install back cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4.2.1.5 Remove / Install side cover left and right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4.2.1.6 Remove / Install front cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.2.1.7 Remove / Install lower front cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4.2.1.8 Remove / Install lower side covers left and right . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4.2.2 Housing installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4.2.3 Collision protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4.2.3.1 Exchange of PSPD-tube (patient table) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4.2.3.2 Exchange of PSPD-cushion (therapy arm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4.2.3.3 Exchange of PSPD-safety relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4.3 Water circuit 4-14

4.3.1 Drain water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4-2 4.3.2 Fill water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
4.3.2.1 Adjustment of water level in therapy head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
4.3.2.2 Calibration of water level sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
4.3.3 Water filter cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
4.3.4 Water bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4.3.4.1 Water bag removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4.3.4.2 Water bag installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4.3.5 Circulation pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4.3.5.1 Circulation pump removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4.3.5.2 Circulation pump installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4.3.6 Water radiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4.3.7 Degassing unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4.3.7.1 Degassing unit removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

4.3.7.2 Degassing unit installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
4.3.7.3 Degassing unit disassembling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
4.3.7.4 Degassing unit assembling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
4.3.7.5 Degassing pump removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
4.3.7.6 Degassing pump installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
4.3.7.7 Board distributor degassing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
16 024 02 0419
4.4 Rubber parts 4-26
4.4.1 Patient foil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
4.4.1.1 Patient foil removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
4.4.1.2 Patient foil installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
4.4.1.3 Patient foil tensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
4.4.2 Coupling Cushion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
4.4.2.1 Coupling cushion removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
4.4.2.2 Coupling cushion installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
4.4.3 Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
4.4.3.1 Airbag removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
4.4.3.2 Airbag installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
4.5 Electrical parts 4-31

4.5.1 Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4.5.1.1 Coil removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4.5.1.2 Coil installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
4.5.2 PCCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
4.5.2.1 PCCU removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
4.5.2.2 PCCU installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
4.5.2.3 PCCU overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
4.5.3 Exchange of HV cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
4.5.3.1 Remove HV cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
4.5.3.2 Install HV cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40 4-3
4.5.4 Exchange of Contact flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
4.5.4.1 Remove contact flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
4.5.4.2 Install contact flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
4.5.5 Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
4.5.5.1 Inductive sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
4.5.5.2 X and Y potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
4.5.5.3 Z tackle-potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
4.5.5.4 Pivot micro switches and potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
4.5.5.5 Light barriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
4.5.5.6 Signal converter of temperature sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
4.5.6 Main Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
4.5.7 Valve plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
4.6 Control panel and software 4-51

4.6.1 Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
4.6.2 Communication controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
4.6.2.1 Installation of controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
4.6.2.2 Connections via SCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
4.6.2.3 Connections via LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
4.6.3 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
4.6.3.1 Software for main board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
16 024 02 0419
4.6.3.2 Software for control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
4.6.3.3 Setting up control panel ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
4.6.3.4 Software for communication controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
4.6.3.5 Set up for communication controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
4.7 Mechanical parts 4-56

4.7.1 Front wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
4.7.1.1 Front wheel right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
4.7.1.2 Front wheel left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
4.7.2 Wheels and brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
4.7.2.1 Turnable wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
4.7.2.2 Turnable wheel / brake exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
4.7.2.3 Front wheels / brake exchange and adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
4.7.3 Hydraulic unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
4.7.3.1 Calibration of hydraulic movements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
4.7.3.2 Hydraulic hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
4.7.3.3 Hydraulic cylinder X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
4.7.3.4 Hydraulic cylinder Y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
4.7.3.5 Hydraulic cylinder Trendelenburg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
4.7.3.6 Swivel cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
4.7.3.7 Pivot hydraulic motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
4.7.3.8 Hydraulic pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
4.7.3.9 Bypass valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
4-4
4.7.3.10 Upper hydraulic distributor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
4.7.3.11 Lower hydraulic distributor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
4.7.3.12 Magnet coil from hydraulic valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
4.7.3.13 Hydraulic oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
4.7.4 Exchange of Snap-in catch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
4.7.4.1 Removal of snap-in catch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
4.7.4.2 Installation of snap-in catch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
4.7.5 Stopper for swivel unit slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
4.8 Inline unit 4-79

4.8.1 Top cover of in-line unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
4.8.2 Calibration of in-line unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
4.8.3 Work on controller board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80

4.8.4 Potentiometer exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
4.8.5 Transducer exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
4.9 Footswitch 4-83
16 024 02 0419
4.1 Introduction
Before performing any service action on the system, read out the operating counter values from ‘system
info’ in setting menu. Note the values of total operating hours (Total OH), coil shock wave counter (Coil
SW) and total shock wave counter (Total SW) for further use.
Most parts of the system are labelled with an identification number. This number contains the part
number (X), release or index (Y) and serial number (Z) of the part. The part numbers are put together like
shown: XXXXX – YY – ZZZZ.
If an exchange of a part with such a number is necessary, note the number of the old and new part.
For accurate and fast spare part supply and return, a repair label must be attached to the old part and a
service report completed including:
–– Serial number of the system.
–– Date of exchange.
–– Total hour counter at exchange.
–– Coil shock wave counter at exchange.
–– Total shock wave counter at exchange.
–– Part number and serial number of the old part.
–– Part number and serial number of the new part.
–– Name of service technician.
4-5
WARNING !

When exchanging components with software integrated, consider compatibility
STORZ MEDICAL.
16 024 02 0419
4.2 Housing elements
The housing of the MODULITH SLK consists of the following parts.
1 Back cover
1 2 Side cover right
3 Top cover
4 Lower side cover right
5 Lower front cover
6 Front cover
7 Lower side cover left
8 2 8 Side cover left
9 Top cover extension
10 Cover ring
3
front & back half
9 10
7 4
4-6
6 5
Figure 4-1 Housing elements of MODULITH SLK
4.2.1 Housing removal

To remove covers, please proceed always in following order:

1. Cover ring
2. Top cover extension
3. Top cover
4. Back cover
5. Side cover left and right
6. Front cover
7. Lower front cover
8. Lower side covers left and right
16 024 02 0419
Following description explains how to remove and reinstall single components of MODULITH SLK housing.
Please keep in mind, that for removing some parts of the housing other parts need to be removed before,
because of the connections between the housing parts.
Reinstallation is reverse order of listed work steps. Observe additional comments for installation.
4.2.1.1 Remove / Install cover ring
• Remove the two fixing screws of cover ring.
• Pull cover ring back half carefully to back side of machine.
• Pull cover ring front half carefully to front side of machine.
For reinstallation take care to insert cover ring into groove.
groove
Figure 4-2 Groove for inserting cover ring 4-7
4.2.1.2 Remove / Install top cover extension
• Check in chapter 4.2.1 Housing removal if other parts need to be removed before.
• Open fixing screw.
• Remove top cover extension.
4.2.1.3 Remove / Install top cover
• Use allen key to open fixing clamps of top cover. Insert allen key into small hole at left side of top
cover.
insert allen key
Figure 4-3 Access to open fixing clamp of top cover
16 024 02 0419
Figure 4-4 Fixing mechanic of top cover
• Remove top cover carefully to right side of machine.
For reinstallation first fix top cover at front cover, two holders need to be hook in, and then press it into
the fixing clamps.
4.2.1.4 Remove / Install back cover
Back cover can be removed and installed without removing other housing parts.
• Open 8 screws and remove back cover. (Take care that cover is not falling down).
For reinstallation take care about mains cable, not to kink or squeeze it with cover.
4.2.1.5 Remove / Install side cover left and right
4-8 • Use allen key to open fixing clamps from back side (see next picture).
→ ←
→ ←
Figure 4-5 Fixing clamps for side covers, right and left, access from back side
• Open inward fixing clamps by hand (see next picture).
16 024 02 0419
← →
Figure 4-6 Fixing clamps for side covers, right and left, access from „inside“
• Remove cover carefully.
4.2.1.6 Remove / Install front cover

4-9
Back cover and side covers can remain. Top cover must be removed.
• Open inward fixing clamps at each side by hand (see next picture).
→ ←
Figure 4-7 Fixing clamps for front cover
16 024 02 0419
• open inward fixing clamp at front (see next picture).
Figure 4-8 Fixing clamp at front (close to hydraulic oil tank)
• Remove front cover carefully.
4-10 4.2.1.7 Remove / Install lower front cover
• Open four screws from outside.
→
←
← →
Figure 4-9 Screws for lower front cover, outside
16 024 02 0419
• Open two screws from inside and remove cover.
Figure 4-10 Screws for lower front cover, inside, right and left (left not visible on picture)
4.2.1.8 Remove / Install lower side covers left and right
4-11
• Open screw to loosen lower side cover.
→
Figure 4-11 Lower side cover
• Rotate lower side cover around wheel until removing is possible (angle about 50°-90°).
16 024 02 0419
Figure 4-12 Remove lower side cover
4.2.2 Housing installation

4-12 • Refer to chapter 4.2.1 Housing removal and proceed in reverse order.
COMMENT
If parts of the housing are replaced by spare parts, please remember to reuse the fixing elements
from the defective housings. Spare parts will be delivered without these fixing elements.
4.2.3 Collision protectors

PSPD (pressure sensitive protection device) consist of mechanical and electrical components. This needs to
be considered during exchange. For free access to connectors maybe it is necessary to remove covers.
For details on removing covers see chapter 4.2.1.
4.2.3.1 Exchange of PSPD-tube (patient table)

COMMENT
For installing (gluing) a new PSPD-tube a primer for better adhesion is required.
Recommended is ‘3M Primer 4298UV’ or any multiprimer.
Observe operating and safety instructions of primer manufacturer!
16 024 02 0419
To exchange collision protection tube at patient table perform following steps:
• Disconnect PSPD-tube connector from distributor clamp to safety relay.
• Get out connector cable from any cable ducts if necessary.
• Remove defect/old PSPD-tube from table edge.
• Prepare surface for new PSPD-tube (clean, dry, smooth, free of any grease).
Use isopropyl alcohol for cleaning.
• Apply a thin coating of primer on surface of table edge,

and let the primer dry (for details see application instructions of primer manufacturer).
Liner = Protection cover for Acrylic Foam Tape (glue)

EKS = PSPD-tube
Acrylic = layer of flexible glue material
Foam
Figure 4-13 spare-part protection tube
• Remove 10-15 cm of liner of PSPD-tube and start attaching it to glue surface.

Avoid any tension / tensile stress to PSPD-tube.
Continue removing the liner and attaching the PSPD-tube until it is completely installed.
• Put back any cables in the cable duct as before.
• Connect cables to distributor clamp of safety relay.

4-13
• Perform function test.
4.2.3.2 Exchange of PSPD-cushion (therapy arm)
PSPD cushion on therapy arm is fixed on arm cover. So complete cover needs to be exchanged.
Figure 4-14 PSPD cushion of therapy arm
• Remove cover with PSPD cushion carefully from therapy arm, not to damage cables.
• Disconnect PSPD-cushion from distributor clamp to safety relay.
• Connect cables of new PSPD cushion to distributor clamp of safety relay.
• Mount spare-part cover with PSPD cushion on therapy arm.
16 024 02 0419
4.2.3.3 Exchange of PSPD-safety relay
Figure 4-15 Safety relay and location in lithotripter
• Remove covers on right side.
• Make notes regarding correct electrical connection.
• Disconnect relay.
• Remove relay from cap rail.
• Mount spare-part relay on cap rail.
• Reconnect cables using personal notes.
• Close covers.
4-14 4.3 Water circuit

4.3.1 Drain water
DANGER !
The coil is a part of the HV-circuit. It is freely accessible when the coupling cush-
ion is removed. Switch off the MODULITH SLK and wait 5 minutes before starting
any work on open coil (HV circuit). This time is required to discharge the capaci-
tors in PCCU completely.
• Swivel the therapy head at a position freely accessible and without any electronic parts below it (e.g.
therapy position).
Pivote must be in 0° position (=UT).
• Turn patient table manually into transport position (for more work space).
Safety circuit is now activated (illegal table position), no more movement possible.
• Switch off the MODULITH SLK and wait 5 minutes.
16 024 02 0419
Figure 4-16 Water bag
• Connect the water bag to the water connector at the therapy head. The hose of the water bag must
be completely free of water.
Water connector
4-15
Figure 4-17 Water connector therapy arm
• Press air (enough for emptying the therapy head of water) into the therapy head,
holding the water bag higher than the therapy head, to avoid water floating into the bag.
• Connect water bag to drain valve at the right side below the cover.
Water will immediately flow into water bag.
Drain valve
Figure 4-18 Draining connector
16 024 02 0419
• When reflector is emptied completely loosen the clamp fitting at therapy head and open the coupling
cushion (see chapter 4.4.2.1 Coupling cushion removal).
• Remove the cushion carefully and let the residual water drop into the therapy head.
• For draining water partially:

Disconnect the water bag when the water is drained completely from the therapy head.
• For draining water completely:

Do not disconnect water bag from the draining connector before water system is empty.
Maybe change of water bag is required.
• Use a soft towel to dry all parts of the reflector.
The water system contains a total of about 8 litres of water.
4.3.2 Fill water

• Before filling in water take care that therapy head is in 0° position (lower horizontal position).
• Connect the filled water bag to the drain valve in front of the degassing unit.
Water bag
4-16
Drain valve
Figure 4-19 Water filling
• Put the water bag on the tabletop (Fig. 4 - 16).
• When the water level reaches the edge of the shock wave reflector disconnect the water bag and
mount the coupling cushion (see chapter 4.4.2.2 Coupling cushion installation).
• Connect the water bag to the filler neck at the therapy head and fill in remaining water.
• Disconnect water bag and empty the water bag hose of water.
• Connect it back to the filler neck and press the remained air out of the therapy head.
• Check the lower sealing edge of the cushion for leaks. Leakages can usually be eliminated by tighten-
ing - or in some cases by loosening – the clamp fitting.
• Switch on the system.
• Pivot the therapy head to 180° position for degassing. Use evacuation mode if required.
• When the air is removed completely, pivot therapy head to 0°.
16 024 02 0419
• Now adjust the cushion level by filling or draining water while the coupling cushion is switched off.
Therefore use water level display from SETTING menu.
• To check the water level, switch off the coupling cushion. With the degassing unit filled, the coupling
cushion should just touch the edge of the coil (max. 1 - 2 mm water between cushion and edge of
coil).
Control water level on the display. The scale for the correct water level on the display is located in the
SETTING menu.
• Check the degassing system, the airbags and the coil for correct functioning.
4.3.2.1 Adjustment of water level in therapy head

Water level or correctly water pressure in therapy head has direct impact on safety logic for movements of
therapy head. If pressure is too low or too high movement is blocked and an error message is displayed.
For adjusting correct water level a special display in setting menu can be activated. Therefore the therapy
head has to be in 0° park position.
Figure 4-20 Water level display in setting menu (accessible for all users)
Correct water level is adjusted when on upper line yellow mark (current level) is matching orange mark
(perfect level).
4-17
4.3.2.2 Calibration of water level sensor
For correct function of water level display, water level sensor must be calibrated.
• Drive therapy head to 0° park position.
• Activate service menu.
• Fill in or drain water until cushion is swimming (1 - 2 mm) over upper edge of coil (water has to be
degassed enough).
• Drive therapy head to therapy and park position.
• Correct water level if movement is blocked.
• Press button “Water Sensor Calib.“ for water level calibration (pressure sensor calibration).
Now system learned correct pressure value and water level display can be used for water level adjust-
ment.
Figure 4-21 Water level display in service menu (accessible only for service engineers)
16 024 02 0419
• Check if therapy head movement moves correctly.
Information:
Blue lines are indicating working range of pressure sensor.
Green lines are indicating +/- 2% tolerance of current calibrated value (orange line). Green lines must be
between the blue ones.
4.3.3 Water filter cleaning

The water filter has to be cleaned periodically, dependent on the purity of the water, environmental con-
ditions and average room temperature.
For water filter cleaning, no water has to be drained, but it makes it easier when all water is removed.
O-ring
Clamp of water
filter bracket
Filter insert
4-18
Silver San® band
Figure 4-22 Water filter
• Close the ball valve, on bottom side of water filter.
• Open top cover of water filter, by unscrewing (quarter turn counter-clockwise) the top cover.
Water will flow out of filter unit.
• Carefully take out the filter insert and clean it if necessary. Use a toothbrush to clean off bulky dirt.
• If the filter housing is dirty, open the clamp of the water filter bracket (see Figure 4-22).
Remove the clamp and pull out the filter housing.
• Drain the remaining water and clean the filter housing inside.
• Reinstall the filter housing and close the clamp of the water filter bracket.
• Fit the filter insert into its housing so that it is located exactly around the conus at the bottom of hous-
ing. Fit in the twisted Silver San® band.
• Place the top cover of the housing so that the filter insert is exactly around the conus at the rear side
of the cover. Take care that the o-ring is located at the original position. Close the top cover (quarter
turn clockwise).
16 024 02 0419
• Open the ball valve.
• Add water to circuit if necessary.
• Check system for water and air leakages. Verify proper degassing.
4.3.4 Water bag
4.3.4.1 Water bag removal

The water reservoir is divided into two parts. In the upper part the water bag is located. In the lower part
the temperature sensor, bypass valve and water connector are located.
Venting hose connector

Circlip ring
Cover with water

bag underneath
4-19
Figure 4-23 Water reservoir top side
• Drain the water completely (see chapter 4.3.1 Drain water).
• Remove the circlip ring with circlip pliers and let the venting hose connector drop under the lid of
water reservoir.
• Open the screws of the lid and remove it.
Retaining ring
with groove
Figure 4-24 Lower side of water bag with retaining ring
• Carefully loose the retaining ring at the lower side of the water bag from the aperture margin of the
internal partitioning of the water reservoir
16 024 02 0419
• Now the water bag can be cleaned from inside with warm water and a soft tissue. Also the lower
chamber can be cleaned with a soft tissue. Remaining particles might be flushed out through the
draining connection.
4.3.4.2 Water bag installation
• Insert the water bag back in its suitable position.
• Carefully snap in the retaining ring of the water bag to the internal opening of the water reservoir.
• Connect the venting hose to the connection of the water bag. Pull the hose through the opening of
the water reservoir cover while placing back the cover to the original position and fix it to the water
reservoir.
• Slide the circlip ring over the venting hose and lift the venting hose connector through the opening. Fix
the circlip ring around the venting hose connector so that it cannot slide back into the water reservoir.
Venting hose
connected to the
water bag
Circlip ring
mounting
4-20
Figure 4-25 Reinstallation of water bag
• Refill the water circuit completely (see chapter 4.3.2 Fill water).
• Verify the proper expansion of the water bag inside the water tank while refilling.
16 024 02 0419
4.3.5 Circulation pump
4.3.5.1 Circulation pump removal
Bypass valve
Circulation pump
Figure 4-26 Circulation pump front side
• Drain water completely (see chapter 4.3.1 Drain water).
• Disconnect connector from the circulation pump.
• Open the hose clamps and remove the hoses.

Be aware that a bigger amount of water might drain out of the water reservoir through the lower
hose.
• Unscrew the circulation pump from the base.

4-21
• Take out the circulation pump.
4.3.5.2 Circulation pump installation
• Refer to chapter 4.3.5.1 Water pump removal and proceed in reverse order.
4.3.6 Water radiator

For an exchange of the water radiator it is necessary to drain the water partially from therapy head and
hoses to radiator (refer to chapter 4.3.1 Drain water).
• Disassemble the two fixing screws holding the water radiator to the base.
• Open the hose clamps and remove the hoses.
• Disconnect the three connectors for the power supply of the ventilators.
• Remove the water radiator.
16 024 02 0419
Fixing screws
Hose clamp Connectors

power supply
Figure 4-27 Water radiator
• To install the water radiator proceed in reverse order.
• Verify that no water or air leakage is present.
• Check that the ventilators are running in its desired direction. An arrow at the top of one ventilator
marks the right direction of rotation and airflow.
4-22
4.3.7 Degassing unit
The degassing unit consists of a clear degassing cylinder with a top and bottom cover. All electromechani-
cal parts are mounted on the top cover like degassing pump, switch degassing min., switch degassing
max., degassing valve, degassing air valve and the board distributor degassing.
ATTENTION !
Take care that the board distributor degassing stays dry.
4.3.7.1 Degassing unit removal
• Drain water completely (see chapter 4.3.1 Drain water).

• Remove the following cables from the board distributor degassing:

–– X801 ‘Main board’
–– X802 ‘Degassing pump’
–– X803 ‘Different cables to radiator/degassing unit’
• Unplug cable ‘Degassing Pump’ at the terminal of the degassing pump (see Fig. 4 - 28).
16 024 02 0419
Board distributor degassing
Degassing unit
Water reservoir with water bag
Figure 4-28 Degassing unit
• Remove both water hoses from top of the degassing pump and degassing valve.
• Remove the three nuts at the bottom holding the degassing unit to the base and get out the degas-
sing unit completely.
4.3.7.2 Degassing unit installation
• Refer to chapter 4.3.7.1 ‘Degassing unit removal’ and proceed in reverse order.
• Refill water completely (see chapter 4.3.2 Fill water).
• Check system for water and air leakages. Verify proper degassing. 4-23
4.3.7.3 Degassing unit disassembling

For complete disassembling, the degassing unit must be removed from the system (see chapter 4.3.7.1
Degassing unit removal).
• Open the three nuts on top of the degassing unit crosswise turn by turn.
• Lift the top cover carefully from the degassing cylinder.
• Remove the degassing cylinder.

Figure 4-29 Disassembled degassing unit
16 024 02 0419
4.3.7.4 Degassing unit assembling
• Refer to chapter 4.3.7.3 Degassing unit disassembling and proceed in reverse order.
• Tight the top nuts crosswise turn by turn. Do not over tighten them.
• Refill water completely (see chapter 4.3.2 Fill water).
4.3.7.5 Degassing pump removal

For degassing pump removal, no water must be drained. Have a Phillips screwdriver with a diameter of 6
millimetres handy to close the water hose connecting the degassing pump with the water reservoir.
• Close the ball valve.
• Remove the water hose on top of the degassing pump. Close the water hose with the Phillips screw-
driver to prevent water from draining.
• Unscrew the hose connection at the bottom of the degassing pump.
• Unscrew the cover of the electronic board at the left side of the degassing pump.
• Screw off the lower screws and remove the degassing pump from the degassing unit.
4-24
Figure 4-30 Degassing unit with degassing pump

16 024 02 0419
4.3.7.6 Degassing pump installation
• Refer to chapter 4.3.7.5 Degassing pump removal and proceed in reverse order.
• Verify that the hose at the lower connection of the degassing pump is not distorted while fixing the
connection screw (see Figure 4-28).
• Open the ball valve.
Figure 4-31 Proper mounted hose Figure 4-32 Distorted hose
4.3.7.7 Board distributor degassing

4-25
from degassing
min/max switch
to / from
degassing valve
and
degassing air valve
to main board
to
water radiator from
degassing pump
Figure 4-33 Board distributor degassing SLK
16 024 02 0419
4.4 Rubber parts
4.4.1 Patient foil
COMMENT
Because of hygienic reasons, it is recommended to exchange patient foil once a year.
COMMENT
Patient foil has different designs and fixations depending on mobile or stationary version of
lithotripter.
4.4.1.1 Patient foil removal
Version A: Fixation of patient foil (#18911) only with attachment lugs

To remove patient foil proceed as follows:
• Pull off the attachment lugs of the patient foil from the attachment nipples, around the complete
patient table.
• Unscrew the two knurled screws from the foot end of the table and remove the metal rail from the
foil.
• Remove the foil by pulling from the head end of the table towards the foot end.
Version B: Fixation of patient foil (#27939) with attachment lugs and screwed with standard rail
4-26
To remove patient foil proceed as follows:
1 1 1 1 1
3 2
1 - attachment lugs with nipples
2 - rail fixture to be removed
3 - rail fixture to be loosened
2 1 3
Figure 4-34 Fixture of patient foil at side
• Pull off the attachment lugs [1] of the patient foil from the attachment nipples [1], around the com-
plete patient table.
• Remove screw of rail fixture at foot end [2] (Allen key is required).
• Loosen rail fixture close to foot end [3] (Allen key is required).
16 024 02 0419
4 - knurled screw
5 - metal fixture
4 5 4
Figure 4-35 Fixture of patient foil at footward end
• Unscrew the two knurled screws [4] from the foot end of the table and remove the metal rail [5] from
the foil.
• Remove the foil by pulling from the head end of the table towards the foot end.
4.4.1.2 Patient foil installation
Version A: Fixation of patient foil (#18911) only with attachment lugs

Proceed as follows to install the patient foil:
• Put the foil over the table from the foot end.
• Slide the foil over the head part of the table.
• Hook the patient foil into the attachment nipples using the attachment lugs.
• Reinsert the metal fixture into the patient foil and fix it at its place using the knurled screws.
Version B: Fixation of patient foil (#27939) with attachment lugs and screwed with standard rail
Proceed as follows to install the patient foil:
• Put the foil over the table from the foot end. 4-27
• Slide the foil over the head part of the table.
• Hook the patient foil into the attachment nipples using the attachment lugs.
1 - attachment lugs at nipples Removal / Installation
1 1
Figure 4-36 Attachment nipples with patient foil hooked in
• Reinsert the metal fixture [5] into the patient foil and fix it at its place using the knurled screws [4].
• Tighten the loosen screws [3] with a torque of 6.4 Nm.
• Reinsert the screws [2] at footward end, and tighten them.

Use universal grease (e.g. motorex 176) for screws, and a torque of 6.4 Nm.
16 024 02 0419
4.4.1.3 Patient foil tensioning
COMMENT
The patient foil is made of plastic material, so its tension is quite high at first but will lessen
through usage. It is recommendable to fix the straps of the patient foil to their outer holes at the
first time of mounting, so the inner holes can be used if the patient foil is getting loose.
• Check the tension of the patient foil
The patient foil has attachment lugs with several holes. Proceed as follows to tension the foil:
• To tension the patient foil, simply pull the next hole of each attachment lugs over the nipple.
1 - attachment lug with adjustment holes
1
Figure 4-37 Attachment lug & Attachment nipple (positions can vary)
4-28 4.4.2 Coupling Cushion
COMMENT
Because of hygienic reasons, it is recommended to exchange the coupling cushion once a year.
4.4.2.1 Coupling cushion removal
• Partially drain water from the water circuit (see chapter 4.3.1 Drain water).
• Loosen the plastic clamp ring at the coupling cushion and press it downwards.
Coupling cushion
Clamp ring screw
Plastic clamp ring
Figure 4-38 Clamp ring coupling cushion
• Carefully use a blunt screwdriver to remove the cushion and let the residual water drop into the
therapy head.
16 024 02 0419
4.4.2.2 Coupling cushion installation
• Apply silicon grease to the outside of the coupling cushion in the area where the clamp fitting is to be
fastened.
• Apply silicon grease to the outside edge of the reflector where the coupling cushion is mounted.
• Place the coupling cushion onto the reflector and press the sealing lip of the cushion into the lower
groove of the reflector.
• Place the clamp ring at the coupling cushion and tighten it.
• Fill the water partially (see chapter 4.3.2 Fill water).
• Check the lower edge of the cushion for leaks. Leakages can usually be eliminated by tightening - or in
some cases by loosening – the clamp fitting.
• When the air is completely evacuated, adjust the cushion level by filling or draining water while the
coupling cushion is switched off.
• To check the water level, switch off the coupling cushion. With the degassing unit filled, the coupling
cushion should just touch the edge of the coil (max. 1-2 mm water between cushion and coil).
4.4.3 Airbag
4.4.3.1 Airbag removal
DANGER !
The coil is a part of the HV-circuit. It is freely accessible when the coupling cush- 4-29
ion is removed.
Switch off the MODULITH SLK and wait 5 minutes before starting any work on
the HV circuit. This time is required to discharge the capacitors in the PCCU com-
pletely.
• Switch the MODULITH SLK off and wait 5 minutes.
• Remove the coupling cushion (see chapter 4.4.2.1 Coupling cushion removal).
• Remove the coil (see chapter 4.5.1.1 Coil removal).

Figure 4-39 Remove airbag from coil
• Push the airbag with its plastic tube in direction to the coil flange and remove it .
16 024 02 0419
Clamp ring
O-ring
Figure 4-40 Airbag on tube
4.4.3.2 Airbag installation
• Apply a small amount Molykote M55 on the o-rings.
• Press the airbag with its plastic tube into the coil.
4-30
Figure 4-41 Airbag mounting
• Check the correct position.
• Install the coil (see chapter 4.5.1.2 Coil installation).
ATTENTION !
If the airbag was leaking while the system was filled with water, check the corresponding
air hoses from the valve plate to the therapy head and remove remaining water with com-
pressed air.
• Fill the water partially and mount the coupling cushion (see chapter 4.3.2 Fill water and 4.4.2.2 Cou-
pling cushion installation ).
• Check the airbag for leakage and proper function.
16 024 02 0419
4.5 Electrical parts
4.5.1 Coil
COMMENT
Every coil is delivered with a matching coil counter card. Always exchange both of them.
In case of damage ahead of schedule, a prorate warranty will only be possible when the complete
match is sent back to STORZ MEDICAL AG for investigation.
4.5.1.1 Coil removal
DANGER !
The coil is a part of the HV-circuit. It is freely accessible when the coupling cush-
ion is removed.
pletely.
• Write down the values of the hour-, coil- and total counter, which can be found in the menu ‘System
Information’ .
• Remove the coupling cushion (see chapter 4.4.2.1 Coupling cushion removal). 4-31
• Close the water in- and outlet with a soft towel to avoid screws and sealing rings falling into the water
channel.
Protective earth band
mount it here
Coil fixing screws

Figure 4-42 Coil top view
• Remove the screw of the protective earth band (Fig. 4 - 35).
• Remove the four coil fixing screws (Fig. 4 - 35).
16 024 02 0419
Coil extractor
Figure 4-43 Coil extractor
• Mount the coil extractor.
• Pull the coil extractor straight upwards until the coil flange is disconnected from the reflector.
• Dismount the coil extractor and pull the coil out hy hand.
ATTENTION !
Pull the coil with the coil extractor straight upwards. Do not agitate the coil laterally. This
could damage the coil flange.
4-32
4.5.1.2 Coil installation
A coil installation kit consist of the following parts:

–– 1 coil complete with mounted airbag
–– 1 coil counter card
–– 4 fixing screws M4 x 25
–– 4 sealing washers M4
–– 1 o-ring degassing connection
• Remove the old counter card placed behind the service aperture.
• Insert the new coil counter card
16 024 02 0419
Coil counter card
Figure 4-44 Coil counter card
• Use a soft towel to rub the reflector and the coil flange completely dry.
• Note the serial numbers of the old and new coil on the repair label of the old coil.
water in-/outlet
pressure sensor connection
HV contacts coil flange
4-33
O-ring degassing connection
bolt holes for coil screws
Figure 4-45 Coil flange
• Replace the o-ring of the degassing connection if necessary.
ATTENTION !
Check that o-ring of the degassing connection is in its proper place.
16 024 02 0419
Airbag o-ring
HV contacts coil
Figure 4-46 Coil side view
• Check the HV contacts of the new coil and the coil flange for damage.
• Apply Molykote M55 to the airbag o-ring.
• Insert the coil into the coil flange in the correct orientation.
• For every coil installation, new sealing washers and screws must be used.
• Insert new coil fixing screws together with the new sealing washers in the coil.
4-34
Figure 4-47 Coil with torque wrench
• Tighten the fixing screws crosswise with a torque of 1.4 Nm.
• Connect the protective earth band.
• Remove the towel of the water in- and outlet.
• Fill the water partially and mount the coupling cushion (see chapter 4.3.2 Fill water and 4.4.2.2 Cou-
pling cushion installation).
• Check the airbag for leakage.
• Check the coil function by releasing shock waves at every energy level and trigger frequency.
Return the used coil with the matching coil counter card to STORZ MEDICAL AG with proper labelling
indicating system serial number and shock wave number.
16 024 02 0419
4.5.2 PCCU
4.5.2.1 PCCU removal
DANGER !
the HV circuit. This time is required to discharge the capacitor in the PCCU com-
pletely.
• Open top cover and right side cover.
• Open the three grub screw of the brake linkage. (Refer to 4.7.2.1 Wheel / Brake removal)
• Dismount brake lever of hydraulic brake, for removing connecting rod.

Open the hexagon socket screws of holder, not torx screws of brake lever.
Grub screws Connecting rod
4-35
Retaining bracket
Figure 4-48 PCCU implemented and brake linkage

• Pull out the connecting rod so that the PCCU is freely accessible.
• Attend that the brake is open.
• Unscrew the four screws of the retaining bracket.
• Push the PCCU a bit from the inner side out of its place, so that you can reach the cables.
• Disconnect earth cable, HV cable, signal cable and cable power supply (see Figure 4-47) .
16 024 02 0419
HV cable
Earth cable
Signal cable
Cable power supply
Figure 4-49 Cable connection to the PCCU
• Push the PCCU out from inside as far that you can pull out it from the outside.
CAUTION !
PCCU of MODULITH SLK is heavy.

Take care when pulling out the PCCU not to squeeze your fingers or drop PCCU
4-36 on your fingers.
Figure 4-50 Pull out the PCCU
16 024 02 0419
4.5.2.2 PCCU installation
• Refer to chapter 4.5.2.1 ‘PCCU removal’ and proceed in reverse order. Verify that the retaining bracket
inside is in the right position.
Must fit into each other
Figure 4-51 PCCU installation
• Attend that the brakes of both wheels are both opened or closed when mounting back the brake rod.
4-37
• Verify that the plastic sheave of the brake is positioned in the correct way (see Fig. 4-50)
Grub screws
Plastic sheave
Figure 4-52 Position of plastic sheave
• Perform function test of PCCU
• Close covers.
16 024 02 0419
4.5.2.3 PCCU overview
See below the front view of the PCCU:

1 Cable X4 to/from thyristor switch (5V)
2 Board PCCU
3 HV cable from capacitor
4 Thyristor switch
5 Shielding
6 Board CTU SLK
7 I/O connector (X1) to/from main controller board
4-38
7 6 5 4 3 2
Figure 4-53 PCCU front view
See below the top view of the PCCU:

1 HV transformer
2 Voltage multiplier
3 Capacitor
4 HV plug for cable pulse current to coil
5 Board PCCU
6 Thyristor switch
7 Board CTU SLK (1L)
16 024 02 0419
1 2 3 4
7 6 5
Figure 4-54 PCCU top view
4.5.3 Exchange of HV cable

HV cable can be exchanged without draining water. As special tool a taut wire is required. If no taut wire
4-39
is available, water must be partially drained and new HV cable needs to be reinstalled together with be-
fore dismounted water tube.
DANGER !
The HV cable is part of the HV-circuit.

pletely.
4.5.3.1 Remove HV cable
To remove HV cable perform following procedure:

• Drive therapy head to OT park position.
• Switch off lithotripter, and disconnect device from mains supply.

Wait 5 minutes before starting to work on HV circuit!
• Open covers of chassis, to get access to PCCU (For details see 4.2 Housing elements).
• Open cover of therapy arm, to get access to cables inside therapy arm (For details see 4.2 Housing ele-
ments).
• Open cover of therapy head. See information in 4.5.4.1 Remove contact flange
• Loosen fixture of PCCU and shift it little bit outside to be able to disconnect HV cable from PCCU (for
details see 4.5.2 PCCU).
16 024 02 0419
• Remove all cable ties fixing the HV cable on water tube and other cables
Make notes, marks or photos to remember routing of HV cable and position of cable ties.
• Disconnect HV cable from contact flange.

For details see 4.5.4 Exchange of Contact flange
• Remove shielding spring, rubber isolator and counter nut from old HV cable, to make cable fitting
through therapy arm and tube.
• Before removing the HV cable out of therapy arm attach a taut wire to it on therapy head side.
• Remove HV cable carefully out of device, meanwhile taut wire is inserted.

Pull and move HV cable to direction of PCCU. Do not pull it through therapy head.
4.5.3.2 Install HV cable
To install a new HV cable into lithotripter therapy arm must be prepared with a taut wire as described in
4.5.3.1 Remove HV cable. If taut wire is not available water must be drained partially and water tube must
be removed out of therapy arm. HV cable and water tube need to be inserted together.
Following procedure describes reinstallation with taut wire:
• If pre-installed, remove PG-cable gland from new HV cable.
• Attach therapy head end of new HV cable carefully to already prepared taut wire.
Take care that cable is fixed well and open cable ends are protected against any damage during inser-
tion.
• Carefully insert new HV cable by pulling taut wire on therapy head side and pushing the HV cable
carefully into therapy arm.
Take care not to damage isolation and shielding of HV cable when inserting it.
• Mount counter nut, rubber isolator and shielding spring on HV cable, before inserting it into contact
4-40 flange.
• Insert HV cable into contact flange.

When inserting the HV cable into the contact flange take care not to damage the isolation of cable
because of sharp edges at drilling hole in contact flange
• Connect HV cable on contact flange. For details see 4.5.4 Exchange of Contact flange.
• Connect HV cable on PCCU.
• Install PCCU back. For details see 4.5.2 PCCU.
• Switch on lithotripter and perform function test.
• Fix HV cable with cable ties where necessary.
• Close device by installing all housings back.

• Clean housings if necessary.
• Perform final function test.
16 024 02 0419
4.5.4 Exchange of Contact flange
For exchanging contact flange water must be drained partially and coil must be removed. Refer to chapter
4.3 Water circuit, 4.4 Rubber parts and 4.5 Electrical parts for additional information on draining and refill
of water circuit, removal and installation of coupling cushion and removal and installation of coil.
DANGER !
The HV contact flange is part of the HV-circuit.

pletely.
4.5.4.1 Remove contact flange
Perform following procedure steps to dismount the HV contact flange:

• Drive therapy head to UT park position.
• Drain water partially, that coil can be removed (See above mentioned chapters).
• Remove coil (See above mentioned chapters).
• Drive therapy head to OT park position. Use override button to activate movement circuit.
• Switch off lithotripter, and disconnect device from mains supply

Wait 5 minutes before starting to work on HV circuit.
• Open lower cover of therapy head, and remove snap-in catch of inline unit. For details see 4.7.4 Ex-
change of Snap-in catch
4-41
• Remove transparent cover of HV contacts.
Figure 4-55 HV contacts with cover

• Lift out HV contacts, to have better access to disconnect cable from HV contacts.
(e.g. replace 2 grub screws by 2 longer screws and pull contact out, ...)
Be careful not to damage contacts or HV cable!
16 024 02 0419
Figure 4-56 HV contacts
• Disconnect HV cable from contacts.
• Unscrew counter nut of the PG-cable gland.

Take care not to damage the isolation of HV cable nor to twist the cable.
Figure 4-57 PG-connector
4-42 • Remove carefully (not damaging) rubber isolator (blue).
• Push with one hand and pull with the other hand HV cable out of therapy head.
• Disconnect cooling- and airbag supplies.

Mark / Label connectors before disconnecting.
Figure 4-58 Connections at contact flange
• Remove flange by opening 6 fixing screws.

Figure 4-59 Fixing screws of contact flange
16 024 02 0419
4.5.4.2 Install contact flange
Installation of new flange in reverse order of 4.5.4.1:

• Install new flange and fix it to reflector.
• Mount tubes for cooling- and airbag-function to the appropriate connectors.
• Insert HV cable into the flange. Be careful not to damage the isolation or shielding of HV cable.
• Mount PG-cable gland to the flange. Take care not to twist the HV cable.
After installation HV cable must be free of any torsion. Do not rotate the cable while fixing the PG-
cable gland.
• Connect HV cable to the contacts and insert contacts into the flange.
• Close HV contacts with transparent cover.
• Re-install snap-in catch on flange (see 4.7.4 Exchange of Snap-in catch for details)
• Install coil, coupling cushion and refill water (see above mentioned chapters for details).
• Close Therapy head.
• Bring machine in normal condition.
4.5.5 Sensors
Inside MODULITH SLK there are several inductive sensors ( ! different types), light barriers, microswitches
and potentiometers installed for feedback signals.
Additional there are pressure sensitive protection devices (PSPD). Details on their function and exchange 4-43
are available in chapter 4.2.3 Collision protectors
4.5.5.1 Inductive sensors
Adjustment distance:
If not mentioned different, all inductive sensors are adjusted with 1 mm distance between sensor and
switching cam.
Information on Trendelenburg sensors:
For controlling horizontal Trendelenburg position system requires first both safety signals TRD0_1S and
TRD0_2S and after that TRD0. Because of the angle movement of the switching cam sensor TRD0 is acti-
vated at last.
Switching distances are 1 mm for TRD0_1S, TRD0_2S and TRD15.
Inductive sensor TRD0 is adjusted to 2 mm.
Figure 4-60 Trendelenburg sensors
16 024 02 0419
Fixture of inductive sensors
Most inductive sensors are installed with a fixing block.
Fixing screws Sensor fixing

screw
Figure 4-61 Fixing block
The Trendelenburg sensors are mounted with different type of fixing clamps. Fixing clamp is mounted
with two screws. The sensor itself is inserted into fixing clamp, and fixed with an integrated clip.
Sensor can only be inserted from one side.
Figure 4-62 Fixing clamp for Trendelenburg sensors
Exchange of an inductive sensor

• Switch off lithotripter.
4-44
• Get access to sensor (remove covers, ...)
• Disconnect sensor from connector cable
• Open sensor fixing screw or fixing clip that defect sensor can be removed
• Remove sensor
• Insert new sensor (same type as old one) into fixing block
• Connect new sensor to connector cable
• Switch on lithotripter
• Move table to corresponding position for sensor adjustment.

(Use override mode to drive to mechanical limit)
• Adjust sensor with correct distance (see description in 4.5.5.1 Inductive sensors for details)
• Tighten sensor fixing screw or fixing clip
• Perform function test
• Bring lithotripter to normal operating condition (install covers, ...)
16 024 02 0419
4.5.5.2 X and Y potentiometer
Fixing for
potentiometer-
connector
Figure 4-63 Fixings for X-and Y-potentiometer
• Switch off lithotripter
• Get access to potentiometer (open patient table, ...)
• Disconnect potentiometer connector
If access is difficult, drive table to a position for easier access to working region.
If table is not moving because of error situation, use override mode, or disconnect hydraulic cylinders
to move table manually.
• Loosen fixing screws for potentiometer.

4-45
• Remove defect potentiometer.
• Prepare new potentiometer for inserting into machine.
For x-potentiometer ball jointed bearing on top needs to be removed before installation.
For Y-potentiometer ball jointed bearing on bottom must be adjusted to length of 30 mm.
30 mm
Figure 4-64 Ball bearing joint of Y-potentiometer
• Mount new potentiometer mechanically.
• Connect plug to signal cable
• Activate service menu
• Select Aktormed - calibration X or calibration Y (corresponding to exchanged potentiometer)
• Perform calibration by following instructions on screen
16 024 02 0419
• Close service menu
• Perform function test and check position information on control panel.
4.5.5.3 Z tackle-potentiometer
• Get access to tackle potentiometer on bottom of z-column (remove covers, ...)
• Disconnect potentiometer connector

If access is difficult, drive table to a position for easier access to working region.
(recommendation: table maximum high, Trendelenburg 15°)
If table is not moving because of error situation, use override mode.
• Loosen fixing point of rope fixture.

! Rope is drawn-in automatically by rotational spring.
• Loosen fixing clamps of potentiometer.

! Do not remove clamps completely.
Access is difficult because mechanic is narrow!
• Remove (slide out) defect tackle potentiometer.
• Mount (slide in) new potentiometer mechanically.
• Tighten fixing clamps.
• Connect rope at rope fixture.
• Connect signal cable

4-46
• Select Aktormed - calibration Z
• Perform function test and check position information on control panel
4.5.5.4 Pivot micro switches and potentiometer
Feedback for pivot movement is provided from board pivot control (20988). Potentiometer and micro
switches are fix mounted on this board. Board must be exchanged completely.
• Get access to board pivot control (remove covers, ...)
- Remove cover plate of hydraulic motor (see 4.7.3.7 Pivot hydraulic motor).
- Loosen lower four screws
- Remove top cover of hydraulic motor
• Make notes or photos of cable positions.
• Disconnect all cables from board
16 024 02 0419
• Open four screws holding board pivot control
• Remove board carefully from tappet of hydraulic drive
• Mount new board pivot control and fix it with four screws
• Connect sensor cables to correct connector positions
• Move patient table to a position, that complete pivot movement is possible without any collision.
• Select Aktormed - calibration Pivot
4.5.5.5 Light barriers

Light barriers sensors can be adjusted as NC or NO. As well sensitivity can be adjusted. In case of replace-
ment “copy” settings from old light barrier to new one.
• Get access to light barrier sensor (remove covers, ...)

4-47
• Disconnect sensor from connector cable
• Open two fixing screws, to remove defect sensor
• “Copy” settings from old to new light barrier (switch NO/NC, set sensitivity to max.)
• Insert new sensor (same type as old one)
• Fix light barrier with two screws
• Connect light barrier and connector cable
4.5.5.6 Signal converter of temperature sensor

Thermal resistors PT 100, which are located in therapy head and at water tank, are connected to a signal
converter. The converter is providing a current value, created out of the resistance value of the sensor.
To exchange the signal converter perform following steps:
16 024 02 0419
at therapy head at water tank
• Drive therapy head to 90° or 180° position.
(for comfortable work position)
• Remove top cover and side covers at right side
• Remove bottom cover of therapy head. of lithotripter.
• Lift water protection foil, or remove it com-
pletely.
• Disconnect PT100 temperature sensor and • Disconnect PT100 temperature sensor and
signal cables from converter. signal cables from converter.
(Make notes for correct re-connection) (Make notes for correct re-connection)
• Unscrew signal converter by loosing 2 screws. • Unscrew signal converter by loosing 2 screws.
• Exchange converter and continue in reverse • Exchange converter and continue in reverse
order for re-installation. order for re-installation.
• Check correct signal transfer (e.g. in service • Check correct signal transfer (e.g. in service
trace) trace)
• Perform function test. • Perform function test.
4.5.6 Main Board
NOTE
Before exchanging main board contact STORZ MEDICAL service department for clarification.
4-48
NOTE
When exchanging the main board of MODULITH SLK (1L) take care to move FRAM-memory to
new board.
If new main board gets started with wrong FRAM-IC, on board memory gets initialised with
wrong values and main board must be exchanged again !
Because of internal initialization routine of main board during first start up it is not possible to use
new main boards for testing purposes.
ATTENTION !
While working on an electronic board take care about ESD (electrostatic discharge) not to
damage the board or components.
WARNING !

STORZ MEDICAL.
16 024 02 0419
Exchange of board:
• If possible read out current software index of main board software, and latest counter values.
(Access via settings - configuration information, Main SW: 28183_XX)
• Get access to main board (remove covers on left side, ...).
• Disconnect all cables.

Make notes or photos to remember correct position of plugs.
• Remove board out of chassis.
• Install new main board without FRAM into device.
• Reconnect all cables.
• Switch on Lithotripter.
Because of missing FRAM different error messages will be displayed. Ignore and cancel this messages.
• Install latest software version (28183_XX).

For details see chapter 4.6.2.1 Software for main board. Index should be same or higher (preferred)
than software index from old main board.
• Restart lithotripter in normal operation mode.
• Check software version via “settings” - “configuration information”.
• Remove FRAM-IC from old board and install it on new one.

Take care about ESD (electrostatic discharge) and correct orientation of IC.
This side facing 4-49

to Microprocessor
Figure 4-65 Orientation of FRAM-IC
• Switch on lithotripter.
No error messages should be displayed.
• Check counter settings and perform some basic function tests.
• Close housing and bring system back to normal operating conditions.
• Perform comprehensive function tests.
16 024 02 0419
4.5.7 Valve plate
To remove the valve plate no water must be drained.
• Disconnect cable X237 ‘to main controller’ from the board distributor air .
• Disconnect cable X238 ‘airbag pressure sensor’ from the board distributor air.
• Disconnect cable X239 ‘airbag valve connector’ from the board distributor air.
• Remove the air hose to airbag by pushing in the grey plastic ring of the angle links.
• Unscrew the 4 screws of the valve plate and take the valve plate off.
angle link to airbag filter

filter
airbag valve
airbag valve
angle link, air
hose to airbag.
4-50
airbag pressure board distribu- compressor

sensor tor air SLK (1L)
Figure 4-66 Valve plate
• To install the valve plate proceed in reverse order.
• Verify the proper function of the airbag at different cushion height. Ensure that no air leakage is
present.
16 024 02 0419
4.6 Control panel and software
WARNING !

STORZ MEDICAL.
4.6.1 Control Panel

Control panel can be mounted on 3 different adapters:
–– Holder for standard rail
–– Holder for joint arm
–– Holder for table mounting
4-51
Figure 4-67 Control panel holder for standard rail, joint arm and table mounting
To fix the control panel to these adapters (VESA standard) push the control panel into the sliding fixture
until small locking bolt clicks. To remove control panel lift small locking bolt and slide control panel to
side.
Electrical connection depends as well from used control panel holder:

–– Control panel mounted at standard rail are connected via connectors directly at table.
–– Control panel mounted on joint arm gets connected via separate cable set at external connector
plate. (grey connector)
–– Control panel mounted on table in remote room is connected via remote cable set to external con-
nector plate. (grey connector)
–– Control panels simulated by software (StorM-Touch) are connected via SCB cables. For shockwave
release buttons and Emergency halt buttons additional cables are connected to external connector
plate (orange connectors).
16 024 02 0419
NOTE
If multiple control panels are installed every control panel needs an unique ID-number assigned.
Details for setting up CP-ID are provided in chapter 4.6.2.3 Setting up control panel ID
4.6.2 Communication controller
4.6.2.1 Installation of controller
The communication controller is an option and gets installed beside the service connectors at external
connector plate. It is fixed with two screws on chassis. Signal connection between SLK main board and
communication controller is realized by a cable from main board -X9 to controller -X360 (or -X1, label
depends on manufacturing date).
4.6.2.2 Connections via SCB
Via SCB connection remote control of lithotripter and data exchange is realised. The OR1 control com-
puter is required, and latest StorM-Touch software has to run on it.
On OR1 the control panel of lithotripter gets simulated by software. Due to the safety concept a local
emergency halt button and a shockwave release button must be connected (if not, error message stating
an emergency halt issue is displayed). Depending on number of activated touch screens the appropriate
number of emergency halt and SWRB must be installed.
These additional hardware components get connected to external connector plate (orange coded sock-
ets).
4-52
Figure 4-68 Connection box for emergency halt (24703) and SWRB (23305)
NOTE
When only one touch monitor is configured and installed, connection box for emergency halt
button must be connected to upper SWRB socket (orange coded) on external connector plate.
4.6.2.3 Connections via LAN
For data exchange of treatment parameters an ethernet connection between communication controller
(lithotripter) an a PC can be established. Because of the integrated network isolator standard ethernet
cables (CAT5 or higher) can be used.
For communication via ethernet all network parameters of communication controller need to be config-
ured. For details see chapter 4.6.3.5 Set up for communication controller.
4.6.3 Software
The MODULITH SLK has three components running on software which can be updated in the field. First is
the microprocessor on the main board, second the single board computer of the control panel, and third
the single board computer of communication controller. All components are independent systems only
communicating via a common communication protocol (SMAL).
16 024 02 0419
4.6.3.1 Software for main board
For installing new software versions on main board following tools and materials are required:
–– USB flash memory containing new software version
USB-standard-A
USB-mini-B USB selector

LED “update mode”
Bootloader
button
Figure 4-69 USB connection for software installation
To install new software on main board perform following steps:

• Prepare USB flash memory with update software. 4-53
Software can be downloaded from service platform www.smag-service.com
Individual service engineer account is required.
• Read out and note current software version (28183-XX) from main board.
(“settings” / “configuration info“)
• Switch off MODULITH SLK
• Open service flap and get access to bootloader button (S2) and USB selector (S3)
• Switch USB selector to upper position (standard-A).
• Connect prepared USB flash memory to lithotripter.
• Keep bootloader button pressed while switching on MODULITH SLK.

LED V9 (upper LED on edge of serviceboard) will indicate activated “update mode”.
Update is installed automatically. Do not interrupt this procedure until LED “update mode” is off.
• Remove USB flash memory.
• Restart MODULITH SLK.

Normal operating mode gets started.
• Read out and note new software version (28183-XX) from main board. Index should have changed.
• Perform system test.
• Close service flap.
16 024 02 0419
4.6.3.2 Software for control panel
For installing new software on control panel a USB flash drive with new software version is required. Files
and folders must have defined structure (complete ffsdisk-folder in root of USB flash drive).
Do not exchange single files - exchange always complete folders!
To install update on control panel perform following steps.
• Prepare USB flash memory with update software.
Software can be downloaded from service platform www.smag-service.com.
• Switch on MODULITH SLK.
• Read out and note current software version (28248-XX) from control panel.
• Select settings.
• Select service and enter password.
• Select button “software update”.

System is now searching for USB device.
• Insert USB flash memory into USB-connector of control panel (bottom side).
Flash memory gets recognized and files are transferred to control panel.
• Control panel will reboot after data transfer.
• Remove USB flash memory.
• Read out and note new software version (28248-XX). Index must be changed.
4-54
4.6.3.3 Setting up control panel ID
Every installed control panel needs an individual ID number for communication. To set CP-ID perform fol-
lowing steps for each connected control panel.
• Open SETTING menu.
• Enter SERVICE menu.
• Click on button “CP-ID” until desired ID-number is displayed.

Remember: Lowest CP-ID is for Master control panel. Spare part control panels are pre-configured with
CP-ID “0x10”.
• Close SERVICE menu.

• Restart lithotripter.
16 024 02 0419
4.6.3.4 Software for communication controller
On communication controller a microprocessor is working. Therefore software is necessary. The software

can be updated by following procedure:
• Prepare USB flash memory with update software.
Software can be downloaded from service platform www.smag-service.com
• Read out and note current software version (28669-XX) of communication controller.
• Remove SCB-cover from communication controller.
• Install USB flash memory with update software at USB Standard-A socket.
Update is performed automatically.
• Remove USB flash memory, after Update is finished (! no feedback, wait 2-5 minutes)
• Restart lithotripter.
• Check new software version information.

• Perform short function test via remote control.
• Close SCB cover on communication controller again.

4-55
4.6.3.5 Set up for communication controller
The communication controller can be connected to a LAN. Therefore address parameters need to be
configured.
Data can be entered in service menu: Settings - service (login) - communication controller
Values for IP-No, subnet-mask and gateway can be entered manually (DHCP=off), or get requested from
device automatically if DHCP-mode is “on”.
In case of manual data entry the decimal points can not be entered. Instead type all values with three (3)
digits: E.g. IP-No. 192.168.0.123 --enter--> 192168000123
Figure 4-70 Example of configuration data for communication controller
16 024 02 0419
4.7 Mechanical parts
4.7.1 Front wheels
The both front wheels of MODULITH SLK are not turnable. They are mounted on a permanent wheel axle.
Left wheel is fix connected with wheel axle, right wheel is mounted via a ball-bearing to the axle.
4.7.1.1 Front wheel right
Figure 4-71 Front wheel right
• Remove wheel cap with finger, plastic or wooden tool,not to scratch the painting.
• Loosen the six screws, do not remove them yet.
4-56 • Lift MODULITH SLK at front side, for example with fork lift (European size)
• Loosen the screws completely and remove them.
• Remove clamp
• Remove wheel
• For installation proceed reverse order
4.7.1.2 Front wheel left

Figure 4-72 Front wheel left
• Remove wheel cap with finger, plastic or wooden tool,not to scratch the painting.
• Loosen grub screw, do not remove it yet.
16 024 02 0419
Figure 4-73 Fixing of left front wheel with ball-bearing
• Lift MODULITH SLK at front side, for example with fork lift (European size)
• Loosen the grub screw completely and remove it.
• Remove clamp
• Remove wheel
• For installation proceed reverse order
4.7.2 Wheels and brakes
4.7.2.1 Turnable wheels 4-57
The MODULITH SLK has two turnable wheels with integrated brake mechanics. Exchanging a for example
broken wheel or a defective brake is the same work. Therefore see following description.
Brake mechanic Brake mechanic

Connecting rod
Footboard
fixing elements
with grub screws
Turnable wheel Turnable wheel
Figure 4-74 Overview turnable wheels and brakes
16 024 02 0419
4.7.2.2 Turnable wheel / brake exchange
Removal
• Remove housings (top cover, back cover, side covers) to get access to brake mechanic.
• Lift MODULITH SLK at backside to get wheels unloaded and free accessible.
(Forklift or lift truck recommended, European size)
• Open grub screws at fixing elements. (See next picture)
Figure 4-75 Grub screws
• Open brake (wheels should be able to rotate)
• Pull out connecting rod to side with water air circuit assemblies.
• Open four screws of defective wheel / brake. (See next picture)

Access from below.
4-58
Figure 4-76 Fixing screws of wheel / brake unit
• Remove complete wheel / brake unit
Installation
For installation of wheel / brake unit take care that brake mechanic of new wheel is open. Also the re-
maining wheel in MODULITH SLK should not be braked.
• Install new wheel/brake unit by fixing the four screws.
Take care that orientation of brake unit will fit with connecting rod.
• Insert connecting rod from sub assembly side into brake unit and fixing elements.
Consider correct position of lever from footboard. Should be upwards because brakes are open. (See
next picture)
16 024 02 0419
Figure 4-77 Lever from footboard in upper position during installation
• Continue pushing connecting rod into other wheel / brake unit.
• Centre connecting rod manually in relation to chassis.

Distance from end of connecting rod to chassis at left and right side should be nearly the same.
• Fix grub screws of fixing elements.
• Test correct function of brake system manually.

Correct if necessary.
• Lower MODULITH SLK back to ground.
• Perform final test of turnable wheels and brake.
• Activate brakes, for save standing, before installing housings. 4-59
4.7.2.3 Front wheels / brake exchange and adjustments

Removal and installation
The hydraulic parking brake system is a closed system, containing hydraulic elements. In case of any mal-
function the complete brake system will be exchanged. Certified engineers must not repair any of these
components.
ATTENTION !
Do not open hydraulic circuit of brake system. Do not repair any components of the hydrau-
lic brake system. Replace always complete hydraulic system.
For exchange of complete brake system perform following steps:

• Remove brake lever, by loosening 2 screws from below fixing the brake lever.
• Loosen screws of brake cylinders on each side.
• Remove complete brake system.
• Put new brake system with its components in correct position.

Take care on hydraulic hoses not to be squeezed, kinked or bent.
• Fix brake cylinders and brake lever with their screws.
• Adjust brake cylinders and brake lever.

(see following paragraphs)
16 024 02 0419
Adjustment of brake cylinders
• Make sure that the pressure point adjustment screw (see below), at brake lever, is unscrewed to the
stop.
Figure 4-78 Pressure point adjustment screw
NOTE
Due to tolerances of mechanics brake pads must be mounted with a distance of 1-2 mm to surface of
wheels. When foot plate is in brake position a sufficient pressure should be applied to the wheels.
If distance is to small (< 1 mm) pressure will be to high, and brake or brake lever can be damaged.
If distance is to large (> 2 mm) brake pads will not reach the wheel, and no brake friction is produced.
• Mount cylinders to chassis and fix them hand tight (that cylinders still can move inside their holders).
• Start with right wheel.

Take care that brake shoe is fully engaged (moved in).
• Press manually cylinder with brake pad on wheel.

4-60
• Carefully pull brake lever by hand and release it until a gap of about 1-2 mm is produced (cylinder
moves around 1-2 mm away from wheel).
• Fix the holder for first cylinder with a torque of max. 6 Nm.
• Repeat procedure above for left wheel.

Take care that brake shoe is fully engaged (moved in).
• Press manually cylinder with brake pad on wheel.
• Carefully pull brake lever by hand and release it until a gap of about 1-2 mm is produced (cylinder
moves around 1-2 mm away from wheel).
• Fix the holder for second cylinder with a torque of max. 6 Nm.
• Check correct function of brake by using foot plate.

Adjustment of brake lever

• Release brakes by lifting the footplate.
• Turn brake lever (arrow in next picture) adjustment screw clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust
neutral position of brake lever.
Distance to set: tip of lever to fixture 90 mm or centre of switching bolt to middle of lever 15 mm.
16 024 02 0419
90 mm
15 mm
or
Figure 4-79 Brake lever adjustment screw (arrow) to adjust neutral position of brake lever
Modifying the brake lever adjustment has no impact on pressure point adjustment (= compensation of
brake pad wear).
Exchange of brake pads

If brake pads are wearing out this can be compensated by using the pressure point adjustment screw.
Each complete turn clockwise will preload the hydraulic circuit, and cylinders with brake pads will move of
about 0,5 mm closer to the wheel.
In case that brake pads are worn out (less than 1 mm, see picture below), the brake pads can be ex-
changed easily.
4-61
Figure 4-80 Exchange of brake pad
• Dismount brake cylinders.
• Remove brake pads, by pulling out.
• Install new brake pads, by pressing in.
• Perform Re-adjustment of cylinders.

Unscrew pressure point adjustment screw to the stop, if it was modified before.
16 024 02 0419
4.7.3 Hydraulic unit
WARNING !
–– Work on the hydraulic unit only if power is disconnected, i. e. in a de-energized sta-

tus. Protect the hydraulic unit against reactivation.
–– Block the movement of mechanical components before removing a hydraulic cylinder
or hose.
–– Retract all cylinders. If this is not possible, support them mechanically.
–– Do not move the shaft of a hydraulic cylinder when a hydraulic hose is disconnected.
–– Wear protective goggles while performing any work on the hydraulic unit. Even with
the precaution mentioned above, a slight pressure could be left in the hydraulic unit
and oil can squirt out uncontrolled.
–– Hydraulic oil may cause skin irritations and other damages to health. Avoid skin being
in contact with for a longer period.
–– In case of damage of single components, hydraulic oil may squirt under high pres-
sure.
ATTENTION !
–– Take care of absolute clean environment when opening the hydraulic unit. Contamination might
lead to malfunction.
4-62 –– Do not kink any hydraulic hose.
–– Tighten the M8 screw joint of the hydraulic cylinder, valves and hoses with a torque of 10 Nm.
–– Tighten the M10 screw joint of the hydraulic cylinder, valves and hoses with a torque of 14 Nm.
–– For refill, use only filtered hydraulic oil of type HLPD 22.
–– Do not bring in hydraulic oil into residual water circuit.
–– The hydraulic cylinder and hoses of the Z-drive are factory-made. Do not perform any work on
them.
COMMENT
Memorize the exact laying of the hydraulic hoses before starting any work on the hydraulic unit.
4.7.3.1 Calibration of hydraulic movements
After exchange of specific cylinders or encoders the hydraulic system needs to be calibrated. Therefore
system provides calibration routines for X-, Y- and Z-axes, as well for pivot movement. To perform calibra-
tion select corresponding routine from setting menu.
During calibration routine system drives selected axes over complete mechanical range while button on
control panel keeps pressed. It drives from “any” start position via maximum and minimum extension of
cylinder back to centre position. If cycle was successful acoustic signal is given and message is displayed.
16 024 02 0419
Perform calibration in following order in case:
a) more than one axes needs to be calibrated at same time
b) any error occurred during calibration or calibration was not successful
c) no movement is possible
• Bring table in “override mode” to following position before starting calibration cycle:
- X close to middle position
- Y to front position
- Z to any position of UT and OT range treatment (regular height value about 200 mm)
- Pivot to 90°
• Perform Pivot calibration
• Perform Z calibration
• Perform Y calibration
• Perform X calibration
4.7.3.2 Hydraulic hoses
• Unscrew the screw joints of the hydraulic hose and remove them.
Please use a cloth / tissue when opening the joint to protect surrounding area against spraying oil.
• Always use new o-ring washers on the upper and lower side of the screw joint when installing a hy-
draulic hose.
• To install the hydraulic hose proceed in reverse order. Tighten the screw joints of the hydraulic hose
with its specified torque.
• Switch on the system and drive the corresponding hydraulic cylinder out and in a view times to get the
air out of the system.
4-63
• Check the hydraulic unit for any leakage and proper operation.
NOTE
For exchanging hydraulic hoses connected to a cylinder it is recommended to drive cylinder (if possi-
ble) to that position where hose is connected. Benefit is that most of the oil is pumped back into tank
and will not squirt out when opening screw joint.
4.7.3.3 Hydraulic cylinder X
NOTE
Because of its horizontal orientation X-cylinder is unloaded if it is not in move. Although take care
about a light pressure which still can be available when opening the hydraulic circuit.
• Open patient table for access to the hydraulic cylinder X.

Maybe drive cylinder to any position with easy access to work area.
• Switch off MODULITH SLK.
16 024 02 0419
Hydraulic X-potentiometer
cylinder X
Figure 4-81 Hydraulic cylinder X
• Remove the hydraulic hoses from the hydraulic cylinder as described in chapter 4.7.3.2 Hydraulic
hoses. Close the connections of the defective hydraulic cylinder with the yellow sealing screws from the
new hydraulic cylinder.
• Unscrew fork head from hydraulic cylinder.
• Carefully remove the link of X-potentiometer. Do not stretch the potentiometer to its maximum end.
• Unscrew the X-potentiometer from the adapter and remove it.
• Unscrew the adapter from the table support.
• Pull out the bolt from the adapter and remove the hydraulic cylinder.
4-64 • To install the new hydraulic cylinder proceed in reverse order. Tighten the screw joints of the hydraulic
hoses with its specified torque.
• Switch on the system and drive the hydraulic cylinder out and in a view times to get the air out of the
system.
• Perform calibration for X-axes from service menu.
4.7.3.4 Hydraulic cylinder Y
NOTE
Because of its horizontal orientation Y-cylinder is unloaded if it is not in move. Although take care
16 024 02 0419
Hydraulic cylinder Y Y-potentiometer
Figure 4-82 Hydraulic cylinder Y
• Open patient table for access to the hydraulic cylinder Y. For easier access to fixing points of potenti-
ometer drive Y cylinder until ca. 50% is extended.
• Switch off MODULITH SLK 4-65

• Remove hydraulic hoses from the hydraulic cylinder as described in chapter 4.7.3.2 Hydraulic hoses.
Close the connections of the defective hydraulic cylinder with the yellow sealing screws from the new
hydraulic cylinder.
• Unscrew fork head.
• Remove the locking bolt Y and take the hydraulic cylinder out.
• To install the new hydraulic cylinder proceed in reverse order. Tighten the screw joints of the hydraulic
• Check adjustment of Y-sensors. (see 4.5.5.1 Inductive sensors)
system.
• Perform calibration for Y-axes from service menu.
16 024 02 0419
4.7.3.5 Hydraulic cylinder Trendelenburg
NOTE
To unload Trendelenburg cylinder bring table to horizontal position. Although take care about a light
pressure which still can be available when opening the hydraulic circuit.
fixing bolt
secured with circlips
counter nut
hydraulic cylinder TREND

4-66
fixing bolt
secured with circlips
Figure 4-83 Trendelenburg cylinder
• Bring the table in horizontal position and drive the therapy head in park position.
If hydraulic movement is not possible use bypass valves to lower table and move therapy arm.
• Adjust table height to a position, where the upper and lower swing support of the hydraulic cylinder
Trendelenburg can be reached.

• To prevent descent of the table while removing the hydraulic cylinder Trendelenburg, support the table
at the lower end.
• Remove the inductive sensors TRD0, TRD0_1S and TRD0_2S to prevent damage on them. Refer to
chapter 4.5.5 Sensors for their location.
• Proceed with the hydraulic hoses from the hydraulic cylinder as described in chapter 4.7.3.2 Hydraulic
• Remove the circlip rings from the left side of the bolts of the swing support.
• Ensure that the table is proper supported and hydraulic cylinder unloaded.
16 024 02 0419
• Remove the bolts out of the swing support and take out cylinder.
• To install the new hydraulic cylinder proceed in reverse order.
• Tighten the screw joints of the hydraulic hoses with its specified torque.
• Switch on the system.
• Drive the hydraulic cylinder Trendelenburg to the mechanical lower end position.
• Check the horizontal alignment of table.

Adjust distance between upper edge of therapy head and table to 25 mm by turning the cylinder
stamp. Take care that counter nut is open and allows adjustment movement.
• If table is horizontal fix counter nut.
• Mount the inductive sensors TRD0, TRD0_1S and TRD0_2S and adjust correctly. See chapter 4.5.5.1
Inductive sensors for additional information.
• Drive the hydraulic cylinder Trendelenburg to the mechanical upper end position.
• Adjust sensor TRD15 correctly. See chapter 4.5.5.1 Inductive sensors for additional information.
• Drive the hydraulic cylinder Trendelenburg out and in a view times to get the air out of the system.
4.7.3.6 Swivel cylinder
NOTE
Because of horizontal orientation swivel-cylinder is unloaded if it is not in move. Although take care 4-67
Figure 4-84 Swivel cylinder
• Open housing for access to the hydraulic cylinder Q (swivel).

• Remove fixture clamp at fork head to disconnect cylinder.
• Dismount fork head.

It needs to be installed to new cylinder.
• Remove fixture clamp at rear connection of cylinder and remove complete cylinder.
• Proceed with the hydraulic hoses from the hydraulic cylinder as described in chapter 4.7.3.2 Hydraulic
Hold cylinders that way that hydraulic connectors facing upwards, that no oil can flow out.
16 024 02 0419
• To install the new hydraulic cylinder proceed in reverse order. Tighten the screw joints of the hydraulic
Hold cylinders that way that hydraulic connectors facing upwards, that no oil can flow out.
system.
• While driving in and out several times, adjust fork head in that position that inductive sensors for
swivel movement are well covered to detect final positions.
4.7.3.7 Pivot hydraulic motor
NOTE
To unload rotary actuator bring him to 90° position. In end position (0°, 180°) a high pressure is con-
stantly available on hoses and connectors and they can not be connected back to the pump unit.
Removal
Mechanical stop limit
Sensor electronic of therapy arm
4-68
Hydraulic motor
(hydraulic rotary actuator)
Figure 4-85 Hydraulic rotary actuator
• Remove back cover of pivot motor housing with fingers, plastic or wooden tools, without scratching
painting of housing.
• Remove lowest four screws and take away upper half of housing.
↑ ↑
↑
4 screws, to remove cover
Figure 4-86 Screws for opening rotary actuator housing
16 024 02 0419
• Open four screws from pivot sensor board and remove board carefully from tappet.
It is not necessary to disconnect all cables.
Figure 4-87 Switching cam plate with self-aligning coupling (a) and dismount order (b, c)
• Dismount self-aligning coupling by opening the backward micro scrub screws.
• Dismount switching cam plate by removing three small screws.
• Remove tappet pin plate from rotary actuator by removing two screws
CAUTION !
Do not remove screws at backside of rotary actuator before therapy arm is dis-
mounted. Heavy weight of therapy arm will damage hydraulic component.
4-69
• Support therapy arm in current position before opening fixing screws.
It is recommended to have a second person for assistance
• Remove eight fixing screws of therapy arm.
Figure 4-88 Fixing of therapy arm at rotary actuator
• Put complete therapy arm carefully to side or additional table (close to device).
Range is limited by cable conduit. Secure therapy arm against falling down.
• Open eight screws at back side of rotary actuator, and take out actuator carefully.
• Proceed with the hydraulic hoses from the rotary actuator as described in chapter 4.7.3.2 Hydraulic
hoses. Close the connections of the defective actuator with the yellow sealing screws from the new
actuator.
16 024 02 0419
Installation
• To install new actuator proceed in reverse order
NOTE
For installation it is recommended to bring therapy arm in 0° position and install tappet pin plate with
fixing screws in horizontal orientation (parallel to therapy arm). Two of the three inner screw threads
must be in upper position (facing same direction as therapy head / coupling cushion).
↑ ↑ →
Figure 4-89 Horizontal orientation (a), vertical notch (b) and tappet pin (c)
• While mounting the switching cam plate take care that notch (mark) on switching cam plate is aligned
vertical (facing same direction as therapy head / coupling cushion).
• Mount self-aligning coupling with tappet pin in parallel to notch on switching cam plate
• Continue with installing pivot sensor board
• Drive the hydraulic rotary actuator up and down a few times to get the air out of the system.
4-70
• Perform calibration for pivot-movement from service menu.
4.7.3.8 Hydraulic pump
Exchange of hydraulic pump(s) will always be done by changing complete pump and tank unit. See single
steps below:
Sandwich valve block
Pump 1 Valve block fixing screws Oil tank Pump 2

Figure 4-90 Hydraulic pumps, tank and “lower” valves
16 024 02 0419
• Loosen two fixing screws of sandwich valve block and take valve block aside.
• Proceed with the hydraulic hoses from the hydraulic pump unit as described in chapter 4.7.3.2 Hy-
draulic hoses. Close the connections of the defective hydraulic pump with the yellow sealing screws
from the new hydraulic pump.
• Unscrew the hydraulic pump unit from the bracket.
• To install the new hydraulic pump unit proceed in reverse order. Tighten the screw joints of the hy-
draulic hoses with its specified torque.
• Replace the yellow sealing screw of the new oil reservoir with the back venting screw of the old oil
reservoir.
Black
venting screw
Yellow
sealing screw
Figure 4-91 Screws of the oil reservoir
• Switch on the system and drive all hydraulic cylinders out and in a view times to get the air out of the
system.
4-71
4.7.3.9 Bypass valves
Figure 4-92 Bypass valves for Trendelenburg and swivel movement

• Remove housing to get access to bypass valves.
• Lower Trendelenburg to 0° position (table horizontal)
• Bring swivel mechanic to middle position (no load on cylinder and valve)
• Disconnect hydraulic hoses. Refer to chapter 4.7.3.2 Hydraulic hoses for details.
• Exchange valve block
• To install new bypass valves proceed in reverse order.
16 024 02 0419
4.7.3.10 Upper hydraulic distributor
ATTENTION !
Do not open the retaining screws of the upper hydraulic distributor. They connect whole
distributor assembly and keep it together.
• Open table to get access to upper hydraulic distributor
Sandwich valve block
Figure 4-93 “Upper” hydraulic valve block
4-72 • Remove hydraulic valve block.
• Unplug the electrical connections from the hydraulic valves.

Mark connector and assigned valve before.
• Proceed with the hydraulic hoses from the hydraulic distributor as described in chapter 4.7.3.2 Hydrau-
lic hoses.
• To install the new hydraulic distributor proceed in reverse order. Tighten the screw joints of the hy-
draulic hoses with its specified torque.
• Mount the hydraulic valve block back into its original position.
• Turn the throttle screws clockwise to the end position. Then open each of the throttle screws counter
clockwise 2.5 turns.
system.
• Perform calibration for X- and Y-axes
4.7.3.11 Lower hydraulic distributor
16 024 02 0419
• Remove top cover to get access to hydraulic unit
Figure 4-94 “Lower” hydraulic valve block (here electrically disconnected)
• Depending on valve to be exchanged 3 fixing screws on left or right side have to be removed.
Figure 4-95 Fixing screws (3) of left and right sandwich valves.
4-73
• Unplug the electrical connections from the hydraulic valves.
Mark connector and assigned valve before.
Figure 4-96 Valves disconnected

• Proceed with the hydraulic hoses from the hydraulic distributor as described in chapter 4.7.3.2 Hydrau-
lic hoses.
To install the new hydraulic distributor / valve proceed in reverse order.

• Mount the hydraulic valve block back into its original position.
• Install hydraulic hoses.

Tighten the screw joints of the hydraulic hoses with its specified torque.
• Plug in electrical connectors to appropriate valve.
16 024 02 0419
• Turn the throttle screws clockwise to the end position.
Then open each of the throttle screws counter clockwise 2.5 turns.
Figure 4-97 Throttle screws (2 per valve) for oil flow adjustment
system.
• Perform calibration for Q-, Z-, P- or T-movement, depending which one was exchanged.
• Close housings and bring system to normal condition.
4.7.3.12 Magnet coil from hydraulic valve
Before starting an exchange of a coil, check its resistance (66 Ω ± 10%).

• Unscrew the hydraulic valve block.
4-74
Coil Screwdriver
Figure 4-98 Coil of hydraulic valve
• Squeeze two screwdriver from both sides into the gap between the valve and the coil. Hammer onto
the screwdriver one by one using a plastic hammer until the coil comes off.
• Remove the metal housing and exchange the coil.
16 024 02 0419
Housing Coil Valve
Figure 4-99 Dismantled hydraulic valve
• Verify the proper direction of the coil before mounting the metal housing. Press the metal housing
with the new coil back onto the hydraulic valve.
• Use a piece of plastic tube with a diameter between 14 to 20 millimetres and gently hammer the metal
housing with a plastic hammer back into its previous position The gap between the metal housing and
the hydraulic valve should be approximately 1 millimetre.
4-75
Plastic hammer Plastic tube Coil Valve
Figure 4-100 Mounting of coil
• Connect the cable to the coil and check the hydraulic unit for proper operation.
4.7.3.13 Hydraulic oil
ATTENTION !
For refill, use only filtered hydraulic oil of type HLPD 22.
The oil level of the oil reservoir never should drop below ‘min’ at any time. This would indicate an oil leak-
age at the hydraulic unit. As well it should not be over ‘max’ at any time.
Oil level gets measured with an oil dipstick.
16 024 02 0419
←max.
↑
← min.
Figure 4-101 Oil dipstick
• Take care MODULITH SLK is set up correctly and horizontally aligned.
• Measure oil level with all cylinders in “max in” position (cylinders not extended).
Oil level should be below “max” mark.
• Measure oil level with all cylinders in max out position. (cylinders extended)
Oil level should be over “min” mark.
• Refill hydraulic oil if necessary.
• Check hydraulic unit for any leakage and proper operation.
4.7.4 Exchange of Snap-in catch

4-76
The snap-in catch is a spring mechanic holding the inline unit in therapy head. It is simple to exchange, if
necessary. It must be removed to get access to HV contacts or HV contact flange.
4.7.4.1 Removal of snap-in catch
• Drive therapy head to OT park position.
• Switch off lithotripter, and disconnect device from mains supply.
• Remove cross hair aiming device.
• Open lower cover of therapy head.

Therefore remove 6 screws fixing the lower cover at therapy head.
Figure 4-102 Lower cover of therapy head
16 024 02 0419
• Remove lower cover by sliding it in direction of locking handle .
• Dismount protection cover for micro switch (if present).
micro switch
grounding
Figure 4-103 Micro switch and grounding
• Remove micro switch, by opening 2 screws.

Mark position, for re-installation
• Remove 4 screws of spring bow, to get access to fixing screws underneath.

! Spring bow is under tension, spring is pressing mechanic to centre of therapy head.
4-77
Figure 4-104 Fixing of spring bow
• Disconnect grounding wire.
• Open 4 screws fixing the unit.
Figure 4-105 Removal of snap-in catch
• Mark position for re-installation. Correct position of locking handle must be known later again.
• Remove Snap-in catch from inline unit.

Lift it carefully upwards, by turning it little bit seesaw.
16 024 02 0419
4.7.4.2 Installation of snap-in catch
To install snap-in catch proceed in reverse order than 4.7.4.1:
• Mount snap-in catch on contact flange.
Handle is showing in direction of inline unit power connector at therapy head.
(Use marked position from before.)
• Fix snap-in catch with 4 screws.
• Fix spring bow to spring bolt, with 4 screws.
• Install micro switch to correct position, fix it with 2 screws.

Position is correct when switch gets activated by pressing down the white plastic ring.
• Mount protection cover of micro switch with 4 screws (if present).
• Connect grounding cable.
• Mount lower cover of therapy head, and fix it with 6 screws.
4.7.5 Stopper for swivel unit slide

In case stopper of swivel unit slide is damaged it needs to be exchanged.
To exchange stopper perform following steps:
• Remove old / damaged stopper. It is fixed with one screw.
• Prepare new stopper (#25099) by screwing in the adjustment screw until 3 - 5 mm are left.
• Mount new stopper into arm of swivel unit. Fix it with one screw.
• Extend adjustment screw, by fingers, until it hits the solid material of swivel arm.
4-78
• Fix adjustment screw with counter nut.
3
1 - Slide
2 - Stopper
3 - Adjustment screw (M5x30)
with counter nut
Figure 4-106 Slide and stopper of swivel unit
16 024 02 0419
4.8 Inline unit
The SLK inline unit is a small optional device to provide ultrasound diagnostic during lithotripsy. Inside
inline unit you find some mechanics and a controller board. Reasons to open inline unit can be:
–– Exchange ultrasound transducer
–– Exchange fuses or controller board
–– Exchange or repair mechanical components
Therefore the following paragraphs will provide you required information.
WARNING !
Inline unit uses strong springs (linear and rotational springs) for movement.
Keep always in mind that they are loaded with high tension. Sudden unload (e.g.
removing other parts) can cause serious or fatal injury. It also can damage hard-
ware of inline unit.
ATTENTION !
When exchanging ultrasound transducer take care to insert transducer carefully and do not
kink or squeeze cable of transducer. Cable is very sensitive and will break.
4.8.1 Top cover of in-line unit

4-79
Removal
To get access to the inner components of in-line unit perform following steps:
• Open and remove four outer screws and three inner screws of top cover
• Remove top cover carefully without hitting surface of ultrasound transducer
Installation
• To install top cover back perform steps in reverse order
4.8.2 Calibration of in-line unit

After exchange of electronic or mechanic components of in-line unit a new calibration is required. To
perform calibration select corresponding routine from service menu.
During calibration routine system drives in-line unit over complete mechanical range while button on con-
trol panel keeps pressed. It drives from “any” start position via maximum and minimum position back to
centre position. If cycle was successful an acoustic signal is given and message is displayed.
• Do not insert in-line unit into therapy head
• Connect in-line unit to lithotripter
• Perform in-line calibration
16 024 02 0419
4.8.3 Work on controller board
Removal
To get access to controller board perform following steps
• Disconnect inline unit from electrical connectors.
• Disconnect transducer from ultrasound device.
• Remove inline unit from therapy head.
• Open cover of inline unit.
• Disconnect all plugs from controller board.

It is recommended to make notes or take photo to reconnect everything correctly.
• Open two fixing screws on back side of controller board.
• Remove board by pulling it vertically out of plastic holder.

Take care about electrostatic discharge.
COMMENT
Only fuse F2 can be exchanged. In all other situations of malfunction replace controller board.
Do not repair on board level.
Installation
4-80 • To install controller board back perform reverse order.
• Perform calibration of in-line unit movement from service menu.
4.8.4 Potentiometer exchange

In case that feedback potentiometer fails it can be exchanged. To change potentiometer perform follow-
ing steps:
• Disconnect transducer from ultrasound device.
• Remove inline unit from therapy head.

• Open top cover of inline unit.
• Disconnect potentiometer from socket X7.
• Dismount potentiometer from holder and from spring disk coupling.
• Push transducer in guide pipe manually to lowest position.

Do not touch surface of transducer while pushing down.
• Adjust new potentiometer to a value about 40 Ω before mounting it.

(to be checked between pin 2 and 3 on X7, lower values can damage poti during calibration)
• Fix potentiometer in holder and to spring disk coupling.
16 024 02 0419
• Connect plug of potentiometer to socket X7.
• Connect inline unit outside the therapy head to lithotripter.
• Perform calibration of inline unit movement from service menu, and watch correct movement.
• Reinstall top cover to close inline unit.
4.8.5 Transducer exchange
ATTENTION !
When exchanging ultrasound transducer take care to insert transducer carefully and do not
kink or squeeze cable of transducer. Cable is very sensitive and will break.
Removal
To exchange transducer perform following steps:
• Place inline unit outside the therapy head and connect it to lithotripter.
• Switch on MODULITH SLK.
• Drive inline unit to maximum (highest) position.

4-81
• Disconnect transducer from ultrasound device, if necessary.
For following steps place inline unit on a stabile table.

• Remove small cable cover on bottom side.
Press with finger against closed part of cable cover and remove it.
• Remove top cover of inline unit (4 + 3 screws)
• Block rotational spring and loosen toothbelt
Version without notch Version with notch

• Adjust rotational spring manually until tooth- • Rotate rotational spring by finger until notch
belth fixture is on top. is matching screw thread.
• Hold spring and toothbelt with fingers. • Block movement by inserting a M2-screw or
allen key.
• Remove toothbelt fixture by opening single • Remove toothbelt fixture by opening single
screw. Hold transducer with second hand that screw. Take care that transducer holder is not
transducer holder is not jumping out. jumping out.
• Insert M2-screw (e.g. from top cover, or M2 x
30) to the thread.
• Release rotational spring (with screw inserted)

carefully until screw will block movement.
16 024 02 0419
COMMENT
If rotational spring is completely unloaded it must be preloaded again. To preload the spring
rotate wheel (tooth pulley) three turns clockwise.
• Remove tooth belt from pulleys
• Open three screws of guide pipe and remove it.

Take care on ultrasound cable.
• Remove three screws from bottom side of guide pipe.
WARNING !
When removing last screw spring is releasing force rapidly.

Take care that spring is not jumping out. Keep head and face away.
• Dismount transducer
• Remove transducer holder out of guide pipe.
• Unwind spring from ultrasound cable.
• Remove transducer completely out of inline unit.
• Dismount protection tube from transducer cable.

(Needs to be mounted to spare part again.)
4-82 Installation
Requirements:
–– Inline unit is dismounted.
–– Rotational spring is blocked in “mounting position”
To install a new transducer proceed as follows:

• Insert new ultrasound transducer through inline unit base.
If you forget this step complete procedure must be repeated !
• Mount protection tube to transducer cable.

Position is directly behind transducer.
• Wind linear spring to ultrasound cable.

Take care not to kink or squeeze cable, it is sensitive.
• Push transducer through guide pipe.
• Install transducer to transducer holder.

Take care about correct position / orientation of plastic guides.
• Insert transducer (with holder) into guide pipe.
• Close guide pipe with bottom flange.

Compress spring very carefully not to squeeze transducer cable !
• Fix flange with three screws.
• Install guide pipe to inline unit base and fix it with three screws.
Take care about ultrasound cable and tooth belt.
16 024 02 0419
• Install tooth belt on pulleys and fix it on rotational spring.
• Unblock rotational spring.

Perform reverse order than removal.
• Install small cable cover on bottom side.
• Push down transducer manually without touching surface of transducer.
• Install top cover.
• Install inline unit to therapy head.
• Perform calibration of inline unit movement from service menu.
4.9 Footswitch
To get access to controller board inside of footswitch bottom cover must be removed.
• Switch off lithotripter and disconnect footswitch
• Remove 10 screws, to open bottom cover.
• Take care about cables inside
4-83
Figure 4-107 Bottom screws of footswitch
Figure 4-108 Cables inside footswitch
16 024 02 0419
4-84
16 024 02 0419
Service Manual
MODULITH® SLK (1L)

(30k)
5
Chapter 5
Diagnostics
Table of contents
5.1 Error Messages 5-4

5.1.1 SLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.1.2 StorM-Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5.2 Safety Control 5-12

5.2.1 Movement safety circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5.2.2 PSPD safety circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5.2.3 Hydraulic safety circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5.2.4 Shockwave safety circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5.3 Service LEDs 5-19

5.3.1 LEDs on Main board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
5.3.2 LEDs on communication controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
5.3.3 LEDs on in-line unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
5.3.4 LEDs at PCCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
5.3.5 PCCU-LED time pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
5.4 LEDs on PSPD safety relay 5-25
5.5 Service Trace 5-25

5-2
5.6 Sensors 5-36
5.6.1 Translation list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
5.6.2 Inductive sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
5.6.3 Light barriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
5.6.4 Micro switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
5.6.5 PSPD Safety relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
5.6.6 Sensor positions (movement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
5.6.7 Sensor positions (PSPD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
5.6.8 Sensor positions (temperature) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
5.6.9 Sensor positions (pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
5.7 System information 5-44
5.8 Measurements 5-45

5.8.1 HV values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
5.8.2 PSPD & collision protection elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
5.8.3 Temperature sensors / converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
5.8.4 Pressure sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Diagnostics
5.8.5 Disintegration test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47

5.8.5.1 Side conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
5.8.5.2 Test procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
16 025 02 0419
5.9 Troubleshooting 5-50
5.9.1 Movement & Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
5.9.1.1 All movements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
5.9.1.2 X-axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
5.9.1.3 Y-axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
5.9.1.4 Z-axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
5.9.1.5 Trendelenburg motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
5.9.1.6 Therapy head motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
5.9.1.7 Inline unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
5.9.2 HV & PCCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
5.9.3 Water Air Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
5.9.4 Control Panel(s) & electronic & software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
5.10 Fuse list 5-53
5-3
Diagnostics
16 025 02 0419
5.1 Error Messages
5.1.1 SLK
The error messages generated by Modulith SLK are classified in three different types:
–– Warnings
–– Errors
–– Fatal errors
Warnings
A warning reply is used to inform the user about circumstances that may or will lead to a situation in
which an error or a fatal error is generated. Further use of the machine is possible.
Errors
An error reply is used whenever a defect or failure of a part of the device is detected or this defect or
failure does not allow completing a user command. This implies that major parts of the machine are still
working properly and the machine can be used without danger for patient or operator for certain uses.
These error replies are divided into soft errors and hard errors.
Fatal errors
A fatal error is used in the rare case whenever a defect or failure leads to a situation in which the device
can not be used at all because of technical or safety reasons.
All error messages have to be acknowledged by pressing the ‘Bell-off’ key. The message window on the
control panel shows an explanation, the consequences and advice as well as a 4-digit error code regarding
5-4 the problem.
The error codes are numbered according to the message generating module:
Error code number range Related module or process

1xxx Movement process
2xxx Water Air process
- 21xx Pressure coupling cushion
- 22xx Degassing
- 23xx Temperature
- 24xx Airbag
3xxx Shockwave process
- 31xx PCCU unit
- 32xx Shock wave release button
- 34xx Coil Counter
5xxx Movement safety process
7xxx Main process
8xxx Control panel
Tabelle 5-1 Error codes ranges and related modules
Diagnostics
On the following pages the error messages are listed:
16 025 02 0419
Error code Description Action
1xxx
1001 Internal Error Movement Process Read out HEX-status-value and interpret
HEX-number (= CAN-BUS-status)
An error has occurred in the movement (Use table 5-4)
process. Press ‚Bell-off‘ button to clear error.
If problem persists please call for service!.
1003 Memory Error Movement Controller None. Maybe restart system.
1004 When the emergency halt button is activat- Unlock emergency halt button.
ed this error message will be displayed.
1103 PSPD at table activated. Remove force to continue. Use hydraulic
A mechanical force compressed the sensor. safety valve for therapy arm or override but-
ton if necessary.
1104 PSPD on therapy arm activated. Remove force to continue. Use hydraulic
A mechanical force compressed the sensor. safety valve for therapy arm or override but-
ton if necessary.
1203 An external force has disengaged the sliding Check position of therapy head and sliding
clutch of the therapy head swivel. clutch of the swivel drive unit. Check signals
All movements and shock wave emission is and adjustments of the inductive sensors at
disabled the swivel drive unit
1601 Axis of in-line unit not calibrated Perform calibration of in-line unit
2xxx
2101 There is not sufficient water in the system, Check for water leakage and refill water.
probably because of a water system leakage. Check pressure sensor in therapy head.
Degassing, cushion and shock wave emis-
sion is disabled.
2103 The pressure in the coupling cushion in the Check water level. Check pressure sensor in
5-5
decoupled state is much too high. There is a the therapy head.
certain danger for damage of the coupling
cushion. Therapy head swivelling is disabled.
2104 The pressure in the coupling cushion in the Check power supply of the circulation
coupled state is too high. Probably the circu- pump. Check pressure sensor.
lation pump is running full-throttle. It is not
possible to switch off just the power from
the circulation pump or the water system
alone. Consequently, the complete device is
disabled.
2108 Cushion pressure sensor delivers voltages Check water level. Check pressure sensor.
out of range (0.5 - 4.5 VDC) and is prob- Change pressure sensor.
ably defective, shortened or disconnected.
Activating the coupling cushion will not be
possible. Consequently, airbags and shock
wave release are not possible.
2203 Cycle time of degassing mode is too short. Check degassing system for air leakage
This event is triggered when the water is not
properly degassed.
During fill-water mode and evacuation-
mode the error will be suppressed.
Diagnostics
2204 Degassing disabled Check degassing system for proper func-

tion, e.g. power supply.
Check function of sensor ‘dga_max’.
16 025 02 0419
2301 Water temperature Tmax1 (38°C) in the Check room temperature and air circula-
water tank reached tion. Check cooling system for proper func-
tion. Check temperature sensor at water
The water temperature is going to be too
tank.
high. This might lead to error 2303..
2303 Over temperature Tmax2 (40°C) in the Check room temperature and air circula-
water tank reached. The cushion and shock tion. Check cooling system for proper func-
wave emission are disabled until 37°C is tion. Check temperature sensor at water
reached. tank.
2304 Over temperature Tmax3 (41°C) in the Check room temperature and air circula-
therapy head reached. Shock wave emis- tion. Check cooling system for proper
sion and cushion are disabled until 37°C is function. Check water heating system and
reached. Heating is disabled till reset button temperature sensor at therapy head. Reset
at external connection plate is activated. heating system at external connection plate.
2305 Temperature sensor out of range (0.5 – Check that water temperature is within the
49.5°C) and is probably defective, shortened range. Check temperature sensor.
or disconnected. Cushion functions are
disabled. Consequently, airbags and shock
wave release are also disabled.
2306 Water temperature too low Check temperature sensor or wait until
“working temperature” is reached
Water temperature is below 15°C. System
has to idle for warm up. Coupling cushion is
disabled.
2307 Water temperature much too low Check temperature sensor or wait until
“working temperature” is reached
System temperature is below 3°C. Water
system might be frozen. All pumps are
5-6 disabled. System might be damaged. Please
call service!
2401 Airbag burst Check airbags for leakage. Check water sys-
tem for air bubbles. Check proper function
Air is in the coupling cushion. Cushion and
of valve plate.
shock wave emission is disabled.
2402 Airbag will function limited. Continue treat- Check airbag for leakage. Check pressure
ment. sensor (see 5.8.3 Water Air Circuit).
3xxx
3001 Treatment maximum exceeded max counter: 32768 shots/treatment
When the shock wave counter exceeds the
recommended maximum number of shock
wave per patient and treatment this warn-
ing is displayed.
The treatment may be continued uninter-
rupted on the user’s own risk
3003 Battery empty Replace buffer battery on main board.
3103 HVsetValue is not equal to HVsetFeedback. Check position of JP1 on main board. It
Shock wave emission is disabled. must be in position 1-2 (normal operation).
3105 Internal error of CTU occurred. Device will Check board CTU inside PCCU.
try to reset PCCU when error is acknowl-
Diagnostics
edged.
If condition persists, error will re-occur.
3107 High Voltage generation error Check cooling and ventilation of PCCU.
Check temperature sensor of HV-transform-
Temperature of HV-transformer is too high.
er.
Cushion and shock wave emission disabled.
16 025 02 0419
3109 HV checkback value incorrect. Detected Check proper communication between
deviation between HV set and HV feedback mainboard and control panel. If commu-
values. Message is caused by display-energy- nication does not work restart system and
task. report failure to STORZ MEDICAL.
Check deviation of set, actual and reference
voltage going to/from PCCU.
3131 HV-Test of PCCU not successful. Check PCCU for proper function.
Cushion and shock wave emission disabled
3201 Shock wave release button blocked or Check if shock wave release button is
defective. During start-up the shock wave pressed or shorted.
release button is tested. If the test shows
“pressed” status, the release button is
blocked or defective (short-circuit).
3401 The coil counter has exceeded the warning Prepare for coil replacement.
limit, but is still under life time limit.
3402 The coil counter has exceeded the lifetime Replace coil immediately.
limit, but is still under the maximum limit.
Solemn warning to user, danger of damage,
continued treatment on user’s own risk.
3403 The coil counter has exceeded the maximum Replace coil immediately.
limit. Shock wave emission is disabled for
safety reasons until coil is replaced.
3411 No coil counter card detected. Check presence and proper mounting of
coil counter card.
Shock wave emission is disabled.
3415 Coil counter card incompatible. Check proper mounting of coil counter 5-7
card.
Check if FRAM on main board is available
and working correctly.
3416 Coil counter card: Serial number required. Check correct setting of the serial number
at service menu.
5xxx
5101 Safety Circuit of x-ray activated by the Check bumper switch of x-ray.
bumper switch. Signal ‘XRayEmergHalt’ has
been activated.
All motions are disabled.
7xxx
7001 Internal error main controller.
with error sub-codes:
903: internal FRAM empty exchange main board
904: undefined FRAM request main board must be checked at STORZ
905: Total shotcounter inconsistent main board must be checked at STORZ
906: no external FRAM present mount missing FRAM
7002 Internal software error on Main Board per- Check Mainboard.
sisting. The Main Board will disable itself.
Diagnostics
System is completely disabled.
16 025 02 0419
7003 Data integrity of the nonvolatile memory Check 3 VDC at the lithium battery G3 on
(NVM) of the Mainboard (EEPROM and/or Mainboard.
battery-buffered RAM) can not be guaran-
teed any more. This may be caused by a
defective EEPROM or low battery voltage.
All user settings which where stored in the
memory are replaced by factory defaults and
NVM is not used.
7101 The parameters of the table position Reboot system. Check the position encoder
transmitted to the LithoPos are out of the X, Y and Z.
expected range. LithoPos is disabled. Perform LithoPos calibration
8xxx
8001 Internal software error in CP. No further consequences.
8002 The control panel is not able to register suc- Reboot system. Check connection between
cessfully at the main process. control panel and SLK.
8003 The control panel is not able to register suc- Check primary and secondary control panel
cessfully at the main process because their for proper settings in the service menu.
ID is already in use.
This will be the case when two control pan-
els are connected to the machine and both
are configured as e.g. “primary”.
8004 Communication between main process and Reboot system. Check connection between
control panel has broken down. control panel and SLK.
8005 Communication mismatch between main Reboot system. Check connection between
process and control panel. control panel and SLK.
5-8 8006 Unknown command between main process Reboot system.
and control panel.
8007 During start-up of the control panel soft- Reboot system.
ware a graphic file could not be loaded and
is probably missing.
The control panel may be unlocked by the
user and used as usual.
CAUTION: In this case important graphical
messages to the user may not be displayed.
8008 During start-up of the control panel soft- Reboot system
ware a string could not be loaded and is
probably missing.
CAUTION: In this case some messages to the
user may not be displayed.
8009 The control panel received an unknown Write down error codes given on display (as
warning or error code. well HEX-value on bottom line) . Contact
service to find out cause for this error and
decide how to continue.
Diagnostics
CAUTION: In this case an important warn-

ing or error messages may not be displayed.
For safety’s sake, a normal user should treat
this error as the most severe error which can
happen and abandon treatment.
16 025 02 0419
8010 Not all functions available. Perform latest software update for each
installed controll panel.
Control panel is not on latest version.
Tabelle 5-2 Error and Warning messages of MODULITH SLK
All messages mentioned above are displayed on control panel with yellow background. To remove mes-
sages “bell-symbol” needs to be pressed.
Some messages include additional error information for service engineers. In lower right corner,
in brackets, there are HEX-codes displayed. Meaning of these codes are listed in following table.
additional status
information
Fig. 5-1 Error message with additional status information
Following table provides additional information for errors caused by movement unit.
Status code Description

0x0101 Z < ZTHOT and not SUP 5-9
0x0102 Z < ZTHOT and not PTH90
0x0103 Z < ZTHOT and not YL
0x0104 Z < ZTHUT and not Trend 0°
0x0105 Z < ZTHUT and not Pivot range OT
0x0106 Z Range OT, Swivel not Park, Pivot not OT
0x0107 Z Range UT, Swivel not Park, Pivot not UT
0x0108 Z Range OT+UT, Swivel not Park, Pivot not OT/UT
0x0109 Trend not 0, Pivot not 90°
0x010A Swivel unit coupling disengaged
0x010B Table swing not treatment position
0x010C Anti tip beam not mounted
0x010D Collision signal from X-ray
0x0110 No hydraulic unit2 if treatment OT

0x0111 No YR if Z < ZTHOT
0x0112 No Z if swiv not park and pivot not UT
0x0113 No Z if Z at limit
Diagnostics
0x0114 No Z if Z at endposition
0x0118 No Trend if swivel not park
0x0119 No Trend if pivot not 90°
0x011A No Trend if Z not in this range
0x0121 No Pivot if swiv not park
16 025 02 0419
0x0122 No Pivot if Trend not 0°
0x0123 No Pivot if Z not in this range
0x0126 No Swivel if Trend not 0°
0x0127 No Swivel if not in range
0x0128 No Swivel if Inline is inserted and not down
0x0129 No Swivel if cushion not ready to swivel
0x01A1 Break because repetition timeout

0x01A2 Break because timeout runtime
0x01A3 Break because break from driver
0x01A4 Break because timeout cushion decouple
0x01A5 Break because timeout inline move down
0x01A6 Break because break from conditions
0x01F1 Unknown parameter
0x0201 Inconsistent pivoting switch

0x0202 Inconsistent switches
5-10
0x0211 Defect switch YL_1S
0x0212 Defect switch YL_2S
0x0221 Defect switch ZTHOT_1S
0x0222 Defect switch ZTHOT_2S
0x0223 Defect switch ZTHUT_1S
0x0224 Defect switch ZTHUT_2S
0x0231 Defect switch TRD0_1S
0x0232 Defect switch TRD0_2S
0x0241 Defect switch SUP_1S
0x0242 Defect switch SUP_2S
0x0243 Defect switch SUTS
0x0251 Defect switch PTHOUS
0x0252 Defect switch PTHOHUS
0x0253 Defect switch PTHROHS
0x0254 Defect switch PTHROS
0x0301 Emergency-button pressed

Diagnostics
0x0302 Override button is pressed at start

0x0303 No movement during shockwave
0x0401 Over current detection

0x0801 Axis is not calibrated
16 025 02 0419
0x0901 EEPROM/FRAM error
0x0902 EEPROM/FRAM is not initialized
0x0903 Internal FRAM is not initialized
0x0904 Unknown FRAM initialization
0x0905 ext TSC > int TSC
0x0906 No external FRAM present
Tabelle 5-3 Detailed error information for 1001, 1002 and 1601 messages
5.1.2 StorM-Link
The following error messages are generated by StorM-Link module, together with ultrasound device, and
get displayed on ultrasound monitor. The format of the error message display might vary slightly depend-
ent on the ultrasound system. Storm-Link error messages are always displayed with their error code.
The error messages generated by StorM-Link are listed below.
Code Text Explanation

Measures
4 - 01 FATAL ERROR The value for the transducer position is not valid (value is below the abso-
BROKEN WIRE lute minimum “UMIN1”)
• Check connection between therapy head, board StorM-Link ILCU and
ultrasound system.
• Check cabling towards the position potentiometer inside the therapy

head
5-11
4 - 02 FATAL ERROR The value for the transducer position is below the specified range (value is
REMAIN RANGE between the absolute minimum “UMIN1” and the minimum “UMIN2”).
• Check position potentiometer inside the therapy head electrically.
• Check position potentiometer inside the therapy head mechanically.

4 - 04 FATAL ERROR The value for the transducer position is above the specified range (value is
EXCEED RANGE higher than “UMAX1”).
• Check position potentiometer inside the therapy head electrically.
• Check position potentiometer inside the therapy head mechanically.

4 - 08 FATAL ERROR The cyclic redundancy check (CRC) failed. System hang-up, system must
CRC CHECK be rebooted after the reason for the error has been found.
• Reboot the system
• Exchange the pickaback board that contains the firmware. The board is
plugged on top of the board StorM-Link.
4 - 16 FATAL ERROR The watchdog timer check failed. System hang-up, system must be re-
WDT CHECK booted after the reason for the error has been found.
• Reboot the system
• Exchange board StorM-Link

Diagnostics
Tabelle 5-4 StorM-Link messages
Confirmation of StorM-Link error messages

StorM-Link error messages are not confirmed by the user. The error condition is constantly monitored
by the system. This means that the error message will disappear and the machine will be back to normal
operation as soon as the error condition disappears..
16 025 02 0419
5.2 Safety Control
The Modulith SLK provides several safety circuits to control following safety relevant function:
–– Movements
–– Hydraulic system
–– Shockwave generation and High voltage
The safety concept is designed to prevent damages from patient, user and other people involved in treat-
ment and service. Safety signals are evaluated only by hardware logic. In case of a safety event the signals
are also indicated on the control panel. This is only for information.
5.2.1 Movement safety circuit

Axis Swivel not in Parkpos Swivel in Parkpos
Z
(Therapiepos)
340mm
Treatment UT Treatment Trend Pivot 0 - 90°
(Under Table) Trend 0
Position not (Y all)
possible Pivot UT Pivot 90° Pivot 90°
Trend 0 (Trend all) (Trend all)
(Y all) (Y all) (Y all)
245mm AREA_MAX_ZTHOT
Treatment OT (Pivot all)
(over table) Trend 0
(Y all)
Pivot OT Pivot 90°
Trend 0 (Trend all)
5-12
(Y all) (Y all)
175mm AREA_MIN_ZTHUT
Hydr 2 blocked
Pivot 90 - 180°
Position not Position not Trend 0
possible possible (Y all)
120mm AREA_MIN_ZTHOT
Pivot 90°
Trend 0
Position not Position not
Y max. front (left)
possible possible
"easy entry"
0mm
Fig. 5-2 Overview movement ranges
Below possible movement situation are listed and requirements are described.
Situation Requirements
Drive table to patient entry position –– Table max. Y-axis to front
Historie
28.09.2010 Erste Version –– Therapy head in park position and pivot in
04.10.2010 120-160mm: Pivot 90 - 180°; 240-340mm: Pivot 0 - 90°
900°;
Diagnostics
07.11.2011 Beschluss nach Sitzung vom 31.10.2011:

–– No trendelenburg
Z-Achse Positionen SW auf 175 (alt 160) und 245 (alt 240) geändert
Using table for endourological treatment including –– Therapy head in park position and pivot in
Trendelenburg 90°
–– Z-axis must be 175 mm or higher
16 025 02 0419
Situation Requirements
For SW treatment in under table position (UT) –– No Trendelenburg
–– Z-axis must be 175 mm or higher
–– Therapy head must be in park position with
pivot in 90° or in park position with pivot in
UT
For SW treatment in over table position (OT) –– No Trendelenburg
–– Z-axis must be between 120 mm and 245
mm high
–– Therapy head must be in park position with
pivot in 90° or in park position with pivot in
OT
Rotate Therapy head around z-axis / = Swivel –– Table high must be in range for UT or OT
treatment
–– Coupling cushion must be deflated
–– Airbag must be deflated
–– Ultrasound inline unit must be in lowest
position
Endschalterdefinitionen
Limit switch definitions
Endschalterdefinitionen
Pivot Rotation
Range Horizontal to Over Table
Range Under Table to Horizontal
Pivot Rotation
Under Table Horizontal Range Horizontal to Over Table Over Table
0° Range Under Table to Horizontal 90° 180°
PTHROS Under Table Horizontal Over Table PTHROS

0° 90° 180° 5-13
PTHROHS PTHROHS
PTHROS PTHROS
PTHOHUS PTHOHUS
PTHROHS PTHROHS
PTHOUS PTHOUS
PTHOHUS PTHOHUS
Fig. 5-3UnitSwitch conditions for pivot movement

Swivel
PTHOUS PTHOUS
Range X-Ray Control
Swivel Unit Park Pos. Therapy Pos.

0 Range X-Ray Control 0xFFF
SUTS Park Pos. Therapy Pos. SUTS

0 0xFFF
SUT (AM) SUT (AM)
SUTS SUTS
SUP_1S SUP_1S
SUT (AM) SUT (AM)
SUP_2S SUP_2S
SUP_1S SUP_1S
SUP (AM) SUP (AM)
SUP_2S SUP_2S
SUXRP SUXRP
SUP (AM) SUP (AM)
SUXRP SUXRP
Switches SLK2 - V2.xls / Schalterbereiche AS 16.02.2012 Seite 1 von 4
Fig. 5-4 Switch conditions for swivel movements

Trendelenburg Tilt
0° 15°
Diagnostics
TRD0_1S TRD0_1S
TRD0_2S TRD0_2S
TRD0 (AM) TRD0 (AM)
TRD15 (AM) TRD15 (AM)
Fig. 5-5 Switch conditions for Trendelenburg tilt

X-Axis
Footwards Headwards
16 025 02 04190 160
Y-Axis
0° 15°
Trendelenburg Tilt
TRD0_1S TRD0_1S
0° 15°
TRD0_2S TRD0_2S
TRD0_1S TRD0_1S
TRD0 (AM) TRD0 (AM)
TRD0_2S TRD0_2S
TRD0 (AM) TRD0 (AM)
X-Axis
Footwards Headwards
X-Axis 0 160
Footwards Headwards
0 160
Y-Axis
Fig. 5-6 Switch conditions for x axes
Right Left
Y-Axis 0 140
YL_1S YL_1S
Right Left
0 140
YL_2S YL_2S
YL_1S YL_1S
YL_2S YL_2S
Fig. 5-7 Switch conditions for y axes

Z-Axis
Treatment Over Table
Treatment Under Table
Switches SLK2 - V2.xls / Schalterbereiche AS 16.02.2012
Treatment Uro Seite 2 von 4
Down Up
0 120 175 245 340

ZTHOT_1S ~112 ~250 ZTHOT_1S
ZTHOT_2S ZTHOT_2S
ZTHUT_1S ~170 ZTHUT_1S
ZTHUT_2S ZTHUT_2S
Fig. 5-8Schalter
Weitere Switch conditions for z axes
SUC1_1S 1 = angekuppelt, 0 = abgekuppelt
SUC1_2S 2 = angekuppelt, 0 = abgekuppelt
5.2.2
TSTS PSPD safety circuit
1 = Liege in Behandlungsposition, 0 = Liege geschwenkt für Transport
5-14 ATBMS 1 = Anti Tip Beam ausgeschwenkt
ILREC 1 = US-Inline eingesteckt

Ch 1 Ch 1 Ch 1
table TH arm x-ray
Ch 2 Ch 2 Ch 2
Fig. 5-9 2-Channel-Safety of PSPD-relays
For Switches
channel 1 all
SLK2 - V2.xls PSPD-relays are combined in a row,
/ Schalterbereiche while channel 2 provides individual signal forSeite
AS 16.02.2012 specific
3 von 4
PSPD (For details see chapter 6.17.23 Cabling for PSPD relays).
5.2.3 Hydraulic safety circuit

The hydraulic movements are splitted in two circuits with separate control signals and separate power
supplies.
Circuit 1: table movement X, table movement Y, swivel of therapy head
Circuit 2: table movement Z, Trendelenburg, pivot of therapy head
To avoid injuries to a patient by squeezing him between table and therapy head circuit 2 is disabled in
case therapy head is in OT position but not in park position.
Diagnostics
An overload clutch for swivel and pivot movement avoids injuries caused by therapy head or therapy arm.
Opening of the clutch activates safety circuit and hydraulic gets disabled.
The pivot movements are controlled in range from horizontal (90°) to OT position (180°) and from hori-
zontal (90°) to UT position (0°).
In case of a power loss there are two safety valves available to lower Trendelenburg position and to swivel
therapy head manually
16 025 02 0419
5 / 11
Version: 1.7
Project: CLP
027000_01_B39_01_02
5.2.4 Shockwave safety circuit
STORZ MEDICAL AG
Copyright ISO 16016
Beschreibung Gesamt / Total Description
5-15
TEM_ALM_008_01_02
Document in ALM
Diagnostics
Version:
Form:
File:
Fig. 5-10 Safety circuit shockwave 1/4
The Modulith SLK shockwave safety circuit is divided into a two channel model. One hardware controlled
safety logic (PLD) is controlling the trigger- and the other one the charge circuit of the PCCU.
16 025 02 0419
Diagnostics
5-16
PLD1 Emergency Halt
Safety Logic
(see page 4)
EmHalt
Input Signals Output Signals
0 >=1
Unlock Selected Unlock Pressed
5 0 & 0 MovementBlocked
Unlock1 ...5 Multiplexer 0 0
(to Movement Safety Logic PLD1)
5:1 0
Handswitch Select 0..2

(from uP)
0 &
SWRelease 0
5 SelectedSWRelease 0
SWRelease1S ...5S Multiplexer Pressed
5:1
SUTS Trigger Trigger

0 & 0 =1
Enable Active 0 &
0 0 0 & 0 0
0 Trigger
0 0 0 0
CushionOverTemp 0
0 (to PCCU)
Fig. 5-11 Safety circuit shockwave 2/4, for PCCU trigger circuit
Movement Active
(from uP)
IntTrig
(from uP)
Trigger Source
ECGTrig Pulse Former
Multiplexer
Monoflop 1ms
1 3:1
/2
Trigger Mode Select 0...1
(from uP)
EOC
(from PCCU)
TITLE DOC No.

03 Hardware Safety Logic Shockwave PLD1
02
SLK2 20000-01-B39
FULL FILENAME PAGE
01 AEA 09/003 28.04.2011 si/fr
© Storz Medical AG / 2010 P:\Projekte\SLK_2010\Blockdiagramme\Shockwave Safety Circuit
Änderung Datum SLK2.cdd
16 025 02 0419
PLD2
Emergency Halt
Safety Logic
16 025 02 0419
(see page 4)
EmHalt
Output Signals
Input Signals
0 >=1
Unlock Selected Unlock Pressed
5 0 & 0 MovementBlocked
Unlock1 ...5 Multiplexer 0 0
(to Movement Safety Logic PLD2)
5:1 0
Handswitch Select 0..2

(from uP)
SWReleaseS SelectedSWRelease
5
SWRelease1 ...5 Multiplexer Pressed
5:1
0 & ChargeOn
0 0 =1 Active 0 &
0 0 0 0 ChargeOn
0 0 (to PCCU)
SUTS ChargeOn
Fig. 5-12 Safety circuit shockwave 3/4, for PCCU charge circuit
0 & Enable
0
0 0 &
CTUOK 0
0 0
(from PCCU) 0
CushionOverTemp
Movement Active
(from uP)
ChargeRequest
(from uP)
TITLE DOC No.

03 Hardware Safety Logic Shockwave PLD2
02 SLK2 20000-01-B39
FULL FILENAME PAGE
01 AEA 09/003 28.04.2011 si/fr
Diagnostics
5-17
Diagnostics
5-18
not used Control Panel 1 Control Panel 2 Control Panel 3 Control Panel 4 Control Panel 5
(for future Xray
expansions)
EmHaltResS EmHaltFromXrayS EmHalt1S CpConnect1 EmHalt2S CpConnect2 EmHalt3S CpConnect3 EmHalt4S CpConnect4 EmHalt5S CpConnect5
Fig. 5-13 Safety circuit shockwave 4/4

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
&
&
&
&
&
&
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 >=1 0 >=1 0 >=1 0 >=1 0 >=1 0 >=1

0 & 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 EmHalt
0
Read Logic
to uP
Safety PLD1 and PLD2
Board Main SLK2
TITLE DOC No.

03 Emergency Halt Hardware Safety Logic
02
SLK2 20000-01-B39
FULL FILENAME PAGE
01 AEA 09/003 28.04.2011 si/fr
16 025 02 0419
5.3 Service LEDs
5.3.1 LEDs on Main board
On main board there are some LED mounted to indicate availability of different voltages, system alive and
temperature safety from water air circuit.
Name Colour Description

V1 green 24 V for aktormed motion box
V2 green 24 V for control panel
V3 green 24 V for external panel
V4 green 24 V for positioning sensors
V5 green 24 V for water air circuit
V6 green 24 V for inline unit
V7 green 24 V for main board
V12 green 24 V for accessories
V14 green 12 V on main board
V20 green 3,3 V on main board
V21 green 5 V on main board
V52 red Overtemperature safety
V68 green 24 V for integrated ultrasound module (option for CLP series)
V70 green/red green: System alive (blinking, ~1 Hz)
green: Internal error detected (fast blinking, ~6 Hz)
red: for development purposes
V71 yellow Communication status 5-19
V72 blue Communication status, update
Tabelle 5-5 LED on main board
5.3.2 LEDs on communication controller

V1 yellow STA1 = Status 1
status/feedback of operating system of uP, for R&D purposes
V2 yellow STA2 = Status 2
status/feedback of operating system of uP, for R&D purposes
V3 yellow Ethernet Activity
Indicating data traffic
V4 green PONRES (power on reset)
Indicates power supply of communication controller,
it is off during reset via S1 button
Tabelle 5-6 LED on communication controller
Diagnostics
16 025 02 0419
5.3.3 LEDs on in-line unit

V5 green power supply of controller board for in-line-unit, 3.3 V
V7 Duo-LED red:
red / green indicating lowest position of transducer, micro switch activated
green: blinking
indicating connection and activity on CAN-bus
Tabelle 5-7 LED on board in-line unit
5.3.4 LEDs at PCCU

With opening the access cover at the back side of the PCCU, several service LEDs on the board CTU are
visible (see below. A description of this LEDs can be found in following table.
5-20
Fig. 5-14 Service access cover at PCCU

Diagnostics
16 025 02 0419
Identification Description
V4 Fault-SW (red) Error-feedback from Thyristor switch (HV switch)
V6 Out set (red) Overtemperature signal from HV transformer
V19 CTU ok (green) Signal on Microprocessor on CTU board
ON when PCCU is powered up and no error or mismatch
detected.
V20 SD (green) = shut down Signal on Microprocessor on CTU board
ON only for the short time when the capacitor has to be
recharged after it reached EOC but discharged under a
certain level while waiting for the trigger signal.
V21 EOC (green) = end of charge Signal on Microprocessor on CTU board
ON as long as the capacitor is fully charged to the selected
energy level and ready to release a shock wave.
V22 Trigger (green) Signal on Microprocessor on CTU board
ON only for the short time when the trigger signal is send
to thyristor switch to release a shock wave.
V27 CTU Temp (red) Overtemperature on CTU
V30 ChargeON (green) Signal on Interface
ON when capacitor is charging.
V31 CTU ok (green) Signal on Interface
ON when PCCU is powered up and no error or mismatch
detected.
V34 Trigger (green) Signal on Interface
ON only for the short time when the trigger signal is send
to thyristor switch to release a shock wave.
V35 FaultSW (red) Signal on Interface
Error-feedback from Thyristor switch (HV switch) 5-21
V38 HVTest (green) Signal on Interface
ON until HV Test is performed successfully.
V40 HV Max (red) Signal on Interface
ON when HV actual value exceeds HV specified value
(tolerance +1 kV)
V42 Crtl-CTU ON (green) Signal on Interface
On when CTU-ON-signal is provided by main board
(might be on, even if 48V supply voltage is missing)
V43 EOC (green) Signal on Interface
ON as long as the capacitor is fully charged to the selected
energy level and ready to release a shock wave.
V44 24 V ok Feedback on 24 V power supply to CTU board
(might be on, even if 48V supply voltage is missing)
V46 DivIncon (red) = Divider inconsist- Signal on Interface
ent ON when HV dividers are not connected or broken.
V48 TrigCount (green) Signal on Interface
ON while shock wave is released.
V49 12 V ok (green) Feedback on 12 V power supply to CTU board
V58 5 V ok (green) Feedback on 5 V power supply to CTU board
V71 Vcc HV Bridge (green) Feedback power supply HV Fullbridge
Diagnostics
V74 5 V ok (green) Feedback on 5 V power supply for trigger control

Tabelle 5-8 Specification of the LEDs of the board CTU:
16 025 02 0419
V74
V4
V6
V49
V71
V20
V19
V22
V21
V58
V40, V35, V31, V27, V48, V46, V43
5-22
V30, V34, V38, V42
V44
Fig. 5-15 LED on board CTU

Diagnostics
16 025 02 0419
5.3.5
stand by
PCCU-LED time pattern
For information:
The trigger signals and
HV-test signal are very
HV-Test
fast and badly visible.
(LED is lightning less

than 2 ms). 5-23
stand by
switch on
Charge on (V30)
TrigCount (V48)
Diagnostics
HV-Test (V38)
CTU ok (V19)
CTU ok (V31)
Trigger (V22)
Trigger (V34)
Vcc Br. (V71)
CTUon (V42)
12 V (V49)
24 V (V44)
EOC (V21)
EOC (V43)
SD (V20)
Fig. 5-16 LED time pattern during switch on and HV-test
16 025 02 0419
Diagnostics
5-24
stand by shooting stand by switch off
12 V (V49)
Vcc Br. (V71)
SD (V20) blink blink blink blink

CTU ok (V19)
Trigger (V22)
EOC (V21)
EOC (V43)
TrigCount (V48)
CTU ok (V31)
CTUon (V42)
HV-Test (V38)
Trigger (V34)
Charge on (V30)
24 V (V44)
Fig. 5-17 LED time pattern during shock wave release and switch off
than 2 ms).
For information:
(LED is lightning less

fast and badly visible.
HV-test signal are very
The trigger signals and
16 025 02 0419
5.4 LEDs on PSPD safety relay
5.5 Service Trace

A lot of status information of system can be read out via service trace function. The function can be acti-
vated by any user from setting menu. It can be selected as “service trace ON” or “service trace OFF“.
How to interpret display information is shown below:
1 2 3 4 5 6
5-25
9 8 7
1 Skip to previous CAN-ID
2 Skip to next CAN-ID
3 CAN-status-ID (here x225)
4 8 Bytes of status message, in [brackets] selected bytes (here byte 0 and 1)
5 Skip to previous byte
6 Skip to next byte
7 Single bits [7654 3210] of selected byte, value here 0x03
8 Byte-number (here 1)
9 CAN-ID-name (here S TH, = swivel therapy head)
Fig. 5-18 Service trace details
Following table lists the available CAN-status-ID and an overview to the most important bytes. To interpret
single bits consider following schema:
Diagnostics
Byte = 8 bit (e.g. value 0x03)

Nibble 1 = 4 bit (value “0”) Nibble 0 (Value “3”)
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
Fig. 5-19 Example for interpretation of service trace values (nibble = half byte)
16 025 02 0419
Name CAN-ID Description Used Bit Value = 1
CP 0x210 Status active control panel ---SSW req.---
COT 0x211 Status active control unit type 1 ---SSW req.---
(footswitch)
CP0 0x212 Status control panel 0 0.7 This CP is active
CP1 0x213 Status control panel 1
1.7 Em.Halt active
CP2 0x214 Status control panel 2 1.3 No Em.Halt available
COM CTRL 0x218 Communication controller
COT1 0x21A Status connected control unit 1 0.x control-unit number:
(footswitch) 0x20 = footswitch
2.x status of footswitch LSB
3.x status of footswitch MSB

0x0001: wait of first read
0x0002: release all buttons
0x0003: no action active
0x0011: action x foot
0x0012: action x head
0x0021: action y right
0x0022: action y left
0x0031: action z down
0x0032: action z up
0x0041: action trend down
0x0042: action trend up
5-26
6.5 Button “Y left” pressed
6.4 Button “Y right” pressed
6.1 Button “X headw.” pressed
6.0 Button “X footw.” pressed
7.5 Button “Trend up” pressed

7.4 Button “Trend dn” pressed
7.1 Button “Z up” pressed
7.0 Button “Z down” pressed
COT2 0x21B Status connected control unit 2
H CP 0x21F Status administration control panels ---SSW req.---
MOV 0x220 Status movements general 0.7 Hydraulic is active
0.6 Normal operation mode act.
0.5 Service mode act.
0.4 Software update in progress
1.7 Any movement active

Diagnostics
16 025 02 0419
MOVX 0x221 Status axe X 0.5 Driving (+) direction
0.4 Driving (-) direction
0.1 max. Pos. (+) reached
0.0 min. Pos. (-) reached
1.5 Driving head wards

1.4 Driving foot wards
1.1 head wards not possible
1.0 foot wards not possible
2.1 end pos. head w. reached

2.0 end pos. foot w. reached
MOVY 0x222 Status axe Y 0.5 Driving (+) direction
1.5 Driving left

1.4 Driving right
1.1 left not possible
1.0 right not possible
2.1 end pos. left reached

2.0 end pos. right reached
MOVZ 0x223 Status axe Z 0.5 Driving (+) direction
5-27
1.5 Driving up
1.4 Driving down
1.1 up not possible
1.0 down not possible
2.7 Trend. available

2.6 Range for UT
2.5 Range for OT
2.1 end pos. up reached
2.0 end pos. down reached
MOVT 0x224 Status axe Trendelenburg 0.5 Driving (+) direction
1.5 Tilt up
1.4 Tilt down
1.1 Tilt up not possible
1.0 Tilt down not possible
2.1 end pos. up reached

Diagnostics
2.0 end pos. down reached
16 025 02 0419
S TH 0x225 Status swivel 0.5 Driving (+) direction
1.5 Driving to therapy pos.

1.4 Driving to park pos.
1.1 to thera.pos. not possible
1.0 to parkpos. not possible
2.7 range x-ray possible

2.1 end pos. therapy reached
2.0 end pos. park reached
P TH 0x226 Status pivot 0.5 Driving (+) direction
1.5 Driving to OT
1.4 Driving to UT
1.1 to OT not possible
1.0 to UT not possible
2.7 range 90° to OT

2.6 range 90° to UT
2.2 pos. “horiz.” reached (90°)
2.1 end pos. OT reached (180°)
2.0 end pos. UT reached (0°)
5-28 INL 0x22C Status Inlineunit 0.7 Inline unit mounted
0.6 Inline unit active/connected
0.1 vertical movem. avail.
0.0 rotational movem. avail.
1.7 vertical up
1.6 vertical down
1.5 vertical up not avail.
1.4 vertical down not avail.
1.3 rotation clockwise
1.2 rotation counterclockwise
1.1 clockwise not avail.
1.0 counterclockw. not avail.
2.2 swivel not possible

2.1 max. up reached
2.0 min. down reached
3.1 max. clockw. reached

3.0 max. c.clockw. reached
Diagnostics
16 025 02 0419
SW 0x230 Status shockwave unit 0.7 Unlock button pressed
0.6 SWRB pressed
0.5 CCCard detected
0.4 CTU ok
0.3 HV-Test active
0.2 Wait for energy level
0.1 Trigger active
0.0 PCCU on
1.4 HV interlock error

1.3 HV switch error
1.2 HV max exceeded
1.1 HV divider inconsistent
1.0 CTU temp. error
2.0 EOC
6.5 External trigger occured

6.4-3 Triggermode
00 = no trigger
01 = internal trigger
10 = ECG trigger
6.2-0 Triggerfrequency
000 = 0.5 Hz
001 = 1.0 Hz
010 = 1.5 Hz
011 = 2.0 Hz
100 = 2.5 Hz
101 = 3.0 Hz 5-29
110 = 3.5 Hz
111 = 4.0 Hz
SW REL 0x231 Status counter 1 (rel.) 0.x Shotcounter MSB
(! HEX values) 1.x Shotcounter LSB
2.x SMLI MSB
3.x SMLI LSB
SHOTCO 0x232 Status counter 2 (total) 0-2.x Total Op.Hours TOH
(! HEX values) 3-6.x Total Shot Counter TSC
ENELEV 0x233 Shockwave energy level 0.7 Toggle bit (100 ms)
0.0 valid energy level
WATAIR 0x238 Status water air unit 0.7 cooling, fan on
0.6 heating, fan off
0.4 water temp. too low
0.2 overtemp. Tmax3, TH
0.1 overtemp Tmax2, tank
0.0 high temp. Tmax1, tank
3.1 water radiator error

3.0 water radiator
4.x Temp. sensor tank, LSB

Diagnostics
5.x Temp. sensor tank, MSB

6.x Temp. sensor TH, LSB
7.x Temp. sensor TH, MSB
16 025 02 0419
COUPLI 0x239 Status coupling 0.7 water overfilled UT
0.6 water overfilled OT
0.5 water too low UT
0.4 water too low OT
0.3 cushion coupled
0.2 cushion ready to swivel
0.1 cushion automatic mode
0.0 cushion manual mode
1.4 cushion is idle

1.3 cushion is decoupling
1.2 cushion is coupled
1.1 cushion is coupling
1.0 cushion is decoupled
2.x Coupling level
3.7 Circulation pump break

3.6 Circulation pump cw
3.5 Circulation pump ccw
3.3 driver Circ. pump (feedback)
3.2 driver Circ. pump
3.1 By pass valve error
3.0 By pass valve
4.x Circ. pump speed, LSB

5.x Circ. pump speed, MSB
6.x cushion pressure, LSB
5-30 7.x cushion pressure, MSB
AIRBAG 0x23A Status airbag 0.7 Airbag
0.5 Airbag burst
0.4 Airbag leakage
0.2 Airbag central
0.1 Auto mode Airbag
0.0 Manual mode Airbag
1.4 airbag is idle

1.3 airbag is deflating
1.2 airbag is inflated
1.1 airbag is inflating
1.0 airbag is deflated
3.7 airbag valve B error

3.6 airbag valve B
3.5 airbag valve A error
3.4 airbag valve A
3.3 airbag valve select error
3.2 airbag valve select
3.1 airbag compressor error
3.0 airbag compressor
Diagnostics
6.x airbag pressure sens., LSB

7.x airbag pressure sens., MSB
16 025 02 0419
DEGASS 0x23B Status degassing 0.4 degass. time too short
0.2 Evacuation mode
0.1 Cooling mode
0.0 Degassing mode
1.7 Idle
1.4 Timeout
1.2 Filling
1.1 active
1.0 enabled
3.7 Degass. pump cw

3.6 Degass. pump ccw
3.5 Degass. air valve error
3.4 Degass. air valve
3.3 Degass. valve error
3.2 Degass. valve
3.1 sensor dga_max
3.0 sensor dga_min
4.x Degass. cycle time, LSB

5.x Degass. cycle time, MSB
6.x Degass. pump speed, LSB
7.x Degass. pump speed, MSB
TIME 0x23F Date and time 0.x seconds
1.x minutes
2.x hours
4.x day
5.x month 5-31
6.x year, LSB
7.x year, MSB
Diagnostics
16 025 02 0419
ENABLE 0x240 Status enable/disable functions 0.7 Em.Halt from X-Ray
0.6 Em.Halt reserve
0.5 Em.Halt from SMT 2
0.4 Em.Halt from SMT 1
0.3 Em.Halt from CP 3
1.7 collision x-ray I.I.

1.6 collision table (PSPD)
1.5 collision therapy arm (PSPD)
1.4 swivel not coupled
1.1 anti tip beam missing
1.0 table swing not fixed
2.5 Comm. error energy disp.

2.4 CP is showing error
2.1 Energy display not active
2.0 CP is not active
3.5 any unlock button pressed

3.4 any SWRB pressed
3.1 unlock button of active CP
3.0 SWRB of active CP pressed
4.4 any movement active

4.0 hydraulic not in norm. op.
5-32
5.7 inline inserted
5.6 pivot UT
5.5 pivot OT
5.4 swivel in thera. pos.
5.0 inline ins., swivel not ready
6.7 safety cushion overtemp.

6.4 cushion, ready for SW
6.2 cooling mode active
6.0 cushion, swivel not ready
7.7 “Override“ pressed

7.4 Em.Halt port 5
7.3 Em.Halt port 4
7.2 Em.Halt port 3
7.1 Em.Halt port 2
7.0 Em.Halt port 1
Diagnostics
16 025 02 0419
DIGIO1 0x242 Digital signals 1 (I/O for PLD)
SUP_2S 0.7 safety swivel park ch2
SUP_1S 0.6 safety swivel park ch1
SUTS 0.4 safety swivel therapy pos.
SUXRP 0.2 swivel x-ray control
SUC1_2S 0.1 safety swivel coupling ch2
SUC1_1S 0.0 safety swivel coupling ch1
ZTHOT_2S 1.7 safety Z, range OT ch2
ZTHOT_1S 1.6 safety Z, range OT ch1
ZTHUT_2S 1.5 safety Z, range UT ch2
ZTHUT_1S 1.4 safety Z, range UT ch1
TRD0_2S 1.1 Safety T, tilt 0° ch2
TRD0_1S 1.0 Safety T, tilt 0° ch1
YL_2S 2.7 safety Y, left pos. ch2
YL_1S 2.6 safety Y, left pos. ch1
PTHROS 2.3 pivot, range OT
PTHROHS 2.2 pivot, range OT + horiz.
PTHOHUS 2.1 pivot, OT + UT + horiz.
PTHOUS 2.0 pivot, OT + UT
ILRECS 3.7 safety inline recognize
ILREC 3.6 inline recognize
BUMPERALL 3.5 safety relay loop for all, ch.2
BUMPERARM 3.4 safety relay for TH-arm. ch.1
ATBMS 3.3 safety antiTipB.not mounted
BUMPERTABLE 3.2 safety relay for table, ch.1
TSTS 3.1 safety table swing not fixed
BUMPERCARC 3.0 safety relay for xray I.I., ch.1
OVERRIDE2 4.7 table swing not fixed
OVERRIDE1 4.6. Override ch1 5-33
CP_CONNECT5 4.4 Override ch2
CP_CONNECT4 4.3 CP connected 5 = SMT 2
CP_CONNECT3 4.2 CP connected 4 = SMT 1
CP_CONNECT2 4.1 CP connected 3
CP_CONNECT1 4.0 CP connected 2
output 5.7 CP connected 1
output 5.3 Em.Halt to x-ray
output 5.2 power hydr. pump 2
output 5.1 power hydr. pump 1
output 5.0 enable hydr. circuit 2
6.7 enable hydr. circuit 1
6.6 Em.Halt from x-ray
6.5 collision from x-ray
6.4 Em.Halt reserve
6.3 Em.Halt 5 (SMT)
6.2 Em.Halt 4 (SMT)
6.1 any Em.Halt
6.0 MOVEMENTBLOCKED2
7.7 MOVEMENTBLOCKED1
7.6 safety Em.Halt from x-ray
7.5 safety Em.Halt to x-ray
7.4 safety Em.Halt reserve
Diagnostics
7.3 Em.Halt 5 activated

Em.Halt 1 activated
16 025 02 0419
0.4 SW release 5
0.3 SW release 4
0.2 SW release 3
0.1 SW release 2
0.0 SW release 1
1.4 safety SW release 5
2.4 Unlocking 5
2.3 Unlocking 4
2.2 Unlocking 3
2.1 Unlocking 2
2.0 Unlocking 1
3.7 power circ. pump
3.6 Bypass valve
3.5 Airbag valve select
3.4 Airbag valve B
3.3 Airbag valve A
3.2 Airbag compressor
3.1 switch dega_max
3.0 switch dega_min
4.6 SW_XRAYAP
4.5 SW_CUSHIONOVERTEMP
4.4 ST_WATERRADIATOR
4.3 ST_POWBAD
5-34 4.2 ST_DEGAVALVE
4.1 ST_DEGAAIRVALVE
4.0 ST_COOLINGPUMP
5.7 ST_CTUOK
5.6 ST_EOC
5.5 ST_INTERLOCKHV
5.4 ST_FAULTSWITCH
5.3 ST_HVMAX
5.2 ST_DIVINCON
5.1 ST_CTUTEMP
5.0 ST_CARDDETECT
output 6.7 TRIGGERMODESELECT_11
output 6.6 TRIGGERMODESELECT_10
output 6.5 HANDSWITCHELECT_22
output 7.7 CHARGEREQUEST
output 7.6 PCCUON
output 7.5 CTUON
output 7.4 HVTEST
Diagnostics
output 7.3 TRIGGER

output 7.2 CHARGEON
output 7.1 MOVEMENTACTIVE2
output 7.0 MOVEMENTACTIVE1
16 025 02 0419
output 0.7 CIRCPUMPLEFT
output 0.6 CIRCPUMPRIGHT
output 0.5 DEGAAIRVALVE
output 0.4 DEGAVALVE
output 0.3 CIRCPUMPPWR
output 0.2 DEGAPUMPLEFT
output 0.1 DEGAPUMPRIGHT
output 0.0 MCLR
output 1.7 BYPASSVALVE

output 1.6 AIRBAGCOMPRESSOR
output 1.5 AIRBAGVALVESELECT
output 1.4 AIRBAGVALVEB
output 1.3 AIRBAGVALVEA
output 1.2 WATERHEATING
output 1.1 COOLINGPUMP
output 1.0 WATERRADIATOR
output 2.1 ENABLECOILCOUNT
AMED 0x248 Status hydraulic unit (Aktormed) 0.x axe
1.7 power
1.6 enable
1.5 res.
1.4 service mode active
1.3 mech. limit (-)
1.2 mech. limit (+)
1.1 direction (-)
1.0 direction (+) 5-35
2.x current pos., LSB

3.x current pos., MSB
INL CRTL 0x249 Status inline unit controller 0.7 inline vert. movement
0.6 vertical calibration
0.3 calibration in progress
0.1 vert. move. up
0.0 vert. move. down
1.7 inline rot. movement

1.6 rot. calibration
1.3 calibration in progress
1.1 rotation cw
1.0 rotation ccw
2.2 swivel is possible

2.1 inline highest pos.
2.0 inline lowest pos.
3.1 inline max. cw
3.0 inline max. ccw
4.x vert. movement, LSB

Diagnostics
5.x vert. movement, MSB

6.x rot. movement, LSB
7.x rot. movement, MSB
DBGINF 0x24F Status Debug information (for different functions, depend-
developers) ing on software version
16 025 02 0419
5.6 Sensors
5.6.1 Translation list
Due to the universal design of the lithotripter main board, the following table lists signal names on main-
board in relation to device specific signal names.
Mainboard X7 e-box connectors X200 ‘coming in’ via terminal ...

on e-box connectors
sw_npn01pld1_s sw_SUP_1S_s X207
sw_npn02pld1_s sw_ZTHOT_1S_s X209
sw_npn03pld2_s sw_ZTHOT_2S_s X210
sw_npn04pld1_s sw_SUC1_1S_s X201
sw_npn05pld1_s sw_YL_1S_s X203
sw_npn06pld2_s sw_YL_2S_s X204
sw_npn07pld1_s sw_TRD0_1S_s X213
sw_npn08pld2_s sw_TRD0_2S_s X214
sw_pnp09pld1 sw_EmHaltRes X220 (any PSPD or collision)
sw_npn10pld2_s sw_SUC1_2S_s X202
sw_npn11pld12_s sw_TSTS_s X215
sw_npn13pld12_s sw_ATBMS_s X217
sw_npn14pld2_s sw_SUP_2S_s X208
sw_npn15pld1_s sw_ZTHUT_1S_s X205
sw_npn16pld2 sw_SUXRP X211
5-36 sw_npn20pld2_s sw_ZTHUT_2S_s X206
sw_pnp21pld12_s sw_EmHaltResS_s X221
sw_npn22pld12_s sw_SUTS_s X212
sw_npn24pld12_s sw_ILRECS_s X238/6
sw_npn25pld12_s sw_PTHOHUS_s X224/4
sw_npn26pld12_s sw_PTHROS_s X224/2
sw_npn27pld12_s sw_PTHOUS_s X224/6
sw_npn28pld1_s sw_PTHROHS_s X224/3
sw_npn35pld2 sw_RES2 X245 (PSPD swivel arm)
sw_npn36pld12_s sw_RES3S_s X246
sw_npn37pld2 sw_ATBM X218 (PSPD table collision)
sw_npn38pld2 sw_TST X216 (c-arc collision)
sw_npn39pld12_s sw_RES1S_s X244
Mainboard X3 e-box connectors X235

swp_hsw25pld2 n.c.
st_npn28cont_f st_CircPumpRPM_f X241/1
swp_hsw45pld2 n.c.
Diagnostics
Mainboard X11 e-box connectors X142

swp_hsw43pld1 n.c.
swp_hsw47pld2 n.c.
Tabelle 5-9 Signal names mainboard <-> e-box-connectors
16 025 02 0419
5.6.2 Inductive sensors
In the MODULITH SLK are inductive sensor switches with integrated LED assembled. To verify the correct
function of the sensors, refer to the following table. If sensor is active LED is lightning, simultaneously
specified bit of CAN-bus-status is high (=1).
Sensor Description CAN-ID Connector

Name Type Byte.Bit
SUC1_1S NO-2 Swivel unit coupling1 0x242 X201
0.0
SUC1_2S NO-2 Swivel unit coupling2 0x242 X202
0.1
SUT NO-2 Swivel unit therapy position 0x225 X602
0.1
SUP NO-2 Swivel unit park position 0x242 X601
0.0
SUXRP NC-2 Swivel unit x-ray control position 0x242 X211
0.2
ATBMS NC-3 Anti tip beam safety 0x242 X217
3.3
TRD0 NO-4 Trendelenburg tilt 0° 0x224 X603
0.0
TRD15 NO-4 Trendelenburg tilt 15° 0x224 X604
0.1
SUTS NO-2 Swivel unit therapy safety 0x242 X212
0.4
SUP_1S NO-2 Swivel unit park safety 1 0x242 X207
0.6
SUP_2S NO-2 Swivel unit park safety 2 0x242 X208
0.7 5-37
TSTS NO-2 Table Swing treatment safety 0x242 X215
3.1
TRD0_1S NO-4 Trendelenburg 0° safety 1 0x242 X213
1.0
TRD0_2S NO-4 Trendelenburg 0° safety 2 0x242 X214
1.1
YL_1S NO-3 Y-module left position safety 1 0x242 X203
2.6
YL_2S NO-3 Y-module left position safety 2 0x242 X204
2.7
5.6.3 Light barriers

Some of the sensors for movement control and safety logic are light barriers. To verify the correct function
of the light barrier, refer to the following table. If light barrier is active LED-ring is lightning, simultane-
ously specified bit of CAN-bus-status is high (=1).
Sensor Description CAN-ID Connec-

Name Type Byte.Bit tor
ZTHUT_1S Light- Z (vertical treatment range) TH under table 1 0x242 X205
barrier safety, ca. 170-340 mm 1.4
Diagnostics
ZTHUT_2S Light- Z (vertical treatment range) TH under table 2 0x242 X206

barrier safety, ca. 170-340 mm 1.5
ZTHOT_1S Light- Z (vertical treatment range) TH over table 1 safety, 0x242 X209
barrier ca. 112-250 mm 1.6
ZTHOT_2S Light- Z (vertical treatment range) TH over table 2 safety, 0x242 X210
barrier ca. 112-250 mm 1.7
16 025 02 0419
5.6.4 Micro switches

PTHROS Micro- Pivot TH Range overtable safety 0x242 X701 /
switch 2.3 X224
PTHROHS Micro- Pivot TH Range overtable & horizontal safety 0x242 X701 /
switch 2.2 X224
PTHOHUS Micro- Pivot TH overtable & horizontal & undertable safety 0x242 X701 /
switch 2.1 X224
PTHOUS Micro- Pivot TH overtable & undertable safety 0x242 X701 /
switch 2.0 X224
5.6.5 PSPD Safety relays

BUMPER- Safety- Collision detection on PSPD of mobile x-ray c-arc, 0x242 -A103
CARC relay Ch. 2 (option, if not available - bridge is installed) 3.0
BUMPER- Safety- Collision detection on edge of patient table, Ch. 2 0x242 -A101
TABLE relay 3.2
BUMPER- Safety- Collision detection on therapy arm, Ch. 2 0x242 -A102
ARM relay 3.4
BUMPER- Safety- Safety Bumper Switches Mayser. Looped through 0x242
ALL relay all switches; Ch. 1 3.5
5.6.6 Sensor positions (movement)

5-38 In the MODULITH SLK are sensor switches with integrated LED assembled. To verify the correct position of
the sensors, refer to the following drawings.
Diagnostics
16 025 02 0419
t e d
d a
u p
b e
to
Fig. 5-20 Sensor position (1/7) [020000_01_C35]
5-39
t e d
d a
u p
be
t o
Diagnostics
16 025 02 0419
t e d
da
u p
b e
to
5-40
t e d
da
u p
b e
to
Diagnostics
16 025 02 0419
5-41

Diagnostics
16 025 02 0419
t e d
d a
u p
b e
t o
5-42 5.6.7 Sensor positions (PSPD)
Fig. 5-27 PSPD at therapy arm and position of safety relays
foot head
Diagnostics
Fig. 5-28 PSPD tube under patient table
16 025 02 0419
Fig. 5-29 Collision avoidance for x-ray c-arcs
Collision avoidance for mobile x-ray systems is providing signals directly to mainboard or with version for
flat panel systems to safety relay.
5.6.8 Sensor positions (temperature)
5-43
Fig. 5-30 Position of temperature sensors (orange) at therapy head and water tank
The sensors are connected to a signal converter (R to I). Converted signal is forwarded to mainboard.
Type of signal is different to former SLK series!
5.6.9 Sensor positions (pressure)
Fig. 5-31 Position of pressure sensors (green) at valve plate and therapy head
Diagnostics
16 025 02 0419
5.7 System information
Beside the service trace information there are as well other functions available to display system specific
information like “system info” or “configuration info”. By activating the setting menu following functions
are accessible.
Setting menu
Main item Sub item Description
Set start parameters Set start up parameters
Store current treatment param-
eters as start parameters. Gets
activated with switch on or
treatment counter reset (new
patient).
System Info Display counters, temperature, ...
Configuration info Display installed hardware, with
software- and hardware indices
Service trace Enable / Disable service trace
Touch calibration Calibrate touch screen
Service
(password protected !)
Language Select and set other language
Calibration Start calibration routines for
hydraulic unit (X, Y, Z, P, INL)
Explorer Switch to OS level
Water Sensor Calib. Calibration for pressure sensor in
5-44 with water level display TH (only if TH is in park pos.)
CP-ID Set CP ID number
Software update Install new software version from
USB device
DevMod (on / off) Activate / deactivate a set of
developer’s tools.
Serial no Set device serial number
Counters Display and Reset for operating
time counters
Date / Time Setting for date and time
Clear error log Rest of error log (in system info)
Show all strings Display all text strings of active
language modul
Block “Logged off” Developer tool
CAN logger Developer tool
Show alarm texts Display warning messages with
original layout
Comm. Contr. Configuration data of communi-
cation controller
Diagnostics
Water level display Dynamic Display of water level in

(only if TH is in park position) therapy head (technically pres-
sure in TH is displayed).
Tabelle 5-10 Items of setting- and service menu
16 025 02 0419
5.8 Measurements
DANGER !
Switch off the MODULITH SLK and wait 5 minutes before starting any work on the
HV circuit. This time is required to discharge capacitor in PCCU completely.
5.8.1 HV values
HVout [VDC]
Energy level HV [kV] (BNC)
-/+ 0,2 V
1 6,00 6
10 9,30 9,3
50 11,45 11,45
90 14,50 14,5
Tabelle 5-11 HV measurement values
Other values are calculated from internal microprocessor.
5.8.2 PSPD & collision protection elements

Inside of foam collision sensors are resistance networks. Depending on resistance value a control electron-
ic indicates status of sensors. 5-45
measured value meaning

1,2 kOhm row of sensors is ok, no switch activated
0 Ohm short circuit or PSPD pressed anywhere
∞ Ohm cable broken
Tabelle 5-12 Resistance values of pressure sensitive collision sensors
To interpret the feedback of control unit for collision sensors see follwing table:
Diagnostics
Fig. 5-32 Interpretation of status LEDs on MAYSER control unit
16 025 02 0419
5.8.3 Temperature sensors / converter
To check function of thermal sensor (PT100) use fine measurement probes. They can be inserted at meas-
uring holes on signal converter.
Resistance [Ω] Water temp. [°C]

100 0
Ω 104
108
10
20
112 30
116 40
For measuring resistance values of PT100 it is recommended to measure between pin 1 and 4 at signal
converter.
In case of malfunction of a temperature signal converter ...
• Check temperature value in system information display.
If “--.-” is displayed, no correct signal is transferred.
During a system restart feedback of converter is suppressed for about 5-6 seconds, due to self-test of
device.
• To identify a defect temperature sensor, disconnect the sensor and directly measure resistance while
warming up or cooling down the sensor. If sensor works, converter is defect.
5.8.4 Pressure sensors

5-46
The pressure sensor is measuring a relative pressure difference between the two measuring connectors
(measuring chambers). For pressure detection a piezo-resistive chip is used.
Name Connector Values Comment

Cushion Pressure -X903 in: 24 VDC supply voltage
Sensor (distributor (pin 1+3)
(therapy head) board TH) out: 4 - 20 mA
(-50 - +50 mbar)
Airbag Pressure -X852 in: 24 VDC supply voltage

Sensor (distributor (pin 1+GND)
(valve plate) board air) out: 4 - 20 mA
(-100 - +100 mbar)
Alternatives for checking cushion pressure sensor:

–– Use water level display at control panel. Display must react on pressure modifications of coupling
cushion.
–– Check voltage feedback on main board. Measure voltage between F20 and GND.
Take care not to generate any short circuit on mainboard.
–– Check feedback via service trace. Read out byte 6 + 7 from CAN-ID 0x239, and convert HEX-value.
Diagnostics
Alternatives for airbag pressure sensor:

–– Check voltage feedback on main board. Measure voltage between F21 and GND.
Take care not to generate any short circuit on mainboard.
–– Check feedback via service trace. Read out byte 6 + 7 from CAN-ID 0x23A, and convert HEX-value.
16 025 02 0419
5.8.5 Disintegration test
This test is designed to verify the disintegration capability of the system by releasing shock waves on a
test foil. The test foil must be glued to the special test foil holding device which will be mounted to the
focus gauge of the SLK. During the test, the shock waves will colour the test foil in different erythrism (red
colouring) depending on the used energy level. This erythrism determines the disintegration capability of
the system.
Required tools:
–– Focus gauge already mounted at the therapy head
–– Test foil holding device
–– Test foil (pressure sensitive colour paper)
5.8.5.1 Side conditions
The result of the test is largely dependent on the following side conditions which must be closely checked:
Test foil
The colour-developing layer of the test foil may not be in contact with silicon oil, therefore no silicon oil
is used. The colour intensity (result of the test) depends also on temperature and humidity. Therefore the
disintegration capability of the system can only be rated when the test will always be done under the
same conditions.
Energy level
Of course the selected energy level influences the result of the test largely. Always use the same energy
levels to produce comparable results.
5-47
Trigger frequency
The test takes longer if a lower trigger frequency is used. Always use the same trigger frequency to pro-
duce comparable results.
Coupling
Coupling is, just as during a treatment, an important factor that influences the efficiency of the shock
waves. Always check for proper coupling between water cushion and test foil to produce comparable
results. Because of high sensitivity of test foil couple test foil and coupling cushion without silicon oil.
5.8.5.2 Test procedure
• Glue the test foil to the test foil slide of the test foil holding device as shown in Fig. 5-23. The test foil
is already prepared with a double faced adhesive tape.
Test foil test foil slide
Test foil holding device

Diagnostics
Fig. 5-33 Test foil holding device
16 025 02 0419
• Decouple the coupling cushion.
• Loosen the arrest of the focal gauge by pressing lever.
• Swing open the focus gauge until it is blocked.
• Mount test foil holding device with the test foil in direction to the coupling cushion to the focus
gauge.
• The focal point pin has to be placed exactly in the middle of the aperture.
Focal point pin Lever Test foil holding device
Test foil slide
Focus gauge
Fig. 5-34 Therapy head with focus gauge and test foil holding device
Proceed the next 4 steps three times:

• Adjust the black slide to the first, second, third position (it will arrest with the according spring loaded
5-48
pressure piece).
• Couple the coupling cushion to the test foil.

Cushion high on level 9, and table in highest position, no silicon oil.
• Apply 25 shots at energy level 80, 50, 20 with a frequency of 2 Hz.
• Decouple the cushion from the test foil and move the black slide to next position for performing test
on second and third energy level.
Position of slide Energy level Frequency Number of shots

1. 80 2 Hz 25
2. 50 2 Hz 25
3. 20 2 Hz 25
In this figure
the black slide is adjusted in 2. position
(using middle energy level).
Diagnostics
1. 2. 3.
Position
Fig. 5-35 Black holder positions
16 025 02 0419
• Dismount the test foil holding device from the focus gauge.
• Dismount the test foil from holding device.
• If result is unsatisfactory check air bubble free coupling of the coupling cushion and repeat the test. If
no improvement is visible call the service department of STORZ MEDICAL AG.
I
Fig. 5-36 Result of disintegration test
If the test fails to produce the desired result, perform it again using a new test foil. The disintegration
capability of the system should only then be rated inadequate when the test has failed reproducible with
different test foils. Check all side conditions closely. Consider the following measures:
–– Check the function of the degassing system. Exchange water and filter if necessary.
–– Check the coupling cushion. Exchange cushion if it’s old and hardened.
–– Measure High voltage
–– Measure Capacitance
–– Exchange coil
• Preserve the test foil in the System book of the SLK.
5-49
Diagnostics
16 025 02 0419
5.9 Troubleshooting
Goal of troubleshooting is to fix any issues, malfunctions and errors of device. Therefore error situation
must be known. If you ask STORZ MEDICAL Service for assistance in troubleshooting please provide pre-
cise description of error situation, especially including last action of operator before issue occurred.
5.9.1 Movement & Hydraulic

Information in this chapter are intended to help identifying faulty functions of the system. Please refer also
to chapters 2 System Description, 4 Removal / Installation and 6 Wiring diagrams.
5.9.1.1 All movements
No movement
–– Take care that x-ray collision sensor is connected.
–– Check meaning of message in this service manual, chapter 5.1 Error Messages, and perform
recommended procedures.
or
–– Use override button to clear error situation. Check if error situation can be reproduced.
Take care about person safety and collisions.
If no movement is possible, normally warning- or error messages are displayed.
5.9.1.2 X-axis
No movement
5-50 –– See common information in chapter 5.8.1.1 All movements.
5.9.1.3 Y-axis
No movement
–– See common information in chapter 5.8.1.1 All movements.
5.9.1.4 Z-axis
No movement
Table movement downwards is stick-slipping
–– Check voltage of plugs for Z-sandwich-valve.
Maybe change with other plugs to check if function / voltage is available.
–– Check and correct setting of adjustment screw on Z-sandwich-valve for upward (!) direction.
Correct setting is described in chapter 4 Removal / Installation.
5.9.1.5 Trendelenburg motion

Diagnostics
No movement
16 025 02 0419
5.9.1.6 Therapy head motion
No movement
Swivel to therapy position is very slow or not moving
–– Check and correct Bypass-safety-valve for swivel-movement.
5.9.1.7 Inline unit
No movement
In-line unit is not driving to lowest position. Limit switch gets not activated
–– Check and correct if cable of US-transducer is kinked or squeezed in linear spring inside guide
pipe.
5.9.2 HV & PCCU
System is not releasing shock waves

–– Check that safety circuit (movements) is not activated.
–– Check status LEDs of PCCU if PCCU is working correctly.
–– Check status LEDs of PCCU if trigger signal from shock wave release button is available.
Exchange shock wave release button (e.g. from other control panel or spare part) or release
shock waves from additional control panel if available.
5.9.3 Water Air Circuit

5-51
Warning message regarding airbag malfunction is displayed
–– Check airbag system for leakages.
No air bubbles must come out from airbag into coupling cushion, when airbag is inflated.
No water must be in air hoses and air filters.
–– Check function of airbag pressure sensor.
Connector is located on board distributor air SLK (1L). Feedback voltages can be measured
between pin 4 of -X852 (signal: an_airbagpressure_f) and GND (e.g. pin 5 of -X853).
Drive TH to UT-therapy position. Select cushion level 5. Switch on and off airbag several times.
Feedback voltages should be about 0,8 - 1,1 VDC (±0,1 VDC) when airbag is deflated and about
2,2 - 2,3 VDC (±0,1 VDC) when airbag is inflated.
If air hoses are disconnected from airbag pressure sensor (mounted on valve plate) air pressure of
environment is measured and feedback voltage is about 1,8 VDC.
–– Check pressure sensor
Connector X901 for feedback of pressure sensor is located on board distributor swivel in therapy
arm. Signals are also available on X238 on board e-box connector. Feedback of sensor can be
measured between pin 1 (signal: CushionPressure) and pin 7 (signal: VPosRTN) of X901/X238.
Feedback-value (proportional to water level) should be in range between 1,93 VDC and 2,00 VDC.
Optimum is 1,97 VDC.
Values can be checked on service trace with CAN-ID 0x239 COUPLI, byte 6 & 7. Range is 0x0A49
to 0x0AB0. Optimum is 0x0A82.
Diagnostics
16 025 02 0419
5.9.4 Control Panel(s) & electronic & software
Control Panel does not start

–– Check power- and data connection of control panel. Connectors are located at patient table and
at external connector plate.
Refer to chapter 4 Removal / Installation for details.
Control Panel can not be activated
–– Check control panel ID for each installed control panel with only one control panel installed. ID-
number can only be used once.
Control Panels are not working as expected
–– Check control panel ID for each installed control panel with only one control panel installed. ID-
number can only be used once.
Control Panels is showing wrong counter values (in settings / service / counters)
–– If additionally during start up warning message of “invalid coil counter card” was displayed
FRAM is missing or defect and must be added or exchanged. Get in contact with STORZ MEDI-
CAL Service department.
–– In case that main board was exchanged a wrong FRAM-IC was used. Main board is initialised
with wrong values. Main board must be exchanged again. Get in contact with STORZ MEDICAL
Service department.
Control Panel or communication controller (with SCB) is showing emergency halt error 1004
–– Check all emergency halt buttons on control panels, that they are unlocked
–– Check all emergency halt buttons for software simulated control panels (StorM-Touch), that they
5-52 are unlocked.
–– Check if external emergency halt buttons for StorM-Touch control panels are installed. If they are
missing it gets interpreted as activated emergency halt buttons. Number of emergency halt but-
tons must correspond with number of installed touch screens.
If only one touch monitor is installed the upper SWRB socket must be used.
Lithotripter is connected to StorM-Touch, but no hydraulic movements are performed
–– Check correct configuration of touch monitors.
If two monitors are configured and only one monitor is installed, remote control is not possible.
Lithotripter is not displayed in StorM-Touch, on device navigation bar
–– Check in device manager if correct set up is made, and lithotripter is marked as available device.
–– Check if SCB connection is correctly established.
System is not booting correctly

–– Check blinking frequency of LED V52 on main board. Fast frequency (~6 Hz) is indicating error
situation. Reboot system or exchange main board.
–– Check by using service trace function for different CAN-ID if real values are displayed and if com-
munication is working correctly (e.g. checking values while movements are performed, checking
status of sensors, checking shockwave release, ...). If values are not matching to real situation
main boards needs to be exchanged.
Diagnostics
16 025 02 0419
5.10 Fuse list
Board Main SLK (1L)
F1 12.5 A Hydraulic system 24 VDC supply
F2 2 AT Control Panel 24 VDC supply
F3 1 AT External Panel 24 VDC supply
F4 2 AT Sensors and Positioning unit 24 VDC supply
F5 3.15 AT Water air unit 24 VDC supply
F6 2 AT Inline unit 24 VDC supply
F7 1 AT Main Board 24 VDC supply
F8 2.5 AT (fix) Pre-Supply for 12 V, SMD (not exchangeable)
F9 8 AT Periphery 24 VDC supply
F10 0,5 AT (SMD) Control circuit airbag compressor
F11 0,4 A (fix) Supply 24 V, Comm. Crtl., SMD (resetable)
F12 0,15 A (fix) Supply 12 V, WAC, SMD (resetable)
F13 2,0 AT (SMD) Option Supply 24 V, cooling pump
F14 2,5 AT (SMD) Option Supply 12V internal ultrasound module
F15 1,5 A (fix) Supply 12 V Comm Crtl., SMD (resetable)
F20 0,062 AF (SMD) Analogue signal of WAC
5-53
Board Inline SLK (1L)

F1 0.5 AT 24 VDC power supply (not exchangeable)
F2 0.5 AT (SMD) Inline motor current protection
Board CTU SLK (1L)

F1 16 AT Power supply +48 V for HV-generation
F2 1.0 AT Power supply +48 V for board electronic (not exchangeable)
Board Control Panel

F1 1.0 AT Not exchangeable
F2 0.15 A Not exchangeable
Diagnostics
Board Communication Controller

F1 0.3 A Self resetable (cool down)
16 025 02 0419
5-54
Diagnostics
16 025 02 0419
Service Manual
MODULITH® SLK (1L)

(30k)
6
Chapter 6
Wiring Diagrams
Table of contents
6.1 Wiring overview (30000) 6-4
6.2 Power distribution (30000) 6-12
6.3 Main board (28190) 6-14

6.3.1 Board Main (overview) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
6.3.2 Board Main (power, 12V, 3.3V, 5V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6.3.3 Board Main (periphery, diverse) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
6.3.4 Board Main (SWU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
6.3.5 Board Main (I/O, CAN, LAN, SER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
6.3.6 Board Main (others) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
6.3.7 Board Main (Logic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
6.3.8 Board Main (water air, temp., degassing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
6.3.9 Board Main (control panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
6.3.10 Board Main (sensors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
6.4 E-box connectors (28177) 6-35

6.4.1 Cables for inductive sensors [21463] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
6.4.2 Cable temperature sensor water tank SLK (1L) [-----] . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
6.4.3 Cable circulation pump SLK (1L) [28821] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
6.4.4 Cable signal aktormed SLK (1L) [21379] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
6-2
6.5 Distributor air (21018) 6-40
6.5.1 Cable to distributor air SLK (1L) [21173] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
6.6 Distributor degassing (21020) 6-42

6.6.1 Cable to distributor degassing SLK (1L) [21176] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
6.7 Distributor therapy head (26751) 6-43

6.7.1 Cable swivel SLK (1L) [29367] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
6.7.2 Cable temperature sensor herapy head SLK (1L) [-----] . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
6.8 PCCU (25860) 6-47

6.8.1 Cable set power SLK (1L) [29353] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
6.8.2 Cable PCCU 25 pol SLK (1L)[21405] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
Wiring diagrams
6.9 CTU (25857) 6-50
6.10 Control panel (24117) 6-52

6.10.1 Cable control panel SLK (1L) [20816] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
6.10.2 Cable control panel connect SLK (1L) [21015] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
16 026 02 0918
6.11 Pivot control (20988) 6-55
6.12 Box Motion Control (21024) 6-57

6.12.1 Cable set power SLK (1L) [29353] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
6.13 External panel 6-60

6.13.1 External connectors [29464] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60
6.13.2 service external panel (21005) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61
6.13.3 Communication controller (20535) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63
6.14 Hand switch (21493) 6-65
6.15 Footswitch and controller (29592, 29580) 6-66
6.16 Inline Unit 6-70

6.16.1 Cable to inline SLK (1L) [21851] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71
6.16.2 Cable inline within SLK (1L) [21849] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-72
6.16.3 Cable inline board to case SLK (1L) [22210] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-72
6.16.4 Cable inline rs232 board to case SLK (1L) [22211] . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73
6.17 Miscellaneous cables 6-74

6.17.1 Cable set Z-Lift [21462] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-74
6.17.2 Cable set pivot [21507] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76
6.17.3 Cable set flatcable e-box SLK (1L) [21357] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77
6.17.4 Cable set line ebox SLK (1L) [29353] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-79 6-3
6.17.5 Cable bypass valve SLK (1L) [21589] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-80
6.17.6 Cable hand switch SLK (1L) [20817] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-80
Wiring diagrams
16 026 02 0918
6.1 Wiring overview (30000)
6-4
t e d
d a
u p
b e
to
Wiring diagrams
Fig. 6-1 SLK overview boards 1/12 [030000_01_C39_01_01] (draft)
16 026 02 0918
6-5
t e d
d a
u p
b e
t o
Wiring diagrams
16 026 02 0918
6-6
Fig. 6-4 SLK overview boards 4/12 [030000_01_C39_01_01]

Wiring diagrams
16 026 02 0918
6-7
t e d
d a
u p
b e
t o
Wiring diagrams
16 026 02 0918
6-8
Wiring diagrams
Fig. 6-7 SLK overview boards 7a/12 [030000_01_C39_01_01], with Trendelenburg
16 026 02 0918
6-9
Wiring diagrams
Fig. 6-8 SLK overview boards 7b/12 [030000_01_C39_01_01], without Trendelenburg
16 026 02 0918
6-10

Wiring diagrams
16 026 02 0918
6-11

Wiring diagrams
16 026 02 0918
6.2 Power distribution (30000)
6-12
Wiring diagrams
Fig. 6-13 Power unit with isolation transformer and separate power supplies [30000_01_C31]
16 026 02 0918
6-13
Wiring diagrams
Fig. 6-14 Power unit with combined power supply 24 / 48 V [30000_01_C31]
16 026 02 0918
6.3 Main board (28190)
X1 X18
T 12.5 A
T 8.0 A X27
X2
T 2.0 A
T 1.0 A
T 2.0 A
T 3.15 A
T 2.0 A
T 2.0 A
6-14
X5
X3 X4
X6 X7 X8
Wiring diagrams
X11 X12
X10
Fig. 6-15 Board layout [26573_04_B09]
Details about fuses is available in chapter 5.9 Fuse list.
16 026 02 0918
VBat
ISP_P1.25
I2C2_SCL
I2C2_SDA
RST U_Board_Power_12V--12V
Board_Power_12V--12V.SchDoc Sheet: 4
6.3.1
ctrl_MCLR_lb
ctrl_CCCRST_lb
V12PF
st_CCTC_PLD SyncPower
st_CCTC
16 026 02 0918
U_Board_Power_3
Rst
Board_Power_3.3V_5.0V.SchDoc Sheet: 5
U_Overview_SWC U_Overview_Logic
Overview_SWC.SchDoc Sheet: 9 Overview_Logic.SchDoc Sheet: 21
SyncPower
st_ECG+ st_ECG+
RST
st_ECG- st_ECG- RST
Rst
Rst
ctrl_Trigger ctrl_Trigger
st_CCTC_PLD ctrl_MCLR ctrl_MCLR U_Controller_Periph u
ctrl_PCCUOn_lb ctrl_PCCUOn_lb Controller_Periph u. JTAG.SchDoc Sheet: 7
st_CCTC
st_CCTC
ctrl_HVTest ctrl_HVTest
RST TMS
st_CCTC_PLD
ctrl_CCCRST_lb ctrl_ChargeOn ctrl_ChargeOn TMS
TCK
ctrl_MCLR_lb ctrl_CTUOn ctrl_CTUOn TCK
TDI_uC
ctrl_PCCUOn ctrl_PCCUOn TDI_uC
TDO_uC
RST ctrl_SwFocMotDir ctrl_SwFocMotDir TDO_uC
ctrl_SwFocMotEn ctrl_SwFocMotEn
TRACECLK
VBat st_CTUOk st_CTUOk TRACECLK
TRACEDATA(0)
st_EOC st_EOC TRACEDATA(0)
+2.5VRef TRACEDATA(1)
+2.5VRef st_FaultSwitch st_FaultSwitch TRACEDATA(1)
TRACEDATA(2)
st_HVmax st_HVmax TDI_PLD1 TDI_PLD1 TRACEDATA(2)
TRACEDATA(3)
st_DivIncon st_DivIncon TDO_PLD1 TDO_PLD1 TRACEDATA(3)
VBat
st_CTUTemp st_CTUTemp TDI_PLD2 TDI_PLD2 VBat
sw_Extend sw_Extend TDO_PLD2 TDO_PLD2
+3VRef
an_HVActualValue_b sw_Precise sw_Precise +3VRef
an_HVSetFeedback st_ECGTrig st_ECGTrig
I2C2_SCL
I2C2_SDA U_Overview_ I_O_other
st_PowBad st_PowBad
Overview_ I_O_other.SchDoc Sheet: 15
st_ECG_JP1 st_ECG_JP1
SPI2_SSEL
SPI2_SCK
SPI2_MOSI
CAN-L6 CAN2-RX
CAN-L6 st_ECG_JP2 st_ECG_JP2 ISP_P1.25 ISP_P1.25 CAN2-RX
CAN-H6 CAN2-TX
CAN-H6 st_ECG_JP3 st_ECG_JP3 I2C2_SCL CAN2-TX
I2C2_SDA
ctrl_MCLR_lb
SPI2_MOSI ctrl_MCLR_lb
ctrl_CCCRST_lb
Fig. 6-16 Board Main 1/35 [26573_04_B31]

SPI2_SCK ctrl_CCCRST_lb
Controller_F4_Sign.
SPI2_SSEL
Controller_F4_144P.SchDoc Sheet: 8
st_CCTC_PLD_l st_CCTC_PLD_l
Board Main (overview)
RST MISO_OUT MISO_OUT an_ExcessTemperature an_ExcessTemperature

USB_PPWR
I2C2_SDA MOSI_OUT MOSI_OUT ctrl_EnM1pld1_lb ctrl_EnM1pld1_lb USB_PPWR 1
USB_PWRD
I2C2_SCL SCK_OUT SCK_OUT ctrl_EnM2pld1_lb ctrl_EnM2pld1_lb USB_PWRD 2
USB_D+
an_HVSetFeedback SSEL_OUT SSEL_OUT sw_ILRESS_s sw_ILRESS_s USB_D+ 3
USB_D-
an_HVActualValue_b TIM1_CH4 TIM1_CH4 swp_LaserPointer swp_LaserPointer USB_D- 4
SPI2_SCK
USB_UP_LED
SPI2_SSEL
SPI2_MOSI
ISP_P1.25 TIM4_CH4 TIM4_CH4 st_StateLaserPointer st_StateLaserPointer USB_UP_LED 5
USB_CONNECT
EXTI_11 EXTI_11 ctrl_laserPointer ctrl_laserPointer USB_CONNECT 6
CAN2-RX an_DistanceSensor1_fb
CAN2-RX EXTI_15 EXTI_15 sw_Override2_s sw_Override2_san_DistanceSensor1_fb 7
CAN2-TX an_DistanceSensor2_fb
CAN2-TX PD2 PD2 sw_Override1_s sw_Override1_san_DistanceSensor2_fb 8
COM_TxD
PD3 PD3 st_CardDetect_l st_CardDetect_l COM_TxD 9
TDI_uC COM_RxD
TDI_uC PD10 PD10 CAN-H1 CAN-H1 COM_RxD 10
TDO_uC CAN1_RX
TDO_uC PD11 PD11 CAN-L1 CAN-L1 CAN1_RX 11
CAN1_TX I/O Signale
PD12 PD12 CAN-H2 CAN-H2 CAN1_TX 12
TRACECLK ETH _RMII_TXD0
TRACECLK PB1 PB1 CAN-L2 CAN-L2 ETH _RMII_TXD0 13
TRACEDATA(0) ETH _RMII_TXD1
TRACEDATA(0) PD7 PD7 CAN-H3 CAN-H3 ETH _RMII_TXD1 14
TRACEDATA(1) TMS ETH _RMII_TX_EN
TRACEDATA(1) TMS TMS CAN-L3 CAN-L3 ETH _RMII_TX_EN 15
TRACEDATA(2) TCK ETH_MDIO
TRACEDATA(2) TCK TCK CAN-H4 CAN-H4 ETH_MDIO 16
TRACEDATA(3) ETH_MDC
TRACEDATA(3) CAN-L4 CAN-L4 ETH_MDC 17
CAN-H6 an_ExcessTemperature_fb
an_WaterTempReservoir_fb an_WaterTempReservoir_fb CAN-H6 an_ExcessTemperature_fb 18
USB_PPWR CAN-L6 ETH _RMII_RXD0
1 USB_PPWR COM_RxD_RF COM_RxD_RF CAN-L6 ETH _RMII_RXD0 19
USB_PWRD ETH _RMII_RXD1
2 USB_PWRD COM_TxD_RF COM_TxD_RF ctrl_hsw45pld2 ctrl_hsw45pld2 ETH _RMII_RXD1 20
USB_D+ ETH _RMII_REF_CLK
3 USB_D+ SPI3_SSEL SPI3_SSEL st_hsw45pld2 st_hsw45pld2 ETH _RMII_REF_CLK 21
USB_D- ETH_RESET
4 USB_D- st_Sel_PLD_SPI st_Sel_PLD_SPI an_DistanceSensor1 an_DistanceSensor1 ETH_RESET 22
USB_UP_LED ETH_CRS_DV
5 USB_UP_LED SPI3_MOSI SPI3_MOSI an_DistanceSensor2 an_DistanceSensor2 ETH_CRS_DV 23
USB_CONNECT
6 USB_CONNECT SPI3_SCK SPI3_SCK ctrl_hsw25pld2 ctrl_hsw25pld2
an_DistanceSensor1_fb
7 an_DistanceSensor1_fb I2C1_SCL I2C1_SCL st_hsw25pld2 st_hsw25pld2
8 an_DistanceSensor2_fb CLKOUT CLKOUT swp_hsw45pld2 swp_hsw45pld2 +3VRef
COM_TxD
9 COM_TxD I2C1_SDA I2C1_SDA swp_hsw25pld2 swp_hsw25pld2 +2.5VRef
COM_RxD
10 COM_RxD
CAN1_RX U_Board_Power_Main
11 CAN1_RX
I/O Signale CAN1_TX Board_Power_Main.SchDoc Sheet: 2
12 CAN1_TX an_CushionPressure_fb an_CushionPressure_fb
ETH _RMII_TXD0
13 ETH _RMII_TXD0 an_AirbagPressure_fb an_AirbagPressure_fb ctrl_hswM1pld2 ctrl_hswM1pld2
ETH _RMII_TXD1
14 ETH _RMII_TXD1 st_npn28cont_flb st_npn28cont_flb ctrl_hswM2pld2 ctrl_hswM2pld2
ETH _RMII_TX_EN
15 ETH _RMII_TX_ENst_DegaPumpRPM_flb st_DegaPumpRPM_flb ctrl_hswM1_2pld1 ctrl_hswM1_2pld1
ETH_MDIO
16 ETH_MDIO SPI3_MISO SPI3_MISO st_+24V_Motion1_on st_+24V_Motion1_on
ETH_MDC
17 ETH_MDC st_IrqPLD1 st_IrqPLD1 st_+24V_Motion2_on st_+24V_Motion2_on
an_ExcessTemperature_fb
18 an_ExcessTemperature_fb st_IrqPLD2 st_IrqPLD2 st_+24V_Periph._ok st_+24V_Periph._ok
ETH _RMII_RXD0
19 ETH _RMII_RXD0 st_EINT1_Out2 st_EINT1_Out2 st_+24V_Inl_ok st_+24V_Inl_ok Ref._V24L/2
ETH _RMII_RXD1
20 ETH _RMII_RXD1 st_EINT0_Out2 st_EINT0_Out2 st_+24V_WA_ok st_+24V_WA_ok +24V_Motion
ETH _RMII_REF_CLK
21 ETH _RMII_REF_CLK ctrl_IntTrig ctrl_IntTrig st_+24V_(Board)_ok st_+24V_(Board)_ok
ETH_RESET PE12
22 ETH_RESET PE12 PE12
ETH_CRS_DV PE13
23 ETH_CRS_DV PE13 PE13
PC13 U_Board_Power_Main2
24 PC13 PC13
Board_Power_Main2.SchDoc Sheet: 3
+2.5VRef
st_+24V_Motion_ok st_+24V_Motion_ok +24V_Motion
st_+24V_ContPan_ok st_+24V_ContPan_ok Ref._V24L/2
U_References st_+24V_ExtPan_ok st_+24V_ExtPan_ok V12PF
COM_TxD
COM_RxD
References.SchDoc Sheet: 5 +5VRef st_+24V_Pos_ok st_+24V_Pos_ok

+5VRef
+2.5VRef st_V12PF_ok st_V12PF_ok
+5VRef +2.5VRef
COM_TxD
+2.5VRef
+3VRef
+3VRef U_Änderungsnachweis_01
COM_RxD
9
10
I/O Signale
05 beb geprüft: Datum / Unterschrift Stromlaufplan - wiring diagram Zeichn.-Nr. : Version : Druckdatum:
22.03.2018 Size:
04 pvv16_148 Serienausgabe 21.03.18 beb si siehe DMS Stempel OverviewMaster 026573_04_B31_01_01 03
Datum / Unterschrift board main clp/slk1l1/slx-f20r1 PCB-Nr. :
Benennung
03 aea14_001;pvv16_156 Erstausgabe 24.03.17 beb gezeichnet: Storz Medical AG / 2017 Blatt : 1 A3

Änderung Datum beb siehe DMS Stempel Schutzvermerk ISO 16016 Datei : OverviewMaster.SchDoc 26571 von : 36
Wiring diagrams
6-15
Wiring diagrams
6-16
pre+24V
ctrl_hswM1pld2
X1 F1
25A ! +24V_Motion
1 +24V_Motion R49
2 st_+24V_Motion1_on
3
3
+24V Power GND
6.3.2
3 1 X31 2 Value see higher-level parts list R48 TP9
R7 10k 1k5
4 BRÜCKE auf PCB 2 IN Vbb OUT 1 2 IN Vbb OUT 1
3k0, 0.5W R51
3
4 5 4 5 10k
R10 TP1 IS OUT IS OUT
1
10k
GND_Mot Q1 BTS6143D GND Q14 BTS6143D X2
3
X32 V1 V8
1
2
GND 56k BC846B R46
1 2 gn 1 2
R8 ctrl_hswM1_2pld1 10k
3 Power Motion
BRÜCKE auf PCB V24
GND GND TP7 4
2
GND 56k BC846B
5
3
R47 +24V_Periph.
24VRTN 2 IN Vbb OUT 1 GND GND_Mot
st_+24V_Motion1_on
X33
3
2 1 R11 4 IS OUT 5 V79
TP2
BRÜCKE auf PCB 1 st_+24V_Motion1_on 2
ctrl_hswM2pld2 10k
Q2 BTS6143D 3
V9 R50 V33
L1 1
2
GND 56k BC846B
4,7uH/2,7A
R9 10k R56 BAT54C
+24V_ContPan 1k5
F2 GND V24L TP10
1
AGND
GND Ref._V24L/2 st_+24V_Motion2_on
T2A R1
X30 V2
V24L V33
AGND MESS-BRÜCKE
3k0, 0.5W GND
2
R423
GND
gn +24V_ExtPan 15k4
F3 C164
8
7
6
5
Fig. 6-17 Board Main 2/35 [26573_04_B31]

AGND
T1A R2 100nF RN2
V3
GND 10k
3k0, 0.5W TP3 U59A
3
V+
1
2
3
4
GND 7
gn +24V_Pos
F4 1
st_+24V_WA_ok
6 TP4
T2A R3 V- LM339D
V4
3k0, 0.5W 12
GND GND
gn U59B
+24V_WA
F5 5
2
Board Main (power, 12V, 3.3V, 5V)
st_+24V_Inl_ok
T3.15A R4 4 TP5
V5
3k0, 0.5W LM339D
GND
gn +24V_Inl U59C
F6
9
T2A R5 14
V6 st_+24V_(Board)_ok
8 TP6
3k0, 0.5W
GND LM339D
F7 gn +24V
U59D
T2A R6 11
V7 +24V Main Board
13
st_+24V_Periph._ok
3k0, 0.5W 10 TP8
zu.F1 n.m. zu.F5 3.15AT
GND
gn +24V_Periph.
F9 R424 LM339D zu.F2 2AT zu.F6 2AT
11k
T8A R20 C165
V12 zu.F3 1AT zu.F7 2AT
100nF
3k0, 0.5W
zu.F4 2AT zu.F9 8AT
GND GND GND
gn
05 geprüft: Datum / Unterschrift Stromlaufplan - wiring diagram Zeichn.-Nr. : Version : Druckdatum:
22.03.2018
04 pvv16_148 Serienausgabe 21.03.18 beb si siehe DMS Stempel Power_Main 026573_04_B31_01_01 03
Benennung
03 aea14_001;pvv16_156 Erstausgabe 24.03.17 beb gezeichnet: Storz Medical AG / 2017 Blatt : 2

Änderung Datum beb siehe DMS Stempel Schutzvermerk ISO 16016 Datei : Board_Power_Main.SchDoc 26571 von : 36
16 026 02 0918
V24L V33 V24L V24L V33
C162
C192
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
100nF RN1 R394 RN3
100nF
GND 10k 18k 10k
GND
U58A
8
V+
3
+24V_Motion 7 U19A
+24V_Motion 2
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1 V+
st_+24V_Motion_ok 1 TP16
6 st_V12PF_ok
Ref._V24L/2 3 V-
V- LM339D V12PF
12
TP11 LM393
4
GND
U58B
GND
5
+24V_ContPan
2
st_+24V_ContPan_ok
4 U19B
TP12 TP15 6
7
LM339D 5
U58C LM393
GND
9
+24V_ExtPan
14
st_+24V_ExtPan_ok
8
TP13 R395
6k2 C191
LM339D 100nF
U58D
11
+24V_Pos GND GND
13
st_+24V_Pos_ok
10 TP14
LM339D
C163
100nF
GND
Fig. 6-18 Board Main 3/35 [26573_04_B31]
C9
preV12 R24
100nF L3 +2/-2% Ua max.12,5V, min.12,0V/3,5A
U1
V12P
V24L 33uH/4,2A 0R01/0.5W V69 TP22 TP23
1 8
BOOT SW
R23
TP17
L2 2 5 C11 C14 C186 1k3
VIN FB
V13 V15 SS34
05 4,7uH/2,7A geprüft: Datum / Unterschrift
3 6
Benennung
Stromlaufplan - wiring 22uF/25V
22uF/25V 22uF/25V diagram Zeichn.-Nr. : Version : Druckdatum:
EN Comp B560C-13-F V14 C187 22.03.2018
C1
04 pvv16_148 Serienausgabe
C2
21.03.18 beb si siehe DMS Stempel
4 7 Board_Power_Main2 gn
SMBJ12A
026573_04_B31_01_01
220uF/50V 03
R14 RT/CLK GND
03 aea14_001;pvv16_156 Erstausgabe C3 C6
24.03.17 beb gezeichnet:
100k Datum / Unterschrift Storz Medical AG / 2017 board main clp/slk1l1/slx-f20r1 PCB-Nr. : Blatt : 3
220uF/50V 220uF/50V C5 0 GND1 GND1 GND1 GND1 GND GND GND
Änderung 2.2uF/50V Datum
2.2uF/50V beb R15
siehe DMS Stempel
215k
Schutzvermerk
TPS54340 ISO 16016 Datei : Board_Power_Main2.SchDoc
R18
26571 von : 36
100pF TP263
TP21 143k
V10 C7 GND V24L R448
SS34 GND GND GND1 GND1 TP18 4k7
GND R17 R19 V82
SW.on ca.17,2V 28k 10k
6.8pF V80 TP264
C4
R13 C10
R16 BZX384-C18
3
7k5 14k 10pF R447 Si2307
R12 10nF TP261 1 V81
1 2 C8 10k
0R01 BC846B
X36 6,8nF V12
TP262
R446
2
10k
GND GND GND GND GND1 GND GND GND
BRÜCKE auf PCB
GND GND 6-17
F8 V11
2,5AT
SMBJ24A SyncPower
pre+24V GND
V12PF
V12PF
V50 V12
X26 R21 R22 X17

0R n.m. F14
1 V-5 1
V24L V12P
2 2
GND 2.5AT R158
3 3 12V Ultrasound(25W)
preV12 R25 1k5
4 U2 TP20 4
GND 1R
5
preV50
7 OSC V+ 8 C12 5
NC
6 6 2 10uF/25V
GND LV CAP+
7 1 4
preV33 NC CAP- L4 V68
8 3 5 TP19 GND
GND GND VOUT
12V Ultrasound
9
V-5 C13 3.3uH/80mA gn
10 LMC7660IM
GND 10uF/25V GND
CON10
GND GND
Service Connector Power
(Mit 5.0V (V+) und LMC7660 ist Ua=-5V)
Fig. 6-19 Board Main 4/35 [26573_04_B31]

Benennung
22.03.2018
04 pvv16_148 Serienausgabe 21.03.18 beb si siehe DMS Stempel Power_12V--12V 026573_04_B31_01_01 03
03 aea14_001;pvv16_156 Erstausgabe 24.03.17 beb gezeichnet: Datum / Unterschrift Storz Medical AG / 2017 board main clp/slk1l1/slx-f20r1 PCB-Nr. : Blatt : 4
Änderung Datum beb siehe DMS Stempel Schutzvermerk ISO 16016 Datei : Board_Power_12V--12V.SchDoc 26571 von : 36
Wiring diagrams
16 026 02 0918
V24L Stepdown Out 5V/1,5A
U3
C29 C31 330pF R38
3 16
VIN BST GND2
22nF 10R, 0.5W
preV50 R42
L5 +2/-2%
TP24 2 14
SD SW V50
C15 R28 0R01
100k 33uH/2,68A
2.2uF/50V 4 15 V18 R41
SYNC PRE SS34 C33 C35 220R
LM25575 V22
8 13 22uF/16V 22uF/16V
RAMP IS V21 SMBJ5V0A
GND2
gn
SW.on ca.12,3V
7 11
RT OUT
GND2 GND2 GND GND
10 6 R34
SS FB
3k09
COMP
AGND
PGND
R26 C17 R30
VCC
11k 13k
0
10nF
TP26
12
5
GND C25 R32
R35
C20 C21 V17 C23 1k0
1nF 33k 1 2
LL4148 C28 X34
330pF 10nF
220nF
GND GND GND GND GND GND GND2 n.m. GND GND GND2
preV12
BRÜCKE auf PCB
Stepdown Out 3,3V/1,5A
SyncPower
U4
C30 C32 330pF R39
3 16
VIN BST GND3
22nF 10R, 0.5W
preV33 R43
L6 +2/-2%
TP25 2 14
SD SW V33
C16 R29
100k 33uH/2,68A R40 0R01
2.2uF/50V 4 15 V19 180R
2
SYNC PRE SS34 C34 C36
V23
LM25575
GSOT03C
8
RAMP IS
13 47uF/6.3V 47uF/6.3V
GND3 V20
gn
7 11
SW.on ca.9,2V RT OUT
GND3 GND3 GND GND
10 6 R36
SS FB
1k69
COMP
AGND
PGND
C18
VCC
R27 R31
15k4 10nF 13k 0
TP27
C26 R33
1
12
GND
R37
C19 1nF 31k6 1k0
C22 V16 C24
C27 1 2
330pF 10nF LL4148 X35
220nF 220pF
GND GND GND GND GND GND GND3 GND GND GND3
preV12
BRÜCKE auf PCB
05 Fig. 6-20 Board Main 5/35 [26573_04_B31]

geprüft: Datum / Unterschrift Stromlaufplan - wiring diagram Zeichn.-Nr. : Version : Druckdatum:
Benennung
22.03.2018
04 pvv16_148 Serienausgabe si siehe DMS Stempel 21.03.18 beb Power_3.3V_5.0V 026573_04_B31_01_01 03
Änderung Datum beb siehe DMS Stempel Schutzvermerk ISO 16016V12 Datei : Board_Power_3.3V_5.0V.SchDoc 26571 von : 36
C39
V12
AGND
C37 1uF/35V
6-18 100nF
AGND C41
AGND
2
N1 N4 100nF
Vin
Vin
3 6 TP28 3 6 TP29
TEMP Vout +5VRef TEMP Vout +2.5VRef
1 5 1 5 R449
NC TRIM DNC TRIM
7 7 1R
NC NC
GND
GND
8 8
NC DNC
TP31
ADR02ARZ REF5025
4
C42
1uF
AGND AGND
AGND
LM4120AIM5-3.0
U6
L7 3.3uH/80mA TP30
4 5 TP33
V12 IN OUT +3VRef
C38 C40 3
EN REF
1
4.7uF/25V 100nF GND

2
AGND
Fig. 6-21 Board Main 6/35 [26573_04_B31]

Wiring diagrams

Benennung
22.03.2018
04 pvv16_148 Serienausgabe 21.03.18 beb si siehe DMS Stempel References 026573_04_B31_01_01 03
Änderung Datum beb siehe DMS Stempel Schutzvermerk ISO 16016 Datei : References.SchDoc 26571 von : 36
16 026 02 0918
6.3.3 Board Main (periphery, diverse)
V33
R452
VBat
C51 0R U7C C50 4.7uF/16V
2.2uF 32 6
VREF+ VBAT V33 V33 V33
GND
17 100nF
GND VDD C56 R277 R273 R275
30 100nF
VDD C57
39 100nF
VDD C52 10k 10k 10k V33
+3VRef 16 52 100nF
VSS VDD C53
38 62 100nF
VSS VDD C54 X16
51 72 100nF
VSS VDD C55 TMS 2 1
61 84 100nF
VSS VDD C92 TCK 4 3
83 95 100nF
C49
VSS VDD C94 TDI_uC TP35 TDO 6 5
94 108 100nF V33 TDI_uC
22nF
VSS VDD C95 TP36 TDI 8 7
107 121 100nF NC
VSS VDD C97 1 RST 10 9
120 131 100nF
VSS VDD C113 2 TRACECLK 12 11
130 144 100nF JP11 5VTrace NC
GND VSS VDD 3 TRACEDATA(0) 14 13
C58
L8 R276 TRACEDATA(1) 16 15
31 33
VSSA VDDA 1 10k TRACEDATA(2) 18 17
TP34
3.3uH/80mA JP12 2 TRACEDATA(3) 20 19
STM32F407ZGT7A
C43 HEADER 2x10
C44 TDO_uC
4.7uF/16V TDO_uC GND Trace Debug+ETM Interface
100nF
1 X13 GND
2 TMS 2 1
JP13 V33
3 TCK 4 3
AGND GND
TDO 6 5
GND
1 TDI 8 7
N.C.
JP14 2 RST 10 9
GND
Header 2x5
JTAG Interface
1
2
JP15
3
RST
RST
1
TMS
JP16 2 TMS
TCK
TCK
TRACECLK
J11-J16 JTAG select TRACECLK
TRACEDATA(0)
TRACEDATA(0)
TRACEDATA(1)
TRACEDATA(1)
TRACEDATA(2)
TRACEDATA(2)
TRACEDATA(3)
TRACEDATA(3)
TDI_PLD1
TDO_PLD1
TDI_PLD2
TDO_PLD2
Fig. 6-22 Board Main 7/35 [26573_04_B31]

05 geprüft: Datum / Unterschrift
GND Stromlaufplan - wiring diagram Zeichn.-Nr. : Version : Druckdatum:
Benennung
22.03.2018
04 pvv16_148 Serienausgabe 21.03.18 beb si siehe DMS Stempel Controller_F4_Periph u. JTAG 026573_04_B31_01_01 03
03 aea14_001;pvv16_156 Erstausgabe
User_Button
U7A beb gezeichnet:
24.03.17 Datum / UnterschriftC194
TP43 R223Storz Medical AG / 2017 board main clp/slk1l1/slx-f20r1
U7B PCB-Nr. : Blatt : 7
100nF V33 V33
Änderung ISP_P1.25
34
TP40Datum
35 PA1
beb
PA0-WKUP(PA0) PB0DMS46Stempel
siehe
PB1 47
3k3
Schutzvermerk ISO 16016
+2.5VRef
141
Datei : Controller_Periph
142
PE0
u. JTAG.SchDoc
PE1
PF0
PF1
10
11
I2C2_SDA
I2C2_SCL 26571
I2C2_SDA I2C2: F-Ram, Counter, ADC Spannungen von : 36
ETH _RMII_REF_CLK PB1 I2C2_SCL
36 48 BOOT1 TP54 1 12 R270 R271
ETH_MDIO PA2 PB2-BOOT1(PB2) V33 V33 TRACECLK PE2 PF2
TP41 37 133 TP55 2 13 3k3 3k3
an_HVSetFeedback PA3 PB3(JTDO/TRACESWO) TDO_uC TRACEDATA(0) PE3 PF3 an_DistanceSensor1_fb
SPI3: PLD1/2 40 PA4 PB4(NJTRST) 134 TP56 3 PE4 PF4 14
SPI3_SSEL TRACEDATA(1) an_DistanceSensor2_fb
ctrl_IntTrig 41 PA5 PB5 135 TP57 4 PE5 PF5 15 war an_CushionOverTemp_fb V33 V33
ctrl_IntTrig CAN2-RX TRACEDATA(2)
TP42 42 136 CANOpen TP58 5 18
an_HVActualValue_b PA6 PB6 CAN2-TX TRACEDATA(3) PE6 PF6 war an_WaterTemperature_fb
6-19
R64
R65
3k3
3k3
43 PA7 PB7 137 I2C1_SDA 58 PE7 PF7 19

ETH_CRS_DV I2C1_SDA an_CushionPressure_fb R62 R63
PE7
EXTI_15
EXTI_11
I2C1: DAC -Water pumps 3k3 3k3
R60 100 PA8 PB8 139 I2C1_SCL PE8 59 PE8 PF8 20
Power Status of USB host power switch st_Sel_PLD_SPI I2C1_SCL an_AirbagPressure_fb
101 140 TIM4_CH4 PE9 60 21
USB_PWRD 0R PA9 PB9 PE9 PF9 an_WaterTempReservoir_fb
OTG_FS_ID 102 PA10 PB10 69 TP52 63 PE10 PF10 22
OTG FS -device mode 103
st_IrqPLD1 an_ExcessTemperature_fb
TP37
PA11 PB11 70 PE11 64 PE11 PF11 49 EXTI_11
USB_D- st_IrqPLD2 EXTI_11
104 PA12 PB12 73 TP44 PE12 65 PE12 PF12 50 to PLD1 to trigger ADC
USB_D+ SPI2_SSEL TP47 PE12 st_EINT0_Out2
R222 TP38 TMS 105 74 TP45 PE13 66 53
TMS PA13(JTMS-SWDIO) PB13 SPI2_SCK PE13 PE13 PF13 st_EINT1_Out2
0R TP39 TCK 109 75 TIM1_CH4 67 54 st_IrqPLD2 TP60
TCK PA14(JTCK-SWCLK) PB14 SPI / DAC - Set HV PE14 PF14
TDI_uC 110 PA15(JTDI) PB15 76 TP46 68 PE15 PF15 55 EXTI_15
TDI_uC SPI2_MOSI st_IrqPLD2 EXTI_15 to PLD1 to trigger ADC
PE for Host Power Switch
26 PC0 PD0 114 STATEGN 56 PG0 PH0-OSC_IN(PH0) 23
USB_PPWR CAN1_RX
GND 27 PC1 PD1 115 STATERD 57 PG1 PH1-OSC_OUT(PH1) 24 R230
ETH_MDC CAN1_TX
28 116 PD2 S2 STATEYE 87
USB_CONNECT PC2 PD2 PG2 V33 n.m. V33
29 PC3 PD3 117 PD3 0 ... F STATEBL 88 PG3 BOOT0 138 BOOT0
USB_UP_LED
44 PC4 PD4 118 1 TP48 89 PG4 TP59
ETH _RMII_RXD0
45 119 USART2_TX 2 TP49 90 25 R229
ETH _RMII_RXD1 PC5 PD5 USART2: RFID PG5 NRST RST R226 R453
96 122 USART2_RX 4 TP50 91 150R
st_DegaPumpRPM_flb
TIM8_CH1
PC6 PD6 PG6 n.m. 100k
TIM8_CH2 97 123 C 8 TP51 92 143
st_npn28cont_flb PC7 PD7 PD7 GND PG7 PDR_ON V33
98 77 USART3_TX HEX_Codeswitch 0-F 93 71 G1 BOOT1 TP61
PC8 PD8 USART3: Service Board RS232 and X24 PG8 VCAP_1
99 PC9 PD9 78 USART3_RX 124 PG9 VCAP_2 106
CLKOUT
111 79 PD10 125
SPI3_SCK PC10 PD10 PG10 C195 C196 R228 8MHz R454
112 PC11 PD11 80 PD11 126 PG11 100k C45 C46 n.m.
SPI3_MISO ETH _RMII_TX_EN
113 81 PD12 127 22pF 22pF
SPI3: PLD1/2
SPI3_MOSI PC12 PD12 PG12 2.2uF 2.2uF
7 PC13 PD13 82 PD13 128 PG13
PC13 ETH _RMII_TXD0
8 PC14-OSC32_IN(PC14) PD14 85 PD14 129 PG14
ETH _RMII_TXD1
G2 9 PC15-OSC32_OUT(PC15) PD15 86 PD15
ETH_RESET
TP53 132
PG15 GND GND GND GND GND GND
STM32F407ZGT7A STM32F407ZGT7A
n.m. X25
C47 C48 PD10 1
PD10
10pF 10pF PD11 2
PD11
PD12 3
PD12
ctrl_IntTrig 4
V33
GND GND I2C2_SCL 1 2 PD13 5
STATEGN
STATERD
U54 C151
STATEYE
STATEBL
C155 PD14 6
16 1
GND VCC C1+ I2C1_SCL 3 4 PD15 7
100nF
100nF C153
3
C1- JP9 PE7 8
2 4 C152 Beagle SPI/I2C Bus
GND V+ C2+ PE8 9
5 100nF R396 R397 R224 R225
100nF
C2- X20 PE9 10
220R
220R
220R
560R
1 PE11 11
14 T1out T1in 11 USART3_TX
COM_TxD T1 I2C2_SDA 1 2 2 PD2 12
GND PD2
3 PD3 13
7 T2out T2in 10 USART2_TX PD3
COM_TxD_RF T2 I2C1_SDA 3 4 4 TIM1_CH4 14
ye bl N.C. TIM1_CH4
gn 5 TIM4_CH4 15
13 R1in R1out 12 USART3_RX V70 rd V71 V72 JP10 TIM4_CH4
COM_RxD R1 6 EXTI_11 16
MISO_OUT N.C.
7 EXTI_15 17
8 R2in R2out 9 USART2_RX SCK_OUT
COM_RxD_RF R2 8 18
C154 MOSI_OUT V33
9 19
6 15 SSEL_OUT GND
GND V- GND 10 20
GND
100nF SP3232ECN
GND GNDGND GND GND GND Stiftleiste 10pol. Stiftleiste 20pol.
Debug COM
Benennung
22.03.2018
026573_04_B31_01_01 03
Fig. 6-23 Board Main 8/35 [26573_04_B31]
21.03.18 beb si

siehe DMS Stempel
Datum / Unterschrift Storz Medical AG / 2017
Controller_F4_Sign.
board main clp/slk1l1/slx-f20r1 PCB-Nr. : Blatt : 8
beb siehe DMS Stempel Schutzvermerk ISO 16016 26571
Wiring diagrams
Änderung Datum Datei : Controller_F4_144P.SchDoc von : 36
16 026 02 0918
Wiring diagrams
6-20
U_SWC_ECG_Trig U_SWC_HV_ist
SWC_ECG_Trig.SchDoc Sheet: 13 SWC_HV_ist.SchDoc Sheet: 11
st_ECG+ st_ECG+ st_ECGTrig st_ECGTrig
+24V
st_ECG- st_ECG- st_ECG_JP1 st_ECG_JP1 an_HVActualValue_b an_HVActualValue_b
6.3.4
st_ECG_JP3 st_ECG_JP3
st_ECG_JP2 st_ECG_JP2 an_HVActualValue
X27
1
2
U_SWC_CounterC_I2C GND
3 PCCU-CAN Adapter
SWC_CounterC_I2C.SchDoc U_SWC_HV_Soll
4
Sheet: 14 SWC_HV_Soll.SchDoc Sheet: 10
I2C2_SDA I2C2_SDA st_PowBad st_PowBad SPI2_SCK SPI2_SCK an_HVSetFeedback an_HVSetFeedback
Stiftleiste 4pol.
I2C2_SCL I2C2_SCL VBat VBat SPI2_SSEL SPI2_SSEL an_HVSetValue
ctrl_MCLR ctrl_MCLR ctrl_CCCRST_lb ctrl_CCCRST_lb SPI2_MOSI SPI2_MOSI
Rst Rst RST RST +2.5VRef +2.5VRef
+24V GND JP19
ctrl_MCLR_lb ctrl_MCLR_lb
st_CCTC_PLD st_CCTC_PLD
2
1
V25 CAN-L6
SMBJ24A
2
1
CAN-H6
U_SWC_I-O_CTU JP20
SWC_I-O_CTU.SchDoc Sheet: 12 X4
1
2
ctrl_ChargeON_lb 3
st_CCTC st_CCTC ctrl_ChargeON_lb
4
st_CTUOk st_CTUOk
Board Main (SWU)
st_CTUOk_lb 5
st_EOC st_EOC st_CTUOk_lb
6
st_FaultSwitch st_FaultSwitch
st_EOC_lb 7
st_HVmax st_HVmax st_EOC_lb
Fig. 6-24 Board Main 9/35 [26573_04_B31]

st_CCTC_lb 8
st_DivIncon st_DivIncon st_CCTC_lb
ctrl_HVTest_lb 9
st_CTUTemp st_CTUTemp ctrl_HVTest_lb
ctrl_CTUOn_lb 10
sw_Extend sw_Extend ctrl_CTUOn_lb
11
sw_Precise sw_Precise
12
ctrl_SwFocMotDir_lb 13
ctrl_SwFocMotDir_lb
an_HVActualValue 14 to CTU SLK2
ctrl_SwFocMotEn_lb 15 (to e-box_connect)
ctrl_HVTest ctrl_HVTest ctrl_SwFocMotEn_lb
st_FaultSwitch_lb 16
ctrl_PCCUOn ctrl_PCCUOn st_FaultSwitch_lb
17
ctrl_Trigger ctrl_Trigger
an_HVSetValue 18
ctrl_ChargeOn ctrl_ChargeOn
sw_Precise_lb 19
ctrl_SwFocMotDir ctrl_SwFocMotDir sw_Precise_lb
st_HVmax_lb 20
ctrl_SwFocMotEn ctrl_SwFocMotEn
ctrl_Trigger_lb 21
ctrl_CTUOn ctrl_CTUOn st_HVmax_lb
st_DivIncon_lb 22
ctrl_Trigger_lb
23
st_DivIncon_lb
st_CTUTemp_lb 24
st_CTUTemp_lb
sw_Extend_lb 25
sw_Extend_lb
26
ctrl_PCCUOn_lb
GND Stiftleiste 26pol.
ctrl_PCCUOn_lb

22.03.2018
04 pvv16_148 Serienausgabe 21.03.18 beb si siehe DMS Stempel Overview_SWC 026573_04_B31_01_01 03
Benennung

Änderung Datum beb siehe DMS Stempel Schutzvermerk ISO 16016 Datei : Overview_SWC.SchDoc 26571 von : 36
16 026 02 0918
V12
V28
Abgleich ! Z-Diode 2,7V
X19
R69 R72
n.m.
1 R68
2 91K(*) 909R 0.1% 44R2 0.1%
V33 V50
V-5
C59 C62
R67
AGND
U9B
C61 6
V29
10k AGND C64 7
4.7uF/16V AGND 10nF BSS84
100nF 5
8
U8 100nF
4
AGND
U9A OPA2277UA
VDD
2 1 TP62 3 - V-5
SPI2_SSEL CS OUT V27
3 DIN
1
SPI2_MOSI 2N7002
4 SCLK 2 C65
SPI2_SCK
5 + AGND AGND
FB AGND
GND
6 U10
+2.5VRef REF OPA2277UA
8
C60 TP64 100nF 4 -V REF 5
TP63
100nF MAX535BCUA C215
n.m.
7
R71 3 20mA=2,94V
AGND C63 IN+ R74
2 6
44R2 0.1% IN- OUT an_HVSetFeedback
AGND AGND 100nF
100R
3
V12 R70 TP65 8 RG
4mA=0,59V
2k55 0.1% 1 7 1 2
RG +V GND V33
R73 INA128UA C66 V30
BAT54S
21k5 0.1% AGND
AGND 100nF
V12
an_HVSetValue
Fig. 6-25 Board Main 10/35 [26573_04_B31]
Benennung
22.03.2018
04 pvv16_148 Serienausgabe 21.03.18 beb si siehe DMS Stempel SWC_HV_Soll 026573_04_B31_01_01 03
Uin: 0V - 10V
Änderung Datum beb siehe DMS Stempel V-5Schutzvermerk ISO 16016 Datei : SWC_HV_Soll.SchDoc 26571 von : 36
an_HVActualValue
C70
R78 AGND
4k75 0.1% 1 100nF U12
4
R80
8 LT1097
TP66 Uin: 0V - 2,96V 3
V- 6
an_HVActualValue_b
1k0 2 V+
C68 5 R85
3
R79 100R
7
2k0 0.1% 1nF 1 2

GND V33
AGND
V32
C71 100nF BAT54S
AGND AGND
V12
6-21
Fig. 6-26 Board Main 11/35 [26573_04_B31]
+24V
GND
C73
GND
10k
10k
10k
R100 R105
100nF
R103
V36 470R/1.5W
1
TP81
IN1 OUT1
20 TP84 R107
ctrl_PCCUOn ctrl_PCCUOn_lb
Vs
TP75 2 IN2 Datum 19 TP85

OUT2 / Unterschrift R111
05 ctrl_ChargeOn geprüft: ctrl_ChargeON_lb
Stromlaufplan - wiring diagram Zeichn.-Nr. :
Benennung
TP72 3
IN3sieheOUT3
18 TP86 R108
ctrl_HVTest ctrl_HVTest_lb
ctrl_CTUOn 21.03.18 beb si
TP73 4 IN4
DMS Stempel
OUT4 17 TP87 R112 SWC_HV_ist
ctrl_CTUOn_lb
026573_04
03 aea14_001;pvv16_156 Erstausgabe TP76
24.03.17
5
beb gezeichnet: IN5 Datum 16 TP88
OUT5 / Unterschrift R109 board mainctrl_SwFocMotDir_lb
clp/slk1l1/slx-f20r1 PCB-Nr. :
ctrl_SwFocMotDir Storz Medical AG / 2017
TP82 6 15 TP89 R113
Änderung ctrl_SwFocMotEn Datum beb
TP83 7
IN6sieheOUT6
DMS Stempel
14 TP90
Schutzvermerk
R110 ISO 16016 ctrl_SwFocMotEn_lb
Datei : SWC_HV_ist.SchDoc 26571
ctrl_Trigger IN7 OUT7 ctrl_Trigger_lb
Wiring diagrams
8 13
IN8 OUT8
3x1k0, 0.5W 3x1k0, 0.5W
GND
R101
R102
R104
R106
10k
10k
10k
10k
A2982SLW
12
GND GND
Fig. 6-27 Board Main 12a/35 [26573_04_B31]

V33
100nF C74
D1A
7
GND GND
14
V33 VCC
R90 8k2
1 2
st_HVmax_lb
16 026 02 0918 V33 1 st_HVmax
R91 1k5 1 R114 8k2
74AHC14
3 TP91
GND V33 sw_Extend_lb
TP74 2 V37
D1B
R92 8k2 R115 1k5 1
BAT54C 3 4
st_FaultSwitch_lb 1 st_FaultSwitch GND
TP72 3 IN3 OUT3
18 TP86 R108
ctrl_HVTest ctrl_HVTest_lb
TP73 4
IN4 OUT4
17 TP87 R112
ctrl_CTUOn ctrl_CTUOn_lb
TP76 5
IN5 OUT5 16 TP88 R109
ctrl_SwFocMotDir ctrl_SwFocMotDir_lb
TP82 6
IN6 OUT6
15 TP89 R113
ctrl_SwFocMotEn ctrl_SwFocMotEn_lb
TP83 7 IN7 OUT7
14 TP90 R110
ctrl_Trigger ctrl_Trigger_lb
8 13
IN8 OUT8
3x1k0, 0.5W 3x1k0, 0.5W
GND
R101
R102
R104
R106
10k
10k
10k
10k
A2982SLW
12
GND GND
V33
100nF C74
V33
D1A
7
GND GND
14 100nF C75
V33 VCC
R90 8k2
D2A
1 2 7
st_HVmax_lb
V33 1 st_HVmax GND
14
GND
V33 VCC
R91 1k5 1 R114 8k2
74AHC14
3 TP91 1 2
GND
TP74 2
V33 sw_Extend_lb
V37 1 sw_Extend
D1B
R92 8k2 R115 1k5 1
74AHC14
BAT54C 3 4 3
st_FaultSwitch_lb 1 st_FaultSwitch GND
2
V33
TP77 D2B
R93 1k5 R116 8k2
74AHC14
BAT54C 3 4
GND st_CTUTemp_lb
TP92
1 st_CTUTemp
D1C D1F
R94 8k2 R117 1k5
74AHC14
TP78 5 6 13 12
st_CCTC_lb 1 1 st_CCTC GND
V34
R95 1k5 1
74AHC14 74AHC14
3
GND V33 D2C
2 R118 8k2
D1D
R96 8k2 TP93 5 6
BAT54C 9 8
st_DivIncon_lb
V38 1 st_DivIncon
st_EOC_lb
TP79
1 st_EOC
R119 1k5 1
74AHC14
R97 1k5 3
74AHC14 GND V33
2
GND D2D
R120 8k2
D1E
R98 8k2 BAT54C 9 8
TP80 11 10
sw_Precise_lb
TP94 1 sw_Precise
st_CTUOk_lb
V35 1 st_CTUOk
R121 1k5
74AHC14
R99 1k5 1
74AHC14 GND
3
GND V33
2
BAT54C
Benennung
22.03.2018
026573_04_B31_01_01 03
Fig. 6-28 Board Main 12b/35 [26573_04_B31]
21.03.18 beb
Storz Medical AG / 2017
si siehe DMS Stempel
Datum / Unterschrift
SWC_I-O_CTU
Änderung Datum beb siehe DMS Stempel Schutzvermerk ISO 16016 Datei : SWC_I-O_CTU.SchDoc 26571 von : 36
U13
L11 C239
TP95 +24V
5
+Vout
DC +Vin
2
L12
C78 R123 4
0V -Vin
1
D3 C77 C79 C80
CRD S-103T / 10mA 1uF/35V 100nF
2k2, 0.5W 100nF DC 100nF 1uF/35V
ISF2424A 24V/42mA
Jumper Settings in ext. Connector:
3
st_ECG_JPx V40 V41 GND
R122
1 V42
1-2 = n.inv (sonstige) BC846B
1k0, 0.5W C76 LL4148 LL4148
2-3 = inv. (Schiller) V39
2
100nF LL4148
C240 V33
st_ECG+
100nF R124
st_ECG-
4k7 D2E
st_ECG_JP1
st_ECG_JP3 U14A
1 16 TP96 11 10
st_ECG_JP2 1 st_ECGTrig
2 15
74AHC14
ACPL247
GND
Fig. 6-29 Board Main 13/35 [26573_04_B31]
C81
GND V33
6-22 100nF Adr.: 0x52

8
U15
GND TP99
VBat
VCC
5 SDA A0 1
I2C2_SDA geprüft: Datum / Unterschrift Version :
05 Stromlaufplan - wiring diagram Zeichn.-Nr. : Druckdatum:
Benennung
22.03.2018
I2C2_SCL 21.03.18 beb si 6 siehe DMS Stempel
SCL A1 2
V33 SWC_ECG_Trig 026573_04_B31_01_01 03
7 siehe 3
beb WP A2
DMS Stempel R128 26571
GND
Änderung Datum Schutzvermerk ISO 16016 Datei : SWC_ECG_Trig.SchDoc von : 36

GND
GND GND
10R
G3
4
FM24V02
n.m.
GND
Auf DIL-Sockel, Storz Art.Nr.21659
V33
C82
V33 pre+24V
GND
U16 100nF
TP97 1 CNT1 VDD 14 R129
st_CCTC_PLD
V57 10k
2
2 13
GND CNT2 SCL
BAT54S 1,2V bei V24=19V
3 12 3 TP100
GND A0 SDA
4 11 R130
GND A1 NC
G5 680R
5 10 32.768 kHz
1
PFO NC RST
GND
6 RST PFI 9
Rst
GND
7 8
GND VBAK D2F D4A
R443
GND FM31L278 13 12 1 2
1 1 ctrl_CCCRST_lb
0R
14
st_PowBad V50 VCC
TP98 74AHC14 7
GND 74AHC14
Adr. Mem: 0x50 C83
S1 C228 GND
Adr. Cnt: 0x68
100nF
Reset TASTER 100nF
GND
GND GND
Wiring diagrams
D4B
3 4
ctrl_MCLR 1 ctrl_MCLR_lb
74AHC14
Comp. for Partlist:

Fig. 6-30 Board Main 14/35 [26573_04_B31]
B
zu G3
IC-Socke
05 geprüft: Datum / Unterschrift Stromlaufplan - wiring diagram Zeichn.-Nr. :

Benennung
04 pvv16_148 Serienausgabe 21.03.18 beb si siehe DMS Stempel SWC_CounterC_I2C 026573_04_B31_01_01

03 aea14_001;pvv16_156 Erstausgabe 24.03.17 beb gezeichnet: Datum / Unterschrift Storz Medical AG / 2017 board main clp/slk1l1/slx-f20r1 PCB-Nr. :
Änderung Datum beb siehe DMS Stempel Schutzvermerk ISO 16016 Datei : SWC_CounterC_I2C.SchDoc 26571
16 026 02 0918
U_CAN_Bus
X5
CAN_Bus.SchDoc Sheet: 16
1
V33
2
V50 +24V_Inl X12
CAN1_TX CAN1_TX 3
GND 1
CAN1_RX CAN1_RX 4
6.3.5
2
CAN-H1 CAN-H1 5
3
CAN-L1 CAN-L1 6
4
CAN-H2 CAN-H2 7
+24V_ExtPan 5
16 026 02 0918
CAN-L2 CAN-L2 8
CAN-H3 sw_Override1_s 24VRTN 6 Inline
CAN-H3 CAN-H3 9
CAN-L3 sw_Override2_s CAN-H5 7 (to e-box_connect)
CAN-L3 CAN-L3 10
ISP_P1.25 CAN-L5 8 (X233)
CAN-H4 CAN-H4 11
sw_ILRESS_s 9
CAN-L4 CAN-L4 COM_TxD 12 sw_ILRESS_s
CAN-H5 COM_TxD 10
CAN-H5 13
CAN-L5 USB_UP_LED
CAN-L5 COM_RxD 14
CAN-H6 COM_RxD Stiftleiste 10pol.
CAN-H6 CAN-H6 15
CAN-L6 GND
CAN-L6 CAN-L6 st_CardDetect 16
17 Board Service External Panel
USB_D- V54 GSOT05C
CAN-L3 18
X8
st_CardDetect_l st_CardDetect_l 19
st_CardDetect USB_CONNECT CAN-H6 1
st_CardDetect CAN-H3 20
CAN-L6 2
21
USB_D+ 3
I2C2_SCL_l 22 GND
1
2
CAN2-H1 4
23
U_Ethernet_COM USB_PPWR 5
24 ctrl_EnM1pld1_lb
Ethernet_COM.SchDoc Sheet: 18 st_CCTC_PLD_l CAN2-L1 6
25
USB_PWRD 7
I2C2_SDA_l 26 ctrl_EnM2pld1_lb
8 Aktormed
LED_LINK 27
+24VAktormed 9 (to e-box_connect)
28 +24V
ctrl_CCCRST_lb 10 (X226)
ETHOP_TX+ 29
11
30
2
1
ctrl_MCLR_lb 12
ETHOP_TX- 31
V53 13
LED_ACT 32
Fig. 6-31 Board Main 15/35 [26573_04_B31]

GSOT05C 14
ETH _RMII_RXD0 ETH _RMII_RXD0 ETHN_RX+ 33
ETH _RMII_RXD1 ETH _RMII_RXD1 ETHN_RX- 34
Stiftleiste 14pol.
ETH _RMII_REF_CLK ETH _RMII_REF_CLK
Stiftleiste 34pol.
24VRTN
V50 V50 V33 V33 V33 GND
F11
ETH_CRS_DV ETH_CRS_DV TP107
+24V
ETH_RESET ETH_RESET
R52 R53 R126 R125 0,4A SMD1210
ETH _RMII_TXD0 ETH _RMII_TXD0
4k7 4k7 1k5 1k5 Resettable
ETH _RMII_TXD1 ETH _RMII_TXD1
F15
ETH _RMII_TX_EN ETH _RMII_TX_EN SMD1812 X9
V12
ETH_MDIO ETH_MDIO 1
Board Main (I/O, CAN, LAN, SER)
1,5A Resettable
ETH_MDC ETH_MDC V66 TP106 2
TP102 3
LED_LINK I2C2_SDA_l I2C2_SDA V50
LED_LINK I2C2_SDA TP101 4
ETHOP_TX+ V33 Comm. Controller
ETHOP_TX+ BSS138 TP105 5
ETHOP_TX- GND
ETHOP_TX- Adr. CCC : 0x57 6
LED_ACT GND
LED_ACT V67 CAN-H6 TP103 7
ETHN_RX+
ETHN_RX+ CAN-L6 TP104 8
ETHN_RX- I2C2_SCL_l I2C2_SCL
ETHN_RX- I2C2_SCL
BSS138 Stiftleiste 8pol.
U_Other U_Other2 U_CAN_Bus2

Other.SchDoc Sheet: 19 Other2.SchDoc Sheet: 20 CAN_Bus2.SchDoc Sheet: 17
ctrl_laserPointer ctrl_laserPointer I2C2_SDA +2.5VRef +2.5VRef an_DistanceSensor1_fb an_DistanceSensor1_fb
I2C2_SDA CAN2-H1
I2C2_SCL an_DistanceSensor1 an_DistanceSensor1an_DistanceSensor2_fb an_DistanceSensor2_fb CAN2-TX CAN2-TX CAN2-H1
I2C2_SCL CAN2-L1
+3VRef +3VRef an_DistanceSensor2 an_DistanceSensor2 st_hsw45pld2 st_hsw45pld2 CAN2-RX CAN2-RX CAN2-L1
ctrl_hsw45pld2 ctrl_hsw45pld2 swp_hsw45pld2 swp_hsw45pld2
st_StateLaserPointer st_StateLaserPointer an_ExcessTemperature an_ExcessTemperature st_hsw25pld2 st_hsw25pld2
ctrl_hsw25pld2 ctrl_hsw25pld2 swp_hsw25pld2 swp_hsw25pld2
swp_LaserPointer swp_LaserPointer
an_ExcessTemperature_fb an_ExcessTemperature_fb

22.03.2018
04 pvv16_148 Serienausgabe 21.03.18 beb si siehe DMS Stempel Overview_ I_O_other, External Panel 026573_04_B31_01_01 03
Benennung

Änderung Datum beb siehe DMS Stempel Schutzvermerk ISO 16016 Datei : Overview_ I_O_other.SchDoc 26571 von : 36
Wiring diagrams
6-23
V33 V50
C112 C114
U27
GND GND
1 NC NC 20
100nF 100nF
U26 2 19
D8B GND ENB2 CANH2 CAN-H2 CAN-L1
1 VccA VccB 14 4
CAN-L2 CAN-H1
6 3 18
&
2
Text CANL2 R217 U30 U33
2 A1 B1 13 5 120R
st_CardDetect_l st_CardDetect PESD2CAN PESD2CAN
4 17
74HC08D Tx0 GND GND
3 A2 B2 12
CAN1_TX
5 16
GND GND GND GND
4 A3 B3 11
CAN1_RX
6 15
GND GND GND GND
TP108 5 A4 B4 10 TP109 GND GND
7 Rx0 CANL1 14
R425 6 9 R426
NC NC R218
62k n.m. 8 VREF1 CANH1 13
7
GND OE
8 120R
9 12
Rint VCC V50
TXB0104
V33 V50 10 11 C116 C188
GND ENB1 NC
100nF 10uF/10V
GND V33 AMIS-427X0
U28 GND GND
1 NC NC 20
2 19
D8C GND ENB2 CANH2 CAN-H4 CAN-L3
9
CAN-L4 CAN-H3
8 3 18
&
2
10 120R
4 17 PESD2CAN PESD2CAN
74HC08D Tx0 GND GND
5 16
GND GND GND GND
6 15
GND GND GND GND
GND GND
7 Rx0 CANL1 14
R220
8 VREF1 CANH1 13
120R
9 12
Rint VCC V50
10 11 C117 C189
GND ENB1 NC
100nF 10uF/10V
AMIS-427X0
U29 GND GND
1 NC NC 20
2 19
D8A GND ENB2 CANH2 CAN-H6 CAN-L5
1
CAN-L6 CAN-H5
3 3 18
&
2
2 120R
14 4 17 PESD2CAN PESD2CAN
V50 VCC Tx0 GND GND
7
GND
C115 5 16
GND GND GND GND
100nF 74HC08D
6 15
GND GND GND GND
GNDGND GND GND
7 Rx0 CANL1 14
R227
D8D 8 VREF1 CANH1 13
12
120R
11
& 9 12
13 Rint VCC V50
10 11 C118 C190
74HC08D GND ENB1 NC
100nF 10uF/10V
GND AMIS-427X0
GND GND
Benennung
22.03.2018
si siehe DMS Stempel CAN_Bus 026573_04_B31_01_01 03
Fig. 6-32 Board Main 16/35 [26573_04_B31]
21.03.18 beb
24.03.17 beb gezeichnet: Datum / Unterschrift Storz Medical AG / 2017 board main clp/slk1l1/slx-f20r1 PCB-Nr. : Blatt : 16
Änderung Datum beb siehe DMS Stempel Schutzvermerk ISO 16016 Datei : CAN_Bus.SchDoc 26571 von : 36
V33
C193
GND
100nF
N3
3
VDD
4
RX CAN2-H1
7
BUS_H CAN2-L1
1
5 R159 U62
V33 EN 120R
CAN2-RX
6 PESD2CAN
6-24
BUS_L
1
CAN2-TX TX
GND
RS
SN65HVD234
2
8
GND
GND
Fig. 6-33 Board Main 17/35 [26573_04_B31]

V33
V33
V33 R401 V33 R403 L9
49R9 49R9 RD- 1 16
ETHN_RX-
C149
R242 R243 C143
C147 2 15
1k5 10K GND
GND GND
100nF RD+ 3 14
100nF R402 R404 100nF ETHN_RX+
RN4 U53 49R9 49R9 TD- 6 11

ETHOP_TX-
1 8 12
MDIO C150
ETH_MDIO
2 7 13 RMII Mode 21 TD+ TP112 7 10
ETH_MDC MDC TXP GND
3 6
ETH _RMII_RXD1
4 5 7
RXD1/MODE1 TXN
20 TD- TP113 100nF TD+ 8 9
ETH _RMII_RXD0 ETHOP_TX+
8
22R RXD0/MODE0
RXP
23 RD+ TP114 LAN-Transformer
10
RXER/PHYAD0
RN5 RXN
22 RD- LED_Green
TP115 LED_LINK
1 8 16
ETH _RMII_TX_EN TXEN
2 7 17
TXD0
LED_Yellow
ETH _RMII_TXD0 LED_ACT
3 6 18
TXD1 TP116
ETH _RMII_TXD1
4 5 3 LED1_LINK/ACT
ETH_RESET LED1/REGOFF
22R 11
R237 CRS_DV/MODE2
V73 V74
ETH_CRS_DV 22R LED2/nINTSEL 2 LED2_SPEED TP117 LED1_LINK/ACT
14 BSS138 BSS138
ETH _RMII_REF_CLK 220R nINT/REFCLKO
R248 R249
R241 10K 10K
15
nRST
RMII_OSC_IN 5 XTAL1/CLKIN
24 TP111
RBIAS
V33 RMII_OSC_OUT 4
XTAL2
GND GND
6
VDDCR
1
L10 VDD2A
05 geprüft:
19 Datum / Unterschrift Stromlaufplan - wiring diagram Zeichn.-Nr. : Version : Druckdatum:
Benennung
TP110 VDD1A 22.03.2018

04 pvv16_148 Serienausgabe 3.3uH/80mA 21.03.18 beb
9 si VDDIO siehe DMS StempelGND_EP 25
CAN
R247 Motor Controller 026573_04_B31_01_01 03
12.1K
03 aea14_001;pvv16_156 Erstausgabe 24.03.17 beb gezeichnet:
LAN8720A Datum / Unterschrift C203
Storz Medical AG / 2017C204 board main clp/slk1l1/slx-f20r1 PCB-Nr. : Blatt : 17
Änderung C197 C199 C201DatumC202
beb siehe DMS Stempel 1nF
1uF
Datei : CAN_Bus2.SchDoc 26571 von : 36
100nF 10uF/10V 100nF 100nF
GND GND GND GND
GND GND GND GND
Wiring diagrams
V33
C198 C200
100nF 10uF/10V
GND GND
R244 G4 R246
RMII_OSC_OUT RMII_OSC_IN
22R 25MHz 22R
R245
1M
C216 C210 C211
22pF 22pF 10pF
GND GND GND
Fig. 6-34 Board Main 18/35 [26573_04_B31]

Benennung
22.03.2018
04 pvv16_148 Serienausgabe 21.03.18 beb si siehe DMS Stempel Ethernet_com 026573_04_B31_01_01 03
Änderung Datum beb siehe DMS Stempel Schutzvermerk ISO 16016 Datei : Ethernet_COM.SchDoc 26571 von : 36
16 026 02 0918
6.3.6 Board Main (others)
V33 V50
U56 V33 V33 V33 V50 V33

R406 2 7 V61 V62
IN1 OUT1 swp_LaserPointer
10K C166 BAT54C
3
+5V / 500mA
3 R433 R434
IN2 GND
6 2k0 0.1% 909R 0.1%
OUT2 BAT54C
TP118 4 100nF nom.2,50V TP124 nom.2.532V TP126
16
ctrl_laserPointer EN1 U61
1
5 EN2
C157 R435 R436
VDD
C159 13 5 C168 2k0 0.1% C169 3k0 0.1%
I2C2_SCL SCL AIN0
1 8 10uF/10V 100nF 14 6 100nF 100nF
GND OC I2C2_SDA SDA AIN1
7
AIN2 V12 pre+24V
TPS2080 1 8
+3VRef REF AIN3 GND GND GND GND
Host Power Switch
AIN4 9
2 10
NC AIN5 R437 R438
GND GND GND 3 11
NC AIN6 4k75 0.1% 21k5 0.1%
TP120 4 12
st_StateLaserPointer NC AIN7
GND
nom.2,44V TP125 nom.2,55V TP127
C167
100nF R439 R440
R407 C170 C171
MAX11609 1k21 0.1% 2k55 0.1%
15
2K2 100nF 100nF (Zuätzlicher Wert)
V50 V50 +24V V12P GND GND GND GND
V33 GND GND GND GND
Adr.: 0x33
R408 V60 V56
4k7
R405 SS14 SS14
10k
5
6
7
8
U55 Q13
1 Hyst TP121 2 IN Vbb X18
OS 5 TP119 OUT 3 1
2 GND 4 ST
2 Fan
4 GND
V+ C158 R429 10k 0.1%
3
3 CON2, (3.81mm)
Vtemp
V55 ISP752R
1
1
C156 BC846B V50
LM26 1uF/35V C174
100nF
SW on 45°C GND
2
8
R428 100nF
GND GND GND GND GND GND 2 R430 1k0
V-5 V+ 1 TP123
20k 0.1% 3 V-
U60A
LM358A C172
4
Belastung mit max. R=4M0hm V33 R431 100nF
Messwert: 22,6°C= 1,86V 6k8
3
Rechenwert: 50°C= 1,563V, mit Formel 1,5851V

Rechenwert: 0°C = 2,105V, mit Formel 2,1261V V63
BAT54C GND GND GND
U60B
6 R432 1k0
2
7 TP122 Comp. for Partlist: Comp. for PCB:

5 Ref.1 Ref.2
STORZ MEDICAL
C173 Ma1 Ma2 Ma3
100nF zu JP2 Logo
LM358A PCB
Jumper Pilot Hole Pilot Hole
GND 26571 Fiducial Fiducial Fiducial Ref.3
zu JP9 TP67 TP68 TP69 TP70
Vtemp = (-3.479×10-6×(T-30)2) + (-1.082×10-2×(T-30)) + 1.8015V
Jumper SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4 SC5 SC6 SC7
Pilot Hole
zu JP10 Ref.4
Fig. 6-35 Board Main 19/35 [26573_04_B31] n.m.= not mounted/fitted Jumper
GND GND GND GND GND GND GND Pilot Hole

Benennung
22.03.2018
04 pvv16_148 Serienausgabe 21.03.18 beb si siehe DMS Stempel Other 026573_04_B31_01_01 03
GND +24V_WA
Änderung Datum beb siehe DMS Stempel Schutzvermerk ISO 16016 Datei : Other.SchDoc 26571 von : 36
R250
10k V50
C214
5
6
7
8
Q17
TP128 2
IN Vbb AGND
ctrl_hsw45pld2
3
OUT swp_hsw45pld2 8 100nF
TP129 4
st_hsw45pld2 ST
GND 2 U64A R266
V+ 1
an_ExcessTemperature_fb
6-25
1
R251 ISP752R 3 V-
an_ExcessTemperature
2K2 LM358A 100R
GND TP132
4
V33 max. 3.2V

GND +24V_WA AGND
2
R265
1 V78
R450 BC856B
10k 4k7
5
6
7
8
Q18
TP265 2 Vbb
ctrl_hsw25pld2 IN
OUT
3 AGND
swp_hsw25pld2
TP266 4
st_hsw25pld2 ST
GND V50
1
R451 ISP752R C209

2K2
AGND
GND
100nF
V33
8
U63A
2 LM358A R263
V+ 1 TP130
3 V-
an_DistanceSensor1 100R max. 3.2V
2
R261
V75
4
C205 C207 1
R259 BC856B
47uF/16V 100nF AGND 4k7
150R 0.1%
3
AGND
AGND AGND AGND

+2.5VRef
U63B
6 R264
7 TP131
5
an_DistanceSensor2 100R max. 3.2V
LM358A
2
C206 C208 R262

R260 1 V76
47uF/16V 100nF BC856B
150R 0.1% 4k7
3
Wiring diagrams
AGND AGND AGND AGND

Benennung
Fig. 6-36 Board Main 20/35 [26573_04_B31]

04 pvv16_148 Serienausgabe 21.03.18 beb si siehe DMS Stempel Other2 026573_04_B31_01_01 03
22.03.2018
Änderung Datum beb siehe DMS Stempel Schutzvermerk ISO 16016 Datei : Other2.SchDoc 26571 von : 36
16 026 02 0918
6.3.7 Board Main (Logic)
U_Overview_Water-Air
Overview_Water-Air.SchDoc Sheet: 25
an_ExcessTemperature an_ExcessTemperature an_CushionPressure_fb an_CushionPressure_fb
an_WaterTempReservoir_fb an_WaterTempReservoir_fban_AirbagPressure_fb an_AirbagPressure_fb
an_DistanceSensor2 an_DistanceSensor2 st_npn28cont_flb st_npn28cont_flb
an_DistanceSensor1 an_DistanceSensor1 st_DegaPumpRPM_flb st_DegaPumpRPM_flb
swp_hsw45pld2 swp_hsw45pld2 st_ResCushionOverTemp_l
COM_RxD_RF COM_RxD_RF st_ByPassValve
COM_TxD_RF COM_TxD_RF st_AirbagValveSelect
I2C1_SCL I2C1_SCL st_AirbagValveA
I2C1_SDA I2C1_SDA st_CoolingPump
+2.5VRef +2.5VRef sw_CushionOverTemp_s
+5VRef +5VRef ctrl_CircPumpPWR Rst
U_MachXO2_Power swp_hsw25pld2 swp_hsw25pld2 ctrl_AirbagValveSelect EXTI_15
MachXO2_Power.SchDoc Sheet: 24
ctrl_AirbagCompressor EXTI_11
ctrl_ByPassValve TIM4_CH4
ctrl_CircPumpLeft TIM1_CH4
sw_ResCushionOverTemp
sw_ResCushionOverTemp ctrl_CircPumpRight TMS
st_DegaValve ctrl_AirbagValveA TCK
st_DegaAirValve ctrl_AirbagValveB st_+24V_Periph._ok
st_WaterRadiator ctrl_CoolingPump st_V12PF_ok
st_CircPumpPWR ctrl_DegaValve ctrl_hsw25pld2
U_MachXO2_Logic2
sw_DegaMax_flb ctrl_DegaAirValve st_hsw25pld2
MachXO2_Logic2.SchDoc Sheet: 23
sw_DegaMin_flb ctrl_DegaPumpLeft
st_AirbagCompressor ctrl_DegaPumpRight TDI_PLD2 TDI_PLD2
st_AirbagValveB ctrl_WaterRadiator ctrl_hsw45pld2 ctrl_hsw45pld2
U_Overview_Contr.Panel
st_+24V_Periph._ok
st_V12PF_ok
ctrl_hsw25pld2
st_hsw25pld2
ctrl_WaterHeating st_hsw45pld2 st_hsw45pld2
Overview_Contr.Panel.SchDoc Sheet: 30
TDO_PLD2 TDO_PLD2
U_MachXO2_Logic1
st_ECG+ st_ECG+ PE12 PE12
MachXO2_Logic1.SchDoc Sheet: 22
st_ECG- st_ECG- PE13 PE13
st_ECG_JP1 st_ECG_JP1 st_AirbagValveB ctrl_WaterHeating PC13 PC13
st_ECG_JP3 st_ECG_JP3 sw_ResCushionOverTemp st_AirbagCompressor ctrl_WaterRadiator st_+24V_Motion1_on st_+24V_Motion1_on
st_ECG_JP2 st_ECG_JP2 sw_DegaMin_flb ctrl_DegaPumpRight st_+24V_Motion2_on st_+24V_Motion2_on
sw_DegaMax_flb ctrl_DegaPumpLeft RST RST
CAN-H1 CAN-H1
st_CircPumpPWR ctrl_DegaAirValve st_ResCushionOverTemp_l PD10 PD10
CAN-L1 CAN-L1
st_WaterRadiator ctrl_DegaValve st_ByPassValve PD11 PD11
CAN-H2 CAN-H2
st_DegaAirValve ctrl_CoolingPump st_AirbagValveSelect PD12 PD12
CAN-L2 CAN-L2 sw_npn36pld12_s
sw_npn36pld12_s st_DegaValve ctrl_AirbagValveB st_AirbagValveA ISP_P1.25 ISP_P1.25
CAN-H3 CAN-H3 sw_npn35pld2
sw_npn35pld2 ctrl_AirbagValveA st_CoolingPump st_+24V_Motion_ok st_+24V_Motion_ok
CAN-L3 CAN-L3 TDI_PLD1 TDI_PLD1
ctrl_CircPumpRight st_+24V_ContPan_ok st_+24V_ContPan_ok
CAN-H4 CAN-H4 TDO_PLD1 TDO_PLD1
ctrl_CircPumpLeft st_+24V_ExtPan_ok st_+24V_ExtPan_ok
CAN-L4 CAN-L4
sw_pnp09pld1_l sw_pnp09pld1_l ctrl_ByPassValve st_+24V_Pos_ok st_+24V_Pos_ok
sw_SwRelease1_l
sw_SwRelease1_l sw_SwRelease1S_sl sw_SwRelease1S_sl ctrl_AirbagCompressor st_+24V_Inl_ok st_+24V_Inl_ok
sw_SwRelease2_l
sw_SwRelease2_l sw_SwRelease2S_sl sw_SwRelease2S_sl ctrl_AirbagValveSelect st_+24V_WA_ok st_+24V_WA_ok
sw_SwRelease3_l
sw_SwRelease3_l sw_SwRelease3S_sl sw_SwRelease3S_sl ctrl_CircPumpPWR st_+24V_(Board)_ok st_+24V_(Board)_ok
sw_SwRelease4_l
Switch A2 sw_SwRelease4_l sw_SwRelease4S_sl sw_SwRelease4S_sl Rst Rst PD2 PD2
sw_SwRelease5_l
sw_SwRelease5_l sw_SwRelease5S_sl sw_SwRelease5S_sl sw_CushionOverTemp_s sw_CushionOverTemp_s PD3 PD3
sw_Override2_sl
sw_Override2_sl sw_EmHalt4_l sw_EmHalt4_l TMS TMS PB1 PB1
sw_XrayAP_l
sw_XrayAP_l sw_EmHalt5_l sw_EmHalt5_l TCK TCK COM_TxD COM_TxD
ctrl_hsw47pld2_lb
ctrl_hsw47pld2_lb sw_Override1_sl sw_Override1_sl JTAGEN JTAGEN COM_RxD COM_RxD
ctrl_hsw47pld2
ctrl_hsw47pld2
st_CollisionXrayS_sl
st_CollisionXrayS_sl ctrl_HVTest ctrl_HVTest
sw_EmHalt1S_sl
sw_EmHalt1S_sl ctrl_hsw43pld1 ctrl_hsw43pld1 ctrl_ChargeOn ctrl_ChargeOn
sw_EmHalt2S_sl
sw_EmHalt2S_sl ctrl_hsw43pld1_lb ctrl_hsw43pld1_lb ctrl_CTUOn ctrl_CTUOn
sw_EmHalt3S_sl
sw_EmHalt3S_sl PldRes1.2 PldRes1.2 ctrl_PCCUOn ctrl_PCCUOn
sw_EmHalt4S_sl
sw_EmHalt4S_sl PldRes1.3 PldRes1.3 ctrl_SwFocMotDir ctrl_SwFocMotDir
sw_EmHalt5S_sl
sw_EmHalt5S_sl ctrl_SwFocMotEn ctrl_SwFocMotEn
sw_pnp21pld12_sl
sw_pnp21pld12_sl st_EOC st_EOC ctrl_hswM1pld2 ctrl_hswM1pld2
sw_Unlock1_l
Switch A 1 u 2 sw_Unlock1_l st_CardDetect_l st_CardDetect_l EXTI_15 EXTI_15 ctrl_hswM2pld2 ctrl_hswM2pld2
sw_CpConnect1_l
sw_CpConnect1_l st_CCTC st_CCTC EXTI_11 EXTI_11 st_IrqPLD2 st_IrqPLD2
sw_Unlock2_l
sw_Unlock2_l st_CollisionXray st_ECGTrig st_ECGTrig TIM4_CH4 TIM4_CH4 st_EINT0_Out2 st_EINT0_Out2
sw_CpConnect2_l
sw_CpConnect2_l sw_XrayAP ctrl_IntTrig ctrl_IntTrig TIM1_CH4 TIM1_CH4 st_EINT1_Out2 st_EINT1_Out2
sw_Unlock3_l
sw_Unlock3_l sw_Override1_s st_PowBad st_PowBad ctrl_EINT0 ctrl_EINT0 PD7 PD7
sw_CpConnect3_l sw_SwRelease1_l
sw_CpConnect3_l sw_Override2_s SPI3_SSEL SPI3_SSEL ctrl_EINT1 ctrl_EINT1 sw_SwRelease1_l
sw_Unlock4_l sw_SwRelease2_l
sw_Unlock4_l sw_pnp21pld12_s st_Sel_PLD_SPI st_Sel_PLD_SPI ctrl_csPLD2 ctrl_csPLD2 sw_SwRelease2_l
sw_CpConnect4_l st_CollisionXrayS_sl sw_SwRelease3_l
sw_CpConnect4_l st_CollisionXrayS_sl st_CollisionXrayS_sl sw_SwRelease3_l
sw_Unlock5_l sw_EmHalt1S_sl sw_SwRelease4_l
sw_Unlock5_l sw_pnp09pld1 sw_EmHalt1S_sl sw_EmHalt1S_sl sw_SwRelease4_l
sw_CpConnect5_l sw_EmHalt2S_sl sw_SwRelease5_l
sw_CpConnect5_l st_EmHaltFromXray ctrl_hswM1_2pld1 ctrl_hswM1_2pld1 sw_EmHalt2S_sl sw_EmHalt2S_sl sw_SwRelease5_l Switch A2
st_EmHaltFromXrayS_sl sw_EmHalt3S_sl sw_Override2_sl
st_EmHaltFromXrayS_sl ctrl_EnM1pld1_lb ctrl_EnM1pld1_lb sw_EmHalt3S_sl sw_EmHalt3S_sl sw_Override2_sl
sw_EmHalt4S_sl sw_XrayAP_l
ctrl_EnM2pld1_lb ctrl_EnM2pld1_lb sw_EmHalt4S_sl sw_EmHalt4S_sl sw_XrayAP_l
sw_EmHalt5S_sl ctrl_hsw47pld2_lb
ctrl_Trigger ctrl_Trigger sw_EmHalt5S_sl sw_EmHalt5S_sl ctrl_hsw47pld2_lb
U_Overview_Position sw_pnp21pld12_sl ctrl_hsw47pld2
ctrl_MCLR ctrl_MCLR sw_pnp21pld12_sl sw_pnp21pld12_sl ctrl_hsw47pld2
Overview_Position.SchDoc Sheet: 33 sw_Unlock1_l
ctrl_laserPointer ctrl_laserPointer sw_Unlock1_l sw_Unlock1_l
sw_CpConnect1_l Switch A 1 u 2 sw_npn35pld2_l
st_EmHaltFromXray st_IrqPLD1 st_IrqPLD1 sw_CpConnect1_l sw_CpConnect1_l sw_npn35pld2_l
sw_Unlock2_l sw_npn20pld2_sl
sw_pnp09pld1 st_CCTC_PLD st_CCTC_PLD sw_Unlock2_l sw_Unlock2_l sw_npn20pld2_sl
sw_CpConnect2_l st_CollisionXray_l
sw_pnp21pld12_s sw_CpConnect2_l sw_CpConnect2_l st_CollisionXray_l
sw_npn36pld12_s sw_Unlock3_l sw_npn37pld2_l
sw_npn36pld12_s sw_Override2_s sw_Override2_s sw_Unlock3_l sw_Unlock3_l sw_npn37pld2_l
sw_npn35pld2 sw_CpConnect3_l sw_ILREC_l
sw_npn35pld2 sw_Override1_s sw_Override1_s sw_CpConnect3_l sw_CpConnect3_l sw_ILREC_l
sw_Unlock4_l sw_npn16pld2_l Switch B 2
swp_LaserPointer swp_LaserPointer sw_XrayAP sw_Unlock4_l sw_Unlock4_l sw_npn16pld2_l
sw_CpConnect4_l sw_npn38pld2_l
sw_ILRESS_s sw_ILRESS_s st_CollisionXray sw_CpConnect4_l sw_CpConnect4_l sw_npn38pld2_l
sw_Unlock5_l sw_npn10pld2_sl
ctrl_PCCUOn_lb ctrl_PCCUOn_lb st_EmHaltFromXray_l st_EmHaltFromXray_l sw_Unlock5_l sw_Unlock5_l sw_npn10pld2_sl
sw_CpConnect5_l sw_npn03pld2_sl
sw_npn15pld1_sl sw_npn15pld1_sl sw_CpConnect5_l sw_CpConnect5_l sw_npn03pld2_sl
st_EmHaltFromXrayS_sl sw_npn08pld2_sl
sw_npn01pld1_sl sw_npn01pld1_sl st_EmHaltFromXrayS_sl st_EmHaltFromXrayS_sl sw_npn08pld2_sl
sw_npn27pld12_sl sw_npn14pld2_sl
sw_npn04pld1_sl sw_npn04pld1_sl sw_npn27pld12_sl sw_npn27pld12_sl sw_npn14pld2_sl
sw_npn07pld1_sl sw_npn07pld1_sl sw_npn36pld12_sl sw_npn36pld12_sl sw_npn06pld2_sl
sw_npn25pld12_sl
sw_npn02pld1_sl sw_npn02pld1_sl sw_npn25pld12_sl sw_npn25pld12_sl st_StateLaserPointer st_StateLaserPointer
sw_npn26pld12_sl
sw_npn05pld1_sl sw_npn05pld1_sl sw_npn26pld12_sl sw_npn26pld12_sl st_FaultSwitch st_FaultSwitch
sw_npn03pld2_sl Switch B 1 u 2 sw_npn28pld1_sl
sw_npn03pld2_sl st_CCTC_PLD_l st_CCTC_PLD_l sw_npn28pld1_sl sw_npn28pld1_sl st_HVmax st_HVmax
sw_npn20pld2_sl MISO_OUT sw_npn22pld12_sl
sw_npn20pld2_sl MISO_OUT MISO_OUT sw_npn22pld12_sl sw_npn22pld12_sl st_DivIncon st_DivIncon
SPI3_MOSI
sw_ILREC_l sw_npn28pld1_sl MOSI_OUT sw_npn11pld12_sl
SPI3_SCK
CLKOUT
sw_ILREC_l sw_npn28pld1_sl MOSI_OUT MOSI_OUT sw_npn11pld12_sl sw_npn11pld12_sl st_CTUTemp st_CTUTemp
SPI3_MOSI
SPI3_MISO
sw_npn16pld2_l sw_npn25pld12_sl SCK_OUT sw_npn13pld12_sl

SPI3_SCK
MISO2
CLKOUT
sw_npn16pld2_l sw_npn25pld12_sl SCK_OUT SCK_OUT sw_npn13pld12_sl sw_npn13pld12_sl st_CTUOk st_CTUOk

sw_npn38pld2_l sw_npn26pld12_sl SSEL_OUT sw_npn24pld12_sl
MISO2
Switch B 2 sw_npn38pld2_l sw_npn26pld12_sl SSEL_OUT SSEL_OUT sw_npn24pld12_sl sw_npn24pld12_sl sw_Extend sw_Extend

sw_npn10pld2_sl sw_npn22pld12_sl SPI2_SSEL sw_ILRESS_sl
sw_npn10pld2_sl sw_npn22pld12_sl SPI2_SSEL SPI2_SSEL sw_ILRESS_sl sw_ILRESS_sl sw_Precise sw_Precise
sw_npn06pld2_sl sw_npn11pld12_sl SPI2_SCK sw_npn39pld12_sl
sw_npn06pld2_sl sw_npn11pld12_sl SPI2_SCK SPI2_SCK sw_npn39pld12_sl sw_npn39pld12_sl
sw_npn08pld2_sl sw_npn13pld12_sl SPI2_MOSI
sw_npn08pld2_sl sw_npn13pld12_sl SPI2_MOSI SPI2_MOSI
sw_npn35pld2_l sw_npn27pld12_sl SPI3_SCK
sw_npn35pld2_l sw_npn27pld12_sl SPI3_SCK
st_CollisionXray_l sw_npn24pld12_sl SPI3_MOSI
st_CollisionXray_l sw_npn24pld12_sl SPI3_MOSI
sw_npn37pld2_l sw_ILRESS_sl CLKOUT
sw_npn37pld2_l sw_ILRESS_sl SPI3_MISO CLKOUT
sw_npn39pld12_sl MISO2
sw_npn39pld12_sl
Switch B 1 u 2
05 beb geprüft: Datum / Unterschrift Stromlaufplan - wiring diagram Zeichn.-Nr. : Version : Druckdatum:
Benennung
22.03.2018 Size:
04 pvv16_148 Serienausgabe 21.03.18 beb si siehe DMS Stempel Overview_Logic 026573_04_B31_01_01 03
Fig. 6-37 Board Main 21/35 [26573_04_B31] 03 aea14_001;pvv16_156 Erstausgabe
Änderung
Datum beb
siehe DMS Stempel
board main clp/slk1l1/slx-f20r1
Datei : Overview_Logic.SchDoc
PCB-Nr. :
26571
Blatt : 21
von : 36
A3
6-26 U36A
109
U36B
73
INPUT U36F
1
PT28D, DONE PR19B (DQ1)
BANK 5
st_CardDetect_l sw_CpConnect5_l PL3A, L_GPLLT_FB ctrl_DegaPumpLeft

110 74 2
PT28C, INITN st_Sel_PLD_SPI PR19A (DQ1) sw_CpConnect4_l PL3B, L_GPLLC_FB ctrl_DegaPumpRight
111 75 3
PT27B ctrl_WaterHeating PR18B (DQ1) sw_CpConnect3_l PL4A, L_GPLLT_IN ctrl_CircPumpRight
PT27A
112 V33 PR18A (DQ1)
76
PL4B, L_GPLLC_IN
4
st_EOC sw_CpConnect2_l ctrl_CircPumpLeft
113 77 5 ctrl_EnM1pld1
PT25B ctrl_MCLR PR16B (DQ1) sw_CpConnect1_l PL6A, PCLKT5_0
114 78 6
PT25A ctrl_CircPumpPWR PR16A (DQ1) sw_Unlock5_l PL6B, PCLKC5_0 ctrl_EINT0
115 R398 81 9
PT24B st_CCTC PR15B (DQ1) sw_Unlock2_l PL7A ctrl_DegaAirValve
117 3k3 82 10
PT24A sw_DegaMin_flb PR15A (DQ1) sw_Unlock4_l PL7B MISO2
119 83 11
PT23D, PROGRAMN st_PowBad PR14B (DQ1) sw_Unlock3_l PL8A ctrl_CoolingPump
120 84 12 ctrl_EnM2pld1
PT23C, JTAGENB/MD6/TDIR JTAGEN PR14A (DQ1) sw_Unlock1_l PL8B
121 85
PT21B sw_SwRelease3S_sl PR13B (DQS1N) sw_EmHalt2S_sl
PT21A
122
PR13A (DQS1)
86 LCMXO2-4000HC-4TG144C
sw_SwRelease1S_sl 1 sw_npn25pld12_sl
125 87 U36E
PT20D, SDA/IO3/MD3/ATB_FORCE/PCLKC0_0/TDOT sw_SwRelease2S_sl JP5 2 PLD JTAG off PR10D SPI3_MOSI
126 89 13
BANK 4
PT20C, SCL/IO2/MD2/ATB_SENSE/PCLKT0_0 CLKOUT PR10C sw_npn26pld12_sl PL9A st_DegaValve

127 91 14
PT18B, PCLKC0_1 ctrl_IntTrig PR10B, PCLKC1_0 (DQ0) sw_npn24pld12_sl PL9B ctrl_DegaValve
128 92 15
PT18A, PCLKT0_1 sw_SwRelease4S_sl PR10A, PCLKT1_0 (DQ0) sw_EmHalt1S_sl PL10A st_AirbagValveB
130 93 17
PT15D, TMS TMS PR9B (DQS0N) sw_npn28pld1_sl PL10B ctrl_AirbagValveB
PT15C, TCK/TEST_CLK 131 GND PR9A (DQS0) 94 PL10C, PCLKT4_0 19
TCK sw_ILRESS_sl ctrl_AirbagValveA
PT14B 132 PR8B (DQ0) 95 PL10D, PCLKC4_0 20
sw_EmHalt4_l st_CollisionXrayS_sl st_AirbagCompressor
PT14A 133 PR8A (DQ0) 96 PL13A 21
sw_EmHalt5_l sw_EmHalt4S_sl sw_Override1_sl
136 97 22
PT13D, TDI/MD7 TDI_PLD1 PR6B (DQ0) sw_EmHalt5S_sl PL13B PldRes1.2
137 98 23
PT13C, TDO TDO_PLD1 PR6A (DQ0) sw_npn11pld12_sl PL14A PldRes1.3
PT11B 138 PR5B (DQ0) 99 PL14B 24
sw_npn07pld1_sl sw_npn13pld12_sl ctrl_AirbagCompressor
BANK 0
139 100
PT11A ctrl_Trigger PR5A (DQ0) sw_npn22pld12_sl
PT10B 140 PR4C 103 LCMXO2-4000HC-4TG144C
sw_npn01pld1_sl sw_pnp21pld12_sl
U36D
BANK 1
141 104
PT10A sw_npn15pld1_sl PR3B, R_GPLLC_IN (DQ0) sw_EmHalt3S_sl
142 105 25
PT9B PR3A, R_GPLLT_IN (DQ0)
BANK 3
sw_npn05pld1_sl sw_npn39pld12_sl PL16A ctrl_laserPointer

PT9A 143 PR2B, R_GPLLC_FB (DQ0) 106 PL16B 26
sw_npn02pld1_sl st_EmHaltFromXrayS_sl sw_SwRelease5S_sl
PR2A, R_GPLLT_FB (DQ0) 107 PL17A, PCLKT3_0 27
sw_npn27pld12_sl
LCMXO2-4000HC-4TG144C PL17B, PCLKC3_0
28
st_IrqPLD1
LCMXO2-4000HC-4TG144C PL18D
31
ctrl_AirbagValveSelect
PL19A 32
GPIO Pin's GPIO Pin's see PLD2 st_EmHaltFromXray_l
V33 V33 PL19B
33
ctrl_ByPassValve
SPI Pin's U36C PL20A
34
ctrl_WaterRadiator
38 35
System Pin's PB3A SPI3_SCK PL20B st_WaterRadiator
R233 R234 39
BANK 2
PB3B SPI3_SSEL
3k3 3k3 D4F 40 LCMXO2-4000HC-4TG144C
PB4A, CSSPIN/MD4/TDOB MISO_OUT
74AHC14 PB4B
41
MOSI_OUT
42
PB7A sw_npn36pld12_sl
ctrl_EnM1pld1 13 12 43
1 ctrl_EnM1pld1_lb PB7B SCK_OUT
44
TP134 PB9A, MCLK/CCLK SSEL_OUT
45 st_CCTC_PLD
PB9B, SO/SPISO/IO1/MD1/TDIL
ctrl_EnM2pld1 TP133 1 2 47
1 ctrl_EnM2pld1_lb PB10A ctrl_hswM1_2pld1
48 ctrl_hsw43pld1
PB10B EXTI_15
14 49 V33
V50 VCC PB13A, PCLKT2_0/INTEST_OVER EXTI_11
7 50
GND PB13B, PCLKC2_0 TIM4_CH4
C119 52 R231
PB15A st_ECGTrig V50 ctrl_hsw43pld1
GND D7A PB15B
54 3k3
TIM1_CH4
100nF 74AHC14 PB20A, PCLKT2_1/INTEST_OVER
55
SPI2_MOSI
PB20B, PCLKC2_1 56 GNDJP17 R236
SPI2_SCK
GND PB21A 57 1 1k0
SPI2_SSEL
SPI select
PB21B 58 2
PB23A 59 1
sw_pnp09pld1_l TP136 U14D
60 2
st_CCTC_PLD PB23B D7C 7 10
61 ctrl_hsw43pld1_lb
PB24A sw_CushionOverTemp_s JP18
D7B D7F
Wiring diagrams
PB24B 62
ctrl_EINT1 5 6 8 9
PB24D 63
sw_npn04pld1_sl
R232 TP135 1
st_CCTC_PLD 3
1 4 13 12 65 3k3
R235 ACPL247
1 st_CCTC_PLD_l PB27A st_DegaAirValve
PB27B 67
st_CircPumpPWR 10k 74AHC14 24VRTN
68
R421 74AHC14 74AHC14 PB29A sw_DegaMax_flb
PB29B 69
ctrl_csPLD2
4k7 PB30A, SN/MD5/SCAN_SHFT_ENB/TDIB 70 V33
Rst
71
PB30B, SI/SISPI/IO0/MD0/TDOR SPI3_MISO GND
GND LCMXO2-4000HC-4TG144C

Benennung
Fig. 6-38 Board Main 22/35 [26573_04_B31]

22.03.2018
04 pvv16_148 Serienausgabe 21.03.18 beb si siehe DMS Stempel MachXO2_Logic1 026573_04_B31_01_01 03
03 aea14_001;pvv16_156 Erstausgabe Storz Medical AG / 2017 24.03.17 beb gezeichnet: Datum / Unterschrift board main clp/slk1l1/slx-f20r1 PCB-Nr. : Blatt : 22
Änderung Datum beb siehe DMS Stempel Schutzvermerk ISO 16016 Datei : MachXO2_Logic1.SchDoc 26571 von : 36
16 026 02 0918
U37A U37B U37C
109 73 71
PT28D, DONE ctrl_SwFocMotDir PR19B (DQ1) ctrl_hswM1pld2 PB30B, SI/SISPI/IO0/MD0/TDOR sw_CpConnect5_l
110 74 70
PT28C, INITN ctrl_CTUOn PR19A (DQ1) ctrl_EINT0 PB30A, SN/MD5/SCAN_SHFT_ENB/TDIB sw_ILREC_l
111 75 69 Rst
PT27B ctrl_ChargeOn PR18B (DQ1) st_FaultSwitch PB29B Rst
112 76 68
PT27A ctrl_HVTest PR18A (DQ1) st_HVmax PB29A SPI3_SCK
113 77 67 TP138
PT25B ctrl_PCCUOn PR16B (DQ1) ctrl_hswM2pld2 PB27B 1k0 st_EINT0_Out2
114 78 65 R427
PT25A st_V12PF_ok PR16A (DQ1) st_CTUOk PB27A MISO2
115 st_+24V Motion1_on_l 81 63 PldRes2.13
PT24B PR15B (DQ1) sw_Precise PB24D
117 PldRes2.10 82 62 PldRes2.14
PT24A PR15A (DQ1) sw_Extend PB24B
119 PldRes2.9 83 61
PT23D, PROGRAMN PR14B (DQ1) st_CTUTemp PB24A st_+24V_Periph._ok
120 84 60 PldRes2.8
PT23C, JTAGENB/MD6/TDIR JTAGEN PR14A (DQ1) st_DivIncon PB23B
121 PldRes2.7 85 ctrl_hsw47pld2 59 PldRes2.5
PT21B PR13B (DQS1N) PB23A
122 PldRes2.6 86 58
PT21A PR13A (DQS1) sw_SwRelease1_l PB21B st_hsw25pld2
125 PldRes2.4 87 57
PT20D, SDA/IO3/MD3/ATB_FORCE/PCLKC0_0/TDOT PR10D sw_SwRelease3_l PB21A st_AirbagValveSelect
126 89 56
PT20C, SCL/IO2/MD2/ATB_SENSE/PCLKT0_0 CLKOUT PR10C sw_SwRelease2_l PB20B, PCLKC2_1 ISP_P1.25
127 91 55
PT18B, PCLKC0_1 st_ResCushionOverTemp_l PR10B, PCLKC1_0 (DQ0) sw_SwRelease5_l PB20A, PCLKT2_1/INTEST_OVER ctrl_hsw45pld2
128 PldRes2.2 92 54
PT18A, PCLKT0_1 PR10A, PCLKT1_0 (DQ0) st_EINT1_Out2 PB15B st_hsw45pld2
130 93 52
PT15D, TMS TMS PR9B (DQS0N) sw_SwRelease4_l PB15A st_CoolingPump
131 94 war st_Interlock HV 50
PT15C, TCK/TEST_CLK TCK PR9A (DQS0) PB13B, PCLKC2_0 st_AirbagValveA
132 st_+24V Motion2_on_l 95 49
PT14B PR8B (DQ0) sw_npn35pld2_l PB13A, PCLKT2_0/INTEST_OVER ctrl_hsw25pld2
133 96 48
PT14A sw_npn16pld2_l PR8A (DQ0) sw_Override2_sl PB10B st_+24V_(Board)_ok
136 97 47
PT13D, TDI/MD7 TDI_PLD2 PR6B (DQ0) sw_XrayAP_l PB10A st_+24V_WA_ok
137 98 45
PT13C, TDO TDO_PLD2 PR6A (DQ0) sw_npn10pld2_sl PB9B, SO/SPISO/IO1/MD1/TDIL st_+24V_Inl_ok
138 99 44
PT11B st_IrqPLD2 PR5B (DQ0) sw_npn37pld2_l PB9A, MCLK/CCLK st_+24V_ExtPan_ok
BANK 0
139 100 43
PT11A sw_npn08pld2_sl PR5A (DQ0) sw_npn14pld2_sl PB7B st_+24V_Pos_ok
BANK 2
140 103 42
PT10B st_ByPassValve PR4C st_StateLaserPointer PB7A st_+24V_ContPan_ok
BANK 1
141 104 41
PT10A st_CollisionXray_l PR3B, R_GPLLC_IN (DQ0) sw_npn38pld2_l PB4B st_+24V_Motion_ok
142 105 war ctrl_Strobe 40
PT9B sw_npn03pld2_sl PR3A, R_GPLLT_IN (DQ0) PB4A, CSSPIN/MD4/TDOB sw_CushionOverTemp_s
143 106 39
PT9A sw_npn20pld2_sl PR2B, R_GPLLC_FB (DQ0) sw_npn06pld2_sl PB3B ctrl_EINT1
107 38
PR2A, R_GPLLT_FB (DQ0) ctrl_SwFocMotEn PB3A ctrl_csPLD2
LCMXO2-4000HC-4TG144C
LCMXO2-4000HC-4TG144C LCMXO2-4000HC-4TG144C TP139
ctrl_hsw47pld2
SPI Pin's
U37F PL8B
12
sw_npn36pld12_sl
GPIO Pin's GPIO Pin's see PLD1 11
V33 PL8A sw_npn27pld12_sl
10
System Pin's PL7B INPUT
st_EmHaltFromXrayS_sl
9
X24 0R X22 PL7A sw_npn39pld12_sl
6
C227 st_EINT0_Out2 1 PldRes2.13 1 PL6B, PCLKC5_0 sw_EmHalt3S_sl
st_EINT0_Out2 PD2 R267 5
100nF 2 PldRes2.14 2 PL6A, PCLKT5_0 sw_pnp21pld12_sl
COM_RxD PD3 R268
BANK 5
4
3 3 PL4B, L_GPLLC_IN sw_npn22pld12_sl
GND D20A COM_TxD PD7
PL4A, L_GPLLT_IN
3
7 4 4 sw_npn13pld12_sl
GND RST PE12 2
14 5 5 PL3B, L_GPLLC_FB sw_npn11pld12_sl
V33 VCC PB1 PE13
PL3A, L_GPLLT_FB
1
6 PldRes1.3 6 sw_EmHalt5S_sl
NC PldRes1.3
1 2 st_+24V Motion1_on_l PldRes1.2 PldRes2.2 7 PldRes1.2 7
st_+24V_Motion1_on 1 R239
8
PldRes1.2
8
NC NC U37E PL14B
24
PldRes2.4 9 9 sw_EmHalt4S_sl
74AHC14 PD10 R252 PC13
PL14A
23
PldRes2.5 10 Rst 10 st_CollisionXrayS_sl
PD11 R253 PL13B
22
PldRes2.6 11 11 sw_ILRESS_sl
PD12 R254 +24V_Pos 21
D20D PldRes2.7 12 12 PL13A sw_EmHalt1S_sl
TIM1_CH4 R255 +24V_Pos PL10D, PCLKC4_0
20
PldRes2.8 13 13 sw_npn28pld1_sl
TIM4_CH4 R256 +24V_ContPan PL10C, PCLKT4_0
19
9 8 st_+24V Motion2_on_l PldRes2.9 14 14 sw_npn26pld12_sl
st_+24V_Motion2_on 1 EXTI_11 R257 +24V_ContPan
BANK 4
17
PldRes2.10 15 15 PL10B sw_npn24pld12_sl
EXTI_15 R258 V50 PL10A
15
16 16 SPI3_MOSI
74AHC14 NC V50 PL9B
14
17 17 sw_npn25pld12_sl
V33 +24V 13
V33 18 18 PL9A sw_EmHalt2S_sl
V33 +24V
19 19
GND 24VRTN LCMXO2-4000HC-4TG144C
20 20
R442 GND 24VRTN U37D PL20B
35
sw_Unlock1_l
34
510R Stiftleiste 20pol. Stiftleiste 20pol. PL20A sw_Unlock3_l
33
PL19B sw_Unlock4_l
32
PL19A sw_Unlock2_l
U14B 31
D20B 3 14 D20E D20F PL18D sw_Unlock5_l
BANK 3
ctrl_hsw47pld2_lb 28
TP137 PL17B, PCLKC3_0 sw_CpConnect1_l
PL17A, PCLKT3_0 27
ctrl_hsw47pld2 3 4 4 13 11 10 13 12 sw_CpConnect2_l
1 1 1 PL16B 26
sw_CpConnect3_l
ACPL247 PL16A 25
sw_CpConnect4_l
74AHC14 74AHC14 74AHC14
24VRTN GND GND
Benennung
22.03.2018
026573_04_B31_01_01 03
Fig. 6-39 Board Main 23/35 [26573_04_B31]
21.03.18 beb si

siehe DMS Stempel
MachXO2_Logic2
Änderung Datum beb siehe DMS Stempel Schutzvermerk ISO 16016 Datei : MachXO2_Logic2.SchDoc 26571 von : 36
V33 V33 V33 V33
U36G U37G
C142 7
VCCIO5 GND
134 C178 7
VCCIO5 GND
134
10nF 8 135 C148 10nF 8 135 C182
C122 GND VCCIO0 C126 GND VCCIO0
16
VCCIO4 GND
124 10nF 16
VCCIO4 GND
124 10nF
100nF 18
GND VCCIO0
123 C175 100nF 18
GND VCCIO0
123 C183
C144 30
VCCIO3 GND
116 10nF C179 30
VCCIO3 GND
116 10nF
C120
10nF 29
36
GND
VCC
VCCIO0
GND
118
101
C123
100nF C121
10nF 29
36
GND
VCC
VCCIO0
GND
118
101
C127
100nF 6-27
72
VCC VCCIO1
102 C176 72
VCC VCCIO1
102 C184
4.7uF/16V 108
VCC GND
90 10nF 4.7uF/16V 108
VCC GND
90 10nF
144 88 C124 144 88 C128
VCC VCCIO1 VCC VCCIO1
GND
80 100nF GND
80 100nF
C125 37 79 C177 C129 37 79 C185
VCCIO2 VCCIO1 VCCIO2 VCCIO1
100nF 46
GND
10nF 100nF 46
GND
10nF
C145 51
VCCIO2
C180 51
VCCIO2
10nF 53
GND
10nF 53
GND
C146 66
VCCIO2
C181 66
VCCIO2
10nF 64 129 10nF 64 129
GND NC GND NC
LCMXO2-4000HC-4TG144C LCMXO2-4000HC-4TG144C
GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND
Fig. 6-40 Board Main 24/35 [26573_04_B31]

Benennung
22.03.2018
04 pvv16_148 Serienausgabe 21.03.18 beb si siehe DMS Stempel MachXO2 Power 026573_04_B31_01_01 03
Änderung Datum beb siehe DMS Stempel Schutzvermerk ISO 16016 Datei : MachXO2_Power.SchDoc 26571 von : 36
Wiring diagrams
16 026 02 0918
Wiring diagrams
6-28
U_Coupling and Airbag
Coupling and Airbag.SchDoc Sheet: 25
ctrl_ByPassValve ctrl_ByPassValve
ctrl_CircPumpLeft ctrl_CircPumpLeft
ctrl_CircPumpRight ctrl_CircPumpRight I2C1_SCL_b
6.3.8
ctrl_AirbagValveA ctrl_AirbagValveA I2C1_SDA_b
ctrl_AirbagValveSelect ctrl_AirbagValveSelect
ctrl_AirbagValveB ctrl_AirbagValveB
ctrl_AirbagCompressor ctrl_AirbagCompressor
swp_CircPumpPWR
ctrl_CircPumpPWR ctrl_CircPumpPWR swp_CircPumpPWR
an_AirbagPressure_f X3
I2C1_SCL I2C1_SCL an_AirbagPressure_f
an_CushionPressure_f I2C1_SCL_b 1
I2C1_SDA I2C1_SDA an_CushionPressure_f
ctrl_CircPumpLeft_b I2C1_SDA_b 2
+2.5VRef +2.5VRef ctrl_CircPumpLeft_b
ctrl_CircPumpRight_b swp_DegaAirValve 3
ctrl_CircPumpRight_b
swp_ByPassValve swp_DegaValve 4
st_ByPassValve st_ByPassValve swp_ByPassValve
an_CircPumpSpeed_b sw_DegaMax_f 5
st_AirbagValveA st_AirbagValveA an_CircPumpSpeed_b
swp_AirbagValveA sw_DegaMin_f 6
st_AirbagValveSelect st_AirbagValveSelect swp_AirbagValveA
swp_AirbagValveSelect st_DegaPumpRPM_f 7
st_AirbagValveB st_AirbagValveB swp_AirbagValveSelect
swp_AirbagValveB ctrl_DegaPumpRight_b 8
swp_AirbagValveB F20
swp_AirbagCompressor an_CushionPressure_f ctrl_DegaPumpLeft_b 9
an_CushionPressure_fb an_CushionPressure_fb swp_AirbagCompressor
st_npn28cont_f an_DegaPumpSpeed_b 10
an_AirbagPressure_fb an_AirbagPressure_fb st_npn28cont_f 0,062AF
an_CushionPressure_f_F
11
st_AirbagCompressor st_AirbagCompressor F21
an_AirbagPressure_f an_AirbagPressure_f_F
12
swp_AirbagValveB 13
st_CircPumpPWR st_CircPumpPWR 0,062AF
swp_AirbagValveA 14
an_DegaPumpSpeed
F22 swp_AirbagCompressor15
st_npn28cont_flb st_npn28cont_flb an_ExcessTemperature
16
swp_AirbagValveSelect
0,062AF swp_ByPassValve 17
U_Degassing
swp_WaterRadiator 18
Degassing.SchDoc Sheet: 26
19
SafetyCircuitOverTemp
an_DegaPumpSpeed
an_DegaPumpSpeed 20
N.C.
ctrl_DegaValve ctrl_DegaValve ctrl_WaterHeating_b 21
st_DegaPumpRPM_f
ctrl_DegaAirValve ctrl_DegaAirValve st_DegaPumpRPM_f 22
Fig. 6-41 Board Main 25/35 [26573_04_B31]

F23 N.C.
ctrl_DegaPumpLeft ctrl_DegaPumpLeft an_WaterTempReservoir an_WaterTempReservoir_F 23
sw_DegaMin_f
ctrl_DegaPumpRight ctrl_DegaPumpRight sw_DegaMin_f an_ExcessTemperature_F 24
sw_DegaMax_f 0,062AF
sw_DegaMax_f 25 n.c.
swp_DegaValve swp_hsw25pld2
swp_DegaValve F12 V12F 26
swp_DegaAirValve V12
st_DegaValve st_DegaValve swp_DegaAirValve an_CircPumpSpeed_b 27
an_DegaPumpSpeed_b SMD1210
st_DegaAirValve st_DegaAirValve an_DegaPumpSpeed_b st_npn28cont_f 28 st_CircPumpRPM
ctrl_DegaPumpLeft_b 0,15A
sw_DegaMin_flb sw_DegaMin_flb ctrl_DegaPumpLeft_b ctrl_CircPumpRight_b 29 Water/Air
ctrl_DegaPumpRight_b
sw_DegaMax_flb sw_DegaMax_flb ctrl_DegaPumpRight_b ctrl_CircPumpLeft_b 30 (to e-box_connect)
st_DegaPumpRPM_flb st_DegaPumpRPM_flb swp_CircPumpPWR 31
32
33
U_Temperature Safety
34
Temperature Safety.SchDoc Sheet: 24 GND
35
st_ResCushionOverTemp_l st_ResCushionOverTemp_l an_ExcessTemperature 36
an_ExcessTemperature an_ExcessTemperature +24V_WA
sw_CushionOverTemp_s sw_CushionOverTemp_s 37
+5VRef +5VRef SafetyCircuitOverTemp 38
sw_ResCushionOverTemp sw_ResCushionOverTemp 39
24VRTN
ctrl_WaterHeating ctrl_WaterHeating ctrl_WaterHeating_switched 40
41
42
43
Board Main (water air, temp., degassing)
U_Water Temperature
swp_CoolingPump 44
Water Temperature.SchDoc Sheet: 23
swp_hsw45pld2 45 n.c.
swp_hsw45pld2
+2.5VRef ctrl_WaterHeating_switched an_DistanceSensor1 46
an_DistanceSensor1
an_DistanceSensor2 47
ctrl_WaterHeating_b TP147 an_DistanceSensor2
ctrl_WaterRadiator ctrl_WaterRadiator ctrl_WaterHeating_b COM_TxD_RF 48
an_WaterTempReservoir COM_TxD_RF
an_WaterTempReservoir COM_RxD_RF 49
swp_WaterRadiator COM_RxD_RF
st_WaterRadiator st_WaterRadiator swp_WaterRadiator 50
Stiftleiste 50pol.
ctrl_CoolingPump ctrl_CoolingPump
st_CoolingPump st_CoolingPump
an_WaterTempReservoir_fb an_WaterTempReservoir_fb
swp_CoolingPump
swp_CoolingPump

22.03.2018
04 pvv16_148 Serienausgabe 21.03.18 beb si siehe DMS Stempel Overview_WA 026573_04_B31_01_01 03
Benennung

Änderung Datum beb siehe DMS Stempel Schutzvermerk ISO 16016 Datei : Overview_Water-Air.SchDoc 26571 von : 36
16 026 02 0918
4 - 20mA from external transmitter R55
an_WaterTempReservoir
U64B
0R 6 R59
7 TP150
TP148 an_WaterTempReservoir_fb
5
100R max. 3.2V
LM358A
2
C212 C213 R58
R57 1 V47
47uF/16V 100nF BC856B
150R 0.1% 4k7
3
AGND
AGND AGND AGND
+2.5VRef
GND +24V_WA
R131
10k
5
6
7
8
Q3
2 IN Vbb
ctrl_WaterRadiator
TP142
OUT 3
swp_WaterRadiator
4 ST
st_WaterRadiator
GND
TP141
ISP752R
1
R132
2K2
GND
V33
+24V
V33
GND +24V_WA C91
GND R457
Option heating rod ( F2 only)
14
R140 100nF 470R/1.5W
10k D5A 10mA
3
Q4 1 V+
R458 U17A
TP145 TP149 TP144 TP151
2 IN Vbb
Cooling Pump ( F2 only) 1 3 1 8 TP152
ctrl_CoolingPump F13 ctrl_WaterHeating_switched
5 2
OUT swp_CoolingPump 270R max 50mA
4 V- 2 7
st_CoolingPump ST
GND 0,5AT 10k ctrl_WaterHeating_b
74HC7032
TP146 R147 ACPL227
to Board Subplate
1
7
R141 ITS428L2
2K2
GND GND GND GND
V33

Benennung
Fig. 6-42 Board Main 26/35 [26573_04_B31]

22.03.2018
04 pvv16_148 Serienausgabe 21.03.18 beb si siehe DMS Stempel WA_Water Temperature 026573_04_B31_01_01 03
03 aea14_001;pvv16_156 Erstausgabe Storz Medical AG / 2017 24.03.17 beb gezeichnet: Datum / Unterschrift board main clp/slk1l1/slx-f20r1 PCB-Nr. : Blatt : 26
Änderung Datum beb siehe DMS Stempel Schutzvermerk ISO 16016 Datei : Water Temperature.SchDoc 26571 von : 36
+5VRef
V12 V12 V12
D5B +/-20mA R162 C99

4 91K 0.1%AGND R169 R172
AGND
1 6 3k0 3k0
5 100nF V58
C161
8
2.554 V 2
10nF
74HC7032 TP156 2 3
V33
V+ 1 TP163 1
D5C R161
3 V-
9 U20A BAT54C
1k0
1 8 LM393
4
10
74HC7032 R163
75K 0.1% AGND
R167
12
D5D
1 11 OutOfRange
6-29
TP164 13 TP165
750K
TP155
an_ExcessTemperature
6 74HC7032
0.538 V R165 7
GND TP157 5
U20B
1k0 LM393
V33
C93 C96
R168
R160 R164 C98
47uF/16V 100nF R170 R173
330nF 750K C100 C101 R445
150R 0.1% 20K 0.1% 1k0 1k0
1nF 1nF
4k7
AGND AGND AGND AGND AGND GND GND GND GND
D20C
sw_ResCushionOverTemp R444 U14C
st_ResCushionOverTemp 5 12 TP166 5 6
1 st_ResCushionOverTemp_l
4k7 6 11
74AHC14
V50 ACPL247
LL4148 24VRTN GND
ctrl_WaterHeating
TP154
+24V +24V +24V GND V33 V33 +24V
V77
R171 R456
LL4148 R166
K1B 0R 470R/1.5W
TP71 470R
R61 C141 TQ2SA
1K0 TP140
Contact max.2A R455 U17B
3 6 TP143
22uF/35V
V59 TP159
2
R127 270R 4 5
K1A 1 K1C SafetyCircuitOverTemp
10
1
TQ2SA
V48 V51 15K
TP161
V52 GND
ACPL227 to Board Subplate
LL4148 LL4148 BC856B
+
R150
3
- -
270K rt GND
C140 R269
5
TP160
V65 0R TP167
TP158 10nF LL4148 sw_CushionOverTemp_s
3
TP153 V64
excess temperatur
1 TP162
3
TQ2SA R152
R157 R151 10R
OutOfRange 1 V49 BC846B
22K
2
BC846B
820R
ctrl_WaterHeating_switched
2
GND GND GND GND GND

Wiring diagrams
05
Benennung
Fig. 6-43 Board Main 27/35 [26573_04_B31]

22.03.2018
04 pvv16_148 Serienausgabe 21.03.18 beb si siehe DMS Stempel WA_Temperature Safety 026573_04_B31_01_01 03
03 aea14_001;pvv16_156 Erstausgabe 24.03.17 beb gezeichnet:
Storz Medical AG / 2017 Datum / Unterschrift board main clp/slk1l1/slx-f20r1 PCB-Nr. : Blatt : 27
Änderung Datum beb siehe DMS Stempel Schutzvermerk ISO 16016 Datei : Temperature Safety.SchDoc 26571 von : 36
16 026 02 0918
V33 +24V_WA
V33 C106 V50 V50
GND
R195 R200
8
U22 100nF R182 R184 5k6 5k6
R180 2k2 2k2
D6F
VCC
1 5 GND +24V_WA U25A
n.c. EN GND
12 13 16 1
n.m. st_npn28cont_flb 1
I2C1_SDA 3 SDA0 SDA1 6 TP182
I2C1_SDA_b
R187 15 2
10k 74AHC14 st_npn28cont_f
I2C1_SCL 2 SCL0 SCL1 7
I2C1_SCL_b
GND ACPL247
5
6
7
8
TP174 Q6
V12
GND
2 Vbb
C110 ctrl_AirbagValveA IN
OUT 3
swp_AirbagValveA
PCA9515A AGND 4 ST
V33
st_AirbagValveA
GND
4
100nF
TP175
R174 R177 V33 R272 CLP/SLK2/F2
1
GND V=2 R190 ISP752R R197
V33 V33 JP2
0 -5V = closed 2K2 10K
2K2 2K2 C105 1k5 0.1% 1 D4D
GND
2
GND R183 9 8
V=4 ctrl_CircPumpRight 1 ctrl_CircPumpRight_b
0-10V = open V33 TP185
100nF
3k0 0.1% GND +24V_WA
U21 74AHC14
V33
8
4 SCL VDD 1
I2C1_SCL
5 SDA OUTB 8 TP171 2 R188
I2C1_SDA an_DegaPumpSpeed
V+ 1
an_CircPumpSpeed_b 10k R198
7 an_CircPumpSpeed 3 V-
5
6
7
8
OUTA Q7 10K
6 REF TP168 U24A TP176 D4E
+2.5VRef 2 Vbb
LM358A ctrl_AirbagValveB IN
3 11 10
1
4
2 GND ADD 3 R181 OUT swp_AirbagValveB ctrl_CircPumpLeft ctrl_CircPumpLeft_b
4 TP186
1k0 0.1% st_AirbagValveB ST
GND
C102
MAX5821MEUA+ TP177 74AHC14
1
100nF R191 ISP752R
Adr.0x58
2K2
GND GND AGND AGND AGND
GND GND +24V_WA
V33
GND +24V_WA
R196
10k
5
6
7
8
6 U23B R189 Q9
10k TP183
4-20mA 7 2 Vbb
R178 an_AirbagPressure_fb ctrl_ByPassValve IN
5
6
7
8
5 Q8 OUT 3
an_AirbagPressure_f TP169 TP178 swp_ByPassValve
2 IN Vbb 4 ST
1k0 ctrl_AirbagValveSelect st_ByPassValve
LM358A 3 GND
OUT swp_AirbagValveSelect TP184
R175 C103 C107 4 ST
st_AirbagValveSelect
GND
1
150R 0.1% R199 ISP752R
TP179
10uF/10V 100nF 2K2
1
V50 R192 ISP752R GND
AGND AGND AGND C109 2K2 V33
GND V33
AGND V33
+24V_WA
100nF GND +24V_WA
R193
2K2
8
U23A R185
st_CircPumpPWR
2 10k
TP180
5
6
7
8
3
4-20mA R179
V+ 1 TP172 Q5 Q10
an_CushionPressure_fb
3 V- 2 Vbb TP181 2
an_CushionPressure_f TP170 ctrl_AirbagCompressor IN F10 ctrl_CircPumpPWR IN Vbb
OUT 3 OUT 5
1k0 swp_AirbagCompressor swp_CircPumpPWR
LM358A 4 R194 4
st_AirbagCompressor ST
GND 0,5AT 10k
ST
GND
4
R176 C104 C108 I nom. >2A

TP173
150R 0.1%
100nF
1
1
10uF/10V R186 ISP752R ITS428L2
2K2
AGND AGND AGND AGND GND GND GND
V33

Benennung
22.03.2018
026573_04_B31_01_01 03
Fig. 6-44 Board Main 28/35 [26573_04_B31]
21.03.18 beb
si siehe DMS Stempel
Datum / Unterschrift Storz Medical AG / 2017
WA_Coupling and Airbag
Änderung Datum beb siehe DMS Stempel Schutzvermerk ISO 16016 Datei : Coupling and Airbag.SchDoc 26571 von : 36
+24V_WA +24V_WA V33

V33
R207
4k7 R210
R201 10K
D6A D7D
n.m. U25B
3 14 TP188 1 2 9 8
1 sw_DegaMin_flb ctrl_DegaPumpRight 1 ctrl_DegaPumpRight_b
TP193
R203
4 13 14
sw_DegaMin_f V33 VCC 74AHC14
7
ACPL247 GND GND
4K7
74AHC14 V33
6-30 GND C111
100nF
+24V_WA +24V_WA V33 R211
V33 10K
D7E
R208 11 10
ctrl_DegaPumpLeft 1 ctrl_DegaPumpLeft_b
4k7 TP194
R202
D6B 74AHC14
n.m. U25C
5 12 TP189 3 4
1 sw_DegaMax_flb
R204
6 11
sw_DegaMax_f 74AHC14
4K7 ACPL247 GND +24V_WA
GND
+24V_WA V33 R212
10k
5
6
7
8
Q11
R216 R209 TP191 2 Vbb ISP752R
ctrl_DegaValve IN
5k6 5k6 3
OUT swp_DegaValve
TP192 4
D6C st_DegaValve ST
GND
U25D
7 10 TP190 5 6
1 st_DegaPumpRPM_flb
1
R214 Degassing Valve

8 9 2K2
st_DegaPumpRPM_f 74AHC14
GND
ACPL247 GND
V33
GND +24V_WA
R213
R206 10k
5
6
7
8
Q12
3k0 0.1%
TP195 2 IN Vbb ISP752R
ctrl_DegaAirValve
U24B V=4 0 -10V 3
OUT swp_DegaAirValve
6 4
st_DegaAirValve ST
7 TP196 GND
an_DegaPumpSpeed_b
TP187 5
an_DegaPumpSpeed
1
R215 Degassing Air Valve

LM358A 2K2
D6D
R205 GND
1k0 0.1% 9 8
1 V33
74AHC14
D4C D6E
AGND
5 6 11 10
1 1
74AHC14 74AHC14
GND GND
Wiring diagrams
05
Benennung
22.03.2018
026573_04_B31_01_01 03
Fig. 6-45 Board Main 29/35 [26573_04_B31]Storz Medical AG / 2017 WA_Degassing
04 pvv16_148 Serienausgabe 21.03.18 beb si siehe DMS Stempel
03 aea14_001;pvv16_156 Erstausgabe 24.03.17 beb gezeichnet: Datum / Unterschrift board main clp/slk1l1/slx-f20r1 PCB-Nr. : Blatt : 29
Änderung Datum beb siehe DMS Stempel Schutzvermerk ISO 16016 Datei : Degassing.SchDoc 26571 von : 36
16 026 02 0918
X11
1
CAN-H2
sw_EmHalt2S_s 2
U_Contr sw_SwRelease2 3
Contr.P_Inp.1-4_.SchDoc Sheet: 28 4
6.3.9
CAN-L2
sw_Unlock2 5
sw_SwRelease1_l sw_SwRelease1_l
sw_SwRelease1 sw_SwRelease2S_s 6
sw_SwRelease1S_sl sw_SwRelease1S_sl sw_SwRelease1
sw_SwRelease1S_s sw_SwRelease4S_s 7
sw_Unlock1_l sw_Unlock1_l sw_SwRelease1S_s
16 026 02 0918
sw_Unlock1 sw_CpConnect2 8
sw_CpConnect1_l sw_CpConnect1_l sw_Unlock1 GND +24V_ExtPan
sw_CpConnect1 sw_CpConnect4 9
sw_SwRelease2_l sw_SwRelease2_l sw_CpConnect1
sw_SwRelease2 sw_Unlock4 10
sw_SwRelease2S_sl sw_SwRelease2S_sl sw_SwRelease2
sw_SwRelease2S_s R153 sw_EmHalt4S_s 11
sw_Unlock2 sw_EmHalt4 12
sw_EmHalt1S_sl sw_EmHalt1S_sl sw_Unlock2 10k
5
6
7
8
sw_CpConnect2 sw_SwRelease5S_s 13
sw_CpConnect2_l sw_CpConnect2_l sw_CpConnect2 Q15
sw_SwRelease3 sw_SwRelease4 14
sw_SwRelease3_l sw_SwRelease3_l sw_SwRelease3 2 Vbb
sw_SwRelease3S_s ctrl_hsw43pld1 IN sw_CpConnect5 15
sw_SwRelease3S_sl sw_SwRelease3S_sl sw_SwRelease3S_s 3 swp_hsw43pld1
sw_Unlock3 OUT sw_Unlock5 16
sw_Unlock3_l sw_Unlock3_l sw_Unlock3 4
sw_CpConnect3 ST sw_EmHalt5S_s 17
sw_CpConnect3_l sw_CpConnect3_l sw_CpConnect3 GND
sw_SwRelease4 sw_EmHalt5 18
sw_SwRelease4_l sw_SwRelease4_l sw_SwRelease4
1
sw_EmHalt1S_s st_ECG_JP1 19
sw_EmHalt2S_sl sw_EmHalt2S_sl sw_EmHalt1S_s ISP752R st_ECG_JP1
sw_EmHalt2S_s sw_SwRelease5 20
sw_EmHalt3S_sl sw_EmHalt3S_sl sw_EmHalt2S_s
sw_EmHalt3S_s st_ECG_JP2 21
st_CollisionXrayS_sl st_CollisionXrayS_sl sw_EmHalt3S_s GND st_ECG_JP2
st_CollisionXrayS_s st_ECG- 22
st_EmHaltFromXrayS_sl st_EmHaltFromXrayS_sl
st_CollisionXrayS_s st_ECG-
st_EmHaltFromXrayS_s st_ECG_JP3 23
st_EmHaltFromXrayS_s st_ECG_JP3
st_ECG+ 24
st_ECG+
GND +24V_ExtPan 25
CAN-L4 External Connectors
26
CAN-H4
st_EmHaltFromXrayS_s 27
R154 28
st_EmHaltFromXray
10k st_CollisionXray 29
5
6
7
8
st_CollisionXray
Q16 st_CollisionXrayS_s 30
2 IN Vbb 31
ctrl_hsw47pld2 sw_ResCushionOverTemp
Fig. 6-46 Board Main 30/35 [26573_04_B31]

OUT 3 swp_hsw47pld2 32
ctrl_hsw43pld1_lb
4 ST 33
GND 24VRTN
34
+24V_ContPan
35
1
ISP752R 36
+24V_ContPan
37
Board Main (control panel)
GND 38
+24V_ExtPan
U_Contr 39
Contr.P_Inp.4-5_.SchDoc Sheet: 29 40
+24V_ExtPan
41
sw_SwRelease5_l sw_SwRelease5_l NC
sw_SwRelease5 42
sw_SwRelease5S_sl sw_SwRelease5S_sl sw_SwRelease5 NC
sw_SwRelease5S_s swp_hsw43pld1 43 n.c.
sw_Unlock5 44
sw_CpConnect5_l sw_CpConnect5_l sw_Unlock5 sw_npn36pld12_s
sw_CpConnect5 +24V_ContPan X6 45
sw_SwRelease4S_sl sw_SwRelease4S_sl sw_CpConnect5 ctrl_hsw47pld2_lb
sw_SwRelease4S_s 1 46
sw_Unlock4_l sw_Unlock4_l sw_SwRelease4S_s NC
sw_Unlock4 2 swp_hsw47pld2 47 n.c.
sw_CpConnect4_l sw_CpConnect4_l sw_Unlock4
sw_CpConnect4 3 48
sw_EmHalt4S_sl sw_EmHalt4S_sl sw_CpConnect4 NC
sw_EmHalt4S_s 4 sw_npn35pld2 49
sw_EmHalt5S_sl sw_EmHalt5S_sl sw_EmHalt4S_s sw_npn35pld2
sw_EmHalt5S_s 5 50
sw_EmHalt4_l sw_EmHalt4_l sw_EmHalt5S_s NC NC
sw_EmHalt4 24VRTN 6
sw_EmHalt5_l sw_EmHalt5_l sw_EmHalt4 NC
sw_EmHalt5 sw_SwRelease3S_s 7 Stiftleiste 50pol.
sw_pnp21pld12_sl sw_pnp21pld12_sl sw_EmHalt5
sw_SwRelease1S_s 8 24VRTN
sw_pnp09pld1_l sw_pnp09pld1_l
CAN-H3 9 +24V_ContPan
sw_Override1_sl sw_Override1_sl CAN-H3
CAN-H1 10 X10
sw_Override2_sl sw_Override2_sl CAN-H1
CAN-L3 11 Controlpanel 1+ 3 1
sw_XrayAP_l sw_XrayAP_l CAN-L3
CAN-L1 12 (to e-box_connect) 2
CAN-L1
sw_Unlock3 13 CAN-H3 3
sw_pnp21pld12_s sw_pnp21pld12_s
sw_Unlock1 14 CAN-L3 4
sw_pnp09pld1 sw_pnp09pld1
sw_CpConnect3 15 sw_SwRelease3 5
sw_CpConnect1 16 sw_SwRelease3S_s 6 Controlpanel 3
sw_EmHalt3S_s 17 sw_Unlock3 7
sw_Override1_s sw_Override1_s
sw_EmHalt1S_s 18 sw_CpConnect3 8
sw_Override2_s sw_Override2_s
sw_SwRelease3 19 sw_EmHalt3S_s 9
sw_XrayAP sw_XrayAP
sw_SwRelease1 20 10
NC
Stiftleiste 20pol. Stiftleiste 10pol.

22.03.2018
04 pvv16_148 Serienausgabe 21.03.18 beb si siehe DMS Stempel Overview_Contr.Panel 026573_04_B31_01_01 03
Benennung

Änderung Datum beb siehe DMS Stempel Schutzvermerk ISO 16016 Datei : Overview_Contr.Panel.SchDoc 26571 von : 36
Wiring diagrams
6-31
V33
V33
100nF C130
V33
D9A
R287 7 R306
GND GND
14 4k7
V33 VCC D10D
R278 U38A 4k7 R296 U40B
1 16 TP197 1 2 3 14 TP206 9 8
sw_SwRelease1 1 sw_SwRelease1_l sw_CpConnect3 1 sw_CpConnect3_l
4k7 V33 4k7 V33
2 15 4 13
74AHC14 74AHC14
R289 R307
24VRTNACPL247 4k7 24VRTNACPL247
D9B D10E
R279 U38B GND R297 U40C GND 4k7
3 14 TP198 3 4 5 12 TP207 11 10
sw_SwRelease3S_s 1 sw_SwRelease3S_sl sw_EmHalt3S_s 1 sw_EmHalt3S_sl
4k7 V33 4k7 V33
4 13 6 11
74AHC14 74AHC14
R290 R308
24VRTNACPL247 4k7 24VRTNACPL247 4k7
D9C D10F
R280 U38C GND R298 U40D GND
5 12 TP199 5 6 7 10 TP208 13 12
sw_Unlock1 1 sw_Unlock1_l sw_SwRelease2 1 sw_SwRelease2_l
4k7 V33 4k7
6 11 8 9
74AHC14 74AHC14
R291 V33
V33
24VRTNACPL247 24VRTNACPL247
D9D 100nF C132
R281 U38D GND 4k7 GND
D11A
7 10 TP200 9 8 R305 7
sw_CpConnect1 1 sw_CpConnect1_l GND GND
4k7 14
4k7 V33 V33 VCC
8 9 R299 U41A
74AHC14
R292 1 16 TP209 1 2
24VRTNACPL247 4k7
sw_Unlock2 1 sw_Unlock2_l
D9E 4k7
R282 U39A GND 2 15
74AHC14
1 16 TP201 11 10
sw_Unlock3 1 sw_Unlock3_l
24VRTNACPL247
V33
4k7 V33
2 15 GND R309
74AHC14
R293 4k7
D11B
24VRTNACPL247 4k7 R300 U41B
D9F
GND 3 14 TP210 3 4
R283
3
U39B
14
sw_SwRelease2S_s 1 sw_SwRelease2S_sl
TP202 13 12
sw_SwRelease3 1 sw_SwRelease3_l 4k7 4 13
V33
4k7 74AHC14
4 13 R310
74AHC14
24VRTNACPL247
D11C
24VRTNACPL247 V33 R301 U41C GND 4k7
GND V33 5 12 TP211 5 6
sw_CpConnect2 1 sw_CpConnect2_l
100nF C131
4k7 V33
6 11
D10A 74AHC14
R288 7 R311
GND GND
4k7 14 24VRTNACPL247 4k7
V33 VCC D11D
R284 U39C R302 U41D GND
5 12 TP203 1 2 7 10 TP212 9 8
sw_SwRelease1S_s 1 sw_SwRelease1S_sl sw_EmHalt2S_s 1 sw_EmHalt2S_sl
4k7 V33 4k7 V33
6 11 8 9
74AHC14 74AHC14
R294 R312
D10B D11E
R285 U39D GND R303 U42A GND
7 10 TP204 3 4 1 16 TP213 11 10
sw_EmHalt1S_s 1 sw_EmHalt1S_sl sw_SwRelease4 1 sw_SwRelease4_l
4k7 V33 4k7 V33
8 9 2 15
74AHC14 74AHC14
R295 1 JP7 R313
+24V_ExtPan
24VRTNACPL247 4k7 2 24VRTNACPL247 4k7
D10C D11F
R286 U40A GND R304 U42B GND
1 16 TP205 5 6 3 14 TP214 13 12
st_CollisionXrayS_s 1 st_CollisionXrayS_sl st_EmHaltFromXrayS_s 1 st_EmHaltFromXrayS_sl
4k7 2 15
4k7 4 13
74AHC14
74AHC14
GND GND
05
Fig. 6-47 Board Main 31/35 [26573_04_B31] geprüft: Datum / Unterschrift Stromlaufplan - wiring diagram Zeichn.-Nr. : Version : Druckdatum:
Benennung
22.03.2018
04 pvv16_148 Serienausgabe 21.03.18 beb si siehe DMS Stempel Contr.P_Inp.1-4 026573_04_B31_01_01 03
Änderung Datum beb siehe DMS Stempel
V33 Schutzvermerk ISO 16016 Datei : Contr.P_Inp.1-4_.SchDoc 26571 von : 36
V33
100nF C133
V33
D12A
R322 7 R339
GND GND
4k7 14 4k7
V33 VCC D13C
R314 U42C R330 U45C
5 12 TP215 1 2 5 12 TP223 5 6
sw_CpConnect4 1 sw_CpConnect4_l sw_CpConnect5 1 sw_CpConnect5_l
4k7 V33 4k7 V33
6 11 6 11
74AHC14 74AHC14
R324 R340
D12B D13D
R315 U42D GND R331 U45D GND
7 10 TP216 3 4 7 10 TP224 9 8
sw_Unlock4 1 sw_Unlock4_l sw_EmHalt5S_s 1 sw_EmHalt5S_sl
6-32 4k7 8
24VRTNACPL247
9
V33
R325
4k7
74AHC14
4k7 8
24VRTNACPL247
9
V33
R341
4k7
74AHC14
D12C D14E
R316 U43A GND R332 U45A GND
1 16 TP217 5 6 1 16 TP225 11 10
sw_SwRelease4S_s 1 sw_SwRelease4S_sl sw_pnp09pld1 1 sw_pnp09pld1_l
4k7 V33 4k7 V33
2 15 2 15
74AHC14 74AHC14
R326 R342
D12D D13F
R317 U43B GND R333 U45B GND
3 14 TP218 9 8 3 14 TP226 13 12
sw_EmHalt4S_s 1 sw_EmHalt4S_sl sw_EmHalt4 1 sw_EmHalt4_l
4k7 V33 4k7
4 13 4 13
74AHC14 74AHC14
R327
24VRTNACPL247 4k7 24VRTNACPL247
D12E
R318 U43C GND GND
5 12 TP219 11 10 V33
sw_SwRelease5 1 sw_SwRelease5_l
V33 100nF
4k7 V33
6 11 C135
74AHC14
R328
D14A
24VRTNACPL247 4k7 1 JP8 R338 7
D12F +24V_Pos GND GND
R319 U43D GND 2 4k7 14
V33 VCC
7 10 TP220 13 12
sw_Unlock5 1 sw_Unlock5_l R334
5
U46C
12 1 2
TP227
4k7 8 9
sw_pnp21pld12_s 1 sw_pnp21pld12_sl
74AHC14 4k7 V33
6 11
74AHC14
24VRTNACPL247 R343
GND V33 24VRTNACPL247 4k7
D14B
V33 R335 U46D GND
100nF C134 7 10 TP228 3 4
sw_EmHalt5 1 sw_EmHalt5_l
D13A 4k7 V33
R323 7 8 9
GND GND 74AHC14
4k7 14 R344
V33 VCC
R320 U44A 24VRTNACPL247 4k7
D14C
1 16 TP221 1 2 R336 U46A GND
sw_SwRelease5S_s 1 sw_SwRelease5S_sl
1 16 TP229 5 6
4k7 sw_Override2_s 1 sw_Override2_sl
2 15
V33 74AHC14 4k7 V33
2 15
74AHC14
24VRTNACPL247 R329 R345
GND 4k7 24VRTNACPL247 4k7
D13B D14D
R321 U44B R337 U46B GND
3 14 TP222 3 4 3 14 TP230 9 8
sw_Override1_s 1 sw_Override1_sl sw_XrayAP 1 sw_XrayAP_l
4k7 4 13
4k7 4 13
74AHC14 74AHC14
GND GND
Fig. 6-48 Board Main 32/35 [26573_04_B31]

Benennung
22.03.2018
04 pvv16_148 Serienausgabe 21.03.18 beb si siehe DMS Stempel Contr.P_Inp.4-5 026573_04_B31_01_01 03
Wiring diagrams
Änderung Datum beb siehe DMS Stempel Schutzvermerk ISO 16016 Datei : Contr.P_Inp.4-5_.SchDoc 26571 von : 36
16 026 02 0918
U_Position_Inp
Position_Inp.1.SchDoc Sheet: 31
sw_npn26pld12_s
16 026 02 0918
sw_npn26pld12_sl sw_npn26pld12_sl sw_npn26pld12_s
sw_npn28pld1_s
sw_npn25pld12_s X7
sw_npn04pld1_s sw_npn01pld1_s 1 sw_SUP_1S
sw_npn10pld2_s sw_npn02pld1_s 2 sw_ZTHOT_1S
sw_npn27pld12_s sw_npn03pld2_s 3 sw_ZTHOT_2S
sw_npn14pld2_s sw_npn04pld1_s 4 sw_SUC1_1S
sw_npn22pld12_s sw_npn05pld1_s 5 sw_YL_1S
sw_npn01pld1_s sw_npn06pld2_s 6 sw_YL_2S
sw_npn16pld2 sw_npn07pld1_s 7 sw_TRD0_1S
sw_npn16pld2_l sw_npn16pld2_l sw_npn16pld2
sw_npn38pld2 sw_npn08pld2_s 8 sw_TRD0_2S
sw_npn11pld12_s sw_pnp09pld1 9 sw_EmHaltRes
sw_npn11pld12_sl sw_npn11pld12_sl sw_npn11pld12_s sw_pnp09pld1
sw_npn37pld2 sw_npn10pld2_s 10 sw_SUC1_2S
sw_npn13pld12_s sw_npn11pld12_s 11 sw_TSTS
sw_npn07pld1_s sw_ILREC 12
sw_npn05pld1_s sw_npn13pld12_s 13 sw_ATBMS
sw_npn14pld2_s 14 sw_SUP_2S
sw_npn15pld1_s 15 sw_ZTHUT_1S
sw_npn16pld2 16 sw_SUXRP
swp_LaserPointer 17
swp_LaserPointer
sw_XrayAP 18
sw_XrayAP
sw_Override2_s 19
sw_Override2_s
sw_npn20pld2_s 20 Pos/Safety
sw_ZTHUT_2S
sw_pnp21pld12_s 21 (to e-box_connect)
sw_EmHaltResS
sw_pnp21pld12_s
6.3.10 Board Main (sensors)
sw_npn22pld12_s 22 sw_SUTS
Fig. 6-49 Board Main 33/35 [26573_04_B31]

U_Position_Inp sw_Override1_s 23
sw_Override1_s
Position_Inp.2.SchDoc Sheet: 32 sw_npn24pld12_s 24 sw_ILRECS
Pos/Safety
(to e-box_connector)
sw_npn25pld12_s 25 sw_PTHOHUS
sw_npn15pld1_s sw_npn26pld12_s 26 sw_PTHROS
sw_npn15pld1_s
sw_npn02pld1_s sw_npn27pld12_s 27 sw_PTHOUS
sw_ILREC sw_npn28pld1_s 28 sw_PTHROHS
sw_npn02pld1_sl sw_npn02pld1_sl sw_ILREC
sw_npn24pld12_s 29
sw_ILREC_l sw_ILREC_l sw_npn24pld12_s sw_npn35pld2
sw_npn08pld2_s 30
sw_npn24pld12_sl sw_npn24pld12_sl sw_npn08pld2_s +24V_Pos
sw_npn39pld12_s 31
sw_npn35pld2 32
sw_ILRESS_sl sw_ILRESS_sl sw_npn35pld2
33
st_CollisionXray_l st_CollisionXray_l 24VRTN
sw_ILRESS_s 34
st_EmHaltFromXray_l st_EmHaltFromXray_l sw_ILRESS_s sw_ILRESS_s
st_CollisionXray sw_npn35pld2 35 sw_RES2
sw_npn39pld12_sl sw_npn39pld12_sl st_CollisionXray st_CollisionXray
st_EmHaltFromXray sw_npn36pld12_s 36 sw_RES3S
sw_npn35pld2_l sw_npn35pld2_l st_EmHaltFromXray st_EmHaltFromXray
sw_npn37pld2 37 sw_ATBM
sw_npn36pld12_s sw_npn38pld2 38 sw_TST
sw_npn06pld2_s sw_npn39pld12_s 39 sw_RES1S
sw_npn20pld2_s ctrl_PCCUOn_lb 40
sw_npn03pld2_s
sw_npn03pld2_s sw_npn36pld12_s
Stiftleiste 40pol.
ctrl_PCCUOn_lb

22.03.2018
04 pvv16_148 Serienausgabe 21.03.18 beb si siehe DMS Stempel Overview_Position 026573_04_B31_01_01 03
Benennung

Änderung Datum beb siehe DMS Stempel Schutzvermerk ISO 16016 Datei : Overview_Position.SchDoc 26571 von : 36
Wiring diagrams
6-33
+24V_Pos V33 +24V_Pos
V33 V33
100nF C136
D15A
R354 7 R370
GND GND
14
V33 VCC D16C
U47A 4k7 U49A 4k7
1 16 TP231 1 2 1 16 TP239 5 6
1 sw_npn26pld12_sl 1 sw_npn07pld1_sl
R346 V33 R362 V33
2 15 2 15
sw_npn26pld12_s 74AHC14 sw_npn07pld1_s 74AHC14
R356 R372
4k7 ACPL247 4k7 4k7 ACPL247 4k7
D15B D16D
U47B GND U49B GND
3 14 TP232 3 4 3 14 TP240 9 8
1 sw_npn28pld1_sl 1 sw_npn16pld2_l
R347 V33 R363 V33
4 13 4 13
sw_npn28pld1_s 74AHC14 sw_npn16pld2 74AHC14
R357 R373
4k7 ACPL247 4k7 4k7 ACPL247 4k7
D15C D16E
U47C GND U49C GND
5 12 TP233 5 6 5 12 TP241 11 10
R348 V33 R364 V33
6 11 6 11
R358 R374
4k7 ACPL247 4k7 ACPL247
D15D D16F
U47D GND 4k7 U49D GND 4k7
7 10 TP234 9 8 7 10 TP242 13 12
R349 V33 R365
8 9 8 9
R359
4k7 ACPL247 4k7 4k7 ACPL247
D15E
U48A GND GND V33
1 16 TP235 11 10 V33
1 sw_npn22pld12_sl
R350 100nF C138
V33
2 15
sw_npn22pld12_s 74AHC14 D17A
R360 R371 7
4k7 ACPL247 GND GND
4k7 4k7 14
D15F V33 VCC
U48B GND U50A
3 14 TP236 13 12 1 16 TP243 1 2
1 sw_npn27pld12_sl 1 sw_npn11pld12_sl
R351 R366 V33
4 13 2 15
sw_npn27pld12_s 74AHC14 sw_npn11pld12_s 74AHC14
R375
4k7 ACPL247 V33 4k7 ACPL247 4k7
D17B
GND V33 U50B GND
100nF C137 3 14 TP244 3 4
1 sw_npn13pld12_sl
D16A R367 V33
R355 7 4 13
GND GND sw_npn13pld12_s 74AHC14
4k7 14 R376
V33 VCC 4k7 ACPL247
U48C 4k7
D17C
5 12 TP237 1 2 U50C GND
1 sw_npn14pld2_sl
5 12 TP245 5 6
R352 V33 1 sw_npn01pld1_sl
6 11 R368
sw_npn14pld2_s 74AHC14 V33
R361 6 11
4k7 ACPL247 sw_npn01pld1_s 74AHC14
4k7 R377
D16B 4k7 ACPL247
U48D GND 4k7
D17D
7 10 TP238 3 4 GND
1 sw_npn10pld2_sl U50D
7 10 TP246 9 8
R353 1 sw_npn05pld1_sl
8 9
sw_npn10pld2_s 74AHC14 R369
8 9
GND 4k7 ACPL247
GND
Fig. 6-50 Board Main 34/35 [26573_04_B31]

Benennung
22.03.2018
04 pvv16_148 Serienausgabe 21.03.18 beb si siehe DMS Stempel Position_Inp.1 026573_04_B31_01_01 03
Änderung Datum beb siehe DMS Stempel Schutzvermerk ISO 16016 Datei : Position_Inp.1.SchDoc 26571 von : 36
+24V_Pos V33
+24V_Pos V33
R387
4k7 R411
D17E
U51A 4k7
D14F
1 16 TP247 11 10
1 sw_npn15pld1_sl U44D
7 10 TP255 13 12
2 15
sw_npn15pld1_s 74AHC14 R409 V33
R388 8 9
4k7 R412
D17F 4k7 ACPL247
U51B GND 4k7
D13E
3 14 TP248 13 12 GND
1 sw_ILREC_l
5
U44C
12 11 10
TP256
R379
4 13
1 sw_npn35pld2_l
6-34
sw_ILREC 74AHC14 R410
6 11
4k7 ACPL247 sw_npn35pld2 74AHC14
V33
GND V33 4k7 ACPL247 V33
100nF C139 GND V33
100nF C160
D18A
R386 7
GND GND D19A
4k7 14 R417 7
V33 VCC GND GND
U51C 4k7 14
V33 VCC
5 12 TP249 1 2 U57A
1 sw_npn02pld1_sl
1 16 TP257 1 2
6 11 R413
sw_npn02pld1_s 74AHC14 V33
R389 2 15
R418
D18B 4k7 ACPL247
U51D GND 4k7 4k7
D19B
7 10 TP250 3 4 GND
1 sw_npn24pld12_sl U57B
R384 3 14 TP258 3
1 4
V33 sw_npn20pld2_sl
8 9
R390 4 13
ACPL247 sw_npn20pld2_s 74AHC14
4k7 4k7 R419
D18C 4k7 ACPL247
U52A GND 4k7
D19C
1 16 TP251 5 6 GND
R385
1 sw_npn08pld2_sl
5
U57C
12 5 6
TP259
V33 1 sw_npn03pld2_sl
2 15
R391 6 11
4k7 R420
D18D 4k7 ACPL247
U52B GND 4k7
D19D
3 14 TP252 9 8 GND
1 sw_ILRESS_sl U57D
7 10 TP260 9 8
4 13 R416
sw_ILRESS_s 74AHC14
R392 8 9
4k7
D18E 4k7 ACPL247
U52C GND
5 12 TP253 11 10 GND
1 st_CollisionXray_l
R382 V33
6 11
st_CollisionXray 74AHC14
R393
4k7 ACPL247 4k7
D18F
U52D GND
7 10 TP254 13 12
1 st_EmHaltFromXray_l
R383
8 9
st_EmHaltFromXray 74AHC14
4k7 ACPL247 D19E D19F
GND 11 10 13 12
1 1
74AHC14 74AHC14
GND GND
Fig. 6-51 Board Main 35/35 [26573_04_B31]

Benennung
22.03.2018
04 pvv16_148 Serienausgabe 21.03.18 beb si siehe DMS Stempel Position_Inp.2 026573_04_B31_01_01 03
Änderung Datum beb siehe DMS Stempel Schutzvermerk ISO 16016 Datei : Position_Inp.2.SchDoc 26571 von : 36
Wiring diagrams
Fig. 6-52 Cable set line ebox SLK (1L) [21458-W10], 24V supply for main board
16 026 02 0918
6.4 E-box connectors (28177)
!
! !
!
!
6-35
!
!
Wiring diagrams
Fig. 6-53 Layout E-Box connectors [028177_01_B09]

! = modifications (compared to former device 1L 20k)
16 026 02 0918
Wiring diagrams
6-36
X201 X202 X203
X225 X228 X226 X227 X200 +24V_Pos 1 +24V_Pos 1 +24V_Pos 1
1 GND_CTU GND_CTU 1 1 CAN-H6 1 1 sw_SUP_1S_s sw_SUC1_1S_s2 sw_SUC1_2S_s2 sw_YL_1S_s 2
2 GND_CTU ctrl_ChargeON_lb 2 2 CAN-L6 2 2 sw_ZTHOT_1S_s VPosRTN 3 VPosRTN 3 VPosRTN 3
3 ctrl_ChargeON_lb st_CTUOk_lb 3 3 GND_CAN 3 3 sw_ZTHOT_2S_s
4 GND_CTU st_EOC_lb 4 4 4 4 sw_SUC1_1S_s
N.C. N.C.
5 st_CTUOk_lb ctrl_HVTest_lb 5 5 ctrl_EnHydr1_lb 5 5 sw_YL_1S_s
6 GND_CTU +24V_CTU 6 6 6 6 sw_YL_2S_s X204 X205 X206
N.C. N.C.
7 st_EOC_lb ctrl_SwFocMotDir_lb 7 7 ctrl_EnHydr2_lb 7 7 sw_TRD0_1S_s +24V_Pos 1 +24V_Pos 1 +24V_Pos 1
8 st_CCTC_lb ctrl_SwFocMotEn_lb 8 8 8 8 sw_TRD0_2S_s sw_YL_2S_s 2 sw_ZTHUT_1S_s2 sw_ZTHUT_2S_s
2
N.C. N.C.
9 ctrl_HVTest_lb +24V_CTU 9 9 +24VAktorm. 9 9 sw_EmHaltRes VPosRTN 3 VPosRTN 3 VPosRTN 3
10 ctrl_CTUOn_lb sw_Precise_lb 10 10 +24VAktorm. 10 10 sw_SUC1_2S_s
11 +24V_CTU ctrl_Trigger_lb 11 11 +24VAktorm. 11 11 sw_TSTS_s
12 GND_CTU GND_CTU 12 12 VAktormRTN 12 12 sw_ILREC
sw_ILREC
13 ctrl_SwFocMotDir_lb sw_Extend_lb 13 13 VAktormRTN 13 13 sw_ATBMS_s X207 X208 X209
14 an_HVActualValue GND_CTU 14 14 VAktormRTN 14 14 sw_SUP_2S_s +24V_Pos 1 +24V_Pos 1 +24V_Pos 1
15 ctrl_SwFocMotEn_lb GND_CTU 15 15 15 sw_ZTHUT_1S_s sw_SUP_1S_s 2 sw_SUP_2S_s 2 sw_ZTHOT_1S_s
2
16 st_FaultSwitch_lb GND_CTU 16 Stiftleiste 14pol. 16 sw_SUXRP VPosRTN 3 VPosRTN 3 VPosRTN 3
to MB (CTU)
17 +24V_CTU st_CCTC_lb 17 to MB (Aktormed) Aktormed 17 swp_LaserPointer
18 an_HVSetValue ctrl_CTUOn_lb 18 18 sw_XrayAP
+24VAktorm.
19 sw_Precise_lb GND_CTU 19 Shield 19 sw_Override2_s
20 st_HVmax_lb an_HVActualValue 20 20 sw_ZTHUT_2S_s X210 X211 X212
V200
21 ctrl_Trigger_lb st_FaultSwitch_lb 21 21 sw_EmHaltResS_s +24V_Pos 1 +24V_Pos 1 +24V_Pos 1
22 st_DivIncon_lb an_HVSetValue 22 22 sw_SUTS_s sw_ZTHOT_2S_s
2 sw_SUXRP 2 sw_SUTS_s 2
SMBJ24A
23 GND_CTU st_HVmax_lb 23 23 sw_Override1_s VPosRTN 3 VPosRTN 3 VPosRTN 3
24 st_CTUTemp_lb st_DivIncon_lb 24 24 sw_ILRECS_s
VAktormRTN sw_ILRECS_s
25 sw_Extend_lb st_CTUTemp_lb 25 25 sw_PTHOHUS_s
26 GND_CTU 26 sw_PTHROS_s
to PCCU 27 sw_PTHOUS_s X213 X214 X215
28 sw_PTHROHS_s +24V_Pos 1 +24V_Pos 1 +24V_Pos 1
Shield 29 sw_TRD0_1S_s2 sw_TRD0_2S_s2 sw_TSTS_s 2
30 VPosRTN 3 VPosRTN 3 VPosRTN 3
+24V_Pos
31
32
33
Fig. 6-54 E-Box connectors 2/3 [028177_01_B31]

VPosRTN
X229 X230 34 X216 X217 X218
1 +24V_ContPan +24V_ContPan 1 35 sw_RES2 +24V_Pos 1 +24V_Pos 1 +24V_Pos 1
2 +24V_ContPan VContPRTN 2 36 sw_RES3S_s sw_TST 2 sw_ATBMS_s 2 sw_ATBM 2
3 VContPRTN CAN-H1 3 37 sw_ATBM VPosRTN 3 VPosRTN 3 VPosRTN 3
4 VContPRTN CAN-L1 4 38 sw_TST
5 sw_SwRelease1 5 39 sw_RES1S_s
N.C. Controlpanel 1
6 sw_SwRelease1S_s 6 40
N.C. N.C.
7 sw_SwRelease3S_s sw_Unlock1 7 X219 X220 X221
8 sw_SwRelease1S_s sw_CpConnect1 8 Stiftleiste 40pol. +24V_Pos 1 +24V_Pos 1 +24V_Pos 1
9 CAN-H3 sw_EmHalt1S_s 9 to MB (Pos/Safety) sw_XrayAP 2 sw_EmHaltRes 2 sw_EmHaltResS_s 2
10 CAN-H1 VPosRTN 3 VPosRTN 3 VPosRTN 3
11 CAN-L3
12 CAN-L1
13 sw_Unlock3 Shield
14 sw_Unlock1 X244 X245 X246
15 sw_CpConnect3 +24V_Pos 1 +24V_Pos 1 +24V_Pos 1
16 sw_CpConnect1 sw_RES1S_s 2 sw_RES2 2 sw_RES3S_s 2
to MB (Controlpanel 1+ 3)
17 sw_EmHalt3S_s VPosRTN 3 VPosRTN 3 Shield VPosRTN 3
18 sw_EmHalt1S_s X231 X233 X232
19 sw_SwRelease3 +24V_ContPan 1 1 +24V_Inl 1 Shield C231 1nF
C230
20 sw_SwRelease1 VContPRTN 2 2 +24V_Inl 2 C232
1nF
CAN-H3 3 3 +24V_Inl 3 C229 Shield Shield
1nF X224
Stiftleiste 20pol. CAN-L3 4 4 VInlRTN 4 1nF X222 X223
L211 +24V_Pos L213 1
+24V_ContPan sw_SwRelease3 5 5 VInlRTN 5 swp_LaserPointer 1 +24V_Pos 1
Controlpanel 2 Inline sw_PTHROS_s L214 2
sw_SwRelease3S_s 6 6 VInlRTN sw_ILRESS_s 6 VPosRTN 2 sw_Override1_s2
sw_PTHROHS_s L215 3
V202 sw_Unlock3 7 7 CAN-H5 7 +24V_Inl +24V_Pos 3
L212 N.C. sw_PTHOHUS_s L216 4
sw_CpConnect3 8 8 CAN-L5 8 C228 sw_Override2_s4
to MB (Inline)
VPosRTN L217 5
switch pivot
SMBJ24A sw_EmHalt3S_s 9 9 sw_ILRESS_s VInlRTN 9 V203 V201 1nF VPosRTN 5

sw_PTHOUS_s L218 6
10
N.C.
VContPRTN SMBJ24A SMBJ24A Shield C235 C233
Shield Shield
Stiftleiste 10pol. 1nF 1nF
Shield Shield VInlRTN VPosRTN C234 1nF
Shield
22.11.2017
02 rr siehe DMS Stempel I/O_Connector.SchDoc 028177_01_B31_01_01 01
Datum / Unterschrift board e-box connectors slk1l1 PCB-Nr. :
Benennung
01 pvv16_027 Erstausgabe 21.11.17 beb gezeichnet: Storz Medical AG / 2017 Blatt : 2
16 026 02 0918
Änderung Datum rr/beb siehe DMS Stempel Schutzvermerk ISO 16016 Datei : I_O_Connectors.SchDoc 20916 von : 4
X235
1 SCL2_b +24V_WA X236
2 SDA2_b 1
3 swp_DegaAirValve 2
Fg ca.1,7MHz
4 swp_DegaValve X242 Shield Shield swp_DegaAirValve 3
5 sw_DegaMax_f R200 0R 1 swp_DegaValve 4
6 sw_DegaMin_f SCL2_b 2 C200 C201 swp_WaterRadiator 5
7 st_DegaPumpRPM_f SDA2_b 3 I2C Bus 1nF 1nF 6
N.C.
16 026 02 0918
8 ctrl_DegaPumpRight_b 4 sw_DegaMax_f 7
9 ctrl_DegaPumpLeft_b R201 0R sw_DegaMin_f 8
L200 distributor degassing slk
10 an_DegaPumpSpeed_b 1863260000 st_DegaPumpRPM_f st_DegaPumpRPM 9
11 an_CushionPressure_f GND ctrl_DegaPumpRight_b ctrl_DegaPumpRight_b10
12 an_AirbagPressure_f Shield ctrl_DegaPumpLeft_b ctrl_DegaPumpLeft_b 11
13 swp_AirbagValveB an_DegaPumpSpeed_b an_DegaPumpSpeed_b12
C202
14 swp_AirbagValveA 13
15 swp_AirbagCompressor C203 Shield 14
16 swp_AirbagValveSelect 220pF 15
220pF
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
17 swp_ByPassValve an_AirbagPressure_f Shield +24V_WA X237
18 swp_WaterRadiator 1 V204 V205 V207 V206 VWARTN Con 15Pol_HD_F
L201 GSOT24C GSOT24C
19 2
N.C. WE-SL1 C204
20 3 Shield
N.C. C205
21 220pF N.C.4
N.C. Shield
22 5 GSOT12C GSOT05C
N.C. 220pF
23 an_WaterTempReservoir swp_AirbagCompressor 6
to MB (Water/Air) X3 24 an_ExcessTemperature 7 Shield Shield GND Shield Shield ShieldShield
N.C.
25 8
N.C. N.C.
26 V12F 9
N.C. distributor air slk C207 C206
27 an_CircPumpSpeed_b swp_AirbagValveA 10 F201
28 st_CircPumpRPM_f swp_AirbagValveB 11 an_CushionPressure_f 220pF L202 220pF
+24V_WA
29 ctrl_CircPumpRight_b swp_WaterRadiator 12
SMD1210 WE-SL1
30 ctrl_CircPumpLeft_b swp_AirbagValveSelect 13 +24V_WA_F
Resettable
31 swp_CircPumpPWR 14 +24V_WA
0,4A C208
32 swp_CircPumpPWR 15 C209
33 +24V_WA 220pF 220pF
2
1
34 VWARTN Con 15Pol_HD_M
GND V208 Shield
35 +24V_WA
36 +24V_WA Shield GSOT24C X238
C222 C223
37 VWARTN L206 1
220pF 220pF
38 VWARTN Shield Fg ca.1,7MHzShield V12F 2
39 VWARTN 3
WE-SL1
40 VWARTN C213 C214 an_ExcessTemperature 4
distributor therapy head slk
41 VWARTN 1nF 1nF Shield 5
C225 C227
42 VWARTN X241 6
SMD-Ferrite 220pF 220pF
!
43 swp_CoolingPump st_CircPumpRPM_f L205 1 Fg ca.1MHz 7

Shield
44 swp_CoolingPump ctrl_CircPumpRight_b 2 L207 8
sw_ILREC
45 ctrl_CircPumpLeft_b 3 L208
N.C. sw_ILRECS_s
46 4 1863340000
Fig. 6-55 E-Box connectors 3/3 [028177_01_B31], ! = modifications

N.C. NC L209
47 an_CircPumpSpeed_b 5 Circulation Pump VPosRTN
N.C.
48 6 L210
N.C. +24V_Pos
49 7 !
N.C.
50 swp_CircPumpPWR 8
N.C. 1nF 1nF 1nF 1nF
Stiftleiste 50pol. 1863340000 C226 C224 C220 C221
2
1
2
1
2
1
V211 V209 Shield
V210
GSOT12C GSOT05C GSOT24C X239

+24V_WA_F 1
From Water Tank
Shield Shield GND Shield VWARTN an_WaterTempReservoir 2
3 signal converter PT100/ 4-20mA
X247 X243 N.C.
4
1 1 N.C.
!
2 Cooling Pump swp_ByPassValve 2

BypassValve 1863260000
3
N.C.= No Connection VWARTN VWARTN

22.11.2017
02 rr siehe DMS Stempel Water Air Connectors.SchDoc 028177_01_B31_01_01 01
Datum / Unterschrift board e-box connectors slk1l1 PCB-Nr. :
Benennung

Änderung Datum rr/beb siehe DMS Stempel Schutzvermerk ISO 16016 Datei : Water Air Connectors.SchDoc 20916 von : 4
Wiring diagrams
6-37
Abbildung 3 (Konfektionierung SUC1_1S)
3.3 SUC1_2S
4/9
021463_01_C35_01_01_230412
6.4.1 Cables for inductive sensors [21463] cable set sensors slk2
Version: 3
1 Stückliste
Separates Dokument
2 Anschlussplan
Fig.Abbildung
6-56 4Cable
(Konfektionierung
inductive SUC1_2S)
sensor [21463], here as example for sensor SUC1_2S
3.4 ZTHUT_1S
3/3
021590_01_C35_01_01_040711
temp. sens water tank slk2
Version: 2
1 Stückliste
Separates Dokument
2 Montage
Abbildung 5 (Konfektionierung ZTHUT_1S)
3/3
3.5 ZTHUT_2S 021590_01_C35_01_01_040711
Version: 2
1 Stückliste
Fig.Separates Dokument
6-57 Cable inductive sensor XXX [21463], universal drawing
Abbildung 1 (Anschlussplan für alle Sensoren)
2 Montage
6-38
6.4.2 Cable temperature sensor water tank SLK (1L) [-----]
Abbildung 6 (Konfektionierung ZTHUT_2S)
Abbildung 1 (Montage)
3 Stromlaufplan
Datei: Dokument im DMS
t e d
Zusammenstellzeichnung Autor: mj
Form: TEM_QM_005_01_01
a
pd
Version: 0 © STORZ MEDICAL AG / 2012 / COPYRIGHT ISO 16016
e u
b
to
3 Stromlaufplan
Fig. 6-58 Cable temp. sens water tank SLK (1L) [21590], PT100 - converter, required without plug
Abbildung 2 (Stromlaufplan)
Wiring diagrams
Fig. 6-59 Temperature signal converter [27523], with 4-, 3-, 2-wire connection
16 026 02 0918
Datei: Dokument im DMS Zusammenstellzeichnung Autor: mj

6.4.3 Cable circulation pump SLK (1L) [28821]
e-box connectors
circulation pump
3/4
021379_01_C17_01_01
cable signal aktormed slk2
Version: 1
1 Stückliste
Pos. Beschreibung Anzahl 4/4
Hersteller ................................................Hersteller Nr. 021379_01_C17_01_01
Lieferant ............................................Lieferanten Nr. cable signal aktormed slk2
Version: 1
10 leitung strg 5x2x0.25 ul 2464 800 mm
3 Montage
Heiniger: ................................................999 991 052
20 Cable
Fig. 6-60 D-Sub Crimp-Buchse
circulation 15P
pump SLK (1L) [28821], X241 - pump 1 Stück
Deltron: ..................................................dt15px
30 Crimpkontakt female AWG 20...24 15 Stück
6.4.4 Cable signal aktormed SLK (1L) [21379]
Deltron: ...................................................px11
40 D-Sub Crimp-Stecker 15P 1 Stück
Deltron: ...................................................dt15sx
50 Crimpkontakt male AWG 20...24 15 Stück
Deltron ...................................................sx11
60 subd gehaeuse 15pol metallisiert 2 Stück
6-39
Deltron: ...................................................ctlm15un4
70 Label gemäss Zeichnung
2 Stromlaufplan / Wiring Diagram

Wiring diagrams
Fig. 6-61
AbbildungCable signal aktormed
1 (Stromlaufplan SLK (1L) [21379], X227 - X631
/ Wiring Diagram)
16 026 02 0918
Datei: Dokument im DMS Fertigungsteilzeichnung Autor: mj

6.5 Distributor air (21018)
Fig. 6-62 PCB distributor air [021018_01_C24]
6-40
Fig. 6-63 Signals on board distributor air [021018_01_C24]

Wiring diagrams
16 026 02 0918
Hersteller ................................................Hersteller Nr. cable to distributor air slk2
Lieferant ............................................Lieferanten Nr. Version: 1
103 Montage
leitung strg 16x0.14 ul 2571 800 mm
Heiniger: ................................................999880163
20 D-Sub High Density Crimp-Buchse 15P 2 Stück
FCT: ..................................................FL09-15S7
6.5.1 Cable
Distrelec:to distributor air SLK (1L)
..........................................121510 [21173]
30 Crimpkontakt AWG 28...24 30 Stück
FCT: ...................................................FK22SL-02V
Distrelec: ...........................................121516
Deltron: ...................................................ctlm9un4
Distrelec: ...........................................124668

6-41
Abbildung
Fig. 6-641 (Stromlaufplan / Wiring Diagram)
Cable to distributor air SLK (1L) [21173], X237 - X851


Wiring diagrams
16 026 02 0918
6.6 Distributor degassing (21020)
Fig. 6-65 PCB distributor degassing [021020_03_C24]
6-42
Wiring diagrams
Fig. 6-66 Signals on board distributor degassing [021020_03_C24]
16 026 02 0918
cable to distributor degassing slk2
10 leitung strg 16x0.14 ul 2571 1500 mm Version: 2
Heiniger: ................................................999880163
3 Montage
20 D-Sub High Density Crimp-Stecker 15P 2 Stück
FCT: ..................................................FL09-15P7
Distrelec: ..........................................121505
6.6.1
30 Cable toAWG
Crimpkontakt distributor
28...24 degassing SLK (1L) [21176]30 Stück
FCT: ...................................................FK22PL-02V
Distrelec: ...........................................121515
Deltron: ...................................................ctlm9un4
Distrelec: ...........................................124668

6-43
Abbildung
Fig. 6-67 1 (Stromlaufplan / Wiring Diagram)
Cable to distributor degassing SLK (1L) [21176], X236 - X801
6.7 Distributor therapy head (26751)

Datei: 0 Dokument im DMS
Version: Fertigungsteilzeichnung Autor:
© STORZ MEDICAL AG / 2011 mj
/ COPYRIGHT ISO 16016
Wiring diagrams
Fig. 6-68 PCB distributor therapy head [26751_01_B09]
16 026 02 0918
Wiring diagrams
6-44
X911
1 +24V_Pos
2 sw_ZTHUT_1S/TH_RES1_s
3 VPosRTN
X913 X914
swp_LaserPointer 1 swp__LED_TH 1 (sw_24V)
VPosRTN 2 (sw_5V) VPosRTN 2 Coupling Cushion Illumination
X912
1 +24V_Pos
measurement range
2 sw_ZTHUT_2S/TH_RES2_s
0 - 50°C
3 VPosRTN
N900 X905
Shield R900 R901
Testpoint 12 +24V_WA_F 1
n.m. n.m. V_LIN
i 10 an_ExcessTemperature 2
4K7 62K V+ i Testpoint R/I Transmitter 4-20mA
C900 C901 1 3
n.m. IR1 GND
220pF n.m. 220pF
X902 Testpoint 14
IR2 X903
1 an_TempSrcSafety+ i +24V_WA_F 1
2 an_TempSensSafety+ 13
3
PT100 n.m. L900 n.m. +Vin an_CushionPressure 2
n.m. 3 n.m. L901 n.m. an_TempSensSafety- Cushion Pressur
3
4 WE-SL1 an_TempSrcSafety- R902 3
RG Base
9 1 V900 GND
n.m. n.m. n.m.
WE-SL1 39R BC846B Shield
1863260000 C912 C913 n.m. R903 4
2
n.m. n.m. RG X901a
220pF 220pF C906 C907 1R5 Emitter
8 C908
an_CushionPressure
1
220pF 2 n.m. n.m. C909
Temperature Sensor Safety 220pF Testpoint i -Vin L902 220pF +24V_WA_F 2
10nF
Shield 3
11 i Testpoint GND
3
V_REG n.m. C914 V12F 4
7 n.m.
Io 220pF an_CushionOverTemp 5
6 WE-SL1
I_RET i an_ExcessTemperature 6 Therapy Head
2 i
X906 n.m. R904 n.m. C910 an_DistanceSensor1 7
XTR105 Testpoint 220pF Testpoint
1 +24V_WA_F 20R an_DistanceSensor2 8
2 an_DistanceSensor2 COM_TxD_RF 9
4 - 20mA normal condition
3 Shield COM_RxD_RF 10
GND
11
V901 R905 2 - 28mA fault condition NC PicoSPOX 11pol.
Skin2TH distance sensor 4-20mA
BC846B n.m. 91R
X907 X901b
Fig. 6-69 Distributor therapy head [26751_01_B31]

3
1 +24V_WA_F VPosRTN 1
2 an_DistanceSensor1 1 +24V_Pos 2
n.m.
7
3 sw_ILREC 3
GND
sw_ILRECS_s 4
2
2
sw_TST/TH_OT45 5
V+ 6 Therapy Head
n.m. i Testpoint sw_ATBM/TH_UT45 6
3 V-
X908 sw_ZTHUT_1S/TH_RES1_s 7
U900
1 +24V_Pos i sw_ZTHUT_2S/TH_RES2_s 8
OPA234
4
2 sw_TST/TH_OT45 swp__LED_TH 9
Testpoint
3 VPosRTN swp_LaserPointer 10
R906 PicoSPOX 10pol.
n.m.
2K2 +24V_Pos 1 X904
X909 sw_ILRECS_s 2
1 +24V_Pos VPosRTN 3
C911 ILREC/ILRECS
2 sw_ATBM/TH_UT45 n.m. i Testpoint +24V_Pos 4
10nF
3 VPosRTN sw_ILREC 5
VPosRTN 6
X910 Comp. for Partlist: Comp. for PCB: SC3 SC4 SC1 SC2
1 COM_RxD_RF
2 COM_TxD_RF
RFID Ref.1 Ma1 Ma2 Ma3
3
GND
Molex 3pol. V902 V903 PCB
Pilot Hole Fiducial Fiducial Fiducial R907 R908
SMAJ15CA SMAJ15CA 26752_01
SC5 SC6 0R 0R
Ref.2 Ref.3
STORZ MEDICAL
GND GND Logo
Pilot Hole Pilot Hole Shield Shield
07.06.2016
02 rr siehe DMS Stempel Alles 026752_01_B31_01_01 02
gezeichnet: Datum / Unterschrift board distributor therapy head clp PCB-Nr. :
Benennung
01 aea14_001 Erstausgabe 07.06.16 rr Storz Medical AG / 2015 Blatt : 1

Änderung Datum beb siehe DMS Stempel Schutzvermerk ISO 16016 Datei : Temp. transmitter.SchDoc 26752 von : 2
16 026 02 0918
6.7.1 Cable swivel SLK (1L) [29367]
3/3
021590_01_C35_01_01_040711
Version: 2
1 Stückliste
Separates Dokument
2 Montage 3/3
021590_01_C35_01_01_040711
temp. sens water tank slk2 6-45
Version: 2
1 Stückliste
Separates Dokument
Fig. 6-70 Cable swivel SLK (1L) [29367],X901a/b - X238
2 Montage
6.7.2 Cable temperature sensor herapy head SLK (1L) [-----]
3 Stromlaufplan t e d signal conv.
d a
u p
be
to
Wiring diagrams
3 Stromlaufplan
Temp. Sens
safety
Fig. 6-71 Cable temp. sens water tank SLK (1L) [21803], PT100 - converter, required without plug
16 026 02 0918
Fig. 6-72 Temperature signal converter [27523], with 4-, 3-, 2-wire connection
6-46
Wiring diagrams
16 026 02 0918
6.8 PCCU (25860)
6-47
Wiring diagrams
Fig. 6-73 Overview PCCU [25860_01]
16 026 02 0918
6.8.1 Cable set power SLK (1L) [29353]
Fig. 6-74 Cable set power SLK (1L) [29353-W11], Supply PCCU - XPowerPCCU
6-48
Fig. 6-75 Cable set power SLK (1L) [29353-W12], XBoardConnectorsPCCU - XPCCU
Wiring diagrams
16 026 02 0918
Hersteller ................................................Hersteller Nr. cable pccu 25pol slk2
Lieferant ............................................Lieferanten Nr. Version: 2
3
10 Montage
leitung strg 25x0.14 ul 2571 500 mm
Heiniger: ................................................999880253
20 stecker subd 25pol crimp 2 Stück
6.8.2 Deltron: ..................................................dt
Cable PCCU 25 pol SLK (1L)[21405] 25 px
30 kontakte awg 24-28 50 Stück
Deltron: ...................................................px 2 2
Deltron: ...................................................ctlm25un

6-49
Fig. 6-76 Cable PCCU 25 pol SLK (1L)[21405], X228 - XPCCU

Abbildung 1Dokument
(Stromlaufplan
Datei: im DMS / Wiring Diagram) Fertigungsteilzeichnung Autor: mj
Wiring diagrams

16 026 02 0918
6.9 CTU (25857)
X2 X7b X7a
X4
X4a
6-50
Wiring diagrams
+12V-C +48F +48V

X11
F1
X10 T 16 A T16A
X6
1
R173 R174 R175 2
C74 C75 C76 C77 C78 C79
10k C81 T 1.0 A 3 +48V
47uF/25V X6 4
X1
Si2309CDS V62
22k/1W 22k/1W 3300uF/63V 3300uF/63V 3300uF/63V 3300uF/63V 3300uF/63V 3300uF/63V
GND-C GND
Fig. 6-77 Layout Board CTU [25641_01_B09]

3
R114
V64 +48F
BC846B 1k3
R177 V65
8
2
V71 IRFB 4410ZPBF

gn 20R/0,5W 3,3uF/50V 3,3uF/50V 3,3uF/50V 3,3uF/50V
16 026 02 0918
3,3uF/50V
M10 T1
Vcc HV-Bridge
7 R179
R181 5k1 R180 C82 C83 C84 C85 C86 C87 C88 C89 C90 C91
GND-C GND-C 4 8
4R7
R182
analog + safety.SchDoc Controller+Digital I_O.SchDoc Overview_Interface a.Connectors.SchDoc HV-Fullbridge driver.SchDoc
EOC_Set EOC_Set st_CTUOk
Teiler_Ref Teiler_Ref SD st_CTUOk
Teiler_Ist Teiler_Ist st_HVmax_b st_HVmax_b SD
16 026 02 0918
OVERVOL OVERVOL st_CTUTemp_b st_CTUTemp_b
st_CTUOk_b st_CTUOk_b
st_FaultSwitch_b st_FaultSwitch_b
st_EOC_b st_EOC_b
ctrl_ChargeOn_l ctrl_ChargeOn_l
ctrl_Trigger_l ctrl_Trigger_l
st_DivIncon_b st_DivIncon_b
st_TrigCount_b st_TrigCount_b
ctrl_RxD ctrl_RxD
st_TxD st_TxD
ctrl_HVTest_l ctrl_PICVPP ctrl_PICVPP
HV-Set-Rev-Value ctrl_PICCLK ctrl_PICCLK
HV-Set-Value ctrl_PICDATA ctrl_PICDATA
HV-Actual-Value V_ck V_ck
st_faultSwitch TMS TMS
M1-(HV-Ref-Value)
TEMP1 TCK TCK
M2-(HV-Actual-Value)
st_TrigCount TDI TDI
CLK
CS3
CS2
CS1
DOUT
TEMP2
ctrl_CTUOn_l
HV-Actual-Value
HV-Set-Value
HV-Set-Rev-Value
ctrl_HVTest_l
ctrl_CTUOn_lb
TDO TDO
Sheet: 3 Sheet: 4 Sheet: 6 Sheet: 10
Fig. 6-78 Board ctu slk 1/10 [25641_01_B31]

HV-Input+Trigger.SchDoc AD-Converter.SchDoc Power_48V Region.SchDoc
M2-(HV-Actual-Value)
M1-(HV-Ref-Value)
ctrl_CTUOn_lb
CLK
CS3
CS2
CS1
TEMP2
DOUT
M1-(HV-Ref-Value)
st_faultSwitch
TEMP1
St_TrigCount HV-Set-Value
HV-Actual-Value ctrl_CTUOn_l
Sheet: 2 Sheet: 5 Sheet: 9
Comp. for Partlist: Comp. for PCB:

STORZ MEDICAL SC1 SC2
KK1
PCB n.m. Sicherung Logo
25642_01
zu KK1 zu U12 Ma1 Ma2
0
Komponente beistellen GND
Wärmeleitfolie zu V65-V70
GND Fiducial Fiducial SC3 SC4
SC5
Ma3
Verriegelungsbügel
GND-C
Änderungsnachweis_01.SchDoc L3
WE-CBF Fiducial
26.01.2017
02 jos siehe DMS Stempel Overview 025641_01_B31_01_01 07
Datum / Unterschrift board ctu slk1l ampegon PCB-Nr. :
Benennung

Änderung Datum beb siehe DMS Stempel Schutzvermerk ISO 16016 Datei : OverviewMaster.SchDoc 25642 von : 11
Wiring diagrams
6-51
6.10 Control panel (24117)
X3 X10
X17
X9a
X6
F1
F2
X1 X2
Fig. 6-79 Layout of board control panel [24117_03_B09]
6-52 Item Description

F1 Fuse T 1.0 A
F2 Fuse 0,15 A
V9 Voltage 12 VDC
V13 Voltage 3,3 VDC
V22 Signal STA1
V23 Signal STA2
V24 Signal Ethernet Activity
V25 Signal /PONRES
X1 Connector Power and I/O
X2 Connector Hand switch
X3 Connector Emergency Halt
X6 Connector Backlight
X9a Connector USB-A
X10 Connector Loudspeaker
X17 Connector Touch screen
Wiring diagrams
Tabelle 6-1 Legend of board control panel
16 026 02 0918
V24
GND V24
V32
F1 1,0AT
TP10
C1
220nF 4 L1
TP1
SS14 C2
V1
C3 1mH/0.95A F2
1 22uF/35V
SMD1210
16 026 02 0918
100nF SMBJ24A
WE-SL5
X1 C4 0,15A GND GND
TP8
220nF
1 +24V_ContPan GND GND GND
GND
2 VContPRTN USBLC6-2
3 CAN-H TP3 L2 1 6 C5 C6
I/01 I/02 CAN-H
4 CAN-L TP4 WE-CNSW 3 4 10nF 10nF
I/02 I/01 CAN-L
Power in u. I/O 5 sw_SwRelease TP5
6 sw_SwRelease S_s 2 5 L3 TP19
GND VBUS V50
7 sw_Unlock L4 WE-CBF X2
8 sw_CpConect GND U2 L5 TP16 sw_SwRelease 1
WE-CBF Trig1
9 sw_EmHalt S_s TP9 L6 2
WE-CBF V24
L7 sw_SwRelease S_s
TP17 3 Hand Switch Shockwave
WE-CBF Trig2
Molex 9pol. TP7 L8 sw_Unlock 4
WE-CBF Elmen
WE-CBF L9 TP18
WE-CBF Molex 4pol.
L10
TP6 C7 C8
WE-CBF 10nF 10nF
X3
GND GND TP11 1
L11 R1
TP2 TP12 EmHaltCH1 2
TP13 3
WE-CBF 1K0, 1W
TP14 EmHaltCH2 4 Emergency Halt
TP15 EmHaltLED 5
6
R2
10K Molex 6pol.
2 GND
R3
1 V2
BC856B
Fig. 6-80 Board control panel 2/12 [24117_03_B31]

1
2
33K
3
V3 V4
GSOT24C
2 1
V33 GND
3
BAV99
3
R4 R5 level shifter
1 V5
DriveEmHaCh1 BC846B EmHaCh2
4k7 4k3
2
R6
680R
GND GND GND
03 pvv15_120 0R Widerstände neue Position 18.11.15 rr geprüft: Datum / Unterschrift Stromlaufplan - wiring diagram Zeichn.-Nr. : Version : Druckdatum:
18.11.2015
02 pvv14/072 Serienausgabe 17.04.15 rr rr siehe DMS Stempel Emergency_Stop 024117_03_B31_01_01 01
gezeichnet: Datum / Unterschrift board control panel pcap slk2-f2 PCB-Nr. :
Benennung
01 pvv14/072 Erstausgabe 05.12.14 rr Storz Medical AG / 2015 Blatt : 2

Änderung Datum rr/beb siehe DMS Stempel Schutzvermerk ISO 16016 Datei : Control_Panel_Emergency_Stop.SchDoc 24118 von : 13
Wiring diagrams
6-53
3/5
020816_01_C17_01_01_020511
cable control panel slk2
Version: 2
1 Aufbau
6.10.1 Cable control panel SLK (1L) [20816]
Ref. 10
Ref. 20
4/5
020816_01_C17_01_01_020511
cable control panel slk2
Version: 2
Ref. 11
2 Stromlaufplan
Abbildung 1 (Aufbauzeichnung / Zusammenstellzeichnung)
3/3
021015_01_C35_01_01_240611
cable controlpanel connect slk2
Version: 1
1 Stückliste
Fig.Abbildung
6-81 2 Cable
(Stromlaufplan)
Separates Dokument control panel SLK (1L) [20816]
2 Stromlaufplan
6.10.2 / Wiring
Cable control panel Diagram
connect SLK (1L) [21015]
6-54 Form: TEM_QM_005_01_01
Fig. 6-82 Cable control panel connect SLK (1L) [21015], extension cable for remote control, X2 - X230
Abbildung 1 (Stromlaufplan / Wiring Diagram)
3 Montage
Wiring diagrams

16 026 02 0918
6.11 Pivot control (20988)
6-55
Fig. 6-83 PCB switch pivot [020988_01_C24]

Wiring diagrams
16 026 02 0918
Fig. 6-84 Board switch pivot [020988_01_C24]
6-56
Wiring diagrams
16 026 02 0918
6.12 Box Motion Control (21024)
Fig. 6-85 Cover Box Motion control [21514]
6-57
Fig. 6-86 Cover Box Motion control, right side [21514]
Wiring diagrams
16 026 02 0918
Wiring diagrams
6-58
+24V +24V +24V
X601 X605 X620

X2 1 1 VppPot 1
1 ctrl_EnHydr2 sw_SUP 2 sw_RES2 2 an_POSPTH 2
TP7
2 N.C. 3 3 3
TP75
3 N.C.
TP76
4 VppPot sw_SUP sw_RES2 an_POSTH
TP8
5 an_POSPTH X602 X621
TP9
6 an_POSX 1 X606 1
TP10
7 an_POSY sw_SUT 2 1 an_POSX 2
TP11
8 an_POSZ 3 sw_RES1 2 3
TP12
9 +24V 3
TP13
10 AGNDPot sw_SUT an_POSX
TP14
11 sw_SUP X603 sw_RES1 X622
TP15
12 sw_SUT 1 1
TP16
13 sw_TRD0 sw_TRD0 2 an_POSY 2
TP17
14 sw_TRD15 3 3
TP18
15 sw_RES1
TP19
16 sw_RES2 sw_TRDO an_POSY
TP20
17 sw_RES3 X604 X623
TP21
18 sw_RES4 1 1
TP22
19 GND sw_TRD15 2 an_POSZ 2
TP23
20 GND 3 AGNDPot 3
21 GND
22 ValPivOT sw_TRD15 an_POSZ
TP24
23 ValPivUT
TP25
24 ValSwivPark X610 X614
TP26
25 ValSwivTh ValPivOT 1 ValRES2 1
TP27
Aktormed 26 ValTrDown 2 2
TP28
27 ValTrUp ValPivUT 3 ValRES1 3
TP29 ctrl_EnHydr2
28 ValXFoot 4 4
TP30
29 ValXHead
TP31
30 ValYLeft Pivot ValRES
TP32 ctrl_EnHydr1
31 ValYRight X611
TP33
32 ValZDown ValSwivPark 1 GND
TP34
Fig. 6-87 Board Aktormed Connectors [20562_01_B31]

33 CAN-H 2
TP35
34 ValZUp ValSwivTh 3
TP36
35 CAN-L 4
TP37
36 ValRES1 TP62 X631
TP38
37 RS232Gnd Swivel CAN-H 1
TP39
38 ValRES2 CAN-L TP63 2
TP40 X612
39 RS232AmTx GND TP64 3
TP41 ValZDown 1
40 ValRES3 TP65 4
TP42 2
41 RS232AmRx ctrl_EnHydr1 5
TP43 ValZUp 3
42 ValRES4 X630 6
TP44 4 TP66
43 +24V TP58 TP69 1 ctrl_EnHydr2 7
ValTrDown 5
44 +24V TP45 RS232AmRx 2 TP67 8
6
45 GND TP46 RS232AmTx 3 9
TP47 ValTrUp 7 TP59
46 GND TP70 4 10
TP48 8
47 N.C. RS232Gnd 5 11
TP77 TP60
48 N.C. 6 12
TP78 Tr and Z TP71
49 ctrl_EnHydr1 7 13
TP49 TP72
50 N.C. X613 8 +24V 14
TP79 TP73 TP68
ValXFoot 1 9 15
TP74
Stiftleiste 50pol. 2
ValXHead 3 SUBD-9Pol Male SUBD-15Pol Male
TP61
4
ValYLeft 5 Shield Shield
GND 6
ValYRight 7
8
GND
Foot and Head
GND
03 geprüft: Datum / Unterschrift Stromlaufplan - wiring diagram Zeichn.-Nr. : Druckdatum:
24.05.2011
02 connectors 020562_03_B31_03_01
Datum / Unterschrift board connector aktormed PCB-Nr. :
Benennung
01 aea09/003 Serienausgabe 23.05.11 beb gezeichnet:  Storz Medical AG / 2011 Blatt : 1
16 026 02 0918
J. Meurer 24.01.2011
Änderung Datum Schutzvermerk ISO 16016 Datei : connector_aktormed.SchDoc 20563_04 von : 2
6.12.1 Cable set power SLK (1L) [29353]
Fig. 6-88 Cable set power SLK (1L) [29353-W13], X2 - XPowerMotion
6-59
Fig. 6-89 Cable set power SLK (1L) [29353-W14], XPowerMotion - X632 (Aktormed)
Wiring diagrams
16 026 02 0918
6.13 External panel
6.13.1 External connectors [29464]
6-60
Wiring diagrams
Fig. 6-90 board external connectors [29464_01]
16 026 02 0918
6.13.2 service external panel (21005)
Fig. 6-91 board service external panel [021005_02_B09]

V8
R7
USB_UP_LED V33
USB-UP ye 470R
ye
V33 V33
R8
10K
2
R9
1 V7
USB_CONNECT BC856B
2K2 gn
V9 R10
3
GND
PWR detect USB_DEV 470R
6-61
VBUS
R11
1K5 USB-Connected gn
S3 R14 R15
GND X336
USB-Device
220k 4K7 +5V USB_DEV 1
R12 1 D- 2
33R
2 D+ 3 USB-Device Mini-B
USB_D-
3 4
6 5
R13
5
USB_D+
4
33R
6
1
Schalter 2pol.
GND Shield
V10 USB-Host
X337
PGB1
Host Power +5V 1
D- 2
D+ 3 USB-Host Standard -A
GND 4
Power Status for USB host power switch
USB_PWRD
5
V33 V33 V50 R18

0R GND Shield
U1
R19 R22 2 7
10K 10K IN1 OUT1
+5V / 500mA
3
IN2
6
Power enable signal for USB port low active OUT2
4
USB_PPWR EN1
5 C4 C5
EN2 R20 R21
1 8 10uF/10V 100nF 15k 15k
GND OC
TPS2082
Host Power Switch
GND GND GND GND GND
Fig. 6-92 board service external panel 2/2 [021005_02_B31]

geprüft: Datum / Unterschrift Stromlaufplan - wiring diagram Zeichn.-Nr. : Druckdatum:
Benennung
03
02 USB Host / Device 021005_01_B31_03_01 04.04.2011
01 aea09/003 Serienausgabe 28.03.11 rr gezeichnet: Datum / Unterschrift  Storz Medical AG / 2011 Board Service ext. Panel SLK2 PCB-Nr. : Blatt : 2
Änderung Datum
* *
Schutzvermerk ISO 16016 Datei : USB.SchDoc 21006_01 von : 2
Wiring diagrams
16 026 02 0918
Wiring diagrams
6-62
V33
V24
C2 V6 C3
1
2
Fig. 6-94
10uF/35V
10uF/10V SMBJ24A
V2
V33
GSOT03C GND GND GND
X330
1 X332
2 ETHOP_TX+ 1
3 GND ETHOP_TX- 2
V50
4 ETHN_RX+ 3
GND R1 R2 R3 R4
5 4
6 5
C1 Ethernet RJ45 incl. LED
7 ETHN_RX- 6
8 sw_Override1_s
V1 2k2 2k2 110R 110R 7
SMBJ5.0A
9 sw_Override2_s 10uF/10V 8
10 ISP_P1.25 9 GN
11 GND GND LED_LINK LED_GN 10 V3
12 COM_TxD 11
13 LED_ACT LED_YE 12 V4
USB_UP_LED
14 COM_RxD
15
VBUS YE
16 st_CardDetect
to Board Main X5
17 Shield
USB_D-
18 CAN-L3
19
USB_CONNECT
20 CAN-H3
21 R5
USB_D+ n.m.
22 I2C_SCL0_l
23 X333
USB_PPWR
24 st_CCTC_PLD_l CF Card Connector CAN-L3 1
25 CAN-H3 2
USB_PWRD X334
26 I2C_SDA0_l COM_TxD 3
COM-CAN Interface
27 LED_LINK 1 26 COM_RxD 4
GND GND
28 ctrl_CCCRST_lb 2 27 5
29 ETHOP_TX+ 3 28 6
GND
30 ctrl_MCLR_lb 4 29
31 ETHOP_TX- V5 5 30
32 LED_ACT ctrl_MCLR_lb 2 I2C_SDA0_l 6 31
33 ETHN_RX+ 3 7 32
Fig. 6-93 board service external panel 1/2 [021005_02_B31]

34 ETHN_RX- ctrl_CCCRST_lb 1 st_CCTC_PLD_l 8 33
I2C_SCL0_l 9 34
Stiftleiste 34pol. BAR43A 10 35
11 36 V24
12 37
13 38
V50 V50
14 39 S1
15 40
V50
16 41
17 42 1
18 43 2 Comp. for Partlist: Comp. for PCB:
ISP_P1.25 R6 19 44 sw_Override1_s 3
4k7 20 45 4 Ma1 Ma2 Ma3
21 46 5 SC1 SC2
22 47 sw_Override2_s 6
S2 23 48 PCB
Taster 2pol. Fiducial Fiducial Fiducial
24 49 21006_01
st_CardDetect 25 50 Override
GND Ma4 Ma5 Ma6
TASTER ISP Shield Shield
zu S1
Adr.: 0xA6 WR SC3 SC4
Tastenkappe
GND
Adr.: 0xA7 RD Fiducial Fiducial Fiducial
zu X334
Auswerfer STORZ MEDICAL
Logo
03 geprüft: Datum / Unterschrift Stromlaufplan - wiring diagram Zeichn.-Nr. : Druckdatum:

04.04.2011
02 Connectors 021005_01_B31_03_01
gezeichnet: Datum / Unterschrift Board Service ext. Panel SLK2 PCB-Nr. :
Benennung
01 aea09/003 Serienausgabe 28.03.11 rr  Storz Medical AG / 2011 Blatt : 1

* *
Änderung Datum Schutzvermerk ISO 16016 Datei : Connectors.SchDoc 21006_01 von : 2
16 026 02 0918
6.13.3 Communication controller (28672)
Fig. 6-95 PCB communication controller [20535_02_B09], with µP board (26745) and SCB node (17605)
V12 V50 V24
1
U8
IN OUT 3
V33b
TP4
6-63
C2 C3 C4
C1 GND
10uF/25V 10uF/25V
OKI-78SR-3.3 22uF/10V
2
2.2uF/35V
GND GND GND GND GND
X360
1 TP1
V24
2 TP2
V12
3 TP3
V50
4 TP49 V33
NC
from main board SLK2 5 TP5
GND
6
GND L1
7 TP6 CAN-H6 1 6
I/01 I/01 CAN-H 2, 3
8 TP7 CAN-L6 WE-CNSW 3 4
I/02 I/02 CAN-L 2, 3
Stiftleiste 8pol. 2 5
GND VBUS V50
GND U2
U1A V33b
J1
Power;
Status Sign. 11
V33
V33 12
16
VBAT NC
/PONRES 15 /PONRES
129
Status 1 STA1 2
130
Status 2 STA2 2
GND 13
GND 14 V33b V33b
GND 39
R1 R2
40 10K 10K
GND
U3
GND 59
Wiring diagrams
TP8 2 5 /PONRES
RESIN RESET /PONRES 2
GND 62
TP48 3 CT RESET 6
GND 83 V33b
C5
GND 84 1 CONTR. SENS 7
4.7uF
GND 85 4 GND VDD 8
Manual Reset S1
0 C6
GND_MH TLC7733ID 100nF
PicoMOD6
GND GND GND GND GND

Benennung
09.05.2016
Fig. 6-96 Communication controller
rr
02 pvv12_061 Serienausgabe, zusätzlich U8
09.05.16 rr
27.04.16 rr gezeichnet:
01 pvv12_061 Erstausgabe
1/ 4 [20535_02_B31]
siehe DMS Stempel
PicoMOD_Reset_Power
board communication ctrl. slk2
020535_02_B31_01_01
PCB-Nr. :
01
Storz Medical AG / 2016 Blatt : 1
Änderung Datum rr/beb siehe DMS Stempel Schutzvermerk ISO 16016 Datei : PicoMOD_Reset_Power.SchDoc 20536 von : 6
16 026 02 0918
U4 V33b
18 2
NC B1 A1 NC
NC
17 B2 A2 3
NC C7
16 4
NC B3 A3 NC V1 GND
15 5
3 TXD1 B4 A4 TXD1_PICO 4
100nF
14 6 R3
4 RXD1_SCB B5 A5 RXD1 3
3
13 7 STA1 N1
1 STA1 B6 A6 V33b
12 8 ye
1 STA2 B7 A7 120R
VDD
11 9 V2 CAN-RX 4
3 EHT-ACT B8 A8 RX
R4 7 TP46
BUS_H CAN-H 1, 3
20 1 STA2
V33b VCC DIR V33b 5
10 GND G 19 ye V33b EN to MainConnector
C8 120R V3 6 TP47
R5 BUS_L CAN-L 1, 3
74AHC245 B to A R6 Ethernet Activity CAN-TX 1
1 /PONRES TX
GND
100nF
RS
V33b
4K7 TP45 ye R7
GND GND GND 120R V4
n.m.
1
2
8
R8 /PONRES SN65HVD234
2 3
GND V33b
V5 gn
U1E 120R
BC846B
J1
CAN; USB; I2C
CAN TX 5 CAN-TX GND GND
CAN RX 6 CAN-RX
R9 22R
USB Dev.- 25
R10
USB Dev.+ 27
22R
R11 R12 X364
32 TP9 1 +5V
USB Dev. Det. GND
TP10 2
n.m. 100R 22R TP11 3 USB-Device Mini-B
R13
USB Host- 26 TP12 4
R14 TP13 5 Internal Debug only
USB Host+ 28
TP14
6
USB Host Pow.
30 22R
GND Shield
R15 X365
31 TP15 1
I2C SDA V33b
TP16 2
2k2 TP17 3 USB-Host Standard -A
R16
34 4
I2C SCL V33b
Internal only, Prog. update
2k2
5
PicoMOD6 V50
V33b V33b
C15 U6 GND Shield
GND
U5 100nF 2 IN1 OUT1 7
8
M24C32-W
3 IN2
VCC
1 A0 SDA 5 OUT2 6
4
Device select code: 0xA2 EN1
2 A1 SCL 6
5 C9
2
EN2
3 7 V6 V7
A2 WP
GND
1 8 47uF/10V PGB1 PGB1

GND OC
Adr.0xA2 TPS2080
4
GND GND GND GND GND GND

Benennung
09.05.2016
020535_02_B31_01_01 01
Fig. 6-97 Communication controller 2/4 Storz
02 pvv12_061 Serienausgabe, zusätzlich U8
01 pvv12_061 Erstausgabe
[20535_02_B31] 09.05.16 rr rr
board communication ctrl. slk2
27.04.16 rr
Medical AG / 2016 gezeichnet:
siehe DMS Stempel
PicoMOD_CAN_USB_I2C
PCB-Nr. : Blatt : 2
Änderung Datum rr/beb siehe DMS Stempel Schutzvermerk ISO 16016 Datei : PicoMOD_USB_I2C.SchDoc 20536 von : 6
V33b
L2 X361
1 16 ETHN/RX- TP18 8
TP19 7
2 15 ETHN/RX- TP20 6
TP21 5
3 14 ETHP/RX+ TP22 4
ETHP/RX+ TP23 3 ETHP / RX+
6 11 ETHON/TX- ETHON/TX- TP24 2 ETHON / TX-
ETHOP/TX+ TP25 1 ETHOP / TX+
7 10
6-64
U1D RJ45 Ethernet
J1 8 9 ETHOP/TX+
Ethernet;
COM1-3 LAN-Transformer
Ethern. RX- 7
C10 C11 V33b V33b
8
Ethern. TX-
9 100nF 100nF U7 C12
Ethern.RX+
1 16 100nF
C1+ VCC
10 3 C13
Ethern.TX+ C1-
4 2 100nF GND
C2+ V+
128 5
Ehtern. Act. EHT-ACT 2 C2-
COM2 TXD 17 TXD0 TXD0 11 T1in T1

T1out 14 COM_TxD0 COM2
COM2 RXD 18 RXD0 TXD2 10 T2in T2

T2out 7 COM3
19 RXD0 12 R1out R1in 13 COM_RxD0

COM2 RTS NC R1
20 RXD2 9 R2out R2in 8

COM2 CTS NC R2
21 15 6
COM1 TXD TXD1 2 GND V-
to/from SCB module
22 SP3232ECN C14
COM1 RXD RXD1 2 100nF
COM3 TXD 23 TXD2
GND GND
24 RXD2
COM3 RXD
X367
PicoMOD6 1
GND
TP26 2
Internal Debug only
TP27 3
COM3
Molex 3pol.
X366
1
1, 2 CAN-H
2
1, 2 CAN-L
COM_TxD0 TP28 3
COM-CAN Interface
COM_RxD0 TP29 4
TP30 5 Internal Debug only COM2
6
GND
RJ12-Connector 6pol
Fig. 6-98 Communication controller 3/4 [20535_02_B31] Stromlaufplan - wiring diagram

Wiring diagrams
03 geprüft: Datum / Unterschrift Zeichn.-Nr. : Version : Druckdatum:

Benennung
09.05.2016
02 pvv12_061 Serienausgabe, zusätzlich U8 09.05.16 rr rr siehe DMS Stempel PicoMOD_Ehernet_COM1-3 020535_02_B31_01_01 01
01 pvv12_061 Erstausgabe 27.04.16 rr gezeichnet: Datum / Unterschrift Storz Medical AG / 2016 board communication ctrl. slk2 PCB-Nr. : Blatt : 3
Änderung Datum rr/beb siehe DMS Stempel Schutzvermerk ISO 16016 Datei : PicoMOD_Ehernet_COM1-3.SchDoc 20536 von : 6
16 026 02 0918
A1B
8b TP31
NC
7b
GND Shield
6b TP32
NC
5b
V12
X100 4b TP33
RXD1_SCB 2
Shield
Shield
3b
GND
2b TP34
TXD1_PICO 2
1b
V50
6 5 TP37
CAN_GND-SCB
SCB-MODUL CAN_GND-SCB TP38 4 3
Interface to SCB(CAN) 2 1
X362
V8
Mini DIN 6pol.
BZX84-C3V9
TP35
1
V9 V10
CAN-L-SCB CAN-H-SCB
BAV99 BAV99 F1
3 3 MF-SM030
Shield 1,7mm Creepage Distance,
Signal - Shield
Shield
Shield
2
2
TP36
V11
A1A
BZX84-C15
6a CAN_GND-SCB TP39 6 5 TP42
5a CAN-VCC-SCB TP40 4 3 TP43
4a CAN-L-SCB TP41 2 1 TP44
X200 3a CAN-H-SCB
2a SW_DET_IN X363
1a SW_DET_OUT Mini DIN 6pol.
SCB-MODUL
Interface to host (SCB device)
Fig. 6-99 Communication controller 4/4 [20535_02_B31]
Ref.1 Ref.2 Ref.3
STORZ MEDICAL
SC1 SC2
20536
135x100mm
Communication zu U1(J1) Pilot Hole Pilot Hole Pilot Hole
PCB 20536
Mainboard
controller M1 M2 M5 Logo
Shield Shield
Fiducial Fiducial Fiducial XS1 SC3 SC4
Y1 M3 M4 M6
KFSE-M3-10 zu A1 KF2-M2,5 ET
GND
Y2 Fiducial Fiducial Fiducial GND_PIN GND GND

Benennung
09.05.2016
02 pvv12_061 Serienausgabe, zusätzlich U8 09.05.16 rr rr siehe DMS Stempel SCB-Module 020535_02_B31_01_01 01
01 pvv12_061 Erstausgabe 27.04.16 rr gezeichnet: Datum / Unterschrift Storz Medical AG / 2016 board communication ctrl. slk2 PCB-Nr. : Blatt : 4
Änderung Datum rr/beb siehe DMS Stempel Schutzvermerk ISO 16016 Datei : SCB-Module.SchDoc 20536 von : 6
6-65
Fig. 6-100 Cable picoblade - mainboard, 650 mm [25672_02_C35]
6.14 Hand switch (21493)
Wiring diagrams
Fig. 6-101 Hand switch [021493_01_C17]
16 026 02 0918
6.15 Footswitch and controller (29592, 29580)
Fig. 6-102 Electrical connection of switches
Shield V24
TP1 R1 V1
F1 0,5AT
Shield n.m. V24 TP2
C1
GND
R1 220nF
4 L1
TP1
V1
Shield TP2
F1 0,5AT SS14
n.m.
GND
C1
V2 C2
Shield
220nF
4 L1 C3 SS14 1 1mH/0.95A
100nF
V2 C2 SMBJ24A 22uF/35V
X1 C3
1
1mH/0.95A
X1
100nF SMBJ24A WE-SL5
22uF/35V
1 +24V_ConpanWE-SL5 TP4
1 +24V_Conpan TP4 C4 220nF
GND GND GND
6-66 2 24VRTN
C4 220nF TP5
GND GND GND
2 24VRTN TP5
Shield Shield
Footswitch
Footswitch (to X305) (to X305) 3 CAN-H4 3 TP6 CAN-H4 TP6 CAN-H
4 CAN-L4 TP7 CAN-H
4 CAN-L4 TP7 C5
L2
Molex 4pol. 100pF C5
L2 CAN-L
100pF
Molex 4pol. WE-CNSW CAN-L
WE-CNSW
Fig. 6-103 Footswitch controller, supply, 1a/4 [29580_01_B31]
V24
U1 C6
3 VIN BOOST 7
TP8 TP9
L3 22uH Ua=+-1,5% R4
R5 2 6 100nF
100k
EN SW V33
0R01
9 8
switch on ca. 9,3V TP20
V24 PG BD
10 RT FB 1
V24
4 GND GND 5
C8 U1 R6 C9 C6
1
LT3970 330R
2.2uF/35V
3 VIN BOOST 7
22uF/10V
V3 R2
GSOT03C 9k31/0,1%
TP8 TP9
L3 22uH Ua=+-1,5% R4
C10 R8 R9 R5 2 6 100nF VMON24
12k 220k
f=600kHz
100k
EN SW R3 V33
100nF Imax=350mA V4
gn 0R01 1k33/0,1% C7
9 8 100nF
PG BD
GND GND GND GND GND GND 10 GND GND 1 GND GND GND
RT FB
4 GND GND 5
Fig. 6-104 Footswitch
C8 controller, supply,LT3970
1b/4 [29580_01_B31] R6 C9
1
330R
V3
2.2uF/35V 22uF/10V
GSOT03C
C10 R8 R9
f=600kHz
12kDatum /220k V4
Wiring diagrams
03 100nF
geprüft: Unterschrift Imax=350mA Stromlaufplan - wiring diagram Zeichn.-Nr. : Version : Druckdatum:
Benennung
26.01.2018
02 muj siehe DMS Stempel Supply gn 029580_01_B31_01_01 01
01 pvv17_107 Erstausgabe 26.01.18 beb gezeichnet: Datum / Unterschrift Storz Medical AG / 2018 board footswitch sl PCB-Nr. : Blatt : 1
Änderung Datum beb siehe DMS Stempel Schutzvermerk ISO 16016 Datei : Supply.SchDoc 22635 von : 5
GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND
03 geprüft: Datum / Unterschrift Stromlaufplan - wiring diagram Zeic

Benennung
02 muj siehe DMS Stempel Supply

01 pvv17_107 Erstausgabe 26.01.18 beb gezeichnet: Datum / Unterschrift Storz Medical AG / 2018 board footswitch sl PCB
Änderung Datum beb siehe DMS Stempel Schutzvermerk ISO 16016 Datei : Supply.SchDoc
16 026 02 0918
V33
3
V33 V33
V5 C12
BAT54C R11 GND V33
R12
1k5 1k5 100nF Adr.: 0xA4 WR
1
2
U2 U3 Adr.: 0xA5 RD
TP10 14 26 GND
16 026 02 0918
VMON24 PA0-WKUP PB0
15 27 SDA 5 1
VCC
PA1 PB1 SDA A0
TP12 16 28
sw_TD_sl PA2 PB2/BOOT1
TP13 17 55 TDO SCL 6 2
sw_TU_sl PA3 PB3/JTDO SCL A1 V33
TP14 20 56 TRST
sw_XF_sl PA4 PB4/JNTRST
TP15 21 57 7 3
sw_XH_sl PA5 PB5 WP A2
TP16 22 58 SCL
GND
sw_YF_sl PA6 PB6
TP17 23 59 SDA GND GND
sw_YP_sl PA7 PB7
4
TP18 CLKOUT 41 61 TP19 FM24V02
PA8 PB8 CANRX
42 62 TP21
PA9 PB9 CANTX
43 PA10 PB10 29 TP23 GND X2
sw_Enable_sl
TP24 44 30 TP25 V33 1
USB_D- PA11 PB11 sw_ZD_sl V33
TP26 45 33 TP27 2
USB_D+ PA12 PB12 sw_ZU_sl NC
TMS 46 34 TP28 TRST 3
PA13/JTMS/SWDIO PB13 sw_SELIMG_sl
TCK 49 35 TP29 R13 4
PA14/JTCK/SWCLK PB14 sw_STOIMG_sl
TDI 50 36 TP30 22k TDI 5
PA15/JTDI PB15 sw_res3_sl
6
5 8 TP31 TMS 7
OSC_IN/PD0 PC0 VBUS
6 9 TP32 8
R14 1M OSC_OUT/PD1 PC1 USB_CONNECT
CSTATETP33 54 10 TP34 TCK 9
PD2 PC2 USB_UP_LED
PC3 11 X3 10
G1 BOOT0 TP35 60 BOOT0 PC4 24 SCL 1 11 JTAG
NC
25 TP36 2 12
PC5 GND
RESET 7 NRST PC6 37 STATERD SDA 3 TDO 13
8MHz 38 STATEGN 4 14
PC7 N.C.
C13 C14 TP37 5 RESET 15
N.C. Beagle SPI/I2C Bus
22p 22p 39 6 16
PC8 N.C.
40 TP38 7 17
PC9 N.C. NC
51 TP39 8 18
PC10 N.C.
GND GND 52 TP40 9 19
PC11 N.C. NC
V33 53 TP41 10 20
PC12 GND
PC13-TAMPER-RTC 2
PC14-OSC32_IN 3 Stiftleiste 10pol. Stiftleiste 20pol.
TP42
1 4
VBAT PC15-OSC32_OUT
GND
4
3
2
1
32 31
Fig. 6-105 Footswitch controller 2/4, controller [29580_01_B31]

VDD_1 VSS_1
48 47 SW1
VDD_2 VSS_2
64 63 DIPSW4 V33 V33
VDD_3 VSS_3
19 VDD_4 VSS_4 18
V33 STATERD STATEGN
TP44
13 12
5
6
7
8
VDDA VSSA
STM32F103RBT6 R15 R16 R17 R18
C15 C16 C17 C18 C19 C20 10k n.m. 330R 330R
4.7uF 100nF 100nF 100nF 100nF 1uF
RESET BOOT0
GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND

R19 gn
rd
S1 100k V6
Manual Reset C21
100nF
GND GND GND GND

26.01.2018
02 muj siehe DMS Stempel Controller 029580_01_B31_01_01 01
Datum / Unterschrift board footswitch sl PCB-Nr. :
Benennung

Änderung Datum beb siehe DMS Stempel Schutzvermerk ISO 16016 Datei : Controller.SchDoc 22635 von : 5
Wiring diagrams
6-67
Wiring diagrams
6-68
PWR detect USB_DEV
VBUS
R20 R21 X4
WE-CBF
L4 +5V USB_DEV TP45 1
GND
USBLC6-2 D- TP46 2
8k2 R22 4K7 TP47 3 4 D+ TP48 3 USB-Device Mini-B
USB_D- I/02 I/02
1 I/01 I/01 6 4
22R L5
R23 TP49 5
USB_D+
2 5 TP50
1
2
22R WE-CNSW C22 C23 GND VBUS
R24
6
10pF 10pF V7
1K5 U4
C24
TP43 GND GND n.m.
3
GSOT05C
R25 USB-Connected gn GND GND GND
V9 V8
TP63 1 R26
USB_CONNECT GND
BC856B
2K2 GND
2
R27 470R
10K
V10 R28
V33
USB-UP ye 470R
V33 V33
V33
USB_UP_LED
C25
GND
100nF
3
N1
CAN-H TP64 SN65HVD234
CAN-H
4
VDD
RX CANRX
R29 7 BUS_H
120R
EN 5
V33
CAN-L TP65 6
CAN-L BUS_L
1
TX CANTX
RS
GND
8
2
Fig. 6-106 Footswitch controller 3/4, communication [29580_01_B31]

GNDGND
16 026 02 0918
26.01.2018
02 muj siehe DMS Stempel USB,CAN, RS232 029580_01_B31_01_01 01
Benennung

Änderung Datum beb siehe DMS Stempel Schutzvermerk ISO 16016 Datei : USB,CAN.SchDoc 22635 von : 5
V33
V33
100nF C26
D1A
7 GND
R30 GND
14 VCC
4k7 V33
R31 U5A
1 16 TP51 1 2
16 026 02 0918
1 sw_TD_sl
4k7 V33
2 15
74AHC14
R32
V24 24VGNDACPL247 4k7
D1B
R33 U5B GND
3 14 TP52 3 4
1 sw_TU_sl
4k7 V33
4 13
74AHC14
R34
24VGNDACPL247 4k7
D1C
R35 U5C GND
5 12 TP53 5 6
1 sw_XF_sl
4k7 V33
6 11
74AHC14
R36
24VGNDACPL247
4k7 D1D
R37 U5D GND
7 10 TP54 9 8 V33
1 sw_YF_sl
X5
1
4k7 8 9
74AHC14
2 sw_TD
R38
3 sw_XF 24VGNDACPL247
4k7 D1E
4 sw_TU GND R39 U6A
5 sw_YF 1 16 TP55 11 10
1 sw_Enable_sl
6 sw_Enable
4k7 V33
7 sw_XH V33 2 15
74AHC14
8 sw_ZD V33 R40
9 sw_YP 100nF C27 24VGNDACPL247 4k7
Switche terminal A
D1F
10 sw_ZU R41 U6B GND
D3A
R42 7 sw_SELIMG 3 14 TP56 13 12
GND GND 1 sw_SELIMG_sl
CON10 4k7 14 VCC
V33 4k7 V33
R43 U7A 4 13
74AHC14
1 16 TP57 1 2 R44
1 sw_ZD_sl
24VGNDACPL247 4k7
4k7 V33 D3E
V24 2 15 R45 U6C GND
74AHC14
R46 sw_STOIMG 5 12 TP58 11 10
Fig. 6-107 Footswitch controller 4/4, interface [29580_01_B31]

1 sw_STOIMG_sl
24VGNDACPL247 4k7
D3B 4k7 V33
R47 U7B GND 6 11
74AHC14
X6 3 14 TP59 3 4
1 sw_XH_sl R48
1 24VGNDACPL247
4k7 V33 4k7 D3F
2 4 13 R49 U6D GND
24VGND 74AHC14
3 sw_SELIMG R50 sw_res3 7 10 TP60 13 12
1 sw_res3_sl
4 sw_STOIMG 24VGNDACPL247 4k7
D3C 4k7
5 sw_res3 R51 U7C GND 8 9
74AHC14
5 12 TP61 5 6
Switche terminal B
1 sw_ZU_sl
CON5 24VGNDACPL247
4k7 V33
6 11 GND
74AHC14
R52
24VGNDACPL247
4k7 D3D
R53 U7D GND Comp. for Partlist: Comp. for PCB:
7 10 TP62 9 8
1 sw_YP_sl
M1 M2 M3 Ref.1 Ref.2 Ref.3
4k7 8 9 Y1
74AHC14 22635
24VGNDACPL247 PCB Pilot Hole Pilot Hole Pilot Hole
GND Y2
XM1 STORZ MEDICAL
1 2 n.m.= not mounted SC1 SC2 Logo
24VGND GND
Shield Shield
26.01.2018
02 muj siehe DMS Stempel Interface1 029580_01_B31_01_01 01
Benennung

Änderung Datum beb siehe DMS Stempel Schutzvermerk ISO 16016 Datei : Interface1.SchDoc 22635 von : 5
Wiring diagrams
6-69
6.16 Inline Unit
X4 X9
X1
X5 F2
X7 F1
Fig. 6-108 Layout board inline SLK (1L) [021932_02_B09]
Shield V24M V24 V24

TP1 R1 V1 V33
F1 0,5AT
TP2 TP3
n.m. GND C1
220nF
Shield 4 L1 SS14 R2
R3
V2 C2 3k3
C3 1mH/0.95A n.m.
X1 1
100nF SMBJ24A 22uF/35V N1 REF3333
1 +24V_Inl TP4
WE-SL5
2 +24V_Inl TP5 C4 220nF TP6 1 2
GND GND GND Vin Vout REF3.3
3 VInlRTN TP7
Shield
GND
4 VInlRTN
TP8 WE-CBF
5 sw_ILRESS_s TP9 L2 sw_ILRESS_sf
6 CAN-H5 TP10 V3 C5 C6 C7
CAN-H
3
7 CAN-L5 TP11 BZV55-C5V1 100nF 100nF
L3 C8 2.2uF/35V
Molex 7pol. 100pF
C9 WE-CNSW CAN-L
100nF
GND GND GND GND GND
Shield
V24
V24 R4
9k31/0,1%
U1 C10 VMON24
3 7 R5
VIN BOOST
TP12 TP13
L4 22uH Ua=+-1,5% R6 1k33/0,1% C11
R7 2 6 100nF
EN SW V33 100nF
100k
0R01
9 8
PG BD GND GND
10 1
RT FB
4 5 V33
GND GND
C12 R8 C13
1
LT3970 330R
V4 R9
2.2uF/35V 22uF/10V
GSOT03C 150R/0,1%
6-70 C56
100nF
R10
12k
R11
220k
f=600kHz
Imax=350mA V5 R12
VMON33
gn 1k5/0,1% C14
100nF
GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND

GND GND
Fig. 6-109 Board inline SLK (1L) 1/5 [021932_02_B31]

Benennung
03 V24M
02 aea09/003 Serienausgabe 29.09.11 beb Supply 021932_02_B31_01_01
X8a TP63
X8
20.10.2011
1
01 aea09/003 Prototyp/ Erstausgabe 26.07.11 beb gezeichnet: Datum / Unterschrift
U7  Storz Medical AG / 2011 board inline slk2 PCB-Nr. : 2
optional Blatt : 1
Änderung Datum
as/beb 20.10.2011 9
VBB SchutzvermerkNCISO 16
16016 Datei : Supply.SchDoc 21935_02 X8b
TP64 von : 5
C47 GND Molex 2pol.
C48 C49 C50 14 11 n.m.
100nF VCP CP1
100uF/35V 100nF
C51 15 12 100nF
GND VReg CP2 C52
GND GND 220nF
F2 100pF
2 7 X9
Mode Mode OUT+
1 L16
TP65
R38 C53 WE-SL5 1
0,5AT
3 TP72 2 Motor
Phase Phase 1mH/0.95A
4
10R
6 10 22nF/100V TP66 Molex 2pol.
Enable Enable OUT-
5 C54
nSleep nSLEEP 100pF
1 8 TP73
nFault nFAULT Sense GND
4 13
R39 R40 GND GND R41
0
3k3 3k3 R42 10k
DRV8800 0R5/1W
U = 0 - 500mV
IMOT
V33 V33
C55
100nF
GND GND GND GND

Wiring diagrams
M1 M2 M3 Ref.1 Ref.2 Ref.3

PCB
Y1
21935_02 Pilot Hole Pilot Hole Pilot Hole
X11 X12
STORZ MEDICAL
n.m.= not mounted SC1 Logo
Shield Shield Shield

16 026 02 0918
Benennung
03
02 aea09/003 Serienausgabe 29.09.11 beb motor stage 021932_02_B31_01_01 20.10.2011
01 aea09/003 Prototyp/ Erstausgabe 26.07.11 beb gezeichnet: Datum / Unterschrift  Storz Medical AG / 2011 board inline slk2 PCB-Nr. : Blatt : 5
Änderung Datum
as/beb 20.10.2011
Schutzvermerk ISO 16016 Datei : MotorStage.SchDoc 21935_02 von : 5
V24
V33
GND R32
3k3 R33
2k2
C37
X5 100nF
WE-CBF
1 TP54 L9 R34 1k0 U6
SW_LOWER_POS. 2 TP55 sw_pos_no L10 WE-CBF TP71 1 4
sw_pos
3 TP56 sw_pos_nc L11 WE-CBF
2 3
2
Molex 3pol.
PC357N4
R35 n.m.
GSOT24C C38 C39 C40
100nF
100nF 100nF
V12
GND GND GND GND GND
V24
C41
GND
X6
1 TP57 L12 WE-CBF 100nF
2
SW_ILRES 3 TP58 L13 WE-CBF
sw_ILRESS_sf
4 TP59
1
R36
Molex 4pol. n.m.
GSOT24C C42
100nF
V13
GND GND GND GND
GND V33
X7 C43
1 TP60 L14 WE-CBF 100nF
R371k0
2 TP61 L15 WE-CBF
position_poti
Position_Poti 3 TP62
2
Molex 3pol. V14 C44 C45 C46

GSOT03C 100nF 100nF
22uF/10V
GND GND GND GND GND
6-71
6.16.1 Cable to inline SLK (1L) [21851] geprüft: Datum / Unterschrift Stromlaufplan - wiring diagram Zeichn.-Nr. :
Benennung
03
02 aea09/003 Serienausgabe 20.10.11 beb Interface1 021932_02_B
01 aea09/003 Prototyp/ Erstausgabe 26.07.11 beb gezeichnet: Datum / Unterschrift  Storz Medical AG / 2011 board inline slk2 PCB-Nr. :
Änderung Datum
as/beb 20.10.2011
Schutzvermerk ISO 16016 Datei : Interface1.SchDoc 21935_02
Wiring diagrams
Fig. 6-112 Cable to inline SLK (1L) [21851_01_C17]
16 026 02 0918
6.16.2 Cable inline within SLK (1L) [21849]
Fig. 6-113 Cable inline within SLK (1L) [21849_01_C35]
6.16.3 Cable inline board to case SLK (1L) [22210]

6-72
7 1
6
5 2
4 3
view from crimpside
Wiring diagrams
Fig. 6-114 Cable inline [22210_01_C35], X1 - Lemo connector 7 pin (brown coded)
16 026 02 0918
6.16.4 Cable inline rs232 board to case SLK (1L) [22211]
view from crimpside
Fig. 6-115 Cable inline RS232 [22211_01_C35], X4 - Lemo connector 5 pin (yellow coded)
6-73
Wiring diagrams
16 026 02 0918
Abbildung 2 (Konfektionierung Seite Boards)
6.17 Miscellaneous cables

3 Stromlaufplan
3.1
6.17.1 Cableset
Cable control panel
Z-Lift [21462]
Fig. 6-116 Cable set z-lift [21462], control panel to e-box, X2 - X230
connector
control panel
hydraulic valves
6-74 for x + y cylinder
potentiometer
for x + y cylinder
inductive sensors
for y movement
Wiring diagrams
GND
Fig. 6-117 Cable set z-lift [21462], table side
16 026 02 0918
021462_01_C35_01_01_2
cable set
V
3.2 Ventile
Fig. 6-118 Cable set z-lift [21462], connectors hydraulic valve, XFoot - X613
Abbildung 3 (Stromlaufplan Ventilanschluss)
3.3 Potentiometer
E-Box
6-75
Aktormed
control
Abbildung 4 (Stromlaufplan Potentiometer)
3.4 Sensoren Y-Sensoren 1
1
E-Box
Wiring diagrams
GND
Fig. 6-119 Cable set z-lift [21462], board side
Abbildung 5 (Stromlaufplan Y-Sensoren)
16 026 02 0918
3.3 Potentiometer
Abbildung 3 (Stromlaufplan Ventilanschluss)
3.3 Potentiometer
3.4 Sensoren Y-Sensoren

Fig. 6-120 Cable set z-lift [21462], potentiometer, PosX - X621, PosY - X622
3.4 Sensoren Y-Sensoren
Fig. 6-121 Cable set z-lift [21462], inductive sensors, YL_1S - X203, YL_2S - X204
6-76
6.17.2 Cable set pivot [21507]
Datei: Dokument im DMS Zusammenstellzeichnung A

Version: 0 © STORZ MEDICAL AG / 2012 / COPYRIGHT
Datei: Dokument im DMS Zusammenstellzeichnung A

Version: 0 © STORZ MEDICAL AG / 2012 / COPYRIGHT
Wiring diagrams
Fig. 6-122 Cable set pivot [21507_02_C35], X702 - X620, X224 - X701
16 026 02 0918
6.17.3 Cable set flatcable e-box SLK (1L) [21357]
Fig. 6-123 Cable set flatcable e-box SLK (1L) [21357-W1], X10 - X308
6-77
Wiring diagrams
16 026 02 0918
6-78
Wiring diagrams
16 026 02 0918
6.17.4 Cable set line ebox SLK (1L) [29353]
6-79
Fig. 6-133 Cable set line ebox SLK (1L) [29353-W1], X1 - S1
Fig. 6-134 Cable set line ebox SLK (1L) [29353-W2], S1 - X2 Wiring diagrams
Fig. 6-135 Cable set line ebox SLK (1L) [29353-W3], line - power supply
16 026 02 0918
2 Montage
Fig. 6-136
Abbildung Cable
1 (Montage) set line ebox SLK (1L) [29353-W4], line - ext. panel
3 6.17.5
Stromlaufplan
Cable bypass valve SLK (1L) [21589]
ByPassValve
Fig. 6-137 Cable bypass valve SLK (1L) [21589], ByPassValve - X243
6.17.6 Cable hand switch SLK (1L) [20817]

6-80
Fig. 6-138 Cable hand switch SLK (1L) [20817_01], X1 - X2, extension for hand switch

Wiring diagrams
16 026 02 0918
6-81
Wiring diagrams
16 026 02 0918
6-82
Wiring diagrams
16 026 02 0918
Service Manual
MODULITH® SLK (1L)

(30k)
7
Chapter 7 part a
Preventive Maintenance
Table of contents
7.1 Installation work (only for initial installation) 7a-5
7.2 Visual and functional inspections 7a-5

7.2.1 Optical conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-5
7.2.2 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-5
7.2.2.1 Locking bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-5
7.2.2.2 Emergency halt button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-6
7.2.2.3 Collision sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-6
7.2.2.4 Operating elements and movements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-6
7.2.3 Covers, wheels & brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-7
7.3 Component checks 7a-7

7.3.1 Hydraulic unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-7
7.3.2 Inductive sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-7
7.3.3 Water / Air circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-7
7.3.3.1 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-7
7.3.3.2 Degassing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-8
7.3.3.3 Water leakages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-8
7.3.3.4 Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-9
7.3.3.5 Temperature control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-9
7a-2
7.3.4 HV circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-10
7.3.4.1 Capacitance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-11
7.3.4.2 Resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-11
7.3.4.3 High voltage measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-11
7.3.4.4 Triggering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-11
7.3.5 Inline unit (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-12
7.4 Focal point checks 7a-12

7.4.1 Focus phantom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-12
7.4.2 Ultrasound focus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-12
7.4.3 X-ray focus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-14
7.4.4 Disintegration test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-15
7.5 Safety tests 7a-16

7.5.1 MODULITH SLK . ®
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-16
7.5.1.1 Protection earth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-16
7.5.1.2 Insulating resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-16
7.5.1.3 Earth leakage current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-16
7.5.1.4 Enclosure leakage current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-16
7.5.1.5 Wall connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-16
7.5.2 Ultrasound system (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-16
16 027 02 0918
7.5.2.4 Patient leakage current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-17
7.5.2.5 Auxiliary patient leakage current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-17
7.5.3 ECG system (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-17
7.5.3.4 Patient leakage current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-17
7.5.3.5 Auxiliary patient leakage current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7a-17
7.6 Final work & wearing parts 7a-18
7.7 Completion of paperwork 7a-18
Annex A 7a-18
7a-3
16 027 02 0918
Recommended Maintenance Equipment
Apart from a standard toolbox (set of screwdrivers, set of combination spanner, set of Allen Keys, socket
and ratchet set, grippers, hammer, spirit level, ...) the following table provides information about recom-
mended equipment to maintain the MODULITH SLK.
Part Name Type / Model STORZ-Part No.

Digital Multimeter Fluke 87 1)
/ 2117
BNC-Banana plug Adapter for digital multimeter 2)
BNC-BNC-Cable (for HV measurement) 2)
Temperature sensor (for temperature simulation) STORZ 21590

Digital thermometer 2)
Torch light 2)
Torque wrench 3) Torque Leader QS6 9028

Allen key 0.9 mm 2)
SilverSan band 250 mm STORZ 21677

Test foil kit SLK (1L) STORZ 22035
Corega-Tabs (1 packet = 32 tablets) 1)
/ 3487
USB adapter cable: USB-Standard-A -> USB-Mini-B 2)
Safety tester to measure according to IEC 62353 / VDE 0751 2)
Silicon grease (for rubber/metal junctions) Molykote M55 6210

Penetration oil WD 40 2122
Ball bearing grease Molykote W2 2124
Tube sealing compound Loctite 243 2864
7a-4 Hydraulic oil Aral Vitam DE22 (HLPD 22) 3)
STORZ 23008
Computer (Laptop) with USB-connector 2)
Tabelle 7-1 Recommended tools
1)
Please purchase locally, if not available you can order from STORZ MEDICAL
2)
Please purchase locally
3)
Maybe purchase locally, please refer to specifications in the service manual
Wearing part Criteria for recommended replacement ...

Central airbag together with coil, or in case of damage
Patient foil once a year
Coupling cushion once a year

SilverSan band (water filter) once a year
Coil at lifetime limit (observe information on control panel)
Circulation pump about 10.000 operating hours (of pump)
Air compressor about 10.000 operating hours (of pump)
Degassing pump about 5.000 operating hours (of pump)
Wheels worn-out rubber covering
Buffer battery mainboard every 5 years, consider correct type CR2032, 3V, 220mAh, UL recognition
Tabelle 7-2 Recommendations for replacement
Be aware that the given values are based on experience. They must not be interpreted as a mandatory
exchange time, and will not lead into any warranty claims.
16 027 02 0918
7.1 Installation work (only for initial installation)
For shipment the MODULITH® SLK is set to transport condition. Before using the device it is necessary to
perform some installation work. See following list:
–– Reconnect cable connection for “degassing pump” (cable 20864).
–– Reconnect cable connection for “circulation pump” (cable 21588).
–– Remove transport securing bolt for therapy head.
–– Rinse water circuit to remove alcohol (anti freeze agent) and fill water circuit.
–– Connect lithotripter to mains supply.
7.2 Visual and functional inspections

7.2.1 Optical conditions
• Check optical situation of lithotripter system. Evaluate status of cleanliness of surfaces (patient foil,
coupling cushion and pillows for patient’s positioning for brittleness and stretching) as well as the gen-
eral hygienic conditions. Get system back in best hygienic condition.
• Inspect housing elements and other external components for any visible damage.
• Inspect visible cable connections and cable clamps for any visible damage and proper strain relief.
Labels
• Check presence of warning label on lithotripter. Attach label if missing, or replace it if necessary.
- “Maximum load” and “Do not sit on foot plate“ at foot plate
- “max. load 225 kg” on foot plate fixtures of patient table (left and right side)
7a-5
225 kg
Fig. 7-1 Label “Maximum load” (foot plate) and “Maximum load” (patient table)
7.2.2 Functions
NOTE
Please perform following function tests with different control panels if available, including remote
control panels via Storm-Touch (option).

During movements test various test items are performed simultaneously (touch screen, graphical
display, sounds).
7.2.2.1 Locking bolt
• Verify the proper function of the locking bolt in inhouse transport position, treatment position and
shipment position.
16 027 02 0918
7.2.2.2 Emergency halt button
• Check emergency HALT button for each installed control panel. While performing any table movement
activate emergency halt button and verify that no movements of table and therapy head is possible.
Verify also that inflated coupling cushion gets deflated and shockwave release is stopped.
• Unlock emergency halt button after test.
7.2.2.3 Collision sensor
• Check function of pressure sensitive contact hose on lower side of patient table by applying mechani-
cal force on different locations. Current movement must stop immediately.
• Check function of pressure sensitive protection device (PSPD) on therapy arm by applying mechanical
force on different location of PSPD. Current movement must stop immediately.
• Check function of PSPD or collision sensor (if available) at x-ray c-arc. While moving the patient table
activate / press collision sensor. Current movement must stop immediately.
7.2.2.4 Operating elements and movements
• Verify that below listed functions are working well on all control panels, hand- and foot switches.
- Table movements
- predefined table positions (entry pos., therapy pos., focus check pos.)
- Swivel movements
- Pivot movements
- Access to submenus (therapy, table, ultrasound, settings)
- Modifying treatment parameters (energy level, frequency)
- Table movements while shock wave release
7a-6 The following checks have to be proceeded with therapy head in park position.
• X-axis: Drive the table from footward to headward end (maximum range), if button on control panel
keeps pressed. Check for smooth and silent motion. Verify that the end positions (feedback from po-
tentiometer) are indicated on the control panel.
• Y-axis: Drive table over complete Y-range. Check for smooth and silent motion. Verify that end posi-
tions and coordinates (feedback from potentiometer) are indicated on control panel.
• Z-axis: Drive the table from lowest to highest position, keep button on control panel pressed. Check
for smooth and silent motion. Verify that the end positions are indicated on the control panel.
• Trendelenburg (optional): Drive table into under table therapy range. Perform Trendelenburg motion.
Check for smooth and silent motion. Verify that the end positions are indicated on the control panel.
Check as well safety valve for lowering table.
The following checks have to be proceeded with table at medium therapy high (about 240 mm).
• Swivel & Pivot: Drive therapy head in therapy-, x-ray- and park position, each with under table and
over table position. Check for smooth motion. Verify that the therapy head locks reliably in all posi-
tions. In OT-position vertical movement (z-axis) and Trendelenburg must be blocked.
• Disengage the therapy head manually. Verify that no motorized therapy head motion is possible.
• Drive the therapy head to park position. Lower the table down to access position. Check that no cables
and hoses are squeezed or kinked. Check for unusual noise and jittering motion.
The following checks have to be proceeded with different hand switches (at different control panels) if
available.
• Verify that no table motion is possible while releasing shock waves. To enable table motion during
shock waves release, press additionally the unlock button at the rear side of shock wave release button
(hand switch).
16 027 02 0918
COMMENT
Motion of in-line unit is checked at later stage (ch. 7.3.4 Inline unit (Option)).
7.2.3 Covers, wheels & brakes

• Check proper function of mechanical and hydraulic brakes.
Hydraulic system must be free of leakages, distance between brake pads and wheels should be around
1-2 mm - correct by adjustment if necessary, brake pads should not be worn out - replace if necessary.
• Remove all external covers.
• Inspect covers and fixing points. Replace damaged parts and adjust fixing points if necessary.
• Check for inside abrasion of cover elements.
• Clean device inside with vacuum cleaner.
• Check wheels, that tires are not worn out. Replace if necessary.
7.3 Component checks

Hydraulic tubes
• Inspect hydraulic tubes for signs of kinks or damages.
Check fixtures and end pieces for signs of damage. Replace if necessary.
Leakages 7a-7
• Check for oil spills inside lithotripter and check all hydraulic connections at the cylinders and at the
valve blocks for leakages.
Drive table in corresponding direction while inspecting the hose connections. Tighten leaking screws
with a torque of 10 Nm (M8) / 14 Nm (M10).
Hydraulic oil tanks

• Check filling level of hydraulic oil tank. Refer as well to section installation and removal of service
manual for additional information.
7.3.2 Inductive sensors

• Check and adjust switching distance for all inductive sensors.
Correct switching distance is 1.0 mm. For sensor TRD0 2.0 mm is required.
7.3.3 Water / Air circuit
7.3.3.1 Cleaning
Water radiator
• Verify the cleanliness of the water radiator. Clean up with compressed dry air or vacuum cleaner.
Water circuit
• Drain just that much water that coupling cushion can be taken off. Insert 10 COREGA Tabs into reflec-
tor and mount back coupling cushion to therapy head. Fill back the drained water into system.
16 027 02 0918
• Switch on and off water pump with cushion level 9 several times to interchange water between
therapy head and water tank completely. Also allow the system to fully exchange the water several
times in degassing unit.
• Drain water and rinse the system by using fresh water, to remove any contaminant.
Check nozzle inside degassing unit spraying water properly.
Surfaces and filter

• Switch off system and remove coupling cushion.
• Drain water completely.
• Remove micro filter and water bag.
• Clean surfaces (inside + outside) of: reflector, cushion, micro filter, water bag and water tank.
• Check coil counter and replace coil if lifetime limit is exceeded.
• Check status of airbag and replace it, if any damage is detected or rubber looks unsightly.
• Check status of coupling cushion and replace it, if any damage is detected or rubber looks unsightly.
Degassing cylinder
ATTENTION !
Do not use isopropanol alcohol or equivalent to clean the degassing unit.
• Remove degassing unit and open degassing cylinder. Clean the interior including the nozzle manually.
7a-8
• Remount coupling cushion, degassing unit, micro filter with a new silver-san band and water bag.
• Rinse the system again by using fresh water. After that check micro filter again.
• Finally refill the system with correct amount of water. Wait until water is degassed well.
7.3.3.2 Degassing
• Observe function of degassing over at least one cycle. Verify proper function of water level switch
DGAMIN. Verify that degassing pump is stopped when water level reaches DGAMIN. Verify that
degassing valve and air valve are operating properly during the filling cycle of the degassing cylinder.
Verify proper function of water level switch DGAMAX. Verify that degassing pump starts for new
degassing cycle. Check nozzle inside the degassing cylinder that incoming water is properly sprayed.
Report if degassing unit is not working properly.
• Check operating time of degassing pump. Replace if lifetime range is exceeded.
7.3.3.3 Water leakages
• Dry off remaining water spots on floor and in machine. Switch on MODULITH® SLK. Drive patient table
and coupling cushion up and let circulation pump run at maximum speed for five minutes (switching
on-off coupling cushion). Observe all outlets, hose connections, caps and closures of the water circuit
for leakage. Carefully tighten clamps or closure screws if any leakage is present. Leakage may also
result from over tightening!
• Check operating time of circulation pump. Replace if lifetime range is exceeded.
16 027 02 0918
7.3.3.4 Airbag
Airbag logic
• While releasing shockwaves check that airbag is deflated. By activating the unlock button at the rear
side of hand switch, while still releasing shock waves, the airbag must be inflated again. Check that
airbag is deflated automatically after releasing the unlock button.
Airbag
• Drive table up, select level 9 for cushion pressure and wait until cushion is completely filled. Activate
the airbag. Verify that the airbag is fully inflated, stays inflated and is not leaking.
• Check operating time of airbag compressor. Replace if lifetime range is exceeded.
7.3.3.5 Temperature control
• Prepare a container with water of less than 25°C. Unplug temperature sensor of water tank from sig-
nal converter. Connect a spare part temperature sensor to signal converter and put it into the water.
Use an external thermometer to control water temperature. Also check temperature display at control
panel (system info).
Cooling
• Slowly add hot water in the container. The fans at the radiator should start at a water temperature of
28°C ± 1°C.
Hysteresis: Add cold water into container. The fans should stop at water temperature of 27°C ± 1°C.
Water over temperature

• Activate the cushion and add hot water into the container. At a water temperature of 40°C ± 1°C the
cushion should be disabled automatically.
Hysteresis: Slowly add cold water in the container. Cushion should be enabled automatically at water 7a-9
temperature of 37°C ± 1°C. Reconnect original temperature sensor of water tank to signal converter.
• Open bottom side of therapy head to reach signal converter of temperature sensor safety.
• Keep the spare sensor in the water and connect it to converter in therapy head. Activate the cushion.
Slowly add hot water in the container. At 41°C ± 1°C the cushion should be disabled automatically.
The therapy head over temperature failure can be reset only by activating the button ‘Reset safety
circuit’ located at the external connector plate, which is accessible for the user. As long as the over
temperature condition exists in the therapy head a bistable relay will remain in its safe state, even if the
user tries to activate the reset button.
Hysteresis: Slowly add cold water in the container. The cushion should be enabled at 37°C ± 1°C auto-
matically when the button ‘Reset safety circuit’ is pressed at the rear panel.
16 027 02 0918
7.3.4 HV circuit
DANGER !
Switch off the MODULITH® SLK and wait 5 minutes before starting any work on
the HV circuit. This time is required to discharge capacitors inside PCCU complete-
ly.
There is high voltage available on heat sink of HV-switch. Therefore do not run
PCCU with open PCCU-housing.
Mains Voltage
• Switch off and disconnect lithotripter from mains and measure mains voltage at wall socket.
Vaild range is 100 - 240 VAC for single power supply (combined 24 V & 48 V) configuration or 115 -
240 VAC for double power supply (separate 24 V & 48 V) configuration.
Label “HV-Warning”
• Check presence of HV-warning label on top of the PCCU. Attach label if missing.

Fig. 7-2 Label “HV-Warning”
Ventilators inside PCCU
COMMENT
7a-10 Additional fan (12V) on board CTU SLK 1L can not be checked. No access possible while PCCU is
powered.
• Check function of ventilators at back side of PCCU (side with connectors) by verification of air flow
into PCCU housing. Exchange ventilators if necessary.
• Check function of ventilators at bottom side of PCCU by verification of air flow into PCCU. Exchange
ventilators if necessary.
Therefore PCCU must be moved out from chassis 13 - 15 cm. Then access from below is possible.
Take care not to break cables while PCCU is still connected.
• Verify that air flow leaves PCCU on top to ventilation duct leading to back side of lithotripter.
NOTE
For following test items „cleanliness“, „capacitance“ and „resistors“ PCCU must be completely re-
moved out of chassis. Refer to chapter 4 Removal & Installation for additional information.
These items must be performed during preventive maintenance. They are not necessary during first
installation of system. During installation continue with „high voltage measurement“.
• Switch off the MODULITH® SLK. Wait 5 minutes before dismounting PCCU.
• Remove PCCU out of chassis.
Cleanliness inside PCCU

• Open cover of PCCU.
• Check for any sign of dust and dirt inside the PCCU. Clean up with compressed dry air and / or
vacuum cleaner.
16 027 02 0918
7.3.4.1 Capacitance
• Measure capacitance at the terminals of capacitors. If capacitance is significantly out of range perform
factory-return-repair-procedure for PCCU device exchange.
Value of capacitor is 1200 nF ± 70 nF.
→
Fig. 7-3 Terminals of capacitor for measurement
7.3.4.2 Resistors
• Measure resistance of charging resistor.

The value of charging resistor is 500 Ω ± 120 Ω.
→
→
Fig. 7-4 Measurementpoints for charging resistor
7a-11
7.3.4.3 High voltage measurement
For measuring HV PCCU must be mounted back to lithotripter. Refer to chapter 4 Removal & Installation
for additional information.
• Mount back PCCU.
• Open service flap of PCCU.
• Connect multimeter to connector X14 (BNC) on PCCU.
• Switch on the MODULITH® SLK and wait until message “Press SW release button to perform HV test!”
shows up. Press release button and verify the message “HV test passed” on control panel display and
also by the green LED V38 on board CTUSLK (1L).
• Measure HV-feedback-values according to table in PM-record.

Report if values are significantly out of range.
• Disconnect multimeter from PCCU.
7.3.4.4 Triggering
• Select all available trigger modes (fix 1..4 Hz, ecg) and verify proper function by releasing shock waves.
16 027 02 0918
7.3.5 Inline unit (Option)
Outside
• Check covers for damages and dirt. Clean it from silicon oil and ultrasound gel.
Transducer
• Check transducer surface for damages. Replace transducer if defect.
Movement
• Check vertical movement of inline unit.
- Install inline unit in therapy head
- Drive inline unit up and down
Inside
• Open inline unit housing. Remove dust with compressed air or vacuum cleaner. There should be no
silicon oil or ultrasound gel inside.
• Check transducer cable for any damage (kinks, breaks, scratches).

Report if isolation of cable is damaged.
Carbon rolls
• Check carbon rolls inside therapy head. They are responsible for holding in-line unit.
They must be complete (no one missing), and must not be damaged.
7.4 Focal point checks

7.4.1 Focus phantom
7a-12
• Inspect the integrated focus gauge for any damages. Replace broken or bent parts.
7.4.2 Ultrasound focus

Correct position of cross-hairs on ultrasound display gets checked by using integrated focus gauge. Reflex
mark of focus gauge gets displayed as strong white shadow on ultrasound screen.
Perform following steps for focus check:

• Drive therapy head to 90° park position.
• Install in-line unit into therapy head.
• Select “focus check position” from control panel.

• Remove patient foil to get free access to therapy head.
• Set up focus gauge
• Put filled focus-check-watercushion with a few drops of silicon oil on therapy head.
• Activate coupling cushion. Reflex mark must touch focus-check-water-bag.
16 027 02 0918
Fig. 7-5 Focus-check-watercushion installed
• Connect StorM-Link cable to US device and select shockwave mode on US device
• Drive in-line unit to lowest position and measure distances:

horizontal tolerance ±1,5 mm.
vertical tolerance 9 mm ±2 mm.
9 mm ± 2 mm
7a-13
Fig. 7-6 Vertical tolerance in lowest position
• Drive in-line unit to highest position and measure distances:

horizontal tolerance ±1,5 mm.
vertical tolerance 3 mm ±2 mm.
3 mm ± 2 mm
Fig. 7-7 Vertical tolerance in highest position
• Perform calibration routine on US device if tolerances are exceeded.
• Dismount focus check composition
16 027 02 0918
7.4.3 X-ray focus
WARNING !
During the focus check procedure X-rays are released.
Take care about all measures concerning radiation protection and safety. See sec-
tion 1.6 Safety instructions for details.
• Remove patient foil to get free access to therapy head.
• Drive therapy head to 90° park position and set aiming device to UT-position.
• Drive therapy head to focus check position.
• Set C-Arc to 0° position (vertical beam, image intensifier on top)
• Release x-ray and check accuracy of reflex mark and cross hairs.
Reflex mark must be positioned in centre of cross hair of x-ray system and
cross hair stripes of aiming device must be in congruence.
• If centring of reflex mark or adjusting cross hairs in congruence is not possible check focus gauge and /
or aiming device for damages.
7a-14
Fig. 7-8 Focus check in UT (x-ray 0°-position)
• Fold down focus gauge, before driving to next check position
• Drive therapy head to 90° park position and set aiming device to OT-position.
• Drive therapy head manually to “upper focus check position” (= upper therapy position, cushion off).
• Set C-Arc to 0° position (vertical beam, image intensifier on top)
• Release x-ray and check accuracy of reflex mark and cross hairs.
Reflex mark must be positioned in centre of cross hair of x-ray system and
cross hair stripes of aiming device must be in congruence. (Cross hairs of aiming device are rotated
about 45° if it is still in UT position)
• If centring of reflex mark or adjusting cross hairs in congruence is not possible check focus gauge and /
or aiming device for damages
16 027 02 0918
Fig. 7-9 Focuscheck in OT (x-ray 0°-Position)
Fig. 7-10 Examples for misadjusted a) focus gauge b) aiming device
7.4.4 Disintegration test

Use test foil together with the focus phantom to check the disintegration capability of MODULITH® SLK.
7a-15
NOTE
Do not use silicon oil for coupling between coupling cushion and test foil!
Silicon oil will dissolve colour particles of pressure sensitive paper.
• Proceed for the disintegration test as described in chapter 5.7.2 “Disintegration Test”.
• Apply 25 shots for each energy level 80, 50 and 20 with a trigger frequency of 2Hz.
• Preserve the results in order to check constancy and to have evidence of proper disintegration capabil-
ity. If a result is unsatisfactory check if the water is free of air bubbles and repeat the test. If no im-
provement is visible call STORZ MEDICAL service department. Preventive Maintenance
Fig. 7-11 Example for test results of disintegration test
16 027 02 0918
7.5 Safety tests
STORZ MEDICAL takes no liability for compliance of these inspections with local regulations. We highly
recommend contacting the responsible authorities for further information on medical equipment safety
and national regulations. Refer to IEC 62353 specifications concerning measurements and conditions.
7.5.1 MODULITH® SLK

The acceptance limits given below are in accordance with IEC 62353 for class I, type B devices.
7.5.1.1 Protection earth
• Measure earth resistance of all points mentioned below compared to external ground.
–– Screw joints of base cover

–– External connection plate
–– Table frame
–– Back plate
–– Hose cover under back plate
–– Therapy head
7.5.1.2 Insulating resistance
• Measure insulating resistance.
7a-16 7.5.1.3 Earth leakage current
• Measure earth leakage current. Values must be within mentioned limits.
7.5.1.4 Enclosure leakage current
• Measure enclosure leakage current. Values must be within mentioned limits.
7.5.1.5 Wall connector
• Verify that the wall connector of MODULITH® SLK is according the specification of the manufacturer.
Inform user that there is no liability if different type of wall connector is used.
7.5.2 Ultrasound system (optional)

The acceptance limits given below are in accordance with IEC 62353 for class I, type BF devices.
NOTE
The acceptance limit specified by the manufacturer of the ultrasound system might be different. Refer
to manufacturer’s documentation of the ultrasound system for required tests, test points and accept-
ance limits.
• Disconnect the ultrasound system from the MODULITH® SLK and connect it to safety tester using suita-
ble adapter. Measure the earth resistance of all points mentioned below compared to external ground:
16 027 02 0918
–– Base frame
–– Monitor
–– Transducer connection
7.5.2.2 Earth leakage current
7.5.2.4 Patient leakage current
• System supplied from safety tester, leakage current measured via applied part.
7.5.2.5 Auxiliary patient leakage current
• Supply voltage connected to the applied part, leakage current measured via supply line.
7.5.3 ECG system (optional)

The acceptance limits given below are in accordance with IEC 62353 for a class I, Type CF device.
NOTE
The acceptance limit specified by manufacturer of the ECG-system might be different. Refer to manu-
facturer’s documentation of the ECG-system for required tests, test points and acceptance limits.
7a-17
• Disconnect the ECG system from the MODULITH® SLK and connect it to safety tester using suitable
adapter. Measure earth resistance of all points mentioned below, compared to external ground.
–– Housing
–– Serial connector
7.5.3.2 Earth leakage current

7.5.3.4 Patient leakage current
• System supplied from safety tester, leakage current measured via applied part.
7.5.3.5 Auxiliary patient leakage current
• Supply voltage connected to the applied part, leakage current measured via supply line.
16 027 02 0918
7.6 Final work & wearing parts
• Close covers.
• Install new patient foil, if used one is ugly.
• Perform final function test with basic functions (e.g. movements, x, y, z, trend, swivel).
• Replace positioning cushions, if necessary.
• Take care that surfaces of all devices belonging to lithotripter system are clean, when you hand back
the system to client.
7.7 Completion of paperwork

• Note comments, unusual occurrences and follow up procedures. Get Preventive Maintenance Record
and Service Report signed. Send back the completed forms to STORZ MEDICAL AG.
Annex A
(for Germany, Austria and Switzerland only)
• The form “Prüfprotokoll für Lithotripter über die Durchführung der Sicherheitstechnischen Kontrolle
gemäß §6 MPBetriebV” has to be completed.
• Place STK-Sticker visible for the user on every tested device.
7a-18
16 027 02 0918
Service Manual
MODULITH® SLK
(1L)
7b-1
Chapter 7 part b
Maintenance Record
16 027 02 0918
7.8 Installation work 7b-5
7.9 Preventive maintenance 7b-5

7.9.1 Visual and functional inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7b-5
7.9.2 Component checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7b-6
7.9.3 Safety test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7b-9
7.10 Completion of paperwork 7b-11
Annex A 7b-13
7b-2
16 027 02 0918
MODULITH® SLK Maintenance Record
Please note serial numbers, software and hardware versions after performing maintenance, so that con-
figuration before leaving client site gets documented.
Type of maintenance
Preventive maintenance Installation
(during initial installation additional
instalation work must be performed,
for details see this protocol -
preventive maintenence is performed
after installation work)
Common information
Customer
Service engineer / engineer No.
Date (dd.mm.yyyy)
Service report number
SLK Serial number 1L. 1 __ __ __
Additional devices
Type of x-ray system
Serial number of x-ray system

7b-3
Type of ultrasound system
Serial number of ultrasound system
Type of ECG system
Serial number of ECG system
Component serial numbers

Serial number coil counter card
Serial number PCCU

Systeminformation
Total OpHours
Coil counter
Shock counter
16 027 02 0918
Systemconfiguration
Software Hardware
Main
IL
COM
CP 0
CP 1
CP 2
CP 3
CP 4
COT1:0
Aktor
Trendelenburg yes no
Service details
Shocks Hours
PCCU
Circulation pump
7b-4
Degassing pump
Airbag compressor
Please note serial numbers, software and hardware versions after performing maintenance, so that con-
figuration before leaving client site gets documented.
Measurement tool Type / Model STORZ Device ID /

or Serial No.
Digital Multimeter
Safety tester (according to IEC 62353)
Tabelle 7-1 List of used measurement tools
Please complete table above with detail information about used measurement tools during maintenance
procedure.
16 027 02 0918
7.8 Installation work
This section is only valid for initial installation!
performed comment
Ref. Item Specification yes / no if “no”
7.1 Degassing pump Plug connected ____________
Circulation pump Plug connected ____________
Transport securing bolt Removed ____________
Rinse water circuit Alcohol removed ____________
Fill water circuit ____________
7.9 Preventive maintenance

7.9.1 Visual and functional inspection
passed corrected
Ref. Item Specification yes / no yes / no n/a
7.2.1 Optical condition In general
Visible parts No damages
Visible cable connections No damages, well connected

7b-5
Label “max. load 84 kg” Good visible
Label “max. load 225 kg” Good visible
7.2.2.1 Locking bolt Proper function

7.2.2.2 Emergency halt button
For control panel 1 (ext.1) No movements, no shockwave
For control panel 2 (ext.2) No movements, no shockwave
For control panel 3 (table) No movements, no shockwave
For control panel 4 (SMT1) No movements, no shockwave

For control panel 5 (SMT2) No movements, no shockwave
7.2.2.3 PSPD @ table Stops movement immediately
PSPD @ therapy arm Stops movement immediately
PSPD @ x-ray Stops movement immediately
7.2.2.4 Operating elements Touch screens of all CPs working
& Movements X-axis
Y-axis
Z-axis
16 027 02 0918
passed corrected
Trendelenburg
Trendelenburg safety valve
Pivot (UT - park - OT)
Swivel of therapy head UT

Swivel of therapy head OT
no z-movement possible
Therapy head disengaged
Table entry position, cables free
Hand switch, shock wave release
Hand switch, unlock button
Foot switch, cover ok, function
7.2.3 Mechanical brakes Proper function

Proper function, no leakages,
Hydraulic brakes
brake pads not worn out
Covers No damages, fixtures ok, clean
Wheels Not worn out
7b-6
7.9.2 Component checks
passed corrected
Hydraulic tubes No damages, fixed
Leakages No oil outside of circuit
Hydraulic oil tank Oil level in tolerance range

7.3.2 Inductive Sensors
Switching distance of all

Distance 1.0 mm / TRD0 2.0 mm
inductive sensors
passed corrected
7.3.3 Water / air circuit

7.3.3.1 Water circuit Clean
Surfaces & filter Clean, SilverSan band exchanged
Coil Coil counter < lifetime limit
16 027 02 0918
passed corrected
Airbag Not damaged, not soiled
Coupling cushion Not damaged, not soiled
Degassing cylinder Clean
7.3.3.2 Degassing Proper function
Degassing pump < 5000 op.hrs., proper funct.
7.3.3.3 Leakages No water outside, connectors fix
Circulation pump < 10.000 op.hrs., proper funct.
7.3.3.4 Airbag logic With unlock button of SWRB
Airbag Max. height, no leakages
Airbag compressor < 10.000 op.hrs., proper funct.
7.3.3.5 Cooling Fans starting at 28°C
Water over temp. Cushion disables at 40°C
Cushion enables at 37°C
Temperature safety Temp. safety reacts at 41°C
Temp. safety and reset at 37°C 7b-7
actual passed corrected

Ref. Item Specification value yes / no yes / no n/a
7.3.4 HV circuit
Mains, single power sup. 100 - 240 VAC VAC
Mains, double power sup. 115 - 240 VAC VAC
Label “High voltage”
Ventilators Air flow
Cleanliness
7.3.4.1 Capacitance ± 70 nF
Capacitor C1 1200 nF nF
7.3.4.2 Resistors
Charging resistor 500 Ω ± 120 Ω Ω
7.3.4.3 HV measurement ± 0.2 V

HV test passed
(LED controlled)
EL 1 (6 kV) 6 V V
EL 10 (9.3 kV) 9.3 V V
16 027 02 0918
EL 50 (11.45 kV) 11.45 V V
EL 90 (14.5 kV) 14.5 V V
7.3.4.4 Triggering 4/s up to EL 7
3/s up to EL 45
2/s all EL
1.5/s all EL
1/s all EL
ECG all EL
passed corrected
7.3.5 In-line unit
Outside No damages, clean
Transducer No damages
Snap-in catch Proper locking
Movement Smooth motion

7b-8
Inside Clean, cables ok
Carbon rolls in TH Complete, no damages
passed corrected
7.4 Focal point checks
7.4.1 Focus phantom Not damaged
7.4.2 Ultrasound focus In tolerance, aligned

Pin centred,
7.4.3 x-ray focus UT
cross hairs in congruence

Pin centred,
x-ray focus OT
cross hairs in congruence
7.4.4 Disintegration test Strong / medium / no marks
16 027 02 0918
7.9.3 Safety test

7.5.1 MODULITH® SLK
Protection earth
Screw joints base cover R ≤ 0.2 Ω Ω
External connection plate R ≤ 0.2 Ω Ω
Table frame R ≤ 0.2 Ω Ω
Back plate R ≤ 0.2 Ω Ω
Hose cover under back plate R ≤ 0.2 Ω Ω
Therapy head R ≤ 0.2 Ω Ω
Insulating resistance R ≥ 200 MΩ MΩ
Earth leakage current NOC: ≤ 5.0 mA mA
SFC: ≤ 10.0 mA mA
Enclosure leakage current NOC: ≤ 0.1 mA mA
SFC: ≤ 0.5 mA mA
Wall connector CEE-connector 240V/16A, blue

7b-9
The acceptance limits given above are in accordance with IEC 62353 for class I, Type B devices.

7.5.2 Ultrasound system
Protection earth
Base frame R ≤ 0.2 Ω Ω
Monitor R ≤ 0.2 Ω Ω
Transducer connection R ≤ 0.2 Ω Ω

SFC: ≤ 1.0 mA mA
SFC: ≤ 0.5 mA mA
Patient leakage current NOC: ≤ 0.1 mA mA
SFC: ≤ 0.5 mA mA
Aux. patient leakage current NOC: ≤ 0.5 mA mA
16 027 02 0918
The acceptance limits given above are in accordance with IEC 62353 for class I, Type BF devices.
Note:
The acceptance limit specified by the manufacturer of the ultrasound system might be different. Refer to
the manufacturer’s documentation of the ultrasound system for required tests, test points and acceptance
limits.

7.5.3 ECG system
Protection earth
Housing R ≤ 0.2 Ω Ω
Serial connector R ≤ 0.2 Ω Ω
SFC: ≤ 1.0 mA mA
SFC: ≤ 0.5 mA mA
Patient leakage current NOC:≤ 0.01 mA mA
SFC: ≤ 0.05 mA mA
Aux. patient leakage current NOC:≤ 0.05 mA mA

7b-10
The acceptance limits given above are in accordance with IEC 62353 for class I, Type CF. devices
Note:
The acceptance limit specified by the manufacturer of the ECG system might be different. Refer to the
manufacturer’s documentation of the ECG system for required tests, test points and acceptance limits.
performed comment
Ref. Item Specification yes / no if “no”
7.6 Final work & wearing parts
All housings closed __________
New patient foil On patient table __________
Final function test Completed __________

New cushions For positioning __________
Surfaces of devices clean __________
16 027 02 0918
7.10 Completion of paperwork
passed corrected
Ref. Form Specification yes / no yes / no n/a
a) Maintenance form Signed
Service report Signed
Follow up form Completed
b) Additional for installation
Serial numbers Completed
Hospital details Completed
Agent details Completed
Application confirmation Signed
Acceptance declaration Signed
Send back the completed forms to STORZ MEDICAL AG.
Comments, unusual occurrences, follow up procedures:
7b-11
____________ _________ __________________________ _________________________

Location Date Signature service engineer Signature customer
16 027 02 0918
7b-12
16 027 02 0918
Annex A
Prüfprotokoll für Lithotripter über die Durchführung der Sicherheit-
stechnischen Kontrolle gemäß §6 MPBetreibV.
Typ: MODULITH® SLK

Seriennummer: 1L.
Inventarnummer:
Prüfintervall: 12 Monate
Medizinproduktebuch laut Betreiber  vorhanden  nicht vorhanden

Gebrauchsanweisung laut Betreiber  vorhanden  nicht vorhanden
Folgende, gemäß der Gebrauchsanweisung vorgeschriebene Prüfungen wurden im Verlauf der Wartung-
sarbeiten durchgeführt. Entsprechende Messwerte, insbesondere die Ergebnisse der elektrischen Prüfung
nach VDE0751 bzw. IEC 62353 finden sich im Wartungsprotokoll:
• Lesbarkeit und Vollständigkeit aller am Gerät angebrachten Warnhinweise

• Funktionsfähigkeit und Lesbarkeit aller Bedienelemente
• Funktionsfähigkeit aller Anzeigenelemente
• Äußere Sichtkontrolle auf Beschädigung der Geräteelemente
• Sichtkontrolle auf Dichtigkeit des Wasserkreislaufes bei maximalem Druck
7b-13
• Sichtkontrolle auf Dichtigkeit des Hydraulikkreises
• Sichtkontrolle der Patientenlagerungsfolie
• Sichtkontrolle aller Kabelverbindungen
• Zustand der Patientenliege aus hygienischer Sicht
• Prüfung der Ortung mit dem Fokusphantom
• Prüfung der Wassertemperaturregelung bei 28 °C
• Prüfung des Temperaturabschalters bei 41 °C
• Prüfung aller End- und Positionsschalter sowie Abschalter und Auslöseschalter
• Prüfung der Arretierungen
• Prüfung der Kollisionsmelder
• Prüfung der sequenziellen Verfahrbarkeit
• Prüfung der internen Stosswellen-Triggerung und der internen Überwachung

• Prüfung der Nothalt-Vorkehrungen
• Prüfung der Hochspannungsüberwachung
• Prüfung der Wasserentgasung
• Prüfung der gegenseitigen Ent- bzw. Verriegelung bei Stoßwellenauslösung
• Prüfung der elektrischen Sicherheit entsprechend IEC 62353 bzw. den jeweiligen nationalen Bestimmungen für
a) MODULITH® SLK
b) die Zusatzgeräte Röntgen, Ultraschall und EKG (soweit vorhanden).
Hierbei sind die Herstellerangaben in den Gebrauchsanweisungen der Zusatzgeräte zu beachten.
Gesamtergebnis:  ohne Mängel  mit Mängel
16 027 02 0918
Bemerkungen:
Datum: _____________________________ Unterschrift: __________________________

7b-14
16 027 02 0918
Service Manual
MODULITH® SLK (1L)

(30k)
Chapter 8
Spare Part Catalogue

8-2
Spare part catalogue
16 028 02 0419
Table of contents
8.1 Consumables 8-4

8.1.1 Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.1.2 Rubber parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8.1.3 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8.2 Electronic components 8-7

8.2.1 Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8.2.2 Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8.2.3 External connectors & power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
8.2.4 PCCU & HV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8.2.5 Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8.3 Sensors 8-11

8.3.1 Sensors TRD / x / y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8.3.2 Sensors Z / swivel / ATBM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8.3.3 Collision protection, PSPD & relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8.4 Water / Air 8-13

8.4.1 Hoses, valves & sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
8.4.2 Degassing unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
8.4.3 Water pump & filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
8-3
8.4.4 Water reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
8.4.5 Water radiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
8.4.6 Valve plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
8.5 Mechanical components 8-19

8.5.1 Hydraulic unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
8.5.2 Wheels / Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
8.5.3 Specific parts for options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
8.5.3.1 Table-version „Standard“ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
8.5.3.2 Table-version „Table Top“ (transportable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
8.5.4 Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
8.6 Options 8-25

8.6.1 Ultrasound & Inline unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25

8.6.2 Footswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
8.6.3 ECG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
8.6.4 Endourological accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
8.6.5 Thermal printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
8.6.6 Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
8.7 Tools & documentation 8-29

8.7.1 Service tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
8.7.2 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
16 028 02 0419
8-4
8.1 Consumables
8.1.1 Coil
Part No. Pos. Name 1,2

22405 1 Coil SLK (1L) cpl. non USA
22404 2 Coil SLK (1L) cpl. USA
20841 3 Airbag cpl. SLK (1L)
25483 - Airbag spare part set (1L)
(20841 + 4256 + 11489)
4256 O-ring degassing connection d1=3,0, d2=2,5

8215 O-ring d1=60,0, d2=2,0
20469 O-ring d1=65,0, d2=2,0 nbr 70 sho
3
11489 4 Sealing ring for M4 self-centering
4871 5 Screws M4 x 25mm
If coil is dismounted and inserted again (i.e.

exchange of airbag) new sealing rings must
be used and new screws are recommended. 4,5
16 028 02 0419
8.1.2 Rubber parts
1
Part No. Pos. Name
16 028 02 0419
27939 1 Patient foil * (for stationary version)
18911 Patient foil * (for transportable version)
28395 2 Coupling cushion *
* Recommended for preventive maintenance.
8-5

8-6
8.1.3 Accessories
Part No. Pos. Name

1 4
3487 - *Corega-Tabs (1 packet = 32 tablets)
22035 - *Test foil kit SLK (1L)
22025 1 *Test foil holding device
20887 - Water bag SLK (1L), 6 l with tube
22989 2 Focus-check-watercushion (us-cushion SLK 1L)
13330 - Silicon oil type 100 0.5l 2
2231 - Sonogel 850ml
2242 - Measuring pitcher
21294 3 Coil extractor SLK (1L)
5
4376 4 Triangle pillow, anthracite
4400 5 Head pillow, anthracite
4375 6 Key pillow, anthracite
5858 - Velcro® fastener 3
Paintings
20498 - Paint white (ral 9010)
22711 - Paint telegrey (ral 7047),
for top & front cover + anti tip beam 6
23071 - Paint dark grey (ral ---),
for side covers bottom line, back cover
22712 - Paint black-grey (ral ---) for handle
* Recommended for preventive maintenance.
16 028 02 0419
8.2 Electronic components
8.2.1 Control panel
16 028 02 0419
Part No. Pos. Name 3
21493 1a Hand switch (for hardware CP)
23305 1b Hand switch (for remote (software) CP) 1a/b 2
21397 2 Holder for hand switch
28505 3 Control panel SLK (1L), capacitive
20816 4 Helix cable for control panel
22129 5 VESA adapter plate (for control panel)
21583 - Arm control panel (incl. cable)
21596 - Cable control panel (for arm)
24703 6 Box remote EmHalt
4
25702 7 Cable to remote BoxEmHalt (12 m)
8.2.2 Boards 5
6
Part No. Pos. Name
Before ordering new main board for SLK (1L), please contact
STORZ MEDICAL service department for clarification.
28191 - Board main SLK (1L) without FRAM
7
8-7

8-8
Part No. Pos. Name

20915 - Board e-box connectors SLK (1L)
21018 - Board distributor air SLK (1L)
21020 - Board distributor degassing SLK (1L)
26751 - Board distributor therapy head
21324 - Board distributor swivel
20096 - Board control panel SLK (1L)
20988 - Board switch pivot
28672 - Board communication ctrl. SLK (1L)
21005 - Board service ext. panel SLK (1L)
28246 - Board external connectors II SLK (30k)
Aktormed-Box for hydraulic control
see 8.5.1 Hydraulic components
8.2.3 External connectors & power supply
Part No. Pos. Name

for pcb see section „Boards“ 1
22882 Isolation transformer
27451 Power supply 48 VDC, 600W
25390 Power supply 24 VDC, 600W
26646 Power supply 48VDC & 24VDC, 1200W 2
7338 Main switch
21259 1 Turning knob „green“
21105 2 External panel service flap
13186 Fan 24 VDC
16 028 02 0419
8.2.4 PCCU & HV
Part No. Pos. Name

25860 1 PCCU SLK (1L / 0L1) 1
16 028 02 0419
No subcomponents available.
Please perform factory-return-repair-
procedure for device exchange.
20946 - HV cable (cable pulse current SLK (1L))
11488 - HV contacts for contact flange
27909 - HV Contact flange cpl. SLK (1L),

incl. HV cable (# 20946)
28235 - HV contact flange

(only plastic part, service assembly)
8-9

8-10
8.2.5 Cables
Part No. Pos. Name Connection to
in progress ...
16 028 02 0419
8.3 Sensors
8.3.1 Sensors TRD / x / y
16 028 02 0419
Part No. Pos. Name
15351 - Inductive sensor NO-2
15352 - Inductive sensor NC-2
12476 - Bracket for inductive sensor (NC/NO/2/3)
22749 - Bracket for inductive sensor (NO-4)
When changing sensor type NO-3 -> NO-4 additional
adapter plate is required, call SMAG-service before.
14319 Position encoder x 160 mm
19112 Position encoder y 140 mm

8-11
8-12
8.3.2 Sensors Z / swivel / ATBM
Part No. Pos. Name

23076 Tackle potentiometer (Z)

12476 - Bracket for inductive sensor
12658 - Photo sensor (light barrier) NO/NC adjustable
8.3.3 Collision protection, PSPD & relay
28358 - PSPD collision protector on therapy arm

28176 - Collision protector hose, table head
28215 - Collision protector hose, table long side
28216 - Collision protector hose, table support
??? - PSPD collision protector image intensifier
21539 Collision avoidance (for image intensifier)
29727 Cable for Collision avoidance (6pin-8pin)
24299 - PSPD control relay (MAYSER)
16 028 02 0419
8.4 Water / Air
8.4.1 Hoses, valves & sensors
16 028 02 0419
Part No. Pos. Name
922 Hose d1=8mm, d2=6mm, pur
4224 Hose 4 x 1 x 6
7550 Hose d1=10mm, d2=8mm, pur
13378 Hose 8 x 2 x 12, pur
13566 Hose 11 x 1.5 x 14, 85 shore
20485 Hose 16 x 23, pur
21361 Hose d1=16mm, d2=10mm, silicon
4276 35 Bleeding valve

21130 25 Drain valve
6700 23 Filler neck
21803 21 Temperature sensor safety

27523 Signal converter for temperature sensor
20480 27 Pressure sensor TH

8-13
8-14
8.4.2 Degassing unit
Part No. Pos. Name

20225 - Degassing unit cpl.
19452 1 Degassing pump
21126 2 Degassing air valve
21020 3 Distributor board degassing
20482 4 Switch degassing max 1
4873 5 O-ring d1=32.99, d2=2.62 2
20481 6 Switch degassing min.
(inside degassing cylinder)
12770 7 Degassing valve
30138 - Service Kit “Holder Suction cup”

(inside, at ball valve)
3
4
7
5
6
16 028 02 0419
8.4.3 Water pump & filter

26594 1 Circulation pump cpl.
16 028 02 0419
20898 2 Water filter cpl.
22606 3 O-ring d1=59.0, d2=2.0

13684 4 Filter insert
21677 5 Silver San® band
2 5

8-15
8-16
8.4.4 Water reservoir
Part No. Pos. Name

20349 - Water reservoir cpl.
(water bag cpl. not included)
20919 1 Water reservoir top cover
12769 2 Bypass valve
21590 3 Temperature sensor
7
27523 7 Signal converter for temperature sensor
616 4 Screw M5x12
1
20348 5 Water bag cpl.
6258 6 Securing ring
5
2
16 028 02 0419
8.4.5 Water radiator
Part No. Pos. Name

20880 - Water radiator cpl. SLK (1L)
16 028 02 0419
20879 1 Radiator
13186 2 Fan 24 VDC

8-17
8-18
8.4.6 Valve plate
Part No. Pos. Name

20490 - Valve plate cpl. 1
12641 1 Filter
20856 2 Airbag valve
12816 3 Compressor
21018 4 Board distributor air
20475 5 Airbag pressure sensor
4 3
16 028 02 0419
8.5 Mechanical components
16 028 02 0419
23008 - 500 ml hydraulic oil viscosity 22
(Aral-Vitam DE22)
22828 1 Pump and tank unit

22825 2 Upper valve block (UV)
22826 3 Lower valve block (LV)
14782 - Coil for hydraulic valve (of valve blocks) 4 1
3
22827 4 Emergency valves (EV)
22829 - Cylinder, range 52 mm (TREND) 6

18868 5 Cylinder, range 140 mm (Y)
14566 6 Cylinder, range 160 mm (X)
14567 - Cylinder, range 260 mm (Q)
--- - Cylinder, range 340 mm (Z) 7
21673 7 Rotary actuator, range 180° (P) 5
22830 - Hydr. hose, pump2 - LV, 230 mm

22831 - Hydr. hose, pump1 - UV, 1200 mm
Hydr. hose, UV - tank, 1200 mm length
22832 - Hydr. hose, LV - Za, 890 mm
22833 - Hydr. hose, LV - Zb, 1290 mm
22834 - Hydr. hose, LV - Ta, 2030 mm
22835 - Hydr. hose, LV - Tb, 2010 mm

8-19
8-20
Part No. Pos. Name
22836 - Hydr. hose, LV - Pa, 1800 mm
Hydr. hose, LV - Pb, 1800 mm length
22837 - Hydr. hose, LV - Qa, 1140 mm
22838 - Hydr. hose, LV - Qb, 820 mm
22839 - Hydr. hose, UV - Xa, 860 mm
22840 - Hydr. hose, UV - Xb, 680 mm
22841 - Hydr. hose, UV - Ya, 310 mm
22842 - Hydr. hose, UV - Yb, 300 mm
22843 - Hydr. hose, LV - EV (T), 920 mm
22844 - Hydr. hose, EV - tank, 550 mm
22845 - Hydr. hose, LV - EV (Qa), 460 mm
Hydr. hose, LV - EV (Qb), 460 mm
7745 - Sealing ring for M8 screws

1
17022 - Sealing ring for M10 screws
15800 - O-ring for adjusting screws
18056 1 Banjo bolt double M10x1 2
18057 2 Banjo bolt single M10x1
18058 - Banjo bolt single M8x1
21024 4 Aktormed-Box with Trendelenburg

22349 4 Aktormed-Box without Trendelenburg
13669 3 Fixing-bolt for X-, Y- and Q-cylinder

3
4
16 028 02 0419
8.5.2 Wheels / Brakes
Part No. Pos. Name

20646 1 Turnable wheel
16 028 02 0419
20942 2 Connecting rod 5
2
20731 3 Footboard
20902 4 Bearing sleeve
20901 5 Lever of footboard
20650 - Front wheel cpl. left

21174 - Front wheel cpl. right
20725 - Wheel cap for front wheel 3

4
26475 6 Hydraulic parking brake cpl.

(exchange complete unit only) 1 1

8-21
8-22
8.5.3 Specific parts for options 1
8.5.3.1 Table-version „Standard“
Part No. Pos. Name

21112 1 Back padding
21113 2 Hip padding 5
21114 3 Foot plate padding (grey)
21300 - Foot plate cpl.
18894 4 Gas loaded spring
21116 5 Table cover
23292 6 Locking bolt repl.kit (pre-adjusted)
4
2
16 028 02 0419
8.5.3.2 Table-version „Table Top“ (transportable)
Paddings (pos. 1 - 3), see page before
Part No. Pos. Name
21112 1 Back padding
16 028 02 0419
21113 2 Hip padding
21114 3 Foot plate padding (grey) 8
21300 - Foot plate cpl.
21095 7 Star knob (5510) + cylinder pin (3519)

7
21085 8 Hip section removable
23439 9a Securing angle 14
22930 9b Transport traverse 9a
9b
12020 10 Screws for securing angle
23274 11 Gas loaded spring 10

13
23687 12 Fixing pin
22740 13 Transport column, cpl.
23434 14 Handle
23689 15 Securing shaft with cotter pin

6358 16 Cotter pin
12 11
23432 17 Safety clevis pin
18
29882 18 Collision avoidance SLK (1L) cpl.

29727 --- Cable for collision avoidance 8/6pin
17
15
16

8-23
8-24
8.5.4 Enclosures
1
Part No. Pos. Name
12m
All enclosures will be delivered without
mechanical fixing elements. They must
be reused from defect enclosures.
20685 1 Back cover 12s

8 2
20681 2 Side cover right
20673 3 Top cover
20710 4 Lower side cover right 3
20716 5 Lower front cover
20682 6 Front cover
20707 7 Lower side cover left 9 10
7 4
20680 8 Side cover left
20586 9 Top cover extension
20819 10 Cover ring front half
20818 10 Cover ring back half
20675 - Cover plate for handle mounting

11
21259 - main switch „green“
20611 - Cover therapy head arm

20612 11 Cover therapy head
22904 12m Bow-type handle, mobile 6 5

21578 12s Bow-type handle, standard
16 028 02 0419
8.6 Options
8.6.1 Ultrasound & Inline unit
16 028 02 0419
Part No. Pos. Name
21900 1 Inline unit SLK (1L) cpl. for Aloka-Hitachi (no transducer)
29161 1 Inline unit SLK (1L) cpl. for Samsung (no transducer)
22246 - Top cover 1
21910 - Controller board inline SLK (1L)
2
22214 - Potentiometer
21851 3 Cable Inline unit to therapy head
15577 - Cable StorM-Link SSD 1000 / Prosound 6 / F37
30160 - Cable StorM-Link Samsung HS 50
Transducers for inline mounting
9865 2a US-transducer Aloka UST-9102-3.5 intercostal 3.5 MHz
3
28241 2s US-transducer Samsung CA2-6BM
External transducers for Aloka
20113 - US-transducer UST-9137 abdominal 3.5 MHz (PS2)
13147 - US-transducer UST-9123 abdominal 3.5 MHz
10616 - Biopsy bracket MP-2473
13352 - US-transducer UST-676P endocavitary 6.0 MHz
18555 - US-transducer UST-5413 linear 7.5 MHz
External transducers for Samsung
28424 US-Transd. endocavitary 6.0 MHz ER4-9
28920 Biopsy Bracket BP-KIT-024-3
28239 US-Transd. abdominal 3.5 MHz CA1-7AD
28919 Biopsy Bracket BP-KIT-058
28425 US-Transd. Linear 50mm LA3-14AD

8-25
8-26
8.6.2 Footswitch
Part No. Pos. Name

29592 1 Footswitch cpl. SLK (1L)
1
16 028 02 0419
8.6.3 ECG
Part No. Pos. Name

21731 ECG set StorM-Sync
16 028 02 0419
17300 ECG StorM-Sync
17220 Triggercable for StorM-Sync
24392 ECG set iPM8 (former PM 8000)

23826 ECG “iPM8”
25579 ECG “Passport 8” (version of “ipm8” for USA, FDA approved)
24239 Triggercable for iPM8
21732 ECG set PM 8000

18437 ECG PM 8000
18510 Triggercable for PM 8000
22717 ECG set PM 8000 for USA

18661 ECG PM 8000 (USA)
18510 Triggercable for PM 8000

8-27
8-28
8.6.4 Endourological accessories
Part No. Pos. Name

19615 - Uro-Kit flex with elbow support cpl.
21586 - Uro bag uniflex
19660 - Uro-kit steel
19299 - Leg holder Goepel
19041 - Leg holder with gas spring
25515 - Leg holder “Elite Stirrup”
8.6.5 Thermal printer
Part No. Pos. Name

25912 - Videoprinter Sony UP-x898MD (replaces 897-series)
18815 - Videoprinter Sony UP-990AD
8.6.6 Miscellaneous
Part No. Pos. Name

25565 1 Table insert
19383 - Padding for table insert
15113 - Additional norm rail
14495 - Shoulder support 1
11263 - Elbow support
15677 - Lead curtain
2877 - Lead apron
14915 - Body strap
15419 - Infusion stand
16 028 02 0419
8.7 Tools & documentation
8.7.1 Service tools
16 028 02 0419
Part No. Pos. Name
2117 - *Multimeter (Fluke 87)
2126 - *Digital thermometer
13616 - *Temperature sensor
21294 - Coil extraction tool
9028 - Torque leader QS6
* Required for preventive maintenance
l
8.7.2 Documentation
Part No. Pos. Name

- Operating manual MODULITH® SLK (1L), German
- Operating manual MODULITH® SLK (1L), English
- Operating manual MODULITH® SLK (1L), Portuguese
- Operating manual MODULITH® SLK, (1L) Italian
- Operating manual MODULITH® SLK (1L), Spanish
- Operating manual MODULITH® SLK (1L), French
- Operating manual MODULITH® SLK (1L), Russian
28586 - Service manual MODULITH® SLK (1L), English
????? - System book MODULITH® SLK (1L), English
????? - Installation file MODULITH® SLK (1L), English, with warning labels in all supported languages
-

8-29
8-30
16 028 02 0419
Service Manual
MODULITH® SLK (1L)

(30k)
9
Chapter 9
Modifications
9-2
Modifications
16 029 02 0918
Service Manual
MODULITH® SLK (1L)

(30k)
10
Chapter 10
For future use

10-2
For future use
16 030 02 0918

16 - 020 - 02 - 0419 SH SLK (30k) en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

16 - 020 - 02 - 0419 SH SLK (30k) en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual

Published: April 2019

1.1 Copyright 1-3

1.2 Foreword 1-3

1.3 Modification status of lithotripter 1-3

1.4 Format of service manual 1-4

1.5 Usage of Warning-boxes 1-6

1.6 Safety instructions 1-7

1.7 System variations 1-8

1.8 Abbreviations 1-9

Chapter 2 System Description 2-1

2.2 General description 2-8

2.3 Control panel 2-10

2.4 Power supply 2-15

2.5 Water-air-system 2-16

2.7 Main controller and software concept 2-33

2.8 Shock wave generation 2-37

2.9 In-line Unit 2-45

2.10 Footswitch 2-47

2.11 Communication controller 2-48

3.1 Main board with system overview 3-3

3.2 Power supply 3-5

3.3 Water air system 3-7

3.4 PCCU [25860] 3-9

3.5 Hydraulic circuit 3-10

3.6 Communication controller 3-11

Chapter 4 Removal / Installation 4-1

4.1 Introduction 4-5

4.2 Housing elements 4-6

4.3 Water circuit 4-14

4.3.5 Circulation pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

4.4 Rubber parts 4-26

4.5 Electrical parts 4-31

4.5.5.4 Pivot micro switches and potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46

4.6 Control panel and software 4-51

4.7 Mechanical parts 4-56

4.8 Inline unit 4-79

4.9 Footswitch 4-83

Chapter 5 Diagnostics 5-1

5.1 Error Messages 5-4

5.2 Safety Control 5-12

5.4 LEDs on PSPD safety relay 5-25

5.5 Service Trace 5-25

5.6 Sensors 5-36

5.6.9 Sensor positions (pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43

5.8 Measurements 5-45

5.9 Troubleshooting 5-50

5.10 Fuse list 5-53

Chapter 6 Wiring Diagrams 6-1

6.1 Wiring overview (30000) 6-4

6.2 Power distribution (30000) 6-12

6.3 Main board (28190) 6-14

6.5 Distributor air (21018) 6-40

6.6 Distributor degassing (21020) 6-42

6.7 Distributor therapy head (26751) 6-43

6.8 PCCU (25860) 6-47

6.9 CTU (25857) 6-50

6.10 Control panel (24117) 6-52

6.11 Pivot control (20988) 6-55

6.12 Box Motion Control (21024) 6-57

6.13 External panel 6-60

6.14 Hand switch (21493) 6-65

6.15 Footswitch and controller (29592, 29580) 6-66